2018 Mitsubishi Eclipse Cross 111857 PDF

Eclipse Cross
/ 2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

Eclipse Cross
2018 / OWNER’S MANUAL
© Copyright 2017 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

BK0252700US.book 1 ページ２０１７年１０月４日　水曜日　午後４時５４分
Table of contents
Overview 1
Quick index 2
General information 3
Seat and restraint systems 4
Features and controls 5
Driving safety 6
Comfort controls 7
For emergencies 8
Vehicle care and maintenance 9
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10
Specifications 11
Alphabetical index 12
Instruments and controls
1 Instruments and controls

N00100202805
Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-188

Automatic High Beam (AHB) switch (if so equipped) P.5-191
Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) ON/OFF switch
Turn signal lever P.5-196
(if so equipped) P.5-104
Front fog light switch P.5-198
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) switch Sportronic steering wheel paddle shifter (if so equipped) P.5-65
(if so equipped) P.5-115 Multi-information display switches P.5-142
Active stability control (ASC) OFF switch P.5-82 Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped) P.5-184
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -
Head Up Display (HUD) switches driver’s airbag P.4-30, 4-37
(if so equipped) P.5-184 Horn switch P.5-206
Instrument cluster
“SONAR” switch (if so equipped) P.5-125 P.5-139
Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-196 Engine switch (if so

equipped) P.5-18
Steering wheel audio remote control switches [For

DISPLAY AUDIO and Smartphone Link Display
Audio, refer to the separate owner’s manual.]
Camera switch P.5-133

Hands free switches (if so equipped)
Windshield wiper and washer switch P.5-198
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment lever P.5-50 Rear window wiper and washer switch P.5-203
Cruise control switches P.5-84, 5-88
driver’s knee airbag P.4-37 Ignition switch (if so equipped) P.5-57
1-1 Overview
1
Center vents P.7-3
Hazard warning flasher switch P.5-197
Front passenger seat belt warning light P.4-19
Passenger’s airbag off indicator P.4-30, 4-35
Side vents P.7-3 Theft-alarm indicator P.5-38
Electric rear window defogger

switch P.5-204
Side vents P.7-3
Fuse block P.9-23
Engine hood release

lever P.9-3 Air conditioning P.7-6
Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) P.5-205

Floor console box P.5-219
Arm rest P.4-6
Touchpad Controller
(if so equipped)
Fuel tank filler door release lever P.3-3
12 V power outlet
Front drink holder
Heated seat switch (for the rear seats)
P.5-219 USB input terminal (Type1) P.5-208
P.5-206
ECO mode switch P.5-198
12 V power outlet (Type 2) P.5-208
Overview 1-2
1 Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) P.5-129

Audio (if so equipped)
[For DISPLAY AUDIO and Smartphone Link Display
Audio, refer to the separate owner’s manuals.]

front passenger’s airbag P. 4-30, 4-37
Glove compartment P.5-218
Card holder P.5-218
Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type
Parking brake lever P.5-47 Brake auto hold switch P.5-74

Electric parking brake switch P.5-47
Selector lever P.5-61
Selector lever P.5-61
Heated seat switches Heated seat switches (for the front

(for the front seats) (if seats) (if so equipped) P.4-8
S-AWC drive mode
so equipped) P.4-8 S-AWC drive mode-selector (if so equipped)
selector (if so equipped)
P.5-68 P.5-68
1-3 Overview
Interior
Interior 1
N00100302499
Sun visors P.5-207

Vanity mirror P.5-207
Electric remote-controlled outside rearview Inside rearview mirror P.5-51
Card holder P.5-207
mirrors switch P.5-54 HomeLink® Wireless Control
Power window switch P.5-40 System (if so equipped) P.5-209
Lock switch P.5-42
Power door lock
switch P.5-34
Front seat P.4-3

Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor P.4-19
Seat belts P.4-13
Supplemental Restraint System

(SRS) - side airbag P.4-30, 4-41
Seat belt hook P.4-20

Rear seat P.4-6
Overview 1-4
Interior
1 Dome light (front) switch P.5-215

Hands-free microphone
curtain airbag P.4-30, 4-41 Front sunroof switch
Bottle holder P.5-220 (if so equipped)
Front shade switch
Assist grips P.5-222 (if so equipped)
Coat hook P.5-222 P.5-43
Dome light
(front)/Reading
Dome light
lights P.5-215
(front)/Reading
lights P.5-215
Telematics Control Unit (TCU)

Head restraints P.4-9
Rear shade switch (if so equipped) P.5-43
Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-8

Rear drink holder (if so equipped) P.5-219
Dome light (rear) P.5-216 Cargo area cover (if so equipped) P.5-220
1-5 Overview
BK0252700US.book 6 ページ２０１７年１０月５日　木曜日　午後６時４９分
Luggage area
Luggage area 1
N00100501582
Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-25
Cargo room light P.5-216
Convenient hook P.5-223
Luggage hooks P.5-223 Luggage floor board P.5-223

Jack P. 8-5
Tools P.8-5
Overview 1-6
Outside (Front)
1 Outside (Front)
N00100602753
Sensor (if so equipped) [for Forward Collision Mitigation system Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped) P.5-43
(FCM), Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Automatic High
Beam (AHB)] P.5-100, 5-115, 5-191
Rain sensor (if so equipped) P.5-198
Power window P.5-40
Windshield wipers P.5-198
Engine hood P.9-3

Fuel tank filler P.3-3
Front-view camera
(if so equipped)
P.5-129
Outside rearview mirrors P.5-53
Side turn signal lights P.5-196, 9-28, 9-31
Side-view camera (if so equipped) P.5-129
Front turn signal lights P.5-196, 9-28, 9-31

Parking sensors (if so equipped) P.5-123
Front fog lights P.5-198, 9-28, 9-32
Halogen headlights type LED headlights type Front side-marker

Front side-marker lights P.5-188, 9-28, 9-30
Headlights, high/low beam Headlights, high/low beam lights P.5-188,
P.5-188, 9-28, 9-29 P.5-188, 9-28, 9-30 9-28, 9-30
Parking lights/Daytime running lights P.5-188, 9-28, 9-30 Parking lights/Daytime running lights P.5-188, 9-28, 9-30
1-7 Overview
Outside (Rear)
Outside (Rear) 1
N00100602766
Antenna
Rear window wiper P.5-203, 9-19 Tail lights P.5-188, 9-28
Keyless entry system P.5-6, 5-28
Roof spoiler
F.A.S.T.-key (Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter) (if so equipped) P.5-12
Locking and unlocking P.5-32
Liftgate P.5-36
Tires P.9-12
High-mounted stop light P.9-28 Tire pressure monitoring system
P.5-118
Rear spoiler
Tire inflation pressures P.9-15
Changing tires P.8-6
License plate lights P.9-28, 9-34 Tire rotation P.9-17
Tire chains P.9-18
Size of tires and wheels P.11-7
Rear-view camera
P.5-127, 5-129
Spare tire P.8-7
Rear side-marker lights P.5-188, 9-28
Stop lights P.5-188, 9-28
Rear turn signal lights P.5-196, 9-28, 9-32
Parking sensors (if so equipped) P.5-123

Back-up lights P.9-28, 9-33
Overview 1-8
If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

2
N00200702322
NOTE
 For information regarding warning displays in the multi-information display, refer to “Multi-information display” on page 5-140.
 These warning lights will come on for a few seconds for a bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned to “ON” or the operation mode is put in ON.
Warning lights Do this Ref. Page
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Contact your Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice for assis- P. 5-183
tance.
Charging system warning light
 If this light comes on while driving, check to see that the parking brake is fully
released.
 If this light stays on after releasing the parking brake, immediately stop and check
or the brake fluid level. P. 5-181
 If the brake fluid level is correct, there may be a system malfunction. Avoid hard
Brake warning light (red) braking and high speed, and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
 If the warning light comes on during driving, there is the possibility that the parking
brake cannot be operated or released. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
P. 5-181
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
Electric parking brake warning light choice for assistance.
(yellow) (if so equipped)
Quick index 2-1


2  Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not need towing, have the
or engine system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
of your choice as soon as possible. If the vehicle is not drivable, contact emergency
P. 5-182
roadside assistance at 1-888-648-7820 (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.) or 1-888-576-
Engine malfunction indicator 4878 (for vehicles sold in Canada), an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, or local
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or towing company for assistance.
“Check engine light”)
 If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may become harder to turn the
steering wheel. Have your vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors P. 5-80
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon as possible.
Electric power steering system (EPS)
warning light
 When this light comes on, the anti-lock braking system is not functioning and only
the ordinary braking system is functioning.
Test the system as described on page 5-79. P. 5-79
 If the light does not go out after the test, or if it comes on again, we recommend that
Anti-lock braking system warning you have the system checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
light facility of your choice as soon as possible.
 Immediately have the airbag and the pre-tensioner seat belt system checked at an
P. 4-36
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
SRS warning light
2-2 Quick index


Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out. 2
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
and by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-83
as possible.
ASC indicator and ASC OFF indicator  When this indicator comes on, the active stability control is not functioning and
normal operation of the vehicle will not be affected.
Restart the engine and check whether the indicator goes out.
 If the indicator does not go out, or if it comes on again, have your vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice as soon P. 5-77
as possible.
ASC indicator  When this indicator comes on, the hill start assist is not functioning.
Start off carefully on a steep uphill slope.
 If the warning light comes on, you should stop and adjust the tires to the proper
inflation pressure as soon as possible.
(See “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.)
Once adjustments have been made, the warning light will go off after a few minutes
of driving. P. 5-118
 If the warning light blinks for approximately 1 minute and then remains continu-
Tire pressure monitoring system warn- ously illuminated, the system is not operating properly. If the system returns to nor-
ing light mal, the warning light will go off. If the warning light does not go off, have the
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
 If the warning light comes on, there may be a malfunction in the LED headlight
unit.
P. 5-190
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
facility of your choice.
LED headlight warning light
Quick index 2-3

If this problem occurs...

2
N00200902034
Problem Do this Ref. Page

Unable to turn the key.
(except for vehicles equipped
with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF”.

Check the position of the selector lever. P. 5-58
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position.
The engine does not start when

the engine switch is pressed.
(for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
Make sure the F.A.S.T.-key is in the vehicle.
Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) position, and then press the engine switch P. 5-23
while depressing the brake pedal.
2-4 Quick index


1. Move the selector lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then change the operation mode
The engine does not start and the
to OFF. 2
operation mode cannot be
2. One of the other causes could be low battery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless entry sys- P. 5-19
changed to OFF. (for vehicles
tem and the F.A.S.T.-key operation will also not operate. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key)
Motors dealer.
The F.A.S.T.-key does not oper-
ate. Touch the portion of the F.A.S.T.-key to the engine switch, and then start the engine or change P. 5-25,
(for vehicles equipped with the the operation mode. Use the emergency key to lock and unlock the driver’s door. 5-26
F.A.S.T.-key)
Cannot shift the selector lever Shift the selector lever while pressing the brake pedal.
P. 5-60
from the “P” (PARK) position. Check that the ignition switch or the operation mode is in ON.
The windows are fogged up.
P. 7-3, 7-13,
Push the defogger switch to change to the “ ” position.
7-18, 7-22
The engine does not start.

The lights do not come on.
P. 8-2,
The lights are dim. Have the battery checked. Recharge or replace as needed.
9-10
The horn does not honk.
The horn sound is weak.
Quick index 2-5


The information screen in the
2 multi-information display will
be interrupted and the engine
coolant temperature warning
display will appear. Also “ ”
will blink.
The engine is overheated.

P. 8-4
Carefully stop the vehicle in a safe place.
Steam comes out of the engine

compartment.
1. Slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving again. For an all-
wheel drive vehicle, set the drive mode-selector to the “SNOW” or “GRAVEL” position
If your vehicle becomes stuck in
and then slowly press down on the accelerator pedal to get your vehicle moving. P. 8-12
sand, mud or snow.
2. If there is nothing to stop your tires from slipping, rock your vehicle out of the stuck posi-
tion.
2-6 Quick index

WARNING
 When attempting to rock your vehicle out of a stuck position, be sure that no one is near the vehicle. The rocking motion may cause the vehicle to
suddenly lurch forward or backward, possibly injuring bystanders. 2
 Avoid revving the engine or spinning the wheels. Prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle may result in overheating and transaxle failure.
If the vehicle remains stuck after several rocking attempts, have a towing service pull the vehicle out.

The brakes are not functioning
P. 5-72,
properly after crossing a puddle Dry out the brakes by driving slowly while lightly pressing the brake pedal.
6-5
or stream.
The continuously variable trans-
mission (CVT) makes no shift There may be a problem in the CVT.
change when accelerating. The
P. 5-66
initial movement of the vehicle If the or warning lights on the multi-information display will not turn off, or if they
is slow when the vehicle starts come on frequently, please have the vehicle checked at your nearest Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
moving.
A tire is punctured.
1. Park the vehicle in a safe place where the surface is flat and level.
P. 8-6
2. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire.
Quick index 2-7

General information
3
Fuel selection ...................................................................................3-2
Filling the fuel tank ..........................................................................3-3
Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)..............................3-5
Modifications to and racing of your vehicle ..................................3-12
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts ..................................................3-13
California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .............................3-13
Break-in recommendations ............................................................3-13
Fuel selection
oline to minimize fuel-injector clogging and
Fuel selection minimize intake-valve deposits. Detergent
Ethanol (Gasohol)
N00301002004
gasoline helps keep your engine in tune and
Your vehicle is designed to use unleaded gas- your emission-control system working prop- A mixture of up to 10 % ethanol (grain alco-
3 oline only. It is equipped with a fuel tank erly. hol) and 90 % unleaded gasoline may be used
filler pipe specifically designed to accept only in your vehicle, provided the octane number
a small diameter unleaded gasoline dispens- is at least as high as that recommended for
ing nozzle.
Octane requirement unleaded gasoline.
Your vehicle is designed to operate on

WARNING unleaded gasoline having a minimum octane
Methanol
 Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
number of 87 [(MON+RON)/2] or 91 RON.
sive. You could be burned, seriously Do not operate your vehicle on gasoline con-
injured or killed when handling it. When-
taining methanol (wood alcohol). Using this
ever you refuel your vehicle, stop the NOTE type of alcohol could adversely affect the
engine and keep flames, sparks, and  Premium fuel is recommended to improve
smoking materials away from the vehicle. vehicle’s performance and damage critical
the performance under severe conditions
Always handle fuel in well-ventilated out- such as hot weather or towing.
parts of the vehicle’s fuel system.
door areas.
Reformulated gasoline
Oxygenated gasoline
CAUTION
Many areas of the country require the use of
 Using leaded gasoline in your vehicle will
Gasoline sold at some service stations con- cleaner burning fuel referred to as “Reformu-
damage the engine, catalytic converter, and
the oxygen sensors. Also, using leaded gaso- tains oxygenates such as ethanol, although lated Gasoline”.
line is illegal, and will void your warranty the oxygenates may not be identified by those Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates
coverage of the engine, catalytic converter, names. Oxygenates are required in some and is specially blended to reduce vehicle
and oxygen sensors. areas of the country. Oxygenated fuel can be emissions and improve air quality.
used in your vehicle. Mitsubishi Motors Corporation strongly sup-
ports the use of reformulated gasoline. Prop-
Gasoline detergent additives erly blended reformulated gasoline has no
adverse effect on vehicle performance or the
durability of the engine and the fuel system.
In the United States, fuel suppliers are
required by law to add detergents to their gas-
3-2 General information
Filling the fuel tank

dealer may suggest using a different, lower-
MMT (methylcyclopentadienyl sulfur brand of unleaded gasoline to deter- Filling the fuel tank
manganese tricarbonyl) mine if the problem is fuel-related. N00301102018
WARNING
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic NOTE  When handling fuel, comply with the
3
additive that is blended into some gasolines  Poor-quality gasoline can cause problems safety regulations displayed by garages
to increase the octane number. Mitsubishi such as hard starting, stalling during idling, and filling stations.
Motors Corporation recommends using gaso- abnormal engine noise, and poor accelera-  Gasoline is highly flammable and explo-
lines without MMT. tion. If you experience any of these prob- sive. You could be burned, seriously
Use of gasolines blended with MMT may lems, try using a different brand of gasoline. injured or killed when handling it. When
adversely affect performance, and cause the If the engine malfunction indicator (“SER- refueling your vehicle, always turn the
malfunction indicator on your instrument VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine engine off and keep away from flames,
panel to come on. If this happens, contact an light”) flashes, have the vehicle inspected as sparks, and smoking materials. Always
soon as possible by the nearest authorized handle fuel in well-ventilated outdoor
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility areas.
repair facility of your choice for assistance. of your choice.  Before removing the fuel tank filler cap,
 Repeatedly driving short distances at low be sure to get rid of your body’s static
Sulfur in gasoline speeds can cause deposits to form in the fuel electricity by touching a metal part of the
system and engine, resulting in hard starting vehicle or fuel pump. Any static electricity
and poor acceleration. If these problems on your body could create a spark that
Your vehicle may have been designed to sat- occur, you are advised to add a detergent ignites fuel vapor.
isfy California’s low-emission regulations additive to the gasoline when you refuel the  Perform the whole refueling process
based on clean-burning low-sulfur gasoline. vehicle. The additive will remove the depos- (opening the fuel tank filler door, remov-
Gasoline sold in parts of the country other its, thereby returning the engine to a normal ing the fuel cap, etc.) by yourself; do not
than California is allowed to have a higher condition. Be sure to use a Mitsubishi let any other person near the fuel tank
sulfur content. Using such gasoline could Motors Genuine cleaning additive. Using an filler. If you allowed a person to help you
adversely affect the vehicle’s catalytic con- unsuitable additive could make an engine and that person was carrying static elec-
verter and cause the engine malfunction indi- malfunction. For details, please contact the tricity, fuel vapor could be ignited.
nearest authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
cator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or  Do not move away from the fuel tank filler
“Check engine light”) to come on. Illumina- until refueling is finished. If you moved
tion of this indicator while using high-sulfur away and did something else (for example,
gasoline does not necessarily mean the vehi- sitting on a seat) part-way through the
refueling process, you could pick up a
cle’s emission-control system is malfunction-
fresh charge of static electricity.
ing. Your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
General information 3-3
Filling the fuel tank

3. Open the fuel tank filler pipe by slowly
WARNING turning the fuel tank filler cap counter-
NOTE
 Be careful not to inhale fuel vapor. Fuel  While filling with fuel, store the fuel cap in
clockwise.
contains toxic substances. the cap holder (A) or hang it on the hook (B)
 Keep the doors and windows closed while located on the inside of the fuel tank filler
3 refueling the vehicle. If they were open, door.
fuel vapor could get into the cabin.
Fuel tank capacity
All-wheel drive vehicles: 15.8 gal (60 L)

Front-wheel drive vehicles: 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refueling 1- Remove
2- Close 4. Fueling correctly depends mainly on cor-
1. Before filling with fuel, stop the engine.
rect handling of the fuel filler nozzle. Do
2. The fuel tank filler is located on the rear
not tilt the nozzle. Insert the nozzle in the
driver side of your vehicle. WARNING fuel tank filler port as far as it goes.
The fuel tank filler door can be opened  Since the fuel system may be under pres-
from inside the vehicle with the fuel tank sure, remove the fuel tank filler cap CAUTION
filler door release lever located at the left slowly. This relieves any pressure or vac-
 Your vehicle can only be operated using
side of the driver’s seat. uum that might have built up in the fuel
unleaded gasoline. Serious engine and cata-
tank. If the cap is venting vapor or if you
lytic converter damage will result if leaded
hear a hissing sound, wait until the sound
gasoline is filled into these vehicles, and
stops before removing the cap. Otherwise,
consequently, this must never be attempted.
fuel may spray out, injuring you or others.
5. When the nozzle stops automatically, do

not add more fuel.

Telematics Control Unit (TCU) (if so equipped)
CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not  If the fuel tank filler cap is not tight while  To use the TCU, a user service agreement is
“top-off” the fuel tank. Spilled fuel could driving, the engine malfunction indicator necessary. In addition, you must install the
discolor, stain, or crack the vehicle’s paint- (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check smartphone app, agree to the terms of ser-
work. If fuel spills on the paintwork, wipe it engine light”) may come on when the vice, and register as a user before using the 3
off with a soft cloth. onboard diagnostic (OBD) system performs TCU.
a self check. For details including system limitations, con-
Always tighten the fuel tank filler cap until tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
6. To re-install, turn the fuel tank filler pipe
you hear at least 3 clicks. or a repair facility of your choice, or visit the
cap slowly clockwise until you hear click- The indicator will go off after several driving Mitsubishi Motors website.
ing sounds, then gently push the fuel tank cycles. If the indicator does not go off, con- https://www.mitsubishicars.com/owners/
filler door closed. tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors service/manuals
dealer or a repair facility of your choice as  After you sign a user service agreement for
WARNING soon as possible. the TCU, you will be able to use the telemat-
 Make sure the fuel tank filler cap is ics features on the owners portal and call
securely closed. If the fuel cap is loose, fuel center service.
could leak, resulting in a fire.
Telematics Control Unit
(TCU) (if so equipped) SOS emergency assist/Informa-
CAUTION N00302500028
tion assist
 If you need to replace the fuel tank filler cap,
The Telematics Control Unit (TCU) uses a
use only a cap specified for your model vehi-  SOS emergency assist
cle.
mobile communication network to transmit
notifications (SOS emergency assist/Informa- If a collision is detected or you press the
tion assist) in case of emergency and vehicle SOS switch (A), the system automatically
information. The TCU also allows you to use transmits the vehicle information to an
your smartphone to operate some vehicle emergency call center, and will call the
functions remotely. emergency call center. If necessary, the
telephone call is forwarded to a PSAP
(Public Safety Answering Point).


 Information assist
If you press the information switch (B),
WARNING Flow of the SOS emergency
you will be connected to the call center  If an emergency occurs and you smell fuel assist/Information assist
or other unusual odor, do not stay inside
and your vehicle information will auto-
the vehicle. Exit the vehicle immediately
3 matically be transmitted to the call center. and move to a safe location.
In the case of a breakdown, your tele-  While waiting for rescue after making the
phone call will be forwarded to roadside emergency call, take actions to prevent a
assistance. rear-end collision or other secondary acci-
dent and move to a safe location away
from the vehicle and traffic.
 In the following cases, use a cellular
phone, etc., to call directly for an emer-
gency vehicle or road service.
• When the system does not operate due to
a malfunction because of a collision, etc.
• When the vehicle is in a place where
radio waves cannot be transmitted or
received, such as indoors, in an under-
ground parking structure, in a moun-
A- SOS switch tainous area, or in a tunnel.
B- Information switch • When the line to the emergency call cen-
ter is busy and the call cannot reach the
emergency call center.
WARNING
 In a country or area where no emergency
call center is available for the TCU, or
NOTE
where radio waves for the emergency call  This system transmits a notification to an A- Indicator light (red/green)
cannot be transmitted or received nor- emergency call center, but it does not B- Cover
mally, the system will not operate. In this directly arrange for an emergency vehicle or
C- SOS switch
case, use a cellular phone, etc., to call road service.
D- Information switch
directly for an emergency vehicle or road
E- Microphone
service.
F- Door speaker (only front passenger side)


[Automatic Report]
WARNING WARNING If your vehicle's airbags deploy or if the
 Do not remove or modify the above parts.  If the indicator lights (A) remain illumi-
unit detects that the vehicle was in a
This can cause the system to not operate. nated or illuminate again after setting the
severe collision, your vehicle automati-
operation mode to ON, there is a possible
problem in the system or the battery for cally will attempt to connect to the emer- 3
gency call center operator. Once
NOTE exclusive use of the TCU may be
connected, information about your vehi-
exhausted. The battery life is approxi-
 Although the information switch is not for
mately 3 years. cle, its location, and its condition will be
use in emergencies, the operation is the same
Have the system inspected or replace the sent to the operator; you also can speak to
as the operation of the SOS switch for SOS
battery using an authorized Mitsubishi the operator when connected.
emergency assist.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your [Manual Report]
choice. When you open the cover (B) and press
1. After setting the operation mode to ON,  When the system is not in the standby the SOS switch (C).
the indicator lights (A) illuminate for state, the system does not operate. When
approximately 10 seconds. When approxi- you drive, make sure to check that the sys-
mately 10 seconds has elapsed after the tem is in the standby state.
WARNING
 Before pressing the SOS switch, stop the
lights extinguish, the system is in the
vehicle in a safe place. If you operate it
standby state. while driving, your attention to the sur-
NOTE rounding conditions may be affected,
WARNING  Even if the SOS emergency assist is in the resulting in an accident.
 If the indicator lights do not illuminate standby state, communication may not be
after setting the operation mode to ON, possible for a while depending on the radio
wave conditions.
there is a possible problem in the system. CAUTION
Have the system inspected by an autho-
 Do not open the cover unless you intend to
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair 2. The system operates by the following. press the SOS switch. You may press the
SOS switch by mistake. In addition, if the
cover is left open while driving, the cover
can cause injury in the event of an accident.

NOTE WARNING
 Do not press the SOS switch unless there is  Do not replace the speakers. If they are
an emergency such as an accident or sudden replaced, the voice of the operator at the
illness. If an emergency vehicle, etc. is dis- emergency call center may not be audible.
3 patched unnecessarily, you may be charged. If the speakers need to be replaced due to
a problem, etc., we recommend you con-
sult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
3. The green indicator light blinks and the
dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
system calls the emergency call center.
 An error may occur between the actual
report point and the point reported to the
WARNING emergency call center. Mutually confirm
 If the red indicator light illuminates as fol- the report point and the object through
lows, directly arrange an emergency vehi- the phone call with the operator of the
cle or road service with a cellular phone, emergency call center.
etc.
• When the red indicator light remains
illuminated. (There is a possible problem NOTE
in the system.)
 If the vehicle side microphone (E) and/or the
• When the red indicator light illuminates
speakers fail, you cannot talk with the opera-
for 60 seconds. (The vehicle may be in
tor of the emergency call center.
the place where radio waves cannot be
 An emergency call cannot be disconnected
transmitted and received.)
from the vehicle side.
4. The green indicator light blinks slowly,

6. The emergency call center arranges for
and the location and vehicle information
dispatch of the emergency vehicle as
is transmitted to the emergency call cen-
required.
ter.
5. When the green indicator light changes
from a blinking state to an illumination
state a conversation with an operator of
the emergency call center is available.

Indicator list
Indicator light
Situation
Red light Green light
Cause Solution 3
Wait for a while.
The indicator lights go off when the system check is com-
Illuminates
When changing the plete.
(for approxi- The system check is in pro-
operation mode to Extinguishes If the indicator lights do not illuminate, there is a possible
mately cess.
ON problem in the system. In this case, immediately have the
10 seconds)
system inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice.
After approximately Extinguishes Extinguishes The system works normally. −
10 seconds after There is a possible problem
changing the opera- Immediately have the system inspected at an authorized
Illuminates Extinguishes in the system or the battery
tion mode to ON Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
may be exhausted.
 The system calls the
emergency call center.
Fast blink-  The system transmits the
Extinguishes −
ing location and vehicle
information to the emer-
While the SOS emergency call center.
gency assist/Informa-
tion assist is activated Mutually confirm the details of the SOS emergency
assist/Information assist with the operator of the emergency
A conversation with an oper-
Slow blink- call center.
Extinguishes ator of the emergency call
ing If the green light does not extinguish even after the call
center is available.
ends, have the system inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice.


Indicator light
Situation Cause Solution
Red light Green light
Illuminates
When the SOS emer- The SOS emergency Activate SOS emergency assist/Information assist again, or
3 gency assist/Informa-
(for approxi-
Extinguishes assist/Information assist directly arrange an emergency vehicle or road service with
mately
tion assist failed failed. the nearest public telephone, etc.
60 seconds)
 Stolen vehicle tracking  Remote climate control

Remote control The vehicle tracking function can be used The engine can be started and the air con-
by the call center to provide the vehicle ditioning can be operated using the smart-
NOTE location information quickly to police. phone app.
 Remote door lock/unlock  Car finder
 To operate the remote control functions from
a smartphone or to receive notifications The vehicle doors and liftgate can be The location of the parked vehicle can be
using the smartphone, you must install the locked and unlocked using the smart- confirmed using the smartphone app.
smartphone app and register as a user before- phone app.  Remote horn
hand. For details about using the functions or You can make the horn sound using the
changing the settings, visit the Mitsubishi NOTE smartphone app.
Motors website.  You can lock and unlock the vehicle even if  Remote light
https://www.mitsubishicars.com/owners/ the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle. The lights can be turned on using the
service/manuals  If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked smartphone app.
 The remote operation functions, other than using the smartphone app when no doors or  Speed alert
the alert notification, cannot be activated if the liftgate are opened within a certain length If you set a vehicle speed limit beforehand
the vehicle engine is not started for 5 or more of time, the doors and the liftgate will auto- using the smartphone app, an alert is sent
consecutive days. matically re-lock.
to the smartphone app when the vehicle
 Be sure to have the F.A.S.T.-key with you
speed exceeds that limit.
 Alarm notification before locking the vehicle.
When the vehicle's theft-alarm system is  When the vehicle is locked or unlocked, the
activated, an alert is sent to the smart- power-folding outside rearview mirrors
phone using a short message service operate and the theft-alarm system turns on
or off.
(SMS), e-mail, or push notification.


 Geo-fence
If the specified area is set beforehand
WARNING NOTE
 Do not use the TCU if children, persons in  Use the remote climate control according to
using the smartphone app, an alert is sent
need of care, pets, etc., are in the vehicle. the state or local regulations regarding idling
to the smartphone using a short message
Even if the remote climate control is used, vehicles.
service (SMS), e-mail, or push notifica- the cabin may become too hot or cold if 3
tion when the vehicle enters or leaves that the system stops automatically or due to
area. some other reason. The cabin temperature General information
 Curfew may quickly rise in sunshine, which poses
If the specified time of day is set before- a risk of heat stroke and dehydration. In Model name: LE920A4-NA Auto
hand using the smartphone app, an alert is cold weather, on the other hand, the cabin FCC ID: RI7LE920A4NA
sent to the smartphone using a short mes- temperature may quickly drop. Either of Your TCU operates on a radio frequency sub-
sage service (SMS), e-mail, or push noti- which could lead to death in the worst
ject to Federal Communications Commission
case.
fication when the curfew is violated. (FCC) Rules (for vehicles sold in U.S.A.).
In addition, children can activate switches
 Vehicle settings This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
and controls, resulting in an injury or
You can change settings of items such as fatal accident. Rules. Operation is subject to the following
“Auto Fold Mirrors” and “Headlight two conditions:
Timeout when Exiting Vehicle” from the
smartphone app.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
CAUTION
ference.
 When using the remote climate control, do
not use a car cover.
 This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE
 Air conditioning performance may deterio- CAUTION
rate under the following conditions:  Changes or modifications made to this
• In extremely hot weather equipment not expressly approved by the
• In hot sunshine manufacturer may void the FCC authoriza-
• In extremely cold weather tion to operate this equipment.
 The remote climate control turns off auto-
matically after approximately 10 minutes. FCC Notice: This equipment has been tested
The remote climate control can be operated and found to comply with the limits for a
up to two times consecutively.
Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of

Modifications to and racing of your vehicle

the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to Mitsubishi Motors designs and manufactures
provide reasonable protection against harmful high quality vehicles with an emphasis on
Installation of accessories
N00301701293
interference in a residential installation. safety and durability. Modifications using
This equipment generates, uses and can radi- non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts may CAUTION
3 ate radio frequency energy and, if not affect the performance, safety and/or durabil-
 Before any electrical or electronic accesso-
installed and used in accordance with the ity of your vehicle, and may violate applica- ries are installed, consult an authorized
instructions, may cause harmful interference ble state and/or federal regulations. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
to radio communications.  Your vehicle is equipped with a diagnosis
However, there is no guarantee that interfer- DAMAGE OR PERFORMANCE PROB- connector (data link connector) for checking
ence will not occur in a particular installation. LEMS RESULTING FROM MODIFICA- and servicing the electronic control system.
If this equipment does cause harmful interfer- TIONS TO OR RACING OF YOUR Mitsubishi Motors does not recommend con-
ence to radio or television reception, which VEHICLE ARE NOT COVERED necting a device other than the Scan Tool for
can be determined by turning the equipment UNDER WARRANTY. inspections and service to this connector
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to because an unexpected problem could result.
Examples of modifications to your vehicle In addition, malfunctions caused by connect-
correct the interference by one or more of the
that can cause damage or performance prob- ing a device other than the Scan Tool may
following measures:
lems include the following: not be covered under warranty.
 Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
 Failure to use Mitsubishi Motors genuine  The installation of accessories, optional
 Increase the separation between the
parts parts, etc., should only be performed
equipment and receiver.
 Failure to use required fuel and fluids within the limits prescribed by law, and in
 Connect the equipment into an outlet on a
 Failure to use proper size tires and wheels accordance with the guidelines and warn-
circuit different from that to which the
 Modification of the fuel, intake, exhaust, ings contained within the documents
receiver is connected.
emission, suspension, engine, drive train accompanying this vehicle.
 Consult the dealer or an experienced
or electrical wiring systems Only Mitsubishi Motors approved acces-
radio/TV technician for help.
 Modification of any onboard com- sories should be fitted to your vehicle.
puter/control module, including repro-  Improper installation of electrical parts
Modifications to and racing gramming, or replacing/adding chips to could cause a fire. Refer to the “Modifica-
of your vehicle any onboard computer/control module tion/alterations to the electrical or fuel
N00301601218 systems” section within this owner’s man-
Review the Warranty and Maintenance Man-
This vehicle should not be modified with ual.
ual for further details regarding warranty cov-
non-Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts. erage.

Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts

 Using a cellular phone or radio set inside ine parts affects the driving safety of your able from your Mitsubishi Motors dealer are
the vehicle without an external antenna vehicle. a wide variety of accessories to personalize
may cause electrical system interference, your new vehicle. Each Mitsubishi Motors
which could lead to unsafe vehicle opera- vehicle has a selection of Mitsubishi Motors
Modification/alterations to the
tion.
electrical or fuel systems
authorized accessories to choose from to tai- 3
 Tires and wheels which do not meet spec- lor your new vehicle to your own personal
ifications must not be used. N00301800141
preference. Your Mitsubishi Motors dealer’s
Refer to the “Specifications” section for Mitsubishi Motors manufactures high quality Parts Manager has information on various
information regarding wheel and tire vehicles with an emphasis on safety. It is audio systems, protection items, as well as
sizes. important to consult an authorized Mitsubishi interior and exterior accessories available for
Motors dealer before installation of any your specific model.
accessory which may involve modification of
WARNING the electrical or fuel systems.
 While driving, do not use a cellular phone California Perchlorate
in a way that hinders safe driving. Any-
thing, including cellular phone usage, that CAUTION Materials Requirements
N00300100017
distracts you from the safe operation of  Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
your vehicle increases your risk of an acci- Motors dealer concerning any such acces- Certain components of this vehicle, such as
dent. sory fitment or modification. airbag modules, seat belt pretensioners, and
Refer to and follow all state and local laws If the wires interfere with the vehicle body or button cell batteries, may contain perchlorate
in your area regarding cellular phone improper installation methods are used (pro- materials.
usage while driving. tective fuses not included, etc.), electronic Special handling may apply. For additional
devices may be adversely affected, resulting
information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardous-
in a fire, vehicle damage, or other accident.
waste/perchlorate.
Important point!
Due to the large number of accessory and Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Break-in recommendations
replacement parts provided by different man- parts N00302600029
ufacturers in the market, it is not always pos- N00301400219

Advanced automobile manufacturing tech-
sible for an authorized Mitsubishi Motors niques permit you to operate your new vehi-
dealer to check whether the attachment or Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are cle without requiring a long break-in period
installation of a non-Mitsubishi Motors genu- designed and manufactured to meet high stan- of low-speed driving.
dards of performance, and are recommended
for all of your maintenance needs. Also avail-
Break-in recommendations
However, you can add to the future perfor-
mance and economy of your vehicle by
observing the following precautions during
the first 300 miles (500 km).
3 Drive your vehicle at moderate speeds during
the break-in period.
 Avoid revving the engine.

 Avoid rough driving such as sudden starts,
sudden acceleration, prolonged high-
speed driving and sudden braking. These
actions would have a detrimental effect on
the engine and lead to increased fuel and
oil consumption; this could ultimately
result in the malfunction of engine com-
ponents. Be particularly careful to avoid
full acceleration while in low shift posi-
tion (low gears).
 Do not overload the vehicle. Stay within
the seating capacity.
Refer to “Cargo load precautions” on
page 6-10.
 Refrain from towing a trailer or other
vehicle.
Refer to “Trailer towing” on page 6-11.

Seat and restraint systems
Seats .................................................................................................4-2 4
Seats and restraint systems ..............................................................4-3
Front seats ........................................................................................4-3
Rear seats .........................................................................................4-6
Heated seats (if so equipped)............................................................4-8
Head restraints .................................................................................4-9
Making a cargo area .......................................................................4-12
Seat belts ........................................................................................4-13
Seat belt use during pregnancy ......................................................4-21
Seat belt pre-tensioner and force limiter systems ..........................4-21
Child restraint systems ...................................................................4-22
Maintenance and inspection of seat belts ......................................4-30
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag .............................4-30
Seats
Seats
N00408401610
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-8

1 - Front seat
 To adjust the seat forward or backward 
Page 4-4
 To adjust the seatback  Page 4-5
 To adjust the seat height (Driver’s seat
only)  Page 4-5
 Arm rest (if so equipped)  Page 4-6
2 - Rear seats
 To adjust the seat forward or backward 
Page 4-6
 To adjust the seatback  Page 4-7
4-2 Seat and restraint systems

Seats and restraint systems
Seats and restraint systems WARNING WARNING

N00401601277  Do not place objects under the seats. The  After adjusting the seat, make sure that it
objects could prevent the seat from lock- is securely locked into position.
Your vehicle has seat belts and other safety
ing securely, which could lead to an acci-  To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
features that help protect you and your pas- dent. The objects may also cause damage injury or death during deployment of the
sengers in an accident. to the seat or other parts.
Seat belts are the most important safety
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far
4
device. When worn properly, seat belts can back as possible while maintaining a posi-
reduce the chance of serious injury or death tion that still enables you to fully apply the
in various types of crashes. For added protec-
Front seats pedals, easily control the steering wheel,
N00401801484
tion during a severe frontal collision, your and safely operate the vehicle.
vehicle has a Supplemental Restraint System Position the driver’s seat as far back as possi-  To reduce the risk to the front passenger
(SRS) with airbags for the driver and passen- ble while maintaining a position that still of serious injury or death during deploy-
gers. The seats, head restraints, and door enables you to fully apply the pedals, easily ment of the passenger’s airbag, always
locks also are safety equipment, which must control the steering wheel and safely operate properly wear the seat belt and adjust the
the vehicle. front passenger’s seat as far back as possi-
be used correctly.
ble.
Always check the following before you drive:  Always place children 12 years old and
Manual seat adjustment Power seat adjustment under in the rear seat and use appropriate
 That everyone in your vehicle is properly child restraint systems.
wearing their seat belt.
 That infants and small children are prop-
erly secured in an appropriate child CAUTION
restraint system in the rear seat.  Make sure that the seat is adjusted by an
 That all doors are fully closed and locked. adult. If it is adjusted by a child, an unex-
pected accident might occur.
 That seatbacks are upright, with head
 Do not place a cushion or the like between
restraints properly adjusted.
your back and the seatback while driving.
The effectiveness of the head restraints will
Safety equipment cannot prevent injury or be reduced in the event of an accident.
death in all motor vehicle accidents. How- WARNING  When sliding the seats, be careful not to
ever, you can help reduce the risk of injury or  Do not attempt to adjust the seat while catch your hand or leg.
death, by following the instructions in this driving. This can cause loss of vehicle con-
manual. trol and result in an accident.
Seat and restraint systems 4-3

Front seats
CAUTION To adjust the seat forward or Power seat adjustment (Driver’s

 When sliding or reclining the seat rearward, backward seat only)
pay careful attention to the rear seat passen- N00401901397
gers.
Operate the switch forward or backward to
Manual seat adjustment move the seat to the desired position. Release
4 the switch to lock the seat in place.
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the
seat in place.
1- Forward (toward the front of the vehicle)

2- Backward (toward the rear of the vehi-
cle)
NOTE
WARNING  To prevent the battery from completely dis-
 To make sure that the seat is securely charging, operate the power seat with the
locked, try to move it forward or back- engine running.
ward without using the adjusting lever.

Front seats
To adjust the seatbacks Power seat adjustment (Driver’s WARNING

N00402001441 seat only)  To reduce the risk of serious injury or
death in the event of an accident or sud-
Manual seat adjustment den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
Operate the switch in the direction of the
the upright position while the vehicle is in
arrows to adjust the seatback. motion.
To adjust the seatback, lean forward slightly, Seat belt performance during an accident 4
gently pull the seatback lock lever up, then can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
lean backward to a comfortable position and are reclined. The more a seatback is
release the lever. The seatback will lock in reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
place. mance will be adversely affected. If the
seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
increased risk you will slide under the belt
and receive serious injury or death.
To adjust the seat height

1- Move forward
2- Move backward (Driver’s seat only)
N00402101295
NOTE Manual seat adjustment

 To prevent the battery from completely dis-
charging, operate the power seat with the
CAUTION engine running.
Operate the lever repeatedly to raise or lower
 The reclining mechanism used in the seat- the seat.
back is spring loaded, and will cause the
seatback to return quickly to the vertical
position when the lock lever is operated.
When pulling the lever, sit close to the seat-
back or hold the seatback with your hand to
control its return motion.

Rear seats
Arm rest (if so equipped)

N00402301095
The lid on the floor console box can be

moved forward and backward and used as an
arm rest.
4
1- Raise 1- Raise or lower the front end of the seat

2- Lower cushion
Power seat adjustment
Operate the switch in the direction of the

arrows to raise or lower the seat.
NOTE Rear seats

N00402501273
 To prevent the battery from completely dis-
charging, operate the power seat with the When sitting in the rear seat, adjust the head
engine running. restraints to an appropriate height where they
2- Raise or lower the seat lock in position. Refer to “Head restraints” on
page 4-9.

Rear seats
To adjust the seat forward or CAUTION NOTE

backward  When sliding the rear seat rearward, make  You can adjust the seatback forward or back-
sure that there are no items behind the seat. ward on either side separately.
 If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo
Pull the seat adjusting lever up and slide the area cover, the seatbacks cannot be reclined
seat forward or backward to the desired posi-
tion. Release the adjusting lever to lock the To adjust the seatbacks unless the cargo area cover is installed in the
rear position or removed.
4
N00402801032
seat in place. Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 5-220.
Pull the lever up and adjust the seatback by
hand to the desired position, and release the
lever. The seatback will lock in place. WARNING
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
the upright position while the vehicle is in
motion.
 Seat belt performance during an accident
can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
are reclined. The more a seatback is
reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
NOTE seat belt is not properly positioned against
the body during an accident, there is
 You can adjust the seat forward or backward
increased risk you will slide under the belt
on either side separately.
CAUTION
 When a person is sitting in the center seat-
 If your vehicle is equipped with the arm rest
ing position of the rear seats, the two sides
WARNING and the seatback is reclined while the drink
of the rear seats must have the same for-
 To make sure that the seat is securely holder is used, drinks could be spilled. If the
ward/backward position and the same
locked, try to move it forward or back- spilt drink is very hot, you could be burnt.
seatback angle.
ward without using the adjusting lever.

Heated seats (if so equipped)
Arm rest (if so equipped) WARNING CAUTION

N00403001347  Persons who are unable to feel tempera-  If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
To use the arm rest, tilt the arm rest down for ture change or skin pain due to age, ill- seat, allow it to dry thoroughly before
ness, injury, medication, alcohol use, attempting to use the heater.
use as shown.
fatigue or other physical conditions or  Turn the heater off immediately if it appears
The arm rest includes a cup holder.
who have sensitive skin may suffer burns
4 when using the heated seat even at low
to be malfunctioning during use.
temperatures. To reduce the risk of burns,

people with such conditions must use care NOTE
when using the heated seat.
 Do not use the heated seats for a long time
when the engine is not running, doing so will
cause the battery to be discharged.
CAUTION
 Switch off the heated seats when not in use.
 Operate the heaters at the “HI” position for For the front seats
quick heating. After the seat has become
warm, set the heater switch to the “LO” posi-
tion to keep it warm. Slight variations in the Operate the switch as indicated by arrows.
seat temperature may be felt while using the The indicator light (A) will illuminate while
CAUTION heated seats. This is caused by the operation the heater is on.
 Never sit on an arm rest. Doing so could of the heater’s internal thermostat and does
damage the arm rest. not indicate a malfunction.
 Do not place heavy objects on the seat or
stick pins, needles, or other pointed objects
into the seat.
Heated seats (if so equipped)  Do not place a blanket, cushion, or other
N00404201027
insulating material on the seat while using
the heater; doing so can cause the heater ele-
The heated seats can be operated with the
ment to overheat.
ignition switch or the operation mode in ON.
 When cleaning the seat, do not use benzine,
kerosene, gasoline, alcohol, or other organic
solvents; doing so can cause damage not
only to the surface of the seat, but also to the 1 (HI) - Heater high (for quick heating)
heater.

Head restraints
2 (OFF) - Heater off
3 (LO) - Heater low (to keep the seat-
Head restraints WARNING
N00404301640  Driving without the head restraints in
warm)
place can cause you and your passengers
Head restraints can reduce the risk of a whip-
serious injury or death in an accident. To
lash injury if your vehicle is hit from the rear.
For the rear outboard seats The head restraints are equipped in the illus-
reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
always make sure the head restraints are
trated position. installed and properly positioned when 4
Each time the switch is pressed, the mode To maximize the effectiveness of the head the seat is occupied.
changes to the next one in the following restraints, adjust the seatback to the upright  In order to minimize the risk of a neck
sequence: OFF  HI  LO  OFF. position, and the head restraint to the proper injury due to a rear impact, the seatback
position. Sit back against the seatback with must be adjusted to the upright position
your head close to the head restraint. and the head restraint must be adjusted to
the proper position before vehicle opera-
tion. The driver should never adjust the
seat while the vehicle is in motion.
 Never place a cushion or similar device on
the seatback. This can adversely affect
head restraint performance by increasing
the distance between your head and the
restraint.
OFF - Heater off

HI - Heater high (for quick heating)
LO - Heater low (to keep the seat warm)
NOTE
 The rear seat switch will automatically
return to “OFF” after the engine is stopped.

Head restraints
Adjustment of the head Rear center seat

restraint height
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,
pull up the head restraint to the locked posi-
Front seats and rear outboard tion.
4 seats  To raise the head restraint, move it
upward.
To reduce the risk of injury in an accident,  After adjustment, push the head restraint
adjust the head restraint height so that the downward and make sure that it is locked.
center of the restraint is at your ear level  To lower the restraint, move it downward
when seated. Any person too tall for the while pushing the height adjusting knob
Rear outboard seats
restraint to reach their ear level when seated (A) in the direction of the arrow.
should raise the restraint to the highest locked To raise the head restraint, move it upward,
position. and then push the bottom of the restraint rear-
ward.
 To raise the head restraint, pull it straight
up.
 To lower the restraint, push down on it
while pressing the lock knob (A) in the
direction shown by the arrow.
 After adjusting the height, push down on
the restraint to make sure it is locked in
position.

Head restraints
To remove WARNING To install

 When a person sits in the rear seating
Press the lock knob (A) in the direction position, pull up the head restraint to a
shown by the arrows. Then pull the head height at which it locks in position. Be NOTE
restraint up and out of the seatback. sure to make this adjustment before start-  Before installing the head restraint to the left
ing to drive. Serious injuries could other-
wise be suffered in the result of an impact.
or right rear seat, tilt the seatback forward
slightly.
4
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6.
First check that the head restraint stalk with

the notches (B) is positioned toward the hole
with the lock knob (A), and then insert the
head restraint into the seatback.
And then insert it into the seatback. Push the
head restraint down while pressing the lock
knob (A) until the restraint locks into place.
NOTE
WARNING  If a front seat head restraint contacts the
 To help minimize the risk of neck injury in headliner and cannot be removed, tilt the
the event of an accident, the head seatback rearward slightly.
restraints must be properly installed and Refer to “To adjust the seatbacks” on page
positioned to proper height before vehicle 4-5.
operation.
 To remove the head restraint from the left or
right rear seat, tilt the seatback forward
slightly.
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6.

Making a cargo area
CAUTION Making a cargo area CAUTION

 Check that the lock knob (A) is extended out N00405501131  When adjusting the seats, be careful not to
as shown in the illustration. Then pull the catch your hand or leg. Personal injury could
head restraint up to make sure that it is WARNING result.
locked in place and will not come out of the  Never adjust the seats to make a cargo
seatback.
4 area when the vehicle is in motion or on a
slope. The seats could move more than NOTE
necessary or move suddenly causing a  When the seatback of a front seat is reclined,
serious accident and/or injury. return it to the upright position before driv-
 When returning a seatback to its seating ing.
position after folding down, make sure
that the seat is firmly secured. If the seat is
not secured, it could move causing a seri-
ous accident.
Folding the rear seatbacks for-
 Do not allow anyone to ride in the cargo ward
 The shape and size of the head restraint dif- area while the vehicle is in motion. People N00405701162
fers according to the seat. Always use the who are not properly seated and
correct head restraint provided for the seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to
restrained can be seriously injured or create an additional cargo area.
and do not install the head restraint in the killed in an accident.
wrong direction.
NOTE
CAUTION  You can separately fold the right and left side
 In the cargo area, do not load the luggage of the rear seat.
higher than the top of the seats and make
sure that the luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter- To fold the seatbacks
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious accident 1. When folding the left side rear seat, store
and/or injury. the seat belt for the center seating position
 Seats should always be operated by an adult. of the rear seat.
Seat adjustments by a child could lead to an Refer to “Detachable rear center seat belt”
unexpected accident. on page 4-17.

Seat belts
2. Lower the head restraints of the rear seat
to the lowest position.
WARNING
 To help reduce the risk of injury or death
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9.
in an accident, seat belts and child
3. Place the buckles in the pockets.
restraint systems must always be used.
Refer to “Child restraint systems” on page
4-22 for additional information.
 Never use one seat belt for more than one
4
person.
 Never carry more people in your vehicle
than there are seat belts.
 Always adjust the seat belt for a snug fit.
 Always place the shoulder belt over your
shoulder and across your chest. Never put
To return the seatbacks it behind you or under your arm.
 Always wear the lap belt as low as possible
1. Tilt the seatback up until it is locked prop-
across your hips, not around your waist.
4. Adjust the rear seat to its most rearward erly in position.
 Never insert any foreign object, such as a
position. 2. Make sure the seatback is locked securely piece of plastic, paper clip, button or coin,
Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6. in place. into the seat belt buckle.
NOTE
 If you do not move the rear seat to its most
Seat belts
rearward position, items may fall into the N00406001553
gap between the rear seat and the luggage Seat belts are installed in your vehicle to help
floor. reduce the risk of injury to the driver and pas-
senger in the event of an accident. Always
5. Pull up the lever (A), then fold the seat- use the provided seat belts.
back forward. Carefully review the following information
for proper seat belt usage.  Never modify or alter the seat belts in
your vehicle.

Seat belts
inside the belt retractor is designed to lock the
WARNING WARNING retractor in the event of a sudden change in
 To reduce the risk to the driver of serious  Children 12 years old and under should
the vehicle’s motion.
injury or death during deployment of the always ride in the rear seat and be prop-
driver’s airbag, always properly wear the erly restrained. This reduces their risk of
seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat as far serious injury or death in an accident, NOTE
back as possible while maintaining a posi- especially due to a deploying front passen-
4 tion that still enables you to fully apply the ger’s airbag. Refer to “Child restraint sys-
 For instructions on installing a child restraint
system using a seat belt, refer to “Installing a
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, tems” on page 4-22 for additional child restraint system using the seat belt” on
and safely operate the vehicle. information. page 4-27.
 To reduce the risk to a front seat passen-  Any child who is too small to properly
ger of serious injury or death from a wear a seat belt must be properly
deploying airbag, make sure the passenger restrained in an appropriate child
always wears the seat belt properly, restraint system.
remains seated all the way back and  Infants MUST be placed in a rear-facing
upright in their seat, and moves the seat as child safety seat and positioned in the rear
far back as possible. Refer to “Supplemen- seat.
tal Restraint System (SRS) - airbag” on  In the event of an accident, all seat belt
page 4-30 for additional information. assemblies, including retractors and
 Never hold an infant or child in your arms attachment hardware, should be inspected
or on your lap when riding in this vehicle by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
even when you are wearing your seat belt. dealer to determine whether replacement
Never place any part of the seat belt you is necessary.
are wearing around an infant or child.
Failure to follow these simple instructions
creates a risk of serious injury or death to Seat belt instructions
your child in the event of an accident or N00406201542
sudden stop. All seats are equipped with a seat belt which
uses one combined lap-and-shoulder belt with
an emergency locking retractor.
This system is designed to provide both com-

fort and safety. It permits full extension and
automatic retraction of the belts during nor-
mal vehicle operation. A sensing device

Seat belts
1. Occupants should always sit back in their 3. Grasp the latch plate and slide it up the
seats with their backs against the upright
WARNING webbing so that it easily pulls across your
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or
seatback. To reduce the risk of serious body.
injury or death during deployment of the
den stop, all seatbacks should be kept in
airbag, adjust the driver’s seat as far back the upright position while the vehicle is in
as possible while maintaining a position motion.
that still enables you to fully apply the 4
pedals, easily control the steering wheel, Seat belt performance during an accident
and safely operate the vehicle. The front can be adversely affected if the seatbacks
passenger seat should also be moved as are reclined. The more a seatback is
far back as possible. Refer to “Supple- reclined, the more likely seat belt perfor-
mance will be adversely affected. If the
mental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag”
seat belt is not properly positioned against
on page 4-30. Also refer to “To adjust the the body during an accident, there is
seat forward or backward” on page 4-4. increased risk you will slide under the belt
4. Pull the seat belt out slowly while holding
the latch plate. Push the latch plate into
the buckle until you hear a “click”. Pull
2. Before using the rear center seat belt, up on the belt to be sure the latch plate is
make sure that the detachable anchor is locked securely in the buckle.
securely latched and the seat belt is not
twisted. For details, refer to page 4-17.

Seat belts
6. To release the belt, press the button on the
NOTE NOTE buckle and allow the belt to retract.
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled  With the exception of the seat belt for the
If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull it
out, pull it once with force and let it retract driver, the seat belts in all other seating posi-
out and check for kinks or twists in the
all the way. tions are equipped with an Automatic Lock-
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again. ing Retractor (ALR) function. If you pull the webbing. Then make sure it remains
seat belt fully out of the retractor, the retrac- untwisted as it retracts.
4 tor will switch to its ALR child restraint
5. The lap part of the belt must always be
installation function (see page 4-27). NOTE
worn low and snug across the hips. Pull When the ALR function has been activated,  If the seat belt (A) or ring (B) becomes dirty,
up on the shoulder portion of the belt to the seat belt will only retract. If this happens, the belt may not retract smoothly. If the seat
take up any slack in the lap belt. let the belt fully retract, then pull the seat belt and ring are dirty, clean them with a
belt back out, repeating steps 1 through 4. mild soap or detergent solution.
WARNING
 Be sure the lap belt portion fits snugly and
is worn as low as possible across the hips,
not around the waist. Failure to follow this
instruction will increase the risk of serious
injury or death in the event of an accident.
 Be sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted when worn. Twisted webbing may
adversely affect seat belt performance.

Seat belts
Detachable rear center seat belt To attach

N00409900051
The rear center seat belt can be detached to 1. Pull out the detachable anchor (C)
fold the left side rear seat. between the seatback and the seat cush-
This seat belt must be worn correctly as illus- ion.
2. Pull out the latch plate (A) and then pull
trated.
out the small latch plate (B) by tilting it as 4
shown in the illustration.
4. Pull the small latch plate (B) slowly and

insert it into the detachable anchor (C)
until a click is heard. Make sure that the
seat belt is not twisted.
WARNING
 Never detach the center seat belt except NOTE
when the left side rear seatback is folded.  Pulling out the latch plate by force may dam-
Using the rear center seat belt with the age the interior trim.
detachable anchor unlatched increases the
risk of serious injury or death in an acci-
3. Pull the seat belt out slowly and pass it
dent. Make sure the small latch plate (B) is
properly latched to the detachable anchor
through the seat belt guide (E) so that the
(C) before the center seat belt is used. latch plate (A) is turned to the front side.
NOTE
 If the seat belt locks up and cannot be pulled
out, pull it once with force and let it retract
all the way.
Then, pull the belt out slowly once again.

Seat belts
4. Store the detachable anchor between the
NOTE seatback and the seat cushion.
 The seat belt can be buckled up by inserting
the latch plate (A) into the buckle (D) like
other seat belts.
 If the seat belt switches to the Automatic
4 Locking Retractor (ALR) child restraint
installation function and cannot be pulled
out, detach the latch plate (A) and move the
rear seat fully backward.
Refer to “Installing a child restraint system
using the seat belt” on page 4-27.
3. After the seat belt is retracted completely,
To detach insert the small latch plate (B) into the
upper slit (G) and the latch plate (A) into
1. While holding the center seat belt, insert the lower slit (H). Driver’s seat belt
the latch plate (A) into the slot (F) in the
detachable anchor (C) to release the seat
reminder/warning light and
belt from the detachable anchor. display
N00418401411
2. Pass the seat belt through the seat belt

guide (E) and retract it completely toward A tone and warning light are used to remind
the rear trim. the driver to fasten the seat belt.

Seat belts
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
position or the operation mode is put in ON
Front passenger seat belt warn- WARNING
without the driver’s seat belt being fastened, a ing light  When a child booster seat is used on the
front passenger seat, the front passenger
warning light will come on and a tone will N00418301276
seat belt warning light will not come on, if
sound for approximately 6 seconds to remind The front passenger seat belt warning light is the seat belt is not fastened when the
you to fasten your seat belt. located in the instrument panel. booster seat is used. Confirm that the
If the vehicle is driven with the seat belt still child is wearing the seat belt properly. 4
unfastened, the warning light will blink and  Do not install any accessory or sticker that
the tone will sound intermittently until the makes the light difficult to see.
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, “FAS-
TEN SEAT BELT” is displayed on the infor-
mation screen in the multi-information Adjustable seat belt shoulder
display.
anchor (front seats)
N00406301367
WARNING The seat belt shoulder anchor height can be
 In order to reduce the risk of serious
adjusted. To move the anchor (A), pull the
injury or death in an accident, always fas-
lock knob (B) and slide the anchor to the
ten your own seat belt. Do not allow any-
one to ride in your vehicle unless he or she When the ignition switch is turned to the desired position.
is also seated and fastening a seat belt. “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
Children should additionally be restrained ON, this indicator normally comes on and
in a secure child restraint system. goes off a few seconds later.
The light comes on when a person sits on the
front passenger seat but does not fasten the
NOTE seat belt. It goes off when the seat belt is sub-
 If the seat belt subsequently remains unfas- sequently fastened.
tened, the warning light and the tone will
issue further warnings each time the vehicle
starts moving from a stop.

Seat belts
WARNING Seat belt extender

 Always adjust the shoulder belt anchor so N00406701202
that the shoulder belt is positioned across If your seat belt is not long enough, even
the center of your shoulder without touch- when fully extended, a seat belt extender
ing your neck. The shoulder belt should must be obtained. The extender may be used
not be able to fall off your shoulder. Fail-
4 ure to follow this instruction can adversely
for either of the front seats.
affect seat belt performance and increase
the risk of serious injury or death in the
event of an accident.
 Adjust the shoulder belt anchor only when
the vehicle is not in motion.
Put the seat belt webbing in the back slot (A)
 Make sure the anchor is securely locked in
on the clip and insert the metal plate of the
position after adjusting it.
latch plate into the front slot (B) as shown in
the illustration.
Storing the rear seat belts (out-

board seating positions)
N00406501138
When the seat belts for the rear outboard seat- WARNING
ing positions are not used, the seat belts can  The extender should only be used if the
existing belt is not long enough. Anyone
be stored.
who can use the standard seat belt should
not use an extender. Unnecessary use of an
extender can adversely affect seat belt
performance in an accident.
 When not required, the extender must be
removed and stowed.

Seat belt use during pregnancy
Seat belt use during preg- Pre-tensioner system

nancy
N00406800134
The driver and front passenger seat belts are
equipped with a seat belt pre-tensioner sys-
Seat belts work for everyone, including preg-
tem. In a moderate-to-severe frontal or side
nant women. Like all occupants, pregnant
women are more likely to be seriously injured
collision or when a rollover or overturning of 4
the vehicle is detected, the pre-tensioner sys-
or killed in an accident if they do not wear
tem operates simultaneously with the deploy-
seat belts.
ment of the front airbags, side airbags or
curtain airbags.
WARNING The seat belt pre-tensioners are located in the 1- SRS warning light
 To reduce the risk of serious injury or driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt retrac- 2- Front impact sensors
death to pregnant women and unborn tors (A) and final anchor (B). When activated, 3- Seat belt pre-tensioner
children in an accident, pregnant women the pre-tensioners quickly draw back seat belt 4- Airbag control unit
should always wear a seat belt. The lap 5- Side impact sensors
webbing and increase seat belt performance.
portion of the seat belt should be worn 6- Seat belt buckle switches
snug and low across the hips and below
the rounding. Consult your doctor if you
have any additional questions or concerns. The airbag control unit monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever
the ignition switch or the operation mode is
under the following conditions. These include
Seat belt pre-tensioner and all of the items listed above and all related
force limiter systems wiring.
N00417701765 [Except for vehicles equipped with the
The driver’s and front passenger’s seats each F.A.S.T.-key]
have a seat belt equipped with a pre-tensioner The ignition switch is in the “ON” or
system and force limiter system. “START” position.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system includes [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
the following components: The operation mode is in ON.

Child restraint systems

The seat belt pre-tensioners will operate The child restraint system should be appropri-
under the same conditions as the airbag con-
SRS warning ate for your child’s weight and height, and
N00408701147
trol unit. should properly fit your vehicle’s seat.
This warning light tells you if there is a prob- For detailed information, refer to the instruc-
When the seat belt pre-tensioners activate, lem involving the SRS airbags and/or the seat tion manual accompanying the child restraint
some smoke is released and a loud noise will belt pre-tensioner system. Refer to “SRS system.
4 be heard. The smoke is not harmful, but care warning light/display” on page 4-36.
should be taken not to intentionally inhale it,
as it may cause some temporary irritation to Recommendations for child
people with respiratory problems.
Force limiter system restraint system selection
N00408900126
Even in the event of a severe impact, the pre-
tensioners will not operate if the seat belts are In the event of an accident, the seat belt force
All children should be properly restrained in
not fastened. The seat belt pre-tensioners may limiter system will help reduce the force
a restraint device that offers the maximum
not activate in certain collisions, even though applied to the driver and front seat passenger.
protection for their size and age as specified
the vehicle may appear to be severely dam- by local, state, or provincial laws.
aged. Such non-activation does not mean that Child restraint systems Be sure to check local, state, or provincial
something is wrong with the seat belt pre-ten- N00407101812 requirements for child size and age that may
sioner system, but rather that the collision vary from the recommendations listed below.
forces were not severe enough to activate the When transporting infants or small children
system. in your vehicle, an appropriate child restraint  Children less than 2 years old and who
system must always be used. This is required weigh 22 pounds (10 kg) or less MUST
by law in the U.S. and Canada. ride in a rear-facing child safety seat that
WARNING Child restraint systems specifically designed
 The seat belt pre-tensioner system is
MUST ONLY be used in the rear seat.
for infants and small children are offered by  Children older than 2 years of age and
designed to work only once. After the seat several manufacturers. Choose only a child
belt pre-tensioners have been activated, who weigh less than 40 pounds (18 kg) or
restraint system with a label certifying that it who are less than 40 inches (100 cm) tall
they will not work again. They must
promptly be replaced and the entire seat
complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety must be in a forward-facing restraint used
belt pre-tensioner system inspected by an Standard 213 (FMVSS 213) or Motor Vehicle only in the rear seat.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Restraint Systems and Booster Seats Safety
Regulations (RSSR). Look for the manufac-
turer’s statement of compliance on the box
and child restraint system itself.


 Children who weigh more than 40 pounds
(18 kg) or who are more than 40 inches
WARNING WARNING
 Any child who is too large to use a child  Never hold an infant or child in your arms
(100 cm) tall, regardless of age, should
restraint system should ride in the rear or on your lap when riding in this vehicle,
use a suitable child seat or a booster seat
seat and wear the lap-and-shoulder belt even when you are wearing your seat belt.
in the rear seat until the vehicle’s lap-and- properly. The shoulder belt must be posi- Never place any part of the seat belt you
shoulder belt fits them properly. tioned over the shoulder and across the are wearing around an infant or child.
chest, not across their neck, and with the Failure to follow these simple instructions 4
lap belt positioned low on the child’s hips, creates a risk of serious injury or death to
WARNING not across their stomach. If necessary, a your child in the event of an accident or
 All children must be seated in the rear booster seat should be used to help achieve sudden stop.
seat, and properly restrained.
a proper seat belt fit. Follow the booster
Accident statistics show that children of seat manufacturer’s instructions. Only use
all sizes and ages are safer when properly a booster seat that is certified as comply-
restrained in the rear seat, rather than in
ing with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
the front seat. Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint Sys-
 Be sure to select a child restraint system tems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
that is appropriate not only for the child’s tions.
size and age but also for your vehicle.
Some child restraint systems may not fit
your vehicle properly.

BK0252700US.book 24 ページ２０１７年１１月７日　火曜日　午後１時５分
WARNING WARNING WARNING

 Your vehicle is also equipped with a front  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT  After installation, push and pull the child
passenger’s airbag. SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat restraint system back and forth, and side
Never put REAR-FACING CHILD whenever possible. If one must be used in to side, to see that it is firmly secured. If
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT the front passenger seat, move the seat to the child restraint system is not installed
RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- the most rearward position and make sure securely, it may cause injury to the child
4 senger seat. This places the infant too the child stays in the child restraint sys- or other occupants in the event of an acci-
close to the passenger’s airbag. During tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow dent or sudden stop.
deployment of that airbag, the infant can these instructions could result in serious  When not in use, keep your child restraint
be seriously injured or killed. Rear-facing injury or death to the child. system secured with the seat belt, or
child restraint systems or infant restraint remove it from the vehicle, in order to pre-
systems must only be used in the rear seat. vent it from being thrown around inside
the vehicle during an accident.
Airbag  When attaching a child restraint system to
the rear seat, prevent the front seatbacks
from touching the child restraint system.
Otherwise, the child could be seriously
injured in the event of hard braking or a
collision.
 It is important to use an approved rear-
facing infant restraint until the infant is
one year old (unless the infant outgrows
the seat sooner). This allows the infant’s
neck and spine to develop enough to sup-
port the weight of their head in the event
of an accident.
 When installing a child restraint system,
follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer and follow the directions in
this manual. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death to your child in an
accident or sudden stop.

NOTE Installing a child restraint sys- Tether anchor locations

 Before purchasing a child restraint system, tem using the LATCH (Lower N00418901243
try installing it in the rear seat to ensure Your vehicle has 3 attachment points on the
proper fit. Due to the location of the seat belt Anchors and Tethers for chil- backside of the rear seats. These are for
buckles and the shape of the seat cushion, it dren) system securing a child restraint system tether strap
may be difficult to securely install some
manufacturer’s child restraint systems.
N00418801196 to each of the 3 rear seating positions in your
vehicle.
4
If the child restraint system can be pulled
forward or to either side easily on the seat
Lower anchor locations
cushion after the seat belt has been tightened,
choose another manufacturer’s child restraint The outboard seating positions in the rear seat
system. of your vehicle are equipped with lower
Depending on the seating position in the anchors for attaching child restraint systems
vehicle and the child restraint system that compatible with the LATCH system.
you have, the child restraint system can be
attached using one of the following 2 meth-
ods:
• Attach to the lower anchorage in the rear
seat ONLY if the child restraint system is
compatible with the LATCH system (See
page 4-25).
• Attach to the seat belt (See page 4-27).
NOTE
 The symbols on the seatback show the loca-
tion of the lower anchor points.

Examples of child restraint sys- Using the LATCH system

tems compatible with the LATCH N00419101314
system NOTE
N00419001212
 On vehicles equipped with the cargo area
cover, install the cargo area cover in the rear
4 position or remove it.
Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 5-220.
1. In order to securely fasten the tether strap,

remove the head restraint from the loca- A- Connector
tion where you wish to install the child B- Lower anchor
restraint system.
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9.
2. Adjust the rear seat to its most rearward NOTE
A- Rear-facing child restraint system position.  In order to secure a child restraint system
B- Front-facing child restraint system Refer to “Rear seats” on page 4-6. compatible with the LATCH system, use the
C- Child restraint system lower anchor 3. Push the anchor connectors (A) on the lower anchor points in the outboard positions
connectors child restraint system into the lower of the rear seat. It is not necessary to use the
D- Tether strap anchors (B) in accordance with the vehicle’s seat belt. The vehicle’s seat belt,
(These are only examples.) instructions provided by the child restraint however, MUST be used to secure a child
system’s manufacturer. restraint system in the center seating position
Remember, the lower anchors (B) pro- of the rear seat.
CAUTION vided with your vehicle are designed to
 Do not sit in the center seating position of secure suitable child restraint systems
the rear seat when installing a child restraint compatible with the LATCH system in
system on the left side of the rear seat. the outboard positions of the rear seats
only. The anchor connectors are NOT
designed to secure a suitable child
restraint system in the center seating
position of the rear seat.


5. Push and pull the child restraint system in ever possible, although the front passenger
WARNING all directions to ensure it is firmly seat belt can also be converted to ALR mode.
 If there is any foreign material in or
secured.
around the lower anchors, remove it
before installing the child restraint sys- WARNING
tem. Also, make sure the seat belt is away WARNING  When you install a child restraint system
from, not looped through or otherwise  Child restraint system tether anchors are
interfering with, the child restraint sys- designed only to withstand loads from cor-
using the seat belt, always make sure the
retractor has been switched to the ALR
4
tem. If foreign matter is not removed rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under child restraint installation function. The
and/or the seat belt interferes with the no circumstances are they to be used for ALR function will keep the child restraint
child restraint system, the child restraint adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching system tightly secured to the seat.
system will not be secured properly, could other items, or equipment to the vehicle. Failure to convert the retractor to the
detach and move forward in the event of ALR function may allow the child
sudden braking or an accident, and could restraint system to move forward during
result in injury to the child or other vehi- Installing a child restraint sys- sudden braking or an accident, resulting
cle occupants. in serious injury or death to the child or
 When the vehicle is moving, do not adjust
tem using the seat belt (with other occupants.
the seat where the child restraint system is emergency/automatic locking
installed. mechanism)
N00407301566
CAUTION
4. Latch the tether strap hook (C) of the With the exception of the driver, the seat belt
 Do not sit in the center seating position of
child restraint system to the tether anchor the rear seat when installing a child restraint
in all other seating positions can be converted system on the left side of the rear seat.
bar (D) and tighten the tether strap so it is from normal Emergency Locking Retractor
securely fastened. (ELR) mode, to Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) mode. This means that when you pull
Installation
the seat belt fully out of the retractor, the
retractor will switch to its ALR child restraint
installation function. Always use the ALR NOTE
child restraint installation function when you  On vehicles equipped with the cargo area
install a child restraint system using the seat cover, install the cargo area cover in the rear
belt. position or remove it.
Children 12 years old and under should Refer to “Cargo area cover” on page 5-220.
always be restrained in the rear seat, when-


1. Remove the head restraint from the loca- If the belt is in the ALR function, you will
tion in which you wish to install a child not be able to pull it out. If the webbing
restraint system. can be pulled out from retractor, the ALR
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9. function has not been activated and you
2. Adjust the seat where the child restraint will need to repeat steps 6 and 7.
system will be installed to the most rear- 8. After confirming that the belt is locked,
4 ward position. grab the shoulder part of the belt near the
3. Adjust the seatback of the seat where the buckle and pull up to remove any slack
child restraint system will be installed as from the lap part of the belt allowing the
follows. slack to feed into the retractor. Remember,
[For front passenger’s seat] if the lap belt portion is not tight, the child
Adjust the seatback angle to six steps 6. To activate the ALR child restraint instal- restraint system will not be secure. It may
rearward from the most upright position. lation function, slowly pull the shoulder help to put your weight on the child
Refer to “Front seats: To adjust the seat- part of the belt all the way out of the restraint system and/or push on its seat-
backs” on page 4-5. retractor until it stops. Then let the belt back while pulling up on the belt (See
[For rear seats] feed back into the retractor. illustration).
Adjust the seatback angle to four steps
rearward from the most upright position.
Refer to “Rear seats: To adjust the seat-
backs” on page 4-7.
4. Place the child restraint system on the
seat.
5. Route the seat belt through the child
restraint system according to the instruc-
tions provided by the child restraint sys-
tem’s manufacturer. Then insert the seat
belt latch plate into the buckle. Make sure
you hear a “click” when you insert the 7. After the belt has retracted, tug on it. 9. Push and pull the child restraint system in
latch plate into the buckle. all directions to check that it is installed
securely.
If the child restraint system is not installed
securely, proceed to step 10.


10. [For front passenger’s seat] booster seat must be used to raise the child so
Repeat steps 8 and 9.
WARNING that the shoulder belt crosses their shoulder
 Child restraint system tether anchors are
[For rear seats] and the lap belt remains positioned low
designed only to withstand loads from cor-
Adjust the seatback angle forward until across their hips. The booster seat should fit
rectly fitted child restraint systems. Under
the child restraint system is firmly no circumstances are they to be used for the vehicle seat and have a label certifying
secured, and then check that the seatback adult seat belts, harnesses, for attaching compliance with Federal Motor Vehicle
is locked in place. Then push and pull the other items, or equipment to the vehicle. Safety Standards or Motor Vehicle Restraint 4
child restraint system in all directions to Systems and Booster Seats Safety Regula-
check that it is installed securely. tions.
12. Before putting your child in the restraint,
If your child restraint system requires the
push and pull the restraint in all directions
use of a tether strap, fasten the tether strap WARNING
to be sure it is firmly secure. Do this
in accordance with the following step 11.
before each use. If the child restraint sys-  Any child who is too small to properly
11. Latch the tether strap hook (A) of the wear a seat belt must be properly
tem is not firmly secure, repeat steps 4
child restraint system to the tether anchor restrained in an appropriate child
through 11.
bar (B) and tighten the tether strap so it is restraint system, to reduce their risk of
13. To remove a child restraint system from
securely fastened. serious injury or death in an accident.
the vehicle and deactivate the ALR mode,
 A child should never be left unattended in,
remove the child from the restraint.
or unsupervised around, your vehicle.
Unlatch the buckle. Then remove the belt
When you leave the vehicle, always take
from the restraint and let the belt fully the child out as well.
retract.  Children can die from heat stroke if left or
14. Reinstall the head restraint. trapped inside the vehicle, especially on
Refer to “Head restraints” on page 4-9. hot days.
 Keep your vehicle locked when not in use.
Keep your vehicle keys away from chil-
Children who have outgrown dren.
child restraint systems
N00407601628
Children who have outgrown a child restraint

system should be seated in the rear seat and
wear the seat belt. If the shoulder belt crosses
their face or neck, and/or the lap belt crosses
their stomach, a commercially available

Maintenance and inspection of seat belts

head and chest injuries in certain moderate to
Maintenance and inspection WARNING severe frontal collisions. The SRS front air-
of seat belts  Never use an organic solvent to clean the
seat belt webbing. Do not attempt to
bags, together with sensors at the front of the
N00407001417 vehicle and sensors attached to the front
bleach or re-dye the seat belt webbing.
Regularly check your seat belt buckles and These may weaken the seat belt webbing, seats, form an advanced airbag system.
their release mechanisms for positive engage- increasing risk of injury or death in an
4 ment and release of the latch plate. Check the accident.
The SRS driver’s knee airbag is designed to
Clean seat belt webbing only with mild supplement the primary protection of the
retractors for automatic locking when in the
soap or detergent solution and rinse it driver’s seat belt system. It can reduce the
Automatic Locking Retractor function.
with lukewarm water, and dry the seat forward movement of the driver’s lower legs
The entire seat belt assembly should be belt webbing completely before retracting and provide increased overall body protection
replaced if the webbing shows any obvious it. in certain moderate to severe frontal colli-
cuts, tears, increase in thickness in any sec- sions.
tion of the webbing from broken fibers, or Supplemental Restraint Sys- The SRS side airbags and the curtain airbags
severe fading from sunlight. All of these con-
ditions indicate a weakening of the belt,
tem (SRS) - airbag are also designed to supplement the seat belts.
N00407701876 The SRS side airbags provide the driver and
which may adversely affect seat belt perfor-
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental front passenger with protection against chest
mance in an accident.
Restraint System (SRS), which includes air- injuries by deploying the bag on the side
bags for the driver and passengers. impacted in moderate to severe side impact
WARNING collisions.
 Do not attempt to repair or replace any
part of the seat belt assemblies. This work NOTE The SRS curtain airbags provide the driver
should be done by an authorized  The SOS emergency assist (if so equipped) is and the passengers on the front seat and the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Failure to have designed to operate when any of the airbags rear outboard seats with protection against
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer deploy. head injuries by deploying the curtain airbag
perform the work could reduce the effec- Refer to “Telematics Control Unit (TCU)” on the side impacted in moderate to severe
tiveness of the belts and could result in a on page 3-5. side impact collisions and by deploying both
serious injury or death in an accident.
curtain airbags when a rollover is detected.
The SRS front airbags are designed to supple- The curtain airbags are also designed to help
ment the primary protection of the driver and reduce the risk of complete and partial ejec-
front passenger seat belt systems by provid- tion from the vehicle through side windows
ing those occupants with protection against

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - airbag

in both side impact and rollover type acci-
dents.
WARNING WARNING
• Seat belts reduce the risk of injury in • To reduce the risk to the front passenger
The SRS airbags are NOT a substitute for use rear impact collisions, and in lower- of serious injury or death from a deploy-
of the seat belts. For maximum protection in speed frontal collisions because the air- ing passenger’s airbag, make sure the
bags are not designed to inflate in those passenger always wears the seat belt
all types of accidents, seat belts must
situations. properly, remains seated upright and all
ALWAYS be worn by everyone who drives or
• Seat belts reduce the risk of being the way back in the seat, and positions 4
rides in this vehicle (with infants and small thrown from your vehicle in a collision or the seat as far back as possible.
children in an appropriate child restraint sys- rollover. • Seat all infants and children in the rear
tem in the rear seat, and older children buck-  IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO BE PROP- seat, properly restrained in an appropri-
led in the rear seat). Refer to “Child restraint ERLY SEATED. ate child restraint system.
systems” on page 4-22. • A driver or front passenger sitting too  Airbags inflate very quickly and with
close to the steering wheel or instrument great force. Do not sit on the edge of the
seat or sit with your lower legs too close to
WARNING panel during airbag deployment can be
the instrument panel, or lean your head or
seriously injured or killed.
 IT IS VERY IMPORTANT TO ALWAYS
• Airbags inflate very quickly and with chest close to the steering wheel or the
WEAR YOUR SEAT BELT PROPERLY
great force. If the driver and front pas- instrument panel.
EVEN WITH AN AIRBAG.
senger are not properly seated and  Do not put your feet or legs on or against
• Seat belts help keep the driver and pas-
restrained, the airbag may not provide the instrument panel.
sengers properly positioned. This
the proper protection, and can cause
reduces the risk of injury in all collisions,
serious injuries or death when it inflates.
and reduces the risk of serious injuries or
• To reduce the risk to the driver of serious
death when the airbags inflate.
injury or death due to a deploying
During sudden braking just before a col-
driver’s airbag, always properly wear
lision, an unrestrained or improperly
your seat belt and adjust the driver’s seat
restrained driver or front passenger can
as far back as possible, maintaining a
move forward into direct contact with, or
position that still allows the driver to
within close proximity to, the airbag
have good control of the steering wheel,
when it begins to inflate.
brake, accelerator, and other vehicle con-
The beginning stage of airbag inflation is
trols.
the most forceful and can cause serious
injuries or death if the occupant comes in
contact with the airbag at this time.

BK0252700US.book 32 ページ２０１７年１１月７日　火曜日　午後１時５分

 Infants and small children should never  NEVER put REAR-FACING CHILD  FRONT-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
ride unrestrained, or lean against the RESTRAINT SYSTEMS or INFANT SYSTEMS should be used in the rear seat
instrument panel. They should never ride RESTRAINT SYSTEMS in the front pas- whenever possible. If they must be used in
held in your arms or on your lap. They senger seat. This places the infant too the front passenger seat, move the seat to
can be seriously injured or killed in an close to the passenger’s airbag. During the most rearward position and make sure
4 accident, especially when the airbags deployment of that airbag, the infant can the child stays in the child restraint sys-
inflate. Seat all infants and children in the be seriously injured or killed. tem, properly restrained. Failure to follow
rear seat, properly restrained in an appro- Rear-facing child restraint systems or these instructions could result in serious
priate child restraint system. Refer to infant restraint systems must only be used injury or death to the child.
“Child restraint systems” on page 4-22. in the rear seat.
Airbag
 Older children should be seated in the

rear seat with their seat belt properly
worn, and with an appropriate booster
seat if needed.
Refer to “Children who have outgrown
child restraint systems” on page 4-29.


When the impact sensors detect a sufficient
How the Supplemental front or side impact to deploy the airbag(s),
Restraint System works the appropriate airbag(s) will be deployed.
N00407801617
The SRS includes the following components: When the airbag control unit detects rollover
of the vehicle, curtain airbags will be
deployed. 4
When airbags deploy, some smoke is released
accompanied by a loud noise. The smoke is
not harmful, but do not intentionally inhale
10- Side airbag modules the smoke as it may cause temporary irrita-
11- Curtain airbag modules tion to people with respiratory problems.
12- Side impact sensors
An inflated airbag will deflate quickly, so you
may not even notice that the airbag was
The airbag control unit monitors the readiness inflated.
1- Airbag module (Driver) of the electronic parts of the system whenever Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver
2- SRS warning light the ignition switch or the operation mode is from seeing or being able to steer the vehicle,
3- Passenger’s airbag off indicator under the following conditions. These include and does not prevent people from leaving the
4- Front impact sensors all of the items listed above and all related vehicle.
5- Airbag module (Passenger) wiring.
6- Airbag module (Driver’s knee) [Except for vehicles equipped with the
7- Driver’s seat position sensor F.A.S.T.-key] CAUTION
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or  Airbags inflate very quickly and with great
8- Passenger’s seat occupant classifica-
“START” position. force. In certain situations, contact with an
tion sensor system inflating airbag may cause small cuts, abra-
9- Airbag control unit [Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
sions, and bruises.
The operation mode is in ON.
The airbags will operate under the same con-

ditions as the airbag control unit. Event Data Recording
N00418601266
This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR).

The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in the instrument panel will come on. Refer to
certain crash or near crash-like situations,
NOTE “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-36.
 EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only
such as an airbag deployment or hitting a
if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data
road obstacle, data that will assist in under- WARNING
are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed. ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.,  If the SRS warning light or warning dis-
The EDR is designed to record data related to name, gender, age, and crash location) are
4 vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a recorded. However, other parties, such as
play comes on, have the vehicle inspected
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
short period of time, typically 30 seconds or law enforcement, could combine the EDR dealer as soon as possible.
less. data with the type of personally identifying  Please observe the following instructions
data routinely acquired during a crash inves- to ensure that the driver’s seat position
The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record tigation. sensor can operate correctly.
such data as: • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
and sit well back against the seatback.
 How various systems in your vehicle were To read data recorded by an EDR, special
Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3.
operating; equipment is required, and access to the vehi-
• Do not recline the seatback more than
 Whether or not the driver and front pas- cle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the necessary when driving.
senger safety belts were buckled/fastened; vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as • Do not place metallic objects or luggage
 How far (if at all) the driver was depress- law enforcement, that have the special equip- under the front seat.
ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; ment, can read the information if they have  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
and, access to the vehicle or the EDR. impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
 How fast the vehicle was traveling. an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
Driver’s seat position sensor
These data can help provide a better under- N00417901233
standing of the circumstances in which
The driver’s seat position sensor is attached
crashes and injuries occur. Passenger’s seat occupant clas-
to the seat rail and provides the airbag control
unit with information on the seat’s fore-aft sification sensor system
position. The airbag control unit controls N00418001374
deployment of the driver’s front airbag in The passenger’s seat occupant classification
accordance with the information it receives sensor system is attached to the front passen-
from this sensor. ger seat cushion and provides the airbag con-
If there is a problem involving the driver’s trol unit with information regarding the
seat position sensor, the SRS warning light in occupant on the front passenger seat. The air-


bag control unit controls deployment of the
passenger’s front airbag in accordance with
WARNING WARNING
• The SRS warning light comes on while • If any liquid is spilled on the seat, wipe it
the information it receives from this system.
you are driving. and dry the seat immediately.
The passenger’s front airbag will not deploy
 To ensure that the passenger’s seat occu-  If the vehicle is involved in a severe
in an impact when the system senses no occu-
pant classification sensor system can sense impact, have the SRS sensors inspected by
pant on the front passenger’s seat or a child in
a child restraint system. In this case, the pas-
correctly, observe the following instruc-
tions. Failure to follow these instructions
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as
soon as possible.
4
senger airbag off indicator will come on. can adversely affect the performance of
Refer to “Passenger’s airbag off indicator” on the passenger’s airbag system.
page 4-35. • Adjust the seat to the correct position,
Passenger’s airbag off indicator
If there is a problem involving the passen- and sit well back against the seatback. N00418101375
ger’s seat occupant classification sensor sys- Refer to “Front seats” on page 4-3. The passenger’s airbag off indicator is
tem, the SRS warning light in the instrument • Do not recline the seatback more than located in the instrument panel.
panel will come on. Refer to “SRS warning necessary.
light/display” on page 4-36. • Never have more than one person (adult
or child) sitting on the seat.
• Do not place anything between the seat
WARNING and the floor console.
 If any of the following conditions occur, • When attaching a child restraint system,
you should immediately have your vehicle secure it firmly.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi • Do not place luggage or other objects on
Motors dealer as soon as possible: the seat.
• The SRS warning light does not initially • Do not use a seat cover or a cushion.
come on when the ignition switch or the
• Do not modify or replace the seat and
operation mode is under the following
seat belt.
conditions.
• Do not place luggage or other objects
[Except for vehicles equipped with the The indicator normally comes on when the
under the seat.
F.A.S.T.-key] ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
The ignition switch is in the “ON” or • Do not place and use an electronic device
such as a computer on the seat. or the operation mode is put in ON, and goes
“START” position.
• Do not place heavy objects on the seat or out a few seconds later. In the following situ-
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
The operation mode is in ON. stick pins, needles, or other objects into ations, the indicator will stay on to show that
• The SRS warning light does not go out it. the passenger front airbag is not operational.
after several seconds. • Do not remove the seat cushion skin.
 The front passenger’s seat is not occupied.

 The system senses that a child is using a come on and stay on. At the same time, the
child restraint system on the front passen-
WARNING warning display will appear on the informa-
 Do not attach any accessory to your vehi-
ger’s seat. tion screen in the multi-information display.
cle that makes the passenger’s airbag off
The SRS warning light/display is shared by
indicator difficult or impossible to see.
When the passenger’s seat occupant classifi- the SRS airbag and the seat belt pre-tensioner
You must be able to see the passenger’s
cation sensor system sense there is a person airbag off indicator and verify the status system.
4 seated in the front passenger’s seat, the indi- of the passenger’s airbag system.
cator goes out to show that the passenger’s
WARNING
front airbag is operational.
SRS warning light/display  If any of the following conditions occur,
N00408301651
there may be a problem with the SRS air-
WARNING bags and/or seat belt pre-tensioners, and
There is a Supplemental Restraint System they may not function properly in a colli-
 If any of the following conditions occur,
you should immediately have the airbag (SRS) warning light on the instrument panel. sion or may suddenly activate without a
system in your vehicle inspected by an collision:
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as • Even when the ignition switch or the
soon as possible: operation mode is in ON, the SRS warn-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator ing light does not come on or it remains
comes on when an adult is sitting on the on.
front passenger seat. • The SRS warning light and/or the warn-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does ing display comes on while driving.
not come on when the front passenger The SRS airbags and seat belt pre-ten-
seat is not occupied. sioners are designed to help reduce the
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does risk of serious injury or death in certain
not come on when the ignition switch is collisions. If either of the above conditions
turned to the “ON” position or the oper- occurs, immediately have your vehicle
ation mode is put in ON. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi
The system checks itself every time the igni- Motors dealer.
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator does
not come on when a child is in a child
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
restraint system on the front passenger’s the operation mode is put in ON. The SRS
seat. warning light will come on for several sec-
• The passenger’s airbag off indicator onds and then go out. This is normal and
comes on and goes out repeatedly. means the system is working properly.
If there is a problem involving one or more of
the SRS components, the warning light will
NOTE
 On vehicles equipped with the SOS emer-
gency assist, if the SOS emergency assist
system operates, the SRS warning light illu-
minates.
Driver 4
Driver’s and passenger’s front
Front passenger
airbag system
N00407901357
The driver’s airbag is located under the pad-

ded cover in the middle of the steering wheel.
The front passenger’s airbag is contained in Driver’s knee airbag system
N00404501046
the instrument panel above the glove com-
partment. The driver’s airbag and the front The driver’s knee airbag is located under the
passenger’s airbag are designed to deploy at steering wheel. The driver’s knee airbag is
the same time. However, the front passen- designed to deploy at the same time as the
ger’s airbag does not deploy when the front driver’s front airbag.
passenger seat is not occupied or when the
system senses that a child is in the child
restraint system.

Deployment of front airbags

N00408001661
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when …
4 Head-on collision with a solid wall at speeds of approx. 15 mph (25 km/h) Moderate to severe frontal impact within the shaded area
or higher between the arrows
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag another stationary vehicle, a pole or a guard
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a will deploy if the impact to the vehicle’s main rail).
moderate to severe frontal impact. A typical structure is above a specific threshold level. The initial stage of airbag inflation is the
condition is shown in the illustration to the The threshold level is approximately 15 mph most forceful, and can cause serious injury or
left. (25 km/h) for a frontal collision straight into a death if you are too close to the deploying air-
solid flat wall that does not bend or deform. If bag. Accordingly, it is important that you
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are the impact to the vehicle’s main structure is always wear the available seat belt.
designed to deploy only in certain moderate below this threshold level, the front airbags
to severe frontal collisions within the shaded and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy. This
area between the arrows in the illustration to threshold level may also be higher if the vehi-
the right. cle hits something that absorbs the impact,
either by bending or moving (for example,


they cannot provide protection to the occu-
The front airbags and driver’s Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
pants.
knee airbag MAY NOT DEPLOY narrow object
Some typical situations are shown in the
when … illustration.
In certain types of front collisions, the front Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-
airbags and driver’s knee airbag may not bag do not protect the occupants in all types 4
deploy, even if the deformation of the body of collisions, be sure to always wear your seat
Collision where the vehicle slides under the
seems to be large, because the vehicle’s body belts properly.
rear body of a truck
structure is designed to absorb the impact and
deform in order to help protect the occupants. Rear end collision to your vehicle
Some typical situations where the front air-
bags and driver’s knee airbag may not deploy
are shown in the illustrations.
Oblique frontal impact
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air- Side collision to your vehicle
bag do not protect the occupant in all types of
frontal collisions, be sure to always wear your
seat belts properly.
The front airbags and driver’s Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof
knee airbag ARE NOT
DESIGNED TO DEPLOY when
…
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag are

not designed to deploy in situations where

The front airbags and driver’s Collision with an elevated median/island or WARNING
knee airbag MAY DEPLOY when curb  Do not set anything on, or attach anything
… to, the instrument panel above the glove
compartment. Such items could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.
The front airbags and driver’s knee airbag
4 may deploy if the underside of the vehicle
suffers a moderate to severe impact (under- Vehicle travels over a deep hole/pothole
carriage impact). Some typical situations are
shown in the illustration.
Since the front airbags and driver’s knee air-

bag may deploy in certain types of unex-
pected impacts, as shown in the illustrations, Vehicle drives down a steep slope and hits the
and these unexpected impacts can move you  Do not attach accessories to, or put them
ground
in front of, the windshield. They could
out of position, it is important to always wear
restrict the airbag inflation, or strike and
your seat belts properly. When worn properly, injure an occupant, when the airbag
seat belts can help maintain your distance inflates.
from the airbags when they begin to inflate.  Do not attach additional keys or accesso-
The initial stage of airbag inflation is the ries (hard, pointed or heavy objects) to the
most forceful and can cause serious injury or ignition key. Such objects could prevent
death if you are close to the deploying airbag. the driver’s knee airbag from inflation
normally or could be propelled to cause
serious injury if the airbag inflates.
WARNING
 Do not attach anything to the steering
wheel’s padded cover, such as trim mate-
rial, badges, etc. These could strike and
injure an occupant if the airbag inflates.

WARNING Side airbag system Curtain airbag system

 Do not attach accessories to the lower por- N00408101473 N00419201331
tion of the driver’s side instrument panel. The side airbags (A) are contained in the The curtain airbags are contained in the front
Such objects could prevent the driver’s driver and front passenger seatbacks. pillar, the rear pillar and the side sections of
knee airbag from inflating normally or The side airbag is designed to inflate only on the roof.
could be propelled to cause serious injury
if the airbag inflates.
the side of the vehicle that is impacted, even The curtain airbag is designed to inflate only 4
with no passenger in the front seat. on the side of the vehicle that is impacted,
even with no passenger in the seat.
Also, when the airbag control unit detects
rollover of the vehicle, the curtain airbags
will deploy.
 Do not attempt to remove, install, disas-

semble or repair the SRS airbags.
 Do not place objects, such as packages or
pets, between the airbags and the driver
or the front passenger. Such objects can There is a symbol on the seatbacks that are
adversely affect airbag performance, or equipped with side airbags.
cause serious injury or death when the
airbag deploys.
 Immediately after airbag inflation, some
parts of the airbag system will be hot. Do
not touch them. You could otherwise be
burned.
 The airbag system is designed to work
only once. After the airbags deploy, they
will not work again. They must promptly
be replaced and the entire airbag system
must be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

BK0252700US.book 42 ページ２０１７年１１月１７日　金曜日　午後９時２７分

 The side airbags and curtain airbags can  Do not attach a microphone (A) or any  Do not install seat covers or re-cover seats
cause serious injury or death to anyone other object around the part where the that have side airbags. Covers can inter-
too close to the airbag when it deploys. To curtain airbag (B) deploys, such as on the fere with proper side airbag deployment
reduce the risk of injury from a deploying windshield, side door glass or front and and adversely affect side airbag perfor-
side airbag or curtain airbag, driver and rear pillars and roof side rail. When the mance.
4 front passenger must be properly curtain airbag inflates, the microphone or  Never install a rear-facing child restraint
restrained and seated well back, upright, other object may be hurled with great system in the front passenger seat. Rear-
and in the middle of the seat. Do not lean force or the curtain airbag may not inflate facing child restraint systems MUST
against the door. correctly, resulting in death or serious ONLY be used in the rear seat.
injury.  Front-facing child restraint systems
should also be used ONLY in the rear seat.
If a front-facing child restraint system
must be used in the front passenger seat,
move the seat as far back as possible, and
make sure that the child stays in the child
restraint system, properly restrained and
away from the door.
 Do not allow a child to lean against or sit
 In order to reduce the risk of injury from close to the passenger door, even if the
a deploying side airbag, do not allow any  Do not put a hanger or any heavy or child is seated in a child restraint system.
rear seat passengers to hold onto the back pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur- The child’s head should also not lean
of either front seat. Special care should be tain airbag was activated, any such item against or be close to the section of the
taken with children. could be propelled away with great force seatback where the side airbag and cur-
 Do not place any objects around the area and could prevent the curtain airbag from tain airbag are located. It is dangerous if
where the side airbags deploy. Such inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly the side airbag or curtain airbag deploys.
objects can interfere with proper side air- on the coat hook (without using a hanger). Failure to follow all of these instructions
bag deployment, and cause injury during Make sure there are no heavy or sharp could lead to serious injury or death to the
deployment of the side airbag. objects in the pockets of clothes that you child.
 Do not place stickers, labels or additional hang on the coat hook.
trim on the back of either front seat. They
can interfere with proper side airbag
deployment.


The seat belts in your vehicle are your pri-
WARNING Deployment of side airbag and mary means of protection in an accident. The
 Work done on or in the vicinity of the side curtain airbag SRS side airbags and curtain airbags are
airbag or curtain airbag components N00408201618 designed to provide additional protection.
should be done only by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. There is a risk Therefore, for your safety and the safety of all
of a serious injury or death. Improper The side airbag and curtain airbag occupants, be sure to always wear your seat
work methods can cause accidental side ARE DESIGNED TO DEPLOY belts properly. 4
airbag or curtain airbag deployment, or when...
render a side airbag or curtain airbag The side airbag and curtain airbag
inoperable. Either of these situations The side airbag and curtain airbag are
could result in serious injury or death. MAY NOT DEPLOY when...
designed to deploy when the vehicle suffers a
moderate to severe side impact to the middle
of the passenger compartment. In certain types of side collisions, the side air-
Also when the vehicle detects rollover of the bag and curtain airbag may not deploy, even
vehicle, the curtain airbags will deploy. if the deformation of the body seems to be
Typical situations are shown in the illustra- large, because the vehicle’s body structure is
tion. designed to absorb the impact and to deform
in order to help protect the occupants. There
are also cases where the side airbag and cur-
Moderate to severe impact to the middle of the tain airbag may not deploy at the same time,
vehicle body’s side structure depending on the location of the impact.
Some typical situations where the side air-
bags and curtain airbags may not deploy are
shown in the illustrations.
When the vehicle detects rollover of the vehicle

(Curtain airbag only)


Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do Since the side airbags and curtain airbags do
Oblique side impact
not protect the occupant in all types of side not protect the occupant in all types of colli-
collisions, be sure to always wear the seat sions, be sure to always wear your seat belts
belts properly. properly.
4 Side impact in an area away from the passenger

compartment
Head-on collision
Vehicle rolls onto its side or roof (Side airbag

only)
Motorcycle or other similar small vehicle Rear end collision to your vehicle
collision with the side of vehicle
The side airbag and curtain airbag

ARE NOT DESIGNED TO Pitch end over end
DEPLOY when...
Collision with a utility pole, tree or other
narrow object
The side airbag and curtain airbag are not
designed to deploy in situations where they
cannot provide protection to the occupants.
Some typical situations are shown in the
illustration.

SRS servicing WARNING NOTE

N00408500669  Do not modify your front seats, center pil- • Steering wheel
lar or center console. Such modifications • Instrument panel
WARNING can adversely affect SRS performance and
 Any maintenance performed on or near may lead to injury.
Also, if you discover any tear or open [For vehicles sold in U.S.A.]
the components of the SRS should be per-
formed only by an authorized Mitsubishi seam in the seat fabric near the side air- To contact Mitsubishi Motors North 4
Motors dealer. Do not permit anyone else bag, have the seat inspected by an autho- America, Inc.
to do any service, inspection, maintenance rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. call 1-888-648-7820 or write to:
or repair on any SRS components or wir-  If you have found any scratch, crack or Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc.
ing. Similarly, no part of the SRS should damage to the portion of the front and Customer Relations Department
ever be handled, removed or disposed by rear pillars and roof side rail, you should
P.O. Box 6400
anyone except an authorized Mitsubishi have the SRS inspected by an authorized
Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Improper work methods on the SRS com-
ponents or wiring could result in an acci- [For vehicles sold in Canada]
dental airbag deployment or could make NOTE To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
the SRS inoperable. Either of these situa-  When you transfer ownership of the vehicle Canada, Inc.
tions could result in serious injury or to another person, we urge you to alert the call 1-888-576-4878 or write to:
death. new owner that it is equipped with the SRS Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Canada, Inc.
 Do not modify your steering wheel or any and refer that owner to the applicable sec- Customer Relations Department
other SRS component or related vehicle tions in this owner’s manual. P.O. Box 41009
part. For example, replacement of the  If you decide to junk or scrap your vehicle, 4141 Dixie Road
steering wheel, or modifications to the we urge you to first take it to an authorized Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
front bumper or body structure can Mitsubishi Motors dealer so that the SRS can
adversely affect SRS performance and be made safe for disposal.
may lead to injury.
 If any of the following parts needs to be
 If your vehicle has received any damage, modified for use by a handicapped person,
you should have the SRS inspected by an the advanced airbag system will be greatly
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to affected. Please consult an authorized
make sure it is in proper working order. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• Driver’s seat
• Front passenger seat
• Front seat belt

[For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico] [For vehicles sold in American Samoa]
Warning label
N00408601393
To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of To contact Pacific Marketing Inc.
Occupant restraint warning labels for the SRS
Caribbean, Inc. call 684 (699) 9140 or write to:
are located in the vehicle as shown in the
call 1-787-251-8715 or write to: Pacific Marketing, Inc.
illustration.
Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Caribbean, P.O. Box 698
4 Inc. PAGO PAGO,
Customer Service Department AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
P.O. Box 192216
SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
[For vehicles sold in Guam]

To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.
call (671) 649-3673 or write to:
Triple J Enterprises, Inc.
P.O. Box 6066
TAMUNING
GUAM 96931
[For vehicles sold in Saipan]

To contact Triple J Motors
call (670) 234-7133 or write to:
Triple J Motors
P.O. Box 500487
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487
* - Located in the passenger’s side as well.

Features and controls
Keys .................................................................................................5-3 Anti-lock braking system ..............................................................5-78

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system) ........................5-4 Electric power steering system (EPS) ...........................................5-80
Keyless entry system (if so equipped) ..............................................5-6 Active stability control (ASC) .......................................................5-81 5
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) Cruise control ................................................................................5-84
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................5-12 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)..............5-88
Door locks ......................................................................................5-32 Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped) ....5-100
Power door locks ...........................................................................5-34 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist)
Child safety locks for rear door .....................................................5-35 (if so equipped) ........................................................................5-108
Liftgate ...........................................................................................5-36 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) ....................... 5-112
Theft-alarm system ........................................................................5-38 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped) ....................... 5-115
Power window control ...................................................................5-40 Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) ................................... 5-118
Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped).....................................5-43 Parking sensors (Front/Rear) (if so equipped)..............................5-123
Parking brake .................................................................................5-46 Rear-view camera ........................................................................5-127
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment ..................................5-50 Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)........................................5-129
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................................5-51 Instrument cluster ........................................................................5-139
Outside rearview mirrors ...............................................................5-53 Multi-information display ...........................................................5-140
Ignition switch ...............................................................................5-57 Indicator light, warning light, and information
Starting the engine .........................................................................5-58 screen display list .....................................................................5-160
Turbocharger operation ..................................................................5-60 Indicators .....................................................................................5-180
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...................................5-60 Warning lights ..............................................................................5-181
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped) .....................5-67 Information screen display .........................................................5-183
4-wheel drive operation .................................................................5-70 Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)....................................5-184
Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation ........5-72 Combination headlights and dimmer switch ...............................5-188
Cautions on the handling of 4-wheel drive vehicles ......................5-72 Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)...................................5-196
Service brake .................................................................................5-73 Turn signal lever ..........................................................................5-196
Brake auto hold (if so equipped) ....................................................5-74 Hazard warning flasher switch ....................................................5-197
Hill start assist ................................................................................5-77 ECO mode switch ........................................................................5-198
Brake assist system ........................................................................5-78 Front fog light switch ..................................................................5-198
Features and controls
Wiper and washer switch ............................................................ 5-198

Electric rear window defogger switch ......................................... 5-204
5 Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)............................. 5-205
Horn switch ................................................................................. 5-206
USB input terminal ...................................................................... 5-206
Sun visors .................................................................................... 5-207
12 V power outlets ...................................................................... 5-208
HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped) ............... 5-209
Interior lights ............................................................................... 5-214
Storage spaces ............................................................................. 5-217
Drink holders ............................................................................... 5-219
Bottle holders .............................................................................. 5-220
Cargo area cover (if so equipped) ............................................... 5-220
Assist grips .................................................................................. 5-222
Coat hooks ................................................................................... 5-222
Luggage hooks ............................................................................ 5-223
Convenient hook ......................................................................... 5-223
Luggage floor board ................................................................... 5-223
Keys
Keys Type 2 NOTE

N00508801729 • Do not take the key apart.
Two F.A.S.T.-keys and two emergency keys • Do not excessively bend the key or subject
are provided. it to strong impacts.
Type 1 Keep one F.A.S.T.-key and one emergency • Keep the key dry.
key in a safe place together as a set of spare • Keep away from magnetic objects such as
Two keys are provided. The keys fit all locks.
keys. key rings.
Keep one in a safe place as a spare key.
• Keep away from devices that produce mag- 5
netism, such as audio systems, computers
and televisions.
• Keep away from devices that emit strong
electromagnetic waves, such as cellular
phones, wireless devices and high fre-
quency equipment (including medical
devices).
• Do not clean with ultrasonic cleaners.
• Do not leave the key where it may be
exposed to high temperature or high humid-
ity.
1- F.A.S.T.-key  If you lose your key, to prevent the theft of
1- Key for the electronic immobilizer and
(with electronic immobilizer and key- the vehicle immediately contact an autho-
keyless entry system
less entry system function) rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
2- Key number plate If you notify an authorized Mitsubishi
2- Emergency key
3- Key number plate Motors dealer of the key number, they can
make a new key. The key number is stamped
on the key number plate. Keep the key num-
ber plate in a safe place separate from the
NOTE key itself.
 The key is a precision electronic device with
a built-in signal transmitter. Please observe
the following in order to prevent damage.
• Do not leave where it may be exposed to
heat caused by direct sunlight, such as on
top of the dashboard.
Features and controls 5-3

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

(F.A.S.T.-key): Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
NOTE theft starting system)” on page 5-17.
NOTE
 No keys other than those registered in • When the key grip contacts metal of
advance can be used to start the engine. [Except for vehicles equipped with the another key
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft F.A.S.T.-key]
starting system)” on page 5-4.
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): “Electronic
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
5 immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)” on
page 5-17. bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
 When the theft-alarm is in the system opera- attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
tional status, the alarm operates if a door or achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
liftgate is opened after using the key, the a key “registered” to the immobilizer system.
door lock knob or the power door lock All of the keys provided with your new vehi- • When the key contacts or is close to other
switch to unlock the vehicle. cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s immobilizer keys (including keys of other
 The system does not enter the preparation electronics. vehicles)
state if the keyless entry system or the
F.A.S.T.-key was not used to lock the vehi-
cle. NOTE
 In the following cases, the vehicle may not
be able to recognize the registered ID code
Electronic immobilizer from the key. This means the engine will not
(Anti-theft starting system) start even when the key is turned to the
“START” position.
N00509101905
• When the key contacts a key ring or other
metallic or magnetic object In cases like the above, move the offending
CAUTION object(s) away from the key and turn the key
 Do not make any alterations or additions to back to the “ACC” or “OFF” position. Then
the immobilizer system. Alterations or addi- try to start the engine again. If the engine
tions could cause failure of the immobilizer. does not start, contact an authorized
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]  The key may not operate properly when it is
For information on operations for vehicles near an object or facility that emits strong
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to electromagnetic waves.
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
5-4 Features and controls

Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting system)

your vehicle at your Mitsubishi Motors
NOTE Additional keys dealer) by doing the following:
 Electronic immobilizer is not compatible
with commercially available remote starting To add a key, you must already have two reg- 1. Insert the first valid key into the ignition
systems. Use of commercially available switch and turn the key to the “ON” posi-
istered keys. You need to register the ID code
remote starting systems may result in vehicle
to the vehicle. tion for 5 seconds.
starting problems and a loss of security pro-
tection. Registering the ID code can be done by your- 2. Turn the key to the “OFF” position and
self (except for vehicles sold in Canada), or remove the first key.
 A system failure is suspected when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “START” posi- by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. 3. Within 30 seconds of removing the first 5
tion, and the engine does not start. In such a For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- key, insert the second valid key into the
case, contact an authorized Mitsubishi low the “Customer key programming” proce- ignition and turn it to the “ON” position.
Motors dealer. dure below. Approximately 10 seconds later, the
If you choose to have your authorized immobilizer display will start to blink.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID 4. When the immobilizer display starts
Replacement keys blinking, turn the second valid key to the
code, take your vehicle and all remaining
keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors “OFF” position and remove it. Within
Only keys that have been programmed to the dealer. 30 seconds after doing so, insert a blank
vehicle’s electronics can be used to start the immobilizer key into the ignition switch
vehicle. and turn it to the “ON” position. Perform
NOTE
this operation no more than 30 seconds
If you lose the key, you can order a key from  You are provided with two keys, but you
may register up to eight keys. after the immobilizer display starts blink-
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
ing. When registration of the ID code is
referring to the key number.
complete, the immobilizer display will
To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the
come on for 30 seconds then go off. If an
vehicle keys must be changed. Customer key programming error occurs, the blinking immobilizer dis-
Take your vehicle and all remaining keys to (Except for vehicles sold in play will go off during the procedure.
your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
have your ID code changed.
Canada)
N00562201208
You can program new keys to the system if

you have two valid (already registered) keys
and blank immobilizer key (specially cut for

Keyless entry system (if so equipped)

5. If you wish to register another key, per-
form the process again from step 1.
General information Keyless entry system (if so
N00562301094
equipped)
Your electronic immobilizer operates on a
NOTE radio frequency subject to Federal Communi-
N00509002060
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis- Press the key buttons to lock or unlock the
cations Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehi-
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis- doors and the liftgate.
cles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada
play screen may prevent you from seeing the It can also help you signal for attention by
Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada). This
5 immobilizer display.
device complies with part 15 of FCC Rules
setting off the panic alarm.
 It is not possible to register a key if:
and Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS
• the immobilizer display goes off during the
procedure standard(s).
• the immobilizer display does not come on Operation is subject to the following two con-
within 30 seconds after step 4. ditions.
 The procedure will be terminated automati-
cally if:
 This device may not cause harmful inter-
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
ference.
from the moment when the first key is  This device must accept any interference
turned to the “OFF” position to the moment received, including interference that may
when the second key is turned to the “ON” cause undesired operation.
position
• a period of 30 seconds or longer elapses
from the moment when the second key is
CAUTION 1- LOCK ( ) button
turned to the “OFF” position to the moment  Changes or modifications not expressly 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
when the blank immobilizer key is turned approved by the manufacturer for compli- 3- PANIC button
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
to the “ON” position 4- Indicator light
ate the equipment.
 To use the new keys, it is necessary to regis-
ter the key with both the electronic immobi-
lizer and keyless entry system.
Also refer to “Keyless entry system: Cus-
tomer key programming” on page 5-9.


The front side-marker and parking lights will
NOTE also turn on for approximately 30 seconds.
NOTE
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-  Functions can be modified as stated below.
Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-195.
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto- Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
matically retract or extend when the doors Motors dealer.
and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using NOTE On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
the key buttons of the keyless entry system.  The door and liftgate unlock function can be Link Display Audio, it is possible to change
Refer to “Outside rearview mirrors” on page set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when the setting by means of screen operations.
5-53. the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once.
Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details.
5
function” on page 5-8. • Automatically extend when the driver’s
To lock door is closed and the ignition switch is
turned to the “ON” or “ACC” position.
In addition, automatically retract when the
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the Operation of the outside rear- ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
doors and the liftgate. view mirrors (Vehicles tion, and the driver’s door is then opened.
The turn signal lights will also blink once. equipped with the mirror • Automatically extend when the vehicle
speed reaches 19 mph (30 km/h).
retractor switch) • Deactivate the automatic extension func-
NOTE tion.
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice the
horn will sound once. To retract The outside rearview mirrors can be
retracted or extended by the following
operations, even if changing to the any of
Locking the doors and liftgate using the
To unlock LOCK button, the outside rearview mirrors
above.
After pressing the LOCK button to lock the
are retracted automatically. doors and liftgate, if the LOCK button is
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the pressed again twice in a row within approx-
driver’s door only. imately 30 seconds, the outside rearview
Within approximately 2 seconds, press the
To extend
mirrors will retract.
UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all After pressing the UNLOCK button to
the doors and liftgate. Unlocking the doors and liftgate using the unlock the doors and liftgate, if the
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. UNLOCK button, the outside rearview mir- UNLOCK button is pressed again twice in a
The turn signal lights will also blink twice. rors are extended automatically. row within approximately 30 seconds, the
outside rearview mirrors will extend again.


3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- Number of
Answerback function onds and press the UNLOCK button (2) To lock To unlock
chimes
during this time.
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and One chime One flash Two flashes
entry system answerback function can be LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- Two chimes One flash No flash
changed as required. This is done with the ing the UNLOCK button in step 3. Three chimes No flash Two flashes
key removed from the ignition switch.
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
NOTE
5 NOTE  On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone Five chimes No flash One flash
 The answerback function will not operate if Link Display Audio, the functions can be Six chimes Two flashes No flash
any of the doors are open. adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to
the separate owner’s manual. Seven
No flash No flash
chimes
Horn deactivation/reactivation
Turn signal lights deactiva-
NOTE
The answerback function can be set in the tion/reactivation  On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
following three ways. Link Display Audio, the functions can be
Each time the answerback function is set, a The answerback function can be turned ON adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to
chime will sound to tell you the condition of or OFF separately. the separate owner’s manual.
the answerback function.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch.
One chime: The horn will not sound. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- Setting of door and liftgate
Two chimes: The horn will sound. bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the “OFF” position.
unlock function
Four chimes: The horn will sound if the
N00543601186
LOCK button is pressed twice within 1 sec- 3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to
ond. 10 seconds and press the LOCK button The door and liftgate unlock function can be
(1) during this time. set to the following two conditions.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and Each time the door and liftgate unlock func-
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- LOCK buttons within 5 seconds of press- tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
bination headlights and dimmer switch to ing the LOCK button in step 3. condition of the door and liftgate unlock
the “OFF” position. function.


Number of Using the panic alarm Additional keys
Condition
chimes N00543701086 N00543901075
When the UNLOCK button If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- To add a key, you must already have one reg-
One chime is pressed one time, all doors ened, you may activate the alarm to call atten- istered key.
and the liftgate unlock. tion as follows: Registering the ID code can be done by your-
When the UNLOCK button self or by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is pressed one time, only the 1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than dealer. For you to register the ID code your-
driver's door unlocks. Within 1 second. self, follow the “Customer key program- 5
approximately 2 seconds, 2. The headlights will blink on and off and ming” procedure below.
Two chimes the horn will sound intermittently for If you choose to have your authorized
press the UNLOCK button
one more time to unlock all approximately 3 minutes. Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID
the doors and the liftgate. 3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on code, take your vehicle and any remaining
[Factory setting] the key. keys to your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch. Replacement keys
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com- N00543801104 NOTE
bination headlights and dimmer switch to Only keys programmed with the vehicle’s  You are provided with two keys, but you
the “OFF” position. electronics can lock or unlock all doors and may register up to eight keys.
3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec- the liftgate.
onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
during this time. If you lose the key, you can order a key from Customer key programming
4. Release in sequence the LOCK and your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer by
referring to the key number.
(Except for vehicles sold in
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. To prevent vehicle theft, the ID code for the Canada)
key must be changed. N00544001217
Take your vehicle and all keys to your autho- You can program new keys to the system if
NOTE rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have your you have one valid (already registered) key
 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
ID code changed. by doing the following:
Link Display Audio, the functions can be
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to 1. Have available all (current and new) keys
the separate owner’s manual.
you wish to register.


2. With a valid (already registered) key,
press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to
NOTE NOTE
 For verification purposes, try to lock and  If you wish to obtain an additional key,
10 seconds. Then press and hold the
unlock the doors after the registration is please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
LOCK button (1).
completed. Motors dealer. A maximum of eight keys can
3. Within 10 seconds of pressing the LOCK be programmed for your vehicle.
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a
button, release the LOCK and UNLOCK button is pressed.  To use the new keys, it is necessary to regis-
buttons in sequence.  The keyless entry system does not work if ter the key with both the electronic immobi-
At this time, ID codes for all keys except
5 for the key used in steps 2 and 3 are
the key is in the ignition switch. lizer and keyless entry system.
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
 The key can be used from approximately
erased and the answerback function (door 40 feet (12 m) away. However, this distance theft starting system): Customer key pro-
is locked and unlocked) informs you that may change if your vehicle is near a TV gramming” on page 5-5.
the registration mode has been activated. transmitting tower, a power station, or a
4. Within 60 seconds after step 3, complete radio station.
General information
the following ID code registration opera-  If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
N00546101124
tion using the next key you wish to regis- no doors or the liftgate are opened within
ter within 4 seconds. approximately 30 seconds, the doors and the Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
i) Press both the LOCK and UNLOCK liftgate will automatically re-lock. frequency subject to Federal Communica-
buttons for 2 seconds.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
Link Display Audio, the functions can be sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
ii) Release both the LOCK and UNLOCK adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to
buttons for 1 second. (For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
the separate owner’s manual. complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and
iii) Press the UNLOCK button. The  If the following conditions are observed after
answerback function informs you that the Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS stan-
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but-
ID code registration of the key is com- dard(s).
ton on the key, the battery in the key may
pleted. need to be replaced.
Operation is subject to the following two con-
5. To register the ID codes of additional • The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
ditions.
keys, repeat step 4 within 60 seconds after or unlocked.
step 4. • The panic alarm cannot be operated.
ference.
6. If no ID code of a key is registered within • The indicator light (4) is dim or does not
60 seconds after step 4, the registration come on.
mode is canceled and the normal mode  If you lose your key, please contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a replace- cause undesired operation.
returns.
ment.


3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
CAUTION insert the cloth-cov-ered tip of a flat blade
NOTE
 Changes or modifications not expressly  The Federal Communications Commission
screwdriver into the notch in the key case
approved by the manufacturer for compli- (FCC) ID number, the Industry Canada (IC)
and use it to open the case.
ance could void the user’s authority to oper- number and the model number (radio certifi-
ate the equipment. cation) are indicated in the illustrated posi-
tion.
Procedure for replacing the key 5

battery
N00544101221
1. Before replacing the battery, remove static

electricity from your body by touching a
metal grounded object.
2. Remove the screw (A) from the key.
4. Remove the old battery.
NOTE 5. Install a new battery with the + side (B)
 Be sure to perform the procedure with the up.
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you
open the key case, the buttons may come out. + side
- side
Coin type
battery
CR1620
6. Close the key case firmly.

7. Attach the screw (A) removed in step 2.
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that
it works.
Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key) (if so equipped)
NOTE The F.A.S.T.-key must be carried by the

 You may purchase a replacement battery at
driver. The F.A.S.T.-key is required for
an electric appliance store. vehicle operations such as locking and
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can unlocking the doors and the liftgate,
replace the battery for you if you prefer. starting the engine and changing the
operation mode. When leaving the vehi-
cle, make sure you are carrying the
5 CAUTION F.A.S.T.-key and then lock the vehicle.
 When the key case is opened, be careful to
keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch
the internal components. WARNING
 Individuals who use implantable pace-
makers or implantable cardiovascular-
defibrillators should keep away from the
Free-hand Advanced Secu- external and internal transmitters. The A- External transmitter
rity Transmitter (F.A.S.T.- electromagnetic waves used in the
B- Internal transmitter
F.A.S.T.-key may affect the operation of
key) (if so equipped) implantable pacemakers and implantable
N00503101176 cardiovascular-defibrillators.
WARNING
The Free-hand Advanced Security Transmit-  Individuals using other electro-medical
ter (F.A.S.T.-key) enables the doors and the apparatus besides implantable pacemak-
liftgate to be locked and unlocked, the engine ers and implantable cardiovascular-defi-
to be started and the operation mode to be brillators should check with the
changed simply by carrying it. manufacturer of the apparatus to confirm
The F.A.S.T.-key can also be used as the key the effect of the electromagnetic waves
used by the F.A.S.T.-key. The electromag-
of the keyless entry system.
netic waves may affect the operations of
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security the electro-medical apparatus.
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry
system” on page 5-28.


The operations possible with the F.A.S.T.-
key can be modified as stated below.
NOTE
Use the emergency key in such circum-
(Keyless entry operations are possible.)
stances.
For details, contact an authorized
Refer to “To operate without using the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-key” on page 5-26.
• Enabling only the locking and unlocking  The F.A.S.T.-key is constantly performing
of the doors and the liftgate reception operations in its communication
• Enabling only the starting of the engine
• Deactivating the F.A.S.T.-key
with the vehicle. This means that the battery
is always running down, regardless of how
5
often the F.A.S.T.-key is used. The battery
life is approximately 1 to 2 years, depending
NOTE on the usage conditions.
 The F.A.S.T.-key uses weak electromagnetic  Since the F.A.S.T.-key is constantly perform- NOTE
waves. ing reception operations, the reception of  When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key has run
In cases such as the following, operation strong electromagnetic waves can accelerate down or there are strong electromagnetic
may be improper or unstable. the running down of the battery. Do not place waves or noise in the area, the operating
• The vehicle is near a facility that emits near to electrical appliances such as televi- range could decrease or operations could
strong electromagnetic waves, such as a TV sions or computers. become unstable.
transmitting tower, a power station, a radio
station or an airport
• The key is carried together with other com- Operating range of the
Operating range for locking and
munication devices such as cellular phones F.A.S.T.-key
or radios, or electrical appliances such as N00503201236
unlocking the doors and the lift-
computers
When a person enters the operating range of
gate
• The F.A.S.T.-key touches or is covered by a
metal object the F.A.S.T.-key while carrying the F.A.S.T.-
key and presses the driver’s or front passen- The operating range is within approximately
• A keyless entry system is being used
ger’s door lock/unlock switch, the liftgate 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s and front pas-
nearby
lock switch or the liftgate open switch, verifi- senger’s door lock/unlock switches, the lift-
• The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is run down
cation of the ID code is performed. gate lock switch and the liftgate open switch.
• The vehicle is in a location with strong
electromagnetic waves or noise The doors and the liftgate can be locked and
unlocked and the engine can be started only
when the ID codes of the vehicle and
F.A.S.T.-key match.

Operating range for starting the NOTE

engine and changing the opera-  Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is inside the vehicle,
tion mode it may not be possible to start the engine and
N00503301107
change the operation mode if the key is too
close to a door or door window.
The operating range is the interior of the
vehicle.
To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
5 key
N00503401342
*: Front of the vehicle NOTE

: Operating range  On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
tor switch, the outside rearview mirrors auto-
matically retract or extend when all the doors
NOTE and liftgate are locked or unlocked using the
 Only the doors and the liftgate that detect the F.A.S.T.-key function.
F.A.S.T.-key can be locked and unlocked. Refer to “Outside rearview mirrors” on page
 The system may not operate if the F.A.S.T.- 5-53.
key is too close to the windshield, door win- *: Front of the vehicle
dows or liftgate. : Operating range
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within approxi- To lock
mately 2.3 feet (70 cm) of the driver’s or
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch, NOTE While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, press the
the liftgate lock switch or the liftgate open
 Even if the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operat- driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock
switch, the system may not operate if the key
ing range, it may not be possible to start the switch (A), or the liftgate lock switch (B)
is close to the ground or in a high position.
engine and change the operation mode if the within the operating range to lock all the
 If the F.A.S.T.-key is within the operating key is in a storage space such as the glove
range, even a person not carrying the doors and the liftgate.
compartment, on top of the instrument panel,
F.A.S.T.-key can lock and unlock the doors The turn signal lights will blink once and the
or in the door pocket or luggage compart-
or the liftgate by pressing the driver’s or ment.
buzzer will sound once.
front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch,
the liftgate lock switch or the liftgate open Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door
switch. locks”, and “Liftgate” on pages 5-32, 5-34


and 5-36 respectively.
NOTE To unlock
 Be sure to have the F.A.S.T.-key with you
Driver’s and front passenger’s before locking the vehicle. Even if the While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key within the
door lock/unlock switches F.A.S.T.-key is left in the vehicle in the glove operating range, you can unlock the doors
compartment or other small storage compart- and the liftgate by using the F.A.S.T.-key
ment, the vehicle may be locked depending
operation.
on the radio waves and other conditions in
The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds.
the surrounding environment, trapping the
key inside the vehicle. The turn signal lights will blink twice and the 5
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- buzzer will sound twice.
key does not operate.
Also refer to “Door locks”, “Power door
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger
compartment locks” and “Liftgate” on pages 5-32, 5-34 and
• A door or the liftgate is open or ajar 5-36 respectively.
Liftgate switches • The operation mode is not in OFF.
Press the driver’s door lock/unlock switch
 The liftgate open switch (C) can be used to
(A) to unlock only the driver’s door.
confirm that the vehicle is locked properly.
Press the liftgate open switch within approx-
imately 3 seconds of locking. driver’s door lock/unlock switch one more
 If the liftgate open switch is pressed 3 sec- time to unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
onds or more after the vehicle is locked, the
doors and the liftgate are unlocked. Driver’s door lock/unlock
 The time within which locking confirmation switch
is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio, the function can be
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

NOTE Liftgate open switch NOTE

 Settings can be changed so that all doors and  The doors and the liftgate cannot be
the liftgate are unlocked automatically by unlocked by using the liftgate open switch
pressing the driver’s door lock/unlock switch for approximately 3 seconds after locking.
once.  The time within which locking confirmation
Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock is possible can be adjusted. See an autho-
function” on page 5-30. rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details.
5 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio, the function can be
Press the front passenger’s door lock/unlock
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to
switch (B) or the liftgate open switch (C) to
unlock all the doors and the liftgate.
 Functions settings can be modified as stated
NOTE below.
Front passenger’s door lock/unlock switch  If the doors and the liftgate are unlocked See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
using the driver’s or front passenger’s door for details.
lock/unlock switch when no doors or the lift- On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
gate are opened within approximately Link Display Audio, the functions can be
30 seconds, the doors and the liftgate will adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to
automatically re-lock. the separate owner’s manual.
 The amount of time after unlocking until the • Activating the operation confirmation func-
vehicle re-locks automatically can be tion (blinking of the turn signal lights) only
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi during locking, or only during unlocking.
Motors dealer for details. • Deactivating the operation confirmation
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone function (blinking of the turn signal lights)
Link Display Audio, the functions can be and buzzer.
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to • Modifying the number of blinks in the
the separate owner’s manual. operation confirmation function (blinking
 In cases such as the following, the F.A.S.T.- of the turn signal lights).
key does not operate. • Making the buzzer sound when the
• There is a F.A.S.T.-key in the passenger F.A.S.T.-key is removed from the passenger
compartment compartment when all the doors and the
• The operation mode is not in OFF. liftgate are closed.

Operation of the outside rear- NOTE Electronic immobilizer (Anti-

view mirrors (Vehicles  Functions can be modified as stated below. theft starting system)
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi
equipped with the mirror Motors dealer.
N00529601137
retractor switch) On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig-
N00585700069 Link Display Audio, it is possible to change nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle
the setting by means of screen operations. theft. The purpose of the system is to immo-
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is
To retract Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
details. attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
5
• Automatically extend when the driver’s achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
Locking the doors and liftgate using the door is closed and the operation mode is put a F.A.S.T.-key “registered” to the immobi-
driver’s or front passenger’s door lock/unlock in ON or ACC. lizer system.
switch or the liftgate lock switch or the In addition, automatically retract when the
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
LOCK button on the F.A.S.T.-key, the outside operation mode is put in OFF, and the
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
rearview mirrors are retracted automatically. driver’s door is then opened.
electronics.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security • Automatically extend when the vehicle
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry speed reaches 19 mph (30 km/h).
system” on page 5-28. • Deactivate the automatic extension func-
tion.
To extend The outside rearview mirrors can be

retracted or extended by the following
operations, even if changing to the any of
Unlocking the doors and liftgate using the above.
driver’s lock/unlock switch, front passenger’s After locking the doors and liftgate, if the
door lock/unlock switch or the liftgate open LOCK button is pressed again twice in a
switch or the UNLOCK button on the row within approximately 30 seconds, the
F.A.S.T.-key, the outside rearview mirrors are outside rearview mirrors will retract.
extended automatically. After unlocking the doors and liftgate, if
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security the UNLOCK button is pressed again twice
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Keyless entry in a row within approximately 30 seconds,
system” on page 5-28. the outside rearview mirrors will extend
again.

Engine switch NOTE Operation mode of the engine

N00513501131  When operating the engine switch, press the switch and its function
To prevent vehicle theft, no F.A.S.T.-keys switch all the way in. If the switch is not
other than those registered in advance can be fully pressed, the engine may not start or the
used to start the engine. (Electronic immobi- operation mode may not change. If the OFF
lizer function) engine switch is pressed correctly, there is no
need to hold the engine switch down. The indicator light on the engine switch turns
While carrying the F.A.S.T.-key, the engine off.
5 switch can be used to start the engine.  When the battery in the F.A.S.T.-key has
worn out, or the F.A.S.T.-key is out of the The operation mode cannot be put in OFF
vehicle, a warning display will appear. when the selector lever is in any position
other than the “P” (PARK) position.
Warning display (when the engine switch is
pressed one time)
ACC
Allows operation of electrical accessories.

The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
minates in orange.
Warning display (when the engine switch is ON

pressed two times or more)
All electrical accessories can be used.
CAUTION The indicator light on the engine switch illu-
 The indicator light (A) will flash orange
minates in green.
when there is a problem or malfunction in The indicator light goes off when the engine
F.A.S.T.-key. Never drive if the indicator is running.
light on the engine switch is flashing orange.
Immediately contact your authorized NOTE
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
 If the engine switch operation is not smooth
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code
and feels like it is sticking, do not operate the
which the F.A.S.T.-key sends must match the
switch.
one registered to the immobilizer computer.
Immediately contact an authorized
Refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft
starting system)” on page 5-17.

Changing the operation mode CAUTION ACC power auto-cutout function

N00568001077  When the battery is disconnected, the current N00568101078
If you press the engine switch without press- operation mode is memorized. After recon- After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed
ing the brake pedal while the vehicle is sta- necting the battery, the memorized mode is with the operation mode in ACC, the function
tionary, you can change the operation mode selected automatically. Before disconnect- automatically cuts out the power for the audio
ing the battery for repair or replacement,
in the order of OFF, ACC, ON, OFF. system and other electric devices that can be
make sure to put the operation mode in OFF.
operated with that mode.
Be careful if you are not sure which opera-
tion mode the vehicle is in when the battery When the engine switch is pressed while the 5
is run down. operation mode is in ACC, the power is sup-
 The operation mode cannot be changed from plied again to those devices.
OFF to ACC or ON if the F.A.S.T.-key is not
detected to be in the vehicle. Refer to “Oper- NOTE
ating range for starting the engine and
 It is possible to modify functions as follows:
changing the operation mode” on page 5-14.
• The time until the power cuts out can be
changed to approximately 60 minutes.
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can
NOTE be deactivated.
 If the operation mode cannot be changed to
For details, we recommend you to consult an
OFF, perform the following procedure.
CAUTION 1. Move the selector lever to the “P” On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
 When the engine is not running, put the oper- (PARK) position, and then change the Link Display Audio, screen operations can
ation mode in OFF. Leaving the operation operation mode to OFF. be used to make the adjustment.
mode in ON or ACC for a long time when 2. One of the other causes could be low bat- Refer to the separate owner’s manual for
the engine is not running may cause the battery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless details.
tery to be discharged, making it impossible entry system and the F.A.S.T.-key opera-
to start the engine. tion will also not operate. Contact an

Warning activation
N00503501242
With the F.A.S.T.-key, warnings are given through buzzers and displays on the information screen in the multi-information display in order to pre-
vent mistaken operations or vehicle theft.
When a warning operates, be sure to check the vehicle and the F.A.S.T.-key. A warning is also displayed if there is a problem in the F.A.S.T.-key.
Item Display Buzzer Solution Note

5 Detection of failure Inner buzzer sounds There is a problem in the —
once F.A.S.T.-key.
Fall of battery voltage Inner buzzer sounds The battery of the F.A.S.T.-key is The warning is not activated if the
once run down. battery is completely dead.


F.A.S.T.-key not Inner buzzer sounds When the engine switch is —
detected once pressed to change the operation
mode from OFF or when the
Engine switch is engine is started, the warning is
pressed one time activated, if any of the following
conditions has occurred.
 Carrying another F.A.S.T.-key 5
with a different code, or the
F.A.S.T.-key could be outside
the operating range.
 The battery of the F.A.S.T.-
key is dead.
 Communication is blocked by
Engine switch is
electric wave environment.
pressed two times or
more In such case, touch the F.A.S.T.-
key to the engine switch to
change the operation mode or
start the engine.
Refer to “If the F.A.S.T.-key is
not operating properly” on page
5-25.


F.A.S.T.-key take-out Inner buzzer sounds When the vehicle is parked with  The F.A.S.T.-key take-out moni-
monitoring system once the operation mode in any mode toring system does not function if
other than OFF, if you close the the F.A.S.T.-key is removed
Outer buzzer sounds door after opening any of the through a window without open-
intermittently doors and taking the F.A.S.T.-key ing a door.
out of the vehicle, a warning is This setting can be changed.
5 issued until the F.A.S.T.-key is Contact an authorized Mitsubishi
detected in the vehicle. Motors dealer for details.
 The warning may display even if

the F.A.S.T.-key is in the operat-
ing range for starting the engine
and changing the operation
mode. The surrounding environ-
ment or electromagnetic waves
may make it impossible to verify
the ID codes of the F.A.S.T.-key
and vehicle.
Key lock-in preven- Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode is in Make sure you have the F.A.S.T.-key
tion system once OFF, the F.A.S.T.-key is left in with you before locking the doors.
the passenger compartment, all Even if you leave the F.A.S.T.-key
Outer buzzer sounds the doors and the liftgate are inside the vehicle, it is possible that
approximately 3 sec- closed, and someone tries to lock the doors will lock depending on the
onds intermittently the vehicle by pressing the surrounding environment and wire-
driver’s or front passenger’s door less signal conditions.
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate
lock switch, a warning is issued
and you cannot lock the doors
and liftgate.


Door ajar prevention Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode is in —
system once OFF, and someone tries to lock
the vehicle by pressing the
Outer buzzer sounds driver’s or front passenger’s door
approximately 3 sec- lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate
onds intermittently lock switch while one of the
doors or the liftgate is not fully 5
closed, a warning is issued and
you cannot lock the doors and
liftgate.
Operation mode OFF Inner buzzer sounds When the operation mode is in —
reminder system once any mode other than OFF, all the
doors and the liftgate are closed,
Outer buzzer sounds and someone tries to lock the
approximately 3 sec- vehicle by pressing the driver’s or
onds intermittently front passenger’s door
lock/unlock switch, or the liftgate
lock switch, a warning is issued
and you cannot lock the doors
and liftgate.
 The starter motor will be turning for up to If the engine does not start, wait for a
Starting and stopping the approximately 15 seconds if the engine while and then attempt to start the engine
engine switch is released at once. Pressing the again. Trying repeatedly with the engine
N00514601416 engine switch again while the starter or starter motor still turning will damage
motor is still turning will stop the starter the starter mechanism.
Tips for starting motor.  If the engine will not start because the bat-
The starter motor will be turning for up to tery is weak or discharged, refer to
 The operation mode can be in any mode approximately 30 seconds while the “Jump-starting the engine” on page 8-2
to start the engine. engine switch is pressed. for instructions.


 A longer warm up period will only con- To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
sume extra fuel. between attempts to restart the engine.
NOTE
 Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
The engine is warmed up enough for driv-
1. Make sure all occupants are properly up. These will disappear as the engine warms
ing when the bar graph of engine coolant
seated with seat belts fastened. up.
temperature display starts to move. Refer
to “Engine coolant temperature display” 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
on page 5-147. 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down When the engine is hard to start
firmly with your right foot.
5 After several attempts, you may experience
WARNING NOTE that the engine still does not start.
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly  After the engine has not started for a while,
ventilated area any longer than is needed the brake pedal effort needed to start the 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
to move your vehicle out of the area. Car- engine may become greater. If this occurs, as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and depress the brake pedal more firmly than window defogger, are turned off.
extremely poisonous, could build up and usual. 2. While depressing the brake pedal, press
cause serious injury or death.
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P” there, then crank the engine. Release the
(PARK) position. accelerator pedal, immediately after the
CAUTION
engine starts.
 Do not push-start the vehicle.
 Do not run the engine at high rpms or drive
NOTE
at high speeds until the engine has had a  The engine can only be started when the
chance to warm up. selector lever is in the “P” (PARK) or “N”
(NEUTRAL) position.
For safety reasons, the engine should be
started when the selector lever is in the “P”
Starting the engine (PARK) position in which the driving wheels
lock.
Your vehicle is equipped with an electroni-
cally controlled fuel injection system. This 5. Press the engine switch.
system automatically controls fuel injection. 6. Confirm that all warning lights and warn-
There is usually no need to depress the accel- ing displays are functioning properly.
erator pedal when starting the engine.


3. If the engine still will not start, the engine The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
could be flooded with too much gasoline. able to start normally.
NOTE
 Do not stop the engine with the selector lever
While depressing the brake pedal, push Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
in any position other than the “P” (PARK)
the accelerator pedal all the way down operation.
position. If the engine is stopped with the
and hold it there, then press the engine selector lever in any position other than the
switch to crank the engine. If the engine Stopping the engine “P” (PARK) position, the operation mode
does not start after 5 to 6 seconds, push N00568201053 will go to ACC rather than OFF.
the engine switch to stop cranking the
engine, and release the accelerator pedal. WARNING
Put the operation mode in OFF after placing
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) posi-
5
Put the operation mode in OFF. Wait a  Do not operate the engine switch while tion.
few seconds, and then press the engine driving except in an emergency. If the 1. Stop the vehicle.
switch to crank the engine again while engine is stopped while driving, the brake
2. Fully engage the parking brake while
depressing the brake pedal, but do not servomechanism will cease to function and
depressing the brake pedal.
push the accelerator pedal. If the engine braking efficiency will deteriorate. Also,
the power steering system will not func- 3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
fails to start, repeat these procedures. If
tion and it will require greater manual (PARK) position, and then press the
the engine still will not start, contact your
effort to operate the steering. This could engine switch to stop the engine.
local Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
result in a serious accident.
facility of your choice for assistance.
If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operat-
Startability of the engine with an ambient
NOTE ing properly
temperature of -22 °F (-30 °C) or lower N00568301113
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F (-30  If you have to bring the engine to an emer-
gency stop while driving, press and hold the The following operation can be used to start
°C) or lower, it may not be possible to start
engine switch for 3 seconds or more, or press the engine or change the operation mode.
from a standstill even with the selector lever it quickly three times or more. The engine
in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” (REVERSE) will stop and the operation mode will go to 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly with your
position. ACC. right foot.
This phenomenon occurs because the trans- 2. While depressing the brake pedal, touch
axle has not warmed up sufficiently; it does the portion of the F.A.S.T.-key shown in
not indicate a problem. If this occurs, place the illustration to the engine switch.
the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
and let the engine idle for at least 10 minutes.

To operate without using the NOTE

F.A.S.T.-key  Only use the emergency key in an emer-
N00514800017
gency. When the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key
has run down, replace the battery as soon as
possible and use it as a F.A.S.T.-key again.
Emergency key  After using the emergency key, be sure to
N00515201204
reinsert it into the F.A.S.T.-key.
5 The emergency key is built into the F.A.S.T.-
key. Locking and unlocking the driver’s door
When the F.A.S.T.-key cannot be used, such
as when the battery of the F.A.S.T.-key or the Turn the emergency key toward the front of
3. If the F.A.S.T.-key is recognized, the indi- vehicle has run down, the emergency key can the vehicle to lock the door. After checking
cator light on the engine switch illumi- be used to lock and unlock the driver’s door. that the door is locked, turn the emergency
nates in green, and then the engine can be key back to the center and remove it.
started and the operation mode can be To use the emergency key (A), unlock the
changed within approximately 10 sec- lock knob (B) and remove it from the
onds. Refer to “Starting and stopping the F.A.S.T.-key (C).
engine” on page 5-23 and “Changing the
operation mode” on page 5-19.
NOTE
 If metal objects or other keys are near the
F.A.S.T.-key, the F.A.S.T.-key may not be
recognized.
 Instead of depressing the brake pedal, the
F.A.S.T.-key can also be recognized in the
1- Insert or remove the emergency key
same way within approximately 30 seconds
2- Lock
after pushing the engine switch.
3- Unlock
 To change the operation mode without start-
ing the engine, release the brake pedal after
the indicator light on the engine switch illu-
minates in green, and then push the engine
switch.


rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to have the ID
Electronic immobilizer (Anti- Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
codes reprogrammed.
theft starting system) ming (Except for vehicles sold in
N00529601140 Canada)
Additional F.A.S.T.-keys
The electronic immobilizer is designed to sig- N00561101066
N00561201256
nificantly reduce the possibility of vehicle You can program new F.A.S.T.-keys to the
To add a F.A.S.T.-key, you must already have
theft. The purpose of the system is to immo- system if you have two valid (already regis-
two registered F.A.S.T.-keys. You need to
bilize the vehicle if an invalid start is tered) F.A.S.T.-keys and a blank (not regis-
attempted. A valid start attempt can only be
register the ID code to the vehicle.
tered) F.A.S.T.-key.
5
Registering the ID code can be done by your
achieved (subject to certain conditions) using
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Or it For F.A.S.T.-key programming, follow the
a F.A.S.T.-key “registered” to the immobi-
can be done by yourself (except for vehicles procedures below.
lizer system.
sold in Canada).
All of the keys provided with your new vehi-
For you to register the ID code yourself, fol- 1. Open the driver’s door.
cle have been programmed to the vehicle’s
low the “Customer F.A.S.T.-key program-
electronics.
ming” procedure below. NOTE
If you choose to have your authorized  Keep the driver’s door open until F.A.S.T.-
NOTE Mitsubishi Motors dealer register the ID key programming is finished. Do not open or
 If the engine does not start, contact an autho- code, take your vehicle and all remaining close other doors.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. F.A.S.T.-keys to your authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer. 2. While carrying the first valid F.A.S.T.-
key, put the operation mode in ON. (Per-
Replacement F.A.S.T.-keys NOTE form the following procedure within
N00561000042
 You are provided with two F.A.S.T.-keys, but 30 seconds.)
Only the F.A.S.T.-keys that have been pro- you may register up to four F.A.S.T.-keys. 3. With the first valid F.A.S.T.-key, press the
grammed to the vehicle’s electronics can be You can obtain blank F.A.S.T.-keys specially UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds and
used to start the vehicle. cut for your vehicle from your Mitsubishi press the LOCK button during this time.
Motors dealer. 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
If you lose the F.A.S.T.-key, you can order a UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
F.A.S.T.-key from your authorized Mitsubishi pressing the LOCK button in step 3. (Per-
Motors dealer by referring to the key number. form the following procedure within
To prevent vehicle theft, take your vehicle 30 seconds.)
and the remaining F.A.S.T.-keys to an autho-


5. With the second valid F.A.S.T.-key, press When registration of ID code is complete,
the UNLOCK button for 4 to 10 seconds the buzzer will sound three times and the
Keyless entry system
N00515501294
and press the LOCK button during this immobilizer display will come on for
time. 30 seconds. Press the key buttons to lock or unlock the
6. Release in sequence the LOCK and If an error occurs, F.A.S.T.-key program- doors and the liftgate.
UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of ming will be terminated and the buzzer It can also help you signal for attention by
pressing the LOCK button in step 5. The will sound for 3 seconds. setting off the panic alarm.
immobilizer display on the information
5 screen in the multi-information display NOTE
will blink. (Perform the following step  F.A.S.T.-key programming will be termi-
within 20 seconds.) nated if the operation mode is put in OFF
before the immobilizer display starts blink-
ing.
8. If you wish to register another F.A.S.T.-

key, repeat the process from step 1 after
7. Touch the portion of the new F.A.S.T.-key
the operation mode is put in OFF.
shown in the illustration to the engine
switch.
1- LOCK ( ) button
NOTE
 The immobilizer display will go off immedi- 2- UNLOCK ( ) button
ately if the operation mode is put in OFF. 3- PANIC button
 Perform the operation when the interrupt dis- 4- Operation indicator light
play screen is not showing. The interrupt dis-
play screen may prevent you from seeing the
immobilizer display.
 It is not possible to register a F.A.S.T.-key if
the immobilizer display goes off during the
procedure.


The dome light will turn on for 30 seconds. One chime: The horn will not sound.
NOTE The turn signal lights will also blink twice. Two chimes: The horn will sound.
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
The front side-marker and parking lights will Four chimes: The horn will sound if the
also turn on for approximately 30 seconds. LOCK button is pressed twice within 1 sec-
matically retract or extend when the doors
and the liftgate are locked or unlocked using Refer to “Welcome light” on page 5-195. ond.
the key buttons.
1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security NOTE 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
Transmitter (F.A.S.T.-key): Operation of the
outside rearview mirrors” on page 5-17, and
 If the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed when
bination headlights and dimmer switch to 5
no doors or the liftgate are opened within
“Outside rearview mirrors” on page 5-53. the “OFF” position.
approximately 30 seconds, the doors and the
liftgate will automatically re-lock. 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
To lock Link Display Audio, the functions can be during this time.
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to 4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
the separate owner’s manual. LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
Press the LOCK button (1) to lock all the
 The door and liftgate unlock function can be pressing the UNLOCK button in step 3.
doors and the liftgate.
set so that all doors and liftgate unlock when
The turn signal lights will also blink once. the UNLOCK button (2) is pressed once. NOTE
Refer to “Setting of door and liftgate unlock
function” on page 5-30.
Link Display Audio, the functions can be
NOTE adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to
 If you press the LOCK button (1) twice, the the separate owner’s manual.
horn will sound once. Answerback function
The horn and turn signal lights of the keyless Turn signal light deactivation/reactiva-
To unlock entry system answerback function can be tion
changed as required. This is done with the The answerback function from the turn signal
Press the UNLOCK button (2) to unlock the operation mode in OFF. lights can be turned ON or OFF separately.
driver’s door only.
Horn deactivation/reactivation 1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
UNLOCK button one more time to unlock all The answerback function can be set in the bination headlights and dimmer switch to
the doors and liftgate. following three ways. the “OFF” position.

3. Press the UNLOCK button (2) for 4 to Number
10 seconds and press the LOCK button
NOTE Condition
of chimes
(1) during this time.
4. Release in sequence the UNLOCK and
Link Display Audio, the functions can be When the UNLOCK button or
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a the driver’s door lock/unlock
LOCK buttons within 10 seconds of separate owner’s manual.
pressing the LOCK button in step 3. switch is pressed one time,
only the driver's door unlocks.
Number of Within approximately 2 sec-
Two
5 chimes
To lock To unlock Setting of door and liftgate unlock
chimes
onds, press the UNLOCK but-
One chime One flash Two flashes
function ton or the driver’s door
N00544601154 lock/unlock switch one more
Two chimes One flash No flash time to unlock all the doors and
The door and liftgate unlock function can be
Three chimes No flash Two flashes set to the following two conditions. the liftgate.
Each time the door and liftgate unlock func- [Factory setting]
Four chimes Two flashes One flash
tion is set, a chime will sound to tell you the
Five chimes No flash One flash 1. Put the operation mode in OFF.
condition of the door and liftgate unlock
Six chimes Two flashes No flash function. 2. Open the driver’s door and turn the com-
bination headlights and dimmer switch to
Seven chimes No flash No flash
Number the “OFF” position.
Condition 3. Press the LOCK button (1) for 4 to 10 sec-
of chimes
NOTE onds and press the UNLOCK button (2)
When the UNLOCK button, during this time.
 On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone driver’s or front passenger’s
Link Display Audio, the functions can be 4. Release in sequence the LOCK and
door lock/unlock switch, or UNLOCK buttons within 10 seconds of
adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to One chime
liftgate open switch is pressed pressing the LOCK button in step 3.
one time, all doors and the lift-
gate unlock.
Buzzer deactivation/reactivation NOTE
The buzzer answerback function can be Link Display Audio, the functions can be
turned ON or OFF as required. adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to

Using the panic alarm NOTE CAUTION

N00544701126  If you lose your F.A.S.T.-key, please contact  Changes or modifications not expressly
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat- an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for a approved by the party responsible for com-
ened, you can activate the alarm to call atten- replacement. pliance could void the user’s authority to
tion as follows:  If you wish to obtain an additional F.A.S.T.- operate the equipment.
key, please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
1. Press the PANIC button (3) for more than Motors dealer. A maximum of four F.A.S.T.-
1 second. keys can be programmed for your vehicle.
 To use the new keys, it is necessary to regis-
Procedure for replacing the key 5
2. The headlights will blink on and off and battery
ter the key with both the electronic immobi-
the horn will sound intermittently for
lizer and keyless entry system. N00562101106
approximately 3 minutes. 1. Before replacing the battery, remove static
Also refer to “Electronic immobilizer (Anti-
3. To turn off the alarm, press any button on theft starting system): Customer F.A.S.T.- electricity from your body by touching a
the key. key programming” on page 5-27. metal grounded object.
2. Remove the emergency key from the key.
NOTE General information Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-26.
 The indicator light (4) comes on each time a N00562001091
3. With the Mitsubishi mark facing you,
button is pressed. insert the cloth-covered tip of a flat blade
Your F.A.S.T.-key operates on a radio fre- screwdriver into the notch in the case and
 The F.A.S.T.-key can be used from approxi-
mately 40 feet (12 m) away. However, this
quency subject to Federal Communications use it to open the case.
distance may change if your vehicle is near a Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles sold
TV transmitting tower, a power station, or a in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules (For
radio station. vehicles sold in Canada). This device com-
 If the following conditions are observed after plies with Part 15 of FCC Rules and Industry
pressing the LOCK (1) or UNLOCK (2) but- Canada’s applicable licence-exempt RSS
ton on the key, the battery in the F.A.S.T.-key standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
may need to be replaced. lowing two conditions.
• The doors and the liftgate cannot be locked
or unlocked.  This device may not cause harmful inter-
• The panic alarm cannot be operated. ference, and
• The indicator light (4) is dim or does not  This device must accept any interference
come on. received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of this device.

Door locks
NOTE CAUTION WARNING

 Be sure to perform the procedure with the  When the key case is opened, be careful to  When closing a door, make sure that the
Mitsubishi mark facing you. If the keep water, dust, etc. out. Also, do not touch door is fully closed and the door-ajar
Mitsubishi mark is not facing you when you the internal components. warning display goes out on the informa-
open the case, the transmitter may come out. tion screen on the multi-information dis-
play. If the door is ajar it could open while
driving and cause an accident.
4. Remove the old battery. Door locks
5 5. Install a new battery with the + side (A) N00509201586
up. To lock and unlock with the key

WARNING (driver’s door)
+ side
 Make sure all doors are tightly closed and
locked while driving. Turn the key toward the front of the vehicle to
• Locked doors, in combination with the lock the door. After checking that the door is
use of seat belts, can help reduce the risk locked, turn the key back to the center and
- side of ejection in an accident. remove it.
• Locked doors can help keep passengers,
Coin type especially small children, from opening
battery doors and falling out of moving vehicles.
CR2032 • Locked doors can help prevent outsiders
from gaining access to your vehicle when
you slow or come to a stop.
6. Close the case firmly.  Lock your vehicle whenever you leave it.
7. Install the emergency key removed in step Children who get into unlocked vehicles
2. may not be able to get out. Children
8. Check the keyless entry system to see that trapped inside vehicles can quickly be
overcome by heat and suffer serious
it works.
injury or death due to heat stroke.
 Never leave a child alone in the vehicle. In
1- Insert or remove the key
NOTE addition to the risk of heat stroke, chil-
2- Lock
 You may purchase a replacement battery at dren can activate switches and controls,
resulting in an injury or fatal accident. 3- Unlock
an electric appliance store.
 An authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer can
replace the battery for you if you prefer.

Door locks
2. Be sure the keys are not inside the vehi-
NOTE To lock or unlock the door from cle. Close the door.
 When locking or unlocking with the key, the inside
only the driver’s door will be locked or
unlocked. Move the lock knob to the lock position to
To lock or unlock all doors and liftgate, use lock the door.
the power door lock switch, the keyless entry
All doors should be kept locked while driv-
system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
ing.
Refer to “Power door locks” on page 5-34,
“Keyless entry system” on pages 5-6 and
5
5-28, and “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-
key” on page 5-14.
 In vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key,
the driver’s door can be locked and unlocked
using the emergency key.
Refer to “Emergency key” on page 5-26.
Key reminder system (except
for vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key)
N00549601263
1- Lock
2- Unlock
The driver’s door can be unlocked without

using the lock knob by pulling on the inside
door handle.
If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
position and the driver’s door is opened with
To lock the door without using the key in the ignition switch, the key
the key reminder buzzer will sound intermittently to
remind you to remove the key.
1. Move the inside lock knob to the locked
position.

Power door locks

The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information Power door locks To lock and unlock the doors
display. N00509301659 and liftgate
NOTE
Lock out protection  When locking or unlocking with the key on
Using the power door lock switch
N00517301078 the driver’s door, only the driver’s door will
If the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” lock or unlock.
5 position or the operation mode is in any mode  Repeated continuous operation between lock
and unlock could activate the power door
other than OFF, when you push the lock knob
locking system’s built-in protection circuit,
forward with the driver’s door or passenger’s and prevent the system from operating. If
door open, the lock knob will automatically this occurs, wait approximately 1 minute
return to the unlocked position. before operating the power door lock switch.
Operation mode ON reminder

system (vehicles equipped with
F.A.S.T.-key)
1- Lock
N00503801173
2- Unlock
All of the doors and the liftgate can be locked

or unlocked by pressing the power door lock
switch on the driver’s or the front passenger
door.
If the driver’s door is opened while the engine
is stopped and the operation mode is in any
mode other than OFF, the operation mode ON
buzzer will sound intermittently to remind
you put the operation mode in OFF.
The warning display will be displayed on the
information screen in the multi-information
display.

Child safety locks for rear door
To unlock the doors and liftgate Child safety locks for rear
N00563401210
door
You can select the functions to unlock the N00509401328
doors and liftgate either using the ignition

switch position or the engine switch, or
using the selector lever position.
These functions are not activated when the
vehicle is shipped from the factory. To acti-
5
vate or deactivate these functions, please
contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
NOTE
Using the ignition switch or the Link Display Audio, the functions can be
engine switch adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a 1- To lock
separate owner’s manual. 2- To release
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” Child safety locks help prevent rear passen-
position or the operation mode is put in OFF. gers, especially children, from opening the
rear door using the inside door handle.
A lock lever for the child safety lock is pro-
Using the selector lever position vided on each rear door.
When the lever is in the lock position (1), the
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when rear door cannot be opened using the inside
the selector lever is moved to the “P” (PARK) door handle.
position with the ignition switch in the “ON” To open the rear door when the child safety
position or the operation mode in ON. lock lever is in the lock position, pull the out-
side door handle.
When the lever is in the release position (2),
the child safety lock is released and the rear

Liftgate
door can be opened using the inside door han-
dle.
WARNING NOTE
 When opening and closing the liftgate,  Locking and unlocking the doors by using
make sure that there are no people nearby power door locks (driver and front passenger
WARNING and be careful not to hit your head or side), keyless entry system, or F.A.S.T.-key
 Always keep the doors tightly closed and pinch your hands, neck, etc. operation (vehicles equipped with the
locked when driving. An unlocked door  If snow or ice has accumulated on the lift- F.A.S.T.-key) also locks and unlocks the lift-
may be accidentally opened by a passen- gate, remove it before opening the liftgate. gate.
5 ger, especially by a child who could fall
out. Also, if the doors are not locked, there
Otherwise the liftgate may abruptly close
due to the weight of the snow or ice.
is a greater risk of someone being thrown
from the vehicle in an accident.
 When opening the liftgate, always fully To open
open it. A partially opened liftgate can
unexpectedly close due to its own weight.
 When the vehicle is parked on a slope, the
To open from outside the vehicle
Liftgate effort required to open or close the liftgate
may be greater or less than expected.
N00510101325
The liftgate may also open or close more 1. After unlocking, push the liftgate open
quickly. switch (A) and pull up the liftgate.
WARNING
 The luggage compartment was not
designed for people to ride in it. Do not let
passengers ride in or let children play in
CAUTION
the luggage compartment. Riding or play-  Do not stand behind the exhaust pipe when
ing in the luggage compartment could loading and unloading luggage. Heat from
result in a serious accident or injury. the exhaust could lead to burns.
 Before driving, be sure that the liftgate is  To avoid damage to the liftgate, make sure
securely closed. It is dangerous to drive that area above and behind the liftgate is
with the liftgate open since carbon monox- clear before opening it.
ide (CO) gas contained in engine exhaust
gases can enter the passenger compart-
ment.
CO is an invisible, odorless gas that can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION
In addition, if the liftgate opens while  Make sure there is no one standing nearby
driving, luggage could fall onto the road when opening the liftgate.
and cause an accident.

Liftgate
NOTE To close
 The liftgate cannot be opened if it is not
raised immediately after pressing the liftgate 1. Pull the liftgate grip (A) downward as
open switch. illustrated and release it before the liftgate
If this happens, press the liftgate open switch closes completely. Gently slam the liftgate
again and raise the liftgate. from the outside so that it is completely
 The liftgate cannot be opened when the bat- closed.
tery is discharged or disconnected.
The liftgate must then be opened using the
5
inside liftgate release.
 When the battery is reconnected, all doors
and the liftgate will be locked. Unlock them 2. Move the lever (B) to open the liftgate.
before trying to open the liftgate.
 On vehicles equipped with the mirror retrac-
matically extend when the liftgate and all
doors are unlocked using the liftgate open
switch (A).
To open from inside the vehicle CAUTION

 To avoid injuring your hand or arm, do not
The liftgate can also open from the inside of attempt to close the liftgate without releasing
vehicle. It is designed to provide a way to the liftgate grip (A).
open the liftgate if the battery is dead or dis- 3. Push out on the liftgate to open it.  Before starting the vehicle, be sure to con-
connected. firm that the liftgate is locked. If the liftgate
opens while driving the vehicle, objects
WARNING stored in the luggage compartment could fall
1. Open the lid (A) inside of the liftgate.
 Always keep the release lever lid on the out into the road.
liftgate closed when driving so that your
luggage cannot accidentally bump the
lever and open the liftgate.

Theft-alarm system
At this time, the theft-alarm indicator (A)
NOTE CAUTION on the instrument panel flashes for confir-
 Gas struts (B) are installed in the locations  Do not modify or add parts to the theft-alarm
mation.
illustrated in order to support the liftgate. system. Doing so could cause the theft-alarm
to malfunction.
Armed stage
5 N00510301239
Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the

system as described below.
1. Except for vehicles equipped with the

Please observe the following in order to pre- F.A.S.T.-key, remove the key from the
vent damage or faulty operation: ignition switch.
• Do not touch, push or pull the gas struts 4. The system has entered the armed stage
For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
when closing the liftgate. after approximately 20 seconds, when the
key, put the operation mode in OFF.
• Do not attach any plastic material, tape, theft-alarm indicator (A) flashing
2. Make sure that the engine hood is closed.
etc., to the gas struts. becomes slower.
3. Lock all doors and the liftgate by using
• Do not tie string, etc., around the gas struts. The theft-alarm indicator (A) continues to
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-
• Do not hang objects on the gas struts. flash while the system is in the armed
key operation.
stage.
Arm the system and leave
Theft-alarm system NOTE
N00510201267
 If the engine hood is open, the theft-alarm
indicator (A) illuminates and the system can-
The theft-alarm system is designed to provide not enter the armed stage.
protection from unauthorized entry into the The system enters the armed stage approxi-
vehicle. This system is operated in three mately 20 seconds after the engine hood is
stages: the first is the “armed” stage, the sec- closed.
ond is the “alarm” stage, and third is the “dis-
armed” stage. If triggered, the system
provides both audible and visual alarm sig-
nals.
Theft-alarm system
 One of the doors and the liftgate is opened
NOTE without using the keyless entry system or
NOTE
 The system will be disarmed if, while the  The alarm will continue to operate for 3 min-
the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
theft-alarm indicator (A) is illuminated, all utes. At the end of that period, the alarm will
 The engine hood is opened.
doors and the liftgate are unlocked by using automatically shut off to save battery power.
the keyless entry system or the F.A.S.T.-key The system will then be rearmed until the
operation. Type of alarm proper disarming step is taken.
 The system will be disarmed if, while the N00582500053  The alarm will resume if unauthorized
theft-alarm indicator is illuminated, the fol-
lowing operation is performed.
When the alarm is activated:
actions are taken again, even if the alarm has
stopped.
5
• Except for vehicles equipped with the 1. The headlights blink on and off for 3 min-
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is turned
utes.
to the “ON” position.
After 3 minutes the headlights automati- Alarm deactivation
• For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
cally shut off. N00582600041
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
2. The horn will sound intermittently for 3 The alarm can be deactivated in the following
 The system will not be armed if a door, the
liftgate or the engine hood is not completely minutes. ways.
closed. If this happens, rearm the system as
Horn sounds!  By using the keyless entry system or the
described above.
Headlights blink on and off! F.A.S.T.-key operation to lock or unlock
 The theft-alarm system can be activated
when people are riding inside the vehicle or the doors and liftgate.
when the windows are open. To prevent acci-  Except for vehicles equipped with the
dental activation of the alarm, do not set the F.A.S.T.-key, by turning the ignition
system to the system armed mode while peo- switch to the “ON” position.
ple are riding in the vehicle.  For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key, by putting the operation mode in ON.
Alarm stage
N00510401243 Disarmed stage
The alarm will be activated if any of the fol- N00510501215
lowing occur while the vehicle is parked and The system will be disarmed if the following
the system is armed. operation is performed.

Power window control

 Except for vehicles equipped with the 6. Disarm the system by unlocking all doors
F.A.S.T.-key, if the ignition switch is
NOTE and the liftgate by using the keyless entry
 The amount of time after unlocking until the
turned to the “ON” position. system or the F.A.S.T.-key operation.
vehicle relocks automatically can be
 For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
adjusted. See an authorized Mitsubishi
key, if the operation mode is put in ON.
 All doors and the liftgate are unlocked by
Motors dealer for details. Power window control
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone N00510801436
using the keyless entry system or the Link Display Audio, the functions can be
F.A.S.T.-key operation.
5 adjusted on the screen. For details, refer to a
separate owner’s manual.
Disarm...by using the keyless entry system or  Once the system has been disarmed, it can-
F.A.S.T.-key operation not be rearmed except by repeating the arm-
ing procedure.
Testing the theft-alarm system

N00510601160
Use the following procedure to test the sys-

tem:
1- Open (down)
1. Lower the driver’s window. 2- Close (up)
2. Arm the system as explained in “Armed
NOTE stage”.
 If the UNLOCK button on the key, or the
3. Make sure that the theft-alarm indicator NOTE
driver’s or front passenger’s door
comes on and flashes for approximately  Never try to operate the main switch and
lock/unlock switch is pressed when all doors
20 seconds. sub-switch in different directions at the same
and the liftgate are closed and no door is
4. Wait a few seconds and then unlock the time. This will freeze the window in posi-
opened within approximately 30 seconds, re-
tion.
arming will automatically occur. driver’s side door by using the inside door
 Operating the power windows repeatedly
lock knob. Open the door.
with the engine stopped will run down the
5. Make sure that the horn sounds intermit-
battery. Use the window switches only while
tently and the headlights blink when a the engine is running.
door is opened.

WARNING Sub-switches
 Before operating the power windows, N00548801138
make sure that nothing is capable of being

trapped (head, hands, fingers, etc.) in the
window.
 Never leave the vehicle without carrying
the key.
 Never leave children or unreliable adults
unattended inside the vehicle.
5
1- Driver’s door window switch

Main switch 2- Front passenger’s door window switch
N00548701153 3- Left rear door window switch
1- Open
The main switch located on the driver’s door 4- Right rear door window switch
2- Close
can be used to operate all the windows. 5- Lock switch
A window can be opened or closed by operat-
ing the corresponding switch. Each sub-switch can be used for its own door
Press the switch down to open the window, window, unless the driver’s window lock
and pull up the switch to close it. switch is activated.
If the driver’s door window switch is fully
pressed down/pulled up, the driver’s door NOTE
window automatically opens/closes com-  The rear door windows open only half-way.
pletely.
If you want to stop the window movement,
operate the switch lightly in the reverse direc-
tion.
Power window timer function
N00548901171
The power windows can be opened or closed

when the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
tion or the operation mode is in ON.
The door windows can be opened or closed
for a 30-second period after the engine is


stopped. However, once the driver’s door or
the front passenger’s door is opened, the
Safety mechanism (Driver’s NOTE
power windows cannot be operated. door window only)  The safety mechanism can be activated if the
N00528801174
driving conditions or other circumstances
cause the door window to be subjected to a
Lock switch If a hand or head is trapped, for safety the physical shock similar to that caused by
N00549001182
door window is automatically lowered a little. trapped hand or head.
When this switch is in the lock mode, the sub- After the door window is lowered, clear the  If the safety mechanism is activated five or
obstruction, then pull up the switch again to
5 switches cannot be used to open or close the
close the door window.
more times in a row, the safety mechanism
will be cancelled and the door window will
door windows, and the main switch will open
not close correctly. In such a case, the fol-
or close only the driver’s door window. To
lowing procedure should be implemented to
unlock the switch, press it again. WARNING rectify this situation. If the window is open,
 If the battery terminals are disconnected repeatedly raise the driver’s door window
or the fuse for electric window is replaced, switch until that window has been fully
the safety mechanism will be cancelled. closed.
If a hand or head got trapped, a serious Following this, release the switch, raise the
injury could result. switch once again and hold it in this condi-
tion for at least 1 second, then release it. You
should now be able to operate in the normal
CAUTION fashion.
 The safety mechanism is deactivated just  If the battery terminals are disconnected or
before the door window closes. This allows the fuse for electric window is replaced, the
the door window to close completely. There- safety mechanism will be cancelled and the
fore be especially careful that fingers are not door window will not automatically
1- Lock trapped in the door window opening. open/close completely.
2- Unlock  The safety mechanism is deactivated while If the window is open, repeatedly raise the
the switch is pulled up. Therefore be espe- driver’s door window switch until the win-
cially careful that fingers are not trapped in dow has been fully closed. Following this,
WARNING the door window opening. release the switch, raise the switch once
 Do not deliberately trap your hands or head again and hold it in this condition for at least
 Before driving with a child in the vehicle,
in order to activate the safety mechanism. 1 second, then release it. You should now be
be sure to lock the window switch to make
Your hand or head could be trapped and per- able to operate the driver’s door window in
it inoperative. Children tampering with
sonal injury could result. the normal fashion.
the switch could easily trap their hands or
heads in the window.

Power panoramic sunroof (if so equipped)
What to do if you hear wind WARNING NOTE

buffeting when driving  Because the front sunroof opens to the  Be sure to close the front sunroof completely
N00551400043
outside of the vehicle, do not open the sun- when washing the vehicle or when leaving
roof when cleaning the top of the roof, etc. the vehicle.
Wind buffeting can be described as the per- Your hands or arms could be trapped.  After washing the vehicle or after rain be
ception of pressure on the ears or a booming sure to wipe off any water that is on the front
or rumbling sound. Your vehicle may exhibit sunroof before operating it.
wind buffeting when driving with one or both NOTE  Operating the front sunroof, front shade, or 5
rear door windows down or partially opened.  When leaving the vehicle unattended, be rear shade repeatedly with the engine turned
This is a normal occurrence that can be mini- sure to close the front sunroof and carry the off will run down the battery. Operate the
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear key. front sunroof, front shade, and rear shade
door windows open, open the front door win-  Do not try to operate the front sunroof if it is only while the engine is running.
dows as well as the rear door windows to frozen closed (after snow fall or during
extreme cold).
minimize the condition. Front sunroof & front shade
 Do not sit or place heavy luggage on the
front sunroof or roof opening edge.
Power panoramic sunroof (if  Do not apply any force that may cause dam- The front sunroof & front shade can be
age to the sunroof. opened or closed with the ignition switch in
so equipped)
 Release the switch when the front sunroof, the “ON” position or the operation mode in
N00594700023
front shade, or rear shade starts to move. ON.
 If the front sunroof, front shade, or rear
WARNING shade does not operate when the switch is
 Do not put head, hands or anything else operated, release the switch and check
out of the front sunroof opening while whether something is trapped by the sunroof
driving the vehicle. or shade. If nothing is trapped, we recom-
 Never leave children or unreliable adults mend you to have the sunroof or shade
unattended inside the vehicle. checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 Never leave the vehicle without carrying dealer.
the key.  Be careful when tilting up the front sunroof
 Before operating the front sunroof, front if a ski carrier or a roof carrier is installed.
shade, or rear shade, make sure that noth- Depending on the model of ski carrier or roof
ing is capable of being trapped (head, carrier, the front sunroof may contact the car-
hands, fingers, etc.) in the front sunroof, rier when the front sunroof is tilted up.
front shade, or rear shade.

NOTE NOTE
 The front sunroof automatically stops just  Depending on the position of the front shade,
before reaching the fully open position to the front shade will open together with the
reduce wind noise. front sunroof.
Press the switch again to fully open it.
 Depending on the position of the front shade,
the front shade will open together with the Tilting down the front sunroof
5 front sunroof.
Press the switch in direction (3) or pull the

switch in direction (4) to fully close the front
Closing the front sunroof
sunroof automatically.
Press the switch in direction (3) to fully close

the front sunroof automatically. NOTE
1- Open (front sunroof) To stop the sunroof before it is fully closed,  When you press the switch in direction (6),
2- Tilt up (front sunroof) the front sunroof will close slightly, and then
operate the switches in any of the directions
3- Close (front sunroof) the sunroof and front shade will fully close
(1) to (6). automatically.
4- Tilt down (front sunroof)
5- Open (front shade)
6- Close (front shade) NOTE
 When you press the switch in direction (6), Opening the front shade
the front sunroof will close slightly, and then
the sunroof and front shade will fully close
Opening the front sunroof automatically.
Press the switch in direction (5) to fully open
the front shade automatically.
Press the switch in direction (1) to open the To stop the shade before it is fully open, oper-
front sunroof automatically. ate the switches in any of the directions (1) to
Tilting up the front sunroof
To stop the sunroof before it is fully open, (6).
operate the switches in any of the directions
Press the switch in direction (2) to raise the
(1) to (6).
rear edge of the front sunroof as it opens. Closing the front shade
Press the switch in direction (6) to fully close

the front shade automatically.

To stop the shade before it is fully closed, If the safety mechanism operates five times or
operate the switches in any of the directions more consecutively, you will not be able to
CAUTION
 The safety mechanism is cancelled just
(1) to (6). close the front sunroof and front shade nor-
before the front shade is fully closed. This
mally.
allows the front shade to close completely.
NOTE If this occurs, perform the following proce- Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
 If the front sunroof is open, it will close
dure to reset the safety mechanism. gers are trapped in the front shade.
together with the front shade.
1. Press and hold the switch in direction (3)
or pull and hold the switch in direction 5
(4).
NOTE
Timer function 2. The front sunroof (if open) and front
 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
driving conditions or other circumstances
shade will move to the fully closed posi- cause the front sunroof or the front shade to
Within approximately 30 seconds after the tions in small increments. be subjected to a physical shock similar to
ignition switch is changed to “ACC” or that caused by a trapped hand or head.
“OFF” or the operation mode is changed to NOTE  Do not release the switch until the resetting
ACC or OFF, the front sunroof and front  If the front sunroof and front shade are both procedure is finished. If you release the
shade can be opened and closed. open, the front sunroof will move to the fully switch, the resetting mode will be cancelled.
However, if the driver’s or front passenger’s closed position, and then the front shade will To perform the resetting procedure again,
door is opened within 30 seconds after the move to the fully closed position. repeat the procedure from step 1.
ignition switch is changed to “ACC” or
“OFF” or the operation mode is changed to 3. When the front sunroof and front shade
ACC or OFF, the front sunroof and front have both stopped in the fully closed posi- Rear shade
shade cannot be opened or closed. tions, release the switch. (The resetting
procedure is finished.) The rear shade can be opened or closed with
Safety mechanism the ignition switch in the “ON” position or
If the front sunroof and front shade do not the operation mode in ON.
move correctly to the fully closed positions
If a person’s hand, neck, etc., is trapped in the
after you perform the resetting procedure,
front sunroof or front shade, the front sunroof
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
or front shade will automatically open a max-
dealer.
imum of 8 inches (20 cm) as a safety func-
tion. After the front sunroof and front shade
open, you can use the switch to close them.

Parking brake
Safety mechanism NOTE

 The safety mechanism can be activated if the
If a person’s hand, neck, etc., is trapped in the driving conditions or other circumstances
rear shade, the shade will automatically open cause the rear shade to be subjected to a
a maximum of 8 inches (20 cm) as a safety physical shock similar to that caused by a
trapped hand or head.
function. After the rear shade opens, you can
 Do not release the switch until the resetting
use the switch to close it.
5 If the safety mechanism operates five times or
procedure is finished. If you release the
switch, the resetting mode will be cancelled.
more consecutively, you will not be able to To perform the resetting procedure again,
close the rear shade normally. repeat the procedure from step 1.
If this occurs, perform the following proce-
dure to reset the safety mechanism.
1. Press and hold the switch in direction (8). Parking brake

7- Open (rear shade) 2. The rear shade will move to the fully N00511401484
8- Close (rear shade) closed position in small increments. To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com-
3. When the rear shade has stopped in the plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake,
fully closed position, release the switch. and then move the selector lever to the “P”
Opening the rear shade (The resetting procedure is finished.) (PARK) position.
Make sure the brake warning light (red) is
Press the switch in direction (7) to fully open If the rear shade does not move correctly to illuminated.
the rear shade automatically. the fully closed positions after you perform
To stop the shade before it is fully open, press the resetting procedure, contact an authorized
the switch in direction (7) or (8). Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Closing the rear shade CAUTION

 The safety mechanism is cancelled just
Press the switch in direction (8) to fully close before the rear shade is fully closed. This
allows the rear shade to close completely.
the rear shade automatically.
Therefore be especially careful that no fin-
To stop the shade before it is fully closed,
gers are trapped in the rear shade.
press the switch in direction (7) or (8).

Parking brake
Lever type parking brake (if so To release CAUTION

equipped)  Before driving, be sure that the parking
brake is fully released and brake warning
N00593100033
light is off.
If you drive without the parking brake fully
To apply released, the warning display will appear on
the information screen in the multi-informa-
tion display.
If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
5
parking brake, the brakes will be overheated,
resulting in ineffective braking and possible
brake failure.
Warning light (red)

1- Pull the lever up slightly.
2- Press and hold the button at the end of
the hand grip. or
3- Pressing the lever downward.
Warning display
1- Pull the lever up without pressing the Before driving, be sure to release the parking
button at the end of hand grip. brake.
When the parking brake is set and the
ignition switch is in the “ON” position,
or the operation mode is in ON the
brake warning light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
Electric parking brake (if so
equipped)
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
N00593200047
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. The Electric parking brake is the system that
applies the parking brake by the electric
motor.

Parking brake
When the Electric parking brake is applied,
NOTE the brake warning light (red) in the instru-
NOTE
 You may hear an operation noise from the  If the Electric parking brake must be applied
ment cluster and the indicator light (A) on the
vehicle body when operating the Electric in an emergency situation, pull and hold the
Electric parking brake switch will come on.
parking brake. This does not indicate a mal- Electric parking brake switch to apply the
function and the Electric parking brake is Electric parking brake. At that time, the fol-
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake,
operating normally. lowing warning display will appear in the
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a multi-information display and a buzzer will
 When the battery is weak or dead, the Elec-
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill.
5 tric parking brake cannot be applied or
released. Refer to “Jump-starting the engine”
sound, however you should continue to pull
and hold the Electric parking brake switch.
on page 8-2. CAUTION
 You may feel the brake pedal moving when  While the vehicle is in motion, do not apply
operating the Electric parking brake. the Electric parking brake. Doing so may
This does not indicate a malfunction. cause overheating and/or premature wear of
brake parts, reducing brake performance.
 While the Electric parking brake is applied,
To apply the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
NOTE position or the operation mode is put in OFF.
 In the following conditions, the brake warn-  The ignition switch is in the “OFF” position
ing light (red) will illuminate for approxi- or the operation mode is in OFF.
mately 15 seconds and then go off.  When the Electric parking brake switch is
• While the Electric parking brake is applied, operated in the following conditions, the
the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” brake warning light (red) will illuminate for
position or the operation mode is put in approximately 15 seconds and then go off.
OFF.  When parking on steep grades, pull up the
• While the ignition switch is in the “OFF” Electric parking brake switch twice (once
position or the operation mode is in OFF, more after the operation is completed once).
the Electric parking brake switch is pulled The maximum effect of the parking brake
up. will be obtained.
1. Stop the vehicle completely.  If the parking brake does not hold the vehicle
stationary after the foot brake is released,
2. Pull up the Electric parking brake switch
while depressing the brake pedal.

Parking brake
When the Electric parking brake is released,
NOTE To release
the brake warning light (red) and the indicator
 When the ignition switch or the operation
light on the Electric parking brake switch go
mode is other than ON, if the parking brake
Manual operation off.
is applied, the Electric parking brake indica-
tor light comes on for a while.
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake
 If the Electric parking brake switch is repeat-
is released and brake warning light is off.
edly operated in a short time, the following
warning display will appear in the multi-
information display and the Electric parking CAUTION 5
brake will temporarily stop working. In such  After the Electric parking brake switch has
case, wait for approximately 1 minute until been operated to apply or release the Electric
the warning display disappears, and operate parking brake, if the brake warning light
the Electric parking brake switch again. (red) and the indicator light on the Electric
parking brake switch remain blinking or the
Electric parking brake warning light (yellow)
remain illuminated, the Electric parking
1. Make sure that the ignition switch is in brake system may be malfunctioning and the
the “ON” position or the operation mode parking brake may not be applied or
 The brake warning light (red) and the indica- is ON. released. Immediately park your vehicle in a
tor light on the Electric parking brake switch 2. Press down the Electric parking brake safe place and contact the nearest authorized
may blink. This does not indicate a malfunc- switch while depressing the brake pedal. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
tion, the lights go off when/if the Electric of your choice.
parking brake is released.  If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
 Depending on the situation, the Electric Automatic operation parking brake, the brake will overheat,
parking brake may be applied automatically. resulting in ineffective braking and possible
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-74. When the accelerator pedal is depressed brake failure.
slowly while all of the following conditions  If the brake warning light (red) does not go
are met, the Electric parking brake is auto- off after the parking brake has been released,
matically released. the brake system may be malfunctioning.
Contact the nearest authorized Mitsubishi
 The engine is running. Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
 The selector lever is in the “D” (DRIVE) choice.
or the “R” (REVERSE) position.
 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.

Steering wheel height and reach adjustment

Under normal conditions, the warning light
CAUTION NOTE only comes on when the ignition switch is
 If the acceleration of the vehicle seems  If you start driving without releasing the
turned to the “ON” position or the operation
abnormally slow after the vehicle has been Electric parking brake, the warning display
mode is put in ON and goes off a few seconds
parked with the Electric parking brake will appear.
applied in cold weather, stop the vehicle in a later.
safe place, then apply and release the Elec-
tric parking brake. If the vehicle acceleration CAUTION
5 is still slow, contact the nearest authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
 When the Electric parking brake warning
light (yellow) does not illuminate or remains
of your choice. illuminated when the ignition switch is
 If the driver’s foot contacts the accelerator
pedal in the condition that the Electric park- turned to the “ON” position or the operation
ing brake can release by an automatic opera- mode is put in ON, or comes on while driv-
NOTE tion, the Electric parking brake may be ing, the Electric parking brake may not be
 When the ignition switch or the operation released automatically. applied or released.
mode is other than ON, the parking brake Immediately contact the nearest authorized
cannot be released. Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
 If the Electric parking brake does not auto-
Warning light/display of your choice. For details, refer to “Electric
matically release, it may be released by man- parking brake warning light (yellow)” on
Warning light (yellow) page 5-181.
ual operation.
 When the selector lever is other than “P” When parking your vehicle while the Elec-
(PARK) position, if you try to release the tric parking brake warning light (yellow) is
Electric parking brake without depressing illuminated, park the vehicle on level and
the brake pedal, the warning display will stable ground, move the selector lever to the
appear. Warning display “P” (PARK) position and place chocks,
blocks, stones behind and in front of the tires
to prevent the vehicle from moving.
Steering wheel height and

If there is a malfunction in the system, the reach adjustment
warning light will come on. In addition, the N00511501241
warning display appears on the information To adjust the steering wheel to the desired
screen in the multi-information display. position, move the lever upward or down-
Inside rearview mirror

ward while moving the steering wheel to the
desired position. Type 1 To adjust the vertical mirror
position
Except for vehicles equipped with For-

1
Type 2 ward Collision Mitigation system (FCM)
It is possible to move the mirror up and down

to adjust its position.
5
2
Type 3
1- Wheel lock
2- Release
WARNING WARNING
 After adjusting, make sure the lock lever  Do not attempt to adjust the inside rear-
is secured in the locked (1) position. view mirror while driving. This can be
 Do not attempt to adjust the steering dangerous.
wheel while driving. This can be danger- Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
ous. ing.
To adjust the mirror position
Adjust the inside mirror to maximize the
view through the rear window. It is possible to move the mirror up/down and
Inside rearview mirror left/right to adjust its position.
N00511601415
Adjust the inside rearview mirror only after

making any seat adjustments so as to have a
clear view to the rear of the vehicle.

Inside rearview mirror
To reduce the glare Type 2

When the headlights of the vehicles behind
you are very bright, the reflection factor of
Type 1
the rearview mirror is automatically changed
The day/night knob (A) at the bottom of the to reduce the glare.
mirror can be used to adjust the mirror to
5 reduce the glare from the headlights of vehi-
cles behind you during night driving.
When the ignition switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the reflection factor of the mirror is auto-
1- Daytime position matically changed.
2- Night position
NOTE
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner
on the sensor (1), as reduced sensitivity
could result.

Outside rearview mirrors
Type 3 NOTE WARNING

 If you want to stop automatic mode, press  Your passenger’s side mirror is convex.
When the headlights of the vehicles behind the switch (3) and the indicator will go off. The objects you see in the mirror will look
you are very bright, the reflection factor of To return to automatic mode, press the smaller and farther away than they
the rearview mirror is automatically changed switch again or perform the following opera- appear in a regular flat mirror.
to reduce the glare. tion. Do not use this mirror to estimate the dis-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the tance of vehicles following you when
F.A.S.T.-key]
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” position
changing lanes.
5
after turning to “OFF” or “ACC” position.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
key]
Put the operation mode in ON after putting
the operation mode in OFF.

N00512201232
Normally, use the automatic mode. When the Adjust the outside rearview mirrors only after
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position making any seat adjustments so as to have a
or the operation mode is put in ON, the green clear view to the rear of the vehicle.
indicator (1) illuminates and the reflection
factor of the mirror is automatically changed. WARNING
 Do not attempt to adjust the outside rear-
view mirrors while driving. This can be
NOTE dangerous.
 Do not hang items on, or spray glass cleaner Be sure to adjust the mirrors before driv-
on the sensors (2), as reduced sensitivity ing.
could result.


4- Left For vehicles equipped with the mirror
To adjust the mirror position
retractor switch
N00549101196
The outside rearview mirrors can be adjusted

NOTE
 After completing the adjustment, return the
when the ignition switch is in the “ON” or Retracting and extending the mir-
switch (A) to the center position.
“ACC” position or the operation mode is put
rors using the mirror retractor
in ON or ACC.
Push the switch (A) to the same side as the switch
5 mirror you wish to adjust. To retract the mirror
N00549201171 With the ignition switch in the “ON” or
“ACC” position or the operation mode in ON
The outside mirror can be retracted towards
Type 1 or ACC, push the mirror retractor switch to
the side window to prevent damage when
retract the mirrors. Push it again to extend the
parking in tight locations.
mirrors to their original positions.
Except for vehicles equipped with the After placing the ignition switch in the
mirror retractor switch “OFF” position or the operation mode in
OFF, it is possible to retract and extend the
Push the mirror towards the back of the vehi- mirrors using the mirror retractor switch for
Type 2 cle with your hand to retract it in. When approximately 30 seconds.
extending the mirror, pull it out towards the
front of the vehicle until it clicks to lock in
place.
L- Left outside mirror adjustment

R- Right outside mirror adjustment
Press the switch (B) to adjust the mirror posi-

tion.
1- Up
2- Down
3- Right
CAUTION Retracting and extending the mir- NOTE

 It is possible to retract and extend the mirrors rors without using the mirror • Automatically extend when the ignition
by hand. After retracting a mirror using the retractor switch (automatic exten- switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
mirror retractor switch, however, you should operation mode is put in ON with the
extend it by using the switch again, not by
sion function) driver’s door closed, and automatically
hand. If you extended the mirror by hand retract when the ignition switch is turned to
after retracting it using the switch, it would [For vehicles equipped with the keyless entry the “OFF” position or the operation mode is
not properly lock in position. As a result, it
could move because of the wind or vibration
system] put in OFF with the driver’s door opened.
• Automatically extend when the vehicle
5
The mirrors automatically retract or extend
while you are driving, taking away your rear- when the doors are locked or unlocked using speed reaches approximately 19 mph
ward visibility. (30 km/h).
the key of the keyless entry system.
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-6. • Deactivate the automatic extension func-
tion.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
NOTE The mirrors automatically retract or extend
 The outside rearview mirrors can be
 Be careful not to get your hands trapped retracted or extended by the following opera-
when the doors are locked or unlocked using tions, even if changing to the any of above.
while a mirror is moving.
the key or the F.A.S.T.-key. After pressing the LOCK button on the key
 If you move a mirror by hand or it moves
Refer to “Keyless entry system” on page 5-28 to lock the doors and liftgate, if the LOCK
after hitting a person or object, you may not
be able to return it to its original position
or “To operate using the F.A.S.T.-key” on button is pressed again twice in a row within
using the mirror retractor switch. If this hap- page 5-14. approximately 30 seconds, the outside rear-
pens, push the mirror retractor switch to view mirrors will retract.
After pressing the UNLOCK button on the
place the mirror in its retracted position and NOTE key to unlock the doors and liftgate, if the
then push the switch again to return the mir-
 Functions can be modified as stated below. UNLOCK button is pressed again twice in a
ror to its original position.
Please consult an authorized Mitsubishi row within approximately 30 seconds, the
 When freezing has occurred and mirrors fail Motors dealer.
to operate as intended, please refrain from outside rearview mirrors will extend again.
repeated pushing of the retractor switch as Link Display Audio, screen operations can
this action can result in burn-out of the mir- be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the
ror motor circuits. separate owner’s manual for details.

Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors

(if so equipped)
N00595900022
WARNING
 Even if no vehicles are shown to the side of
5 your vehicle in the Integrated Blind Spot
Mirrors (A), be sure to confirm that traf-
fic is clear before changing lanes.
 Because the Integrated Blind Spot Mir-
rors (A) are wide-angle mirrors, objects
appear smaller than their actual size.
Also, be careful because vehicles and other
objects shown in the mirrors are closer to
your vehicle than they appear.
The Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (A) is a

mirror for showing vehicles and other objects
in the driver's blind spot (C) that are not
shown in the main mirror (B).
When checking the area to the rear of your
vehicle, check the main mirror (B), and then D- When a vehicle is traveling far behind
check the Integrated Blind Spot Mirror (A). your vehicle, the main mirror (B) shows
an image of the vehicle and the Inte-
grated Blind Spot Mirror (A) shows a
small image of the vehicle.
E- When the vehicle moves closer to your
vehicle, the main mirror (B) shows a
larger image of the vehicle and the Inte-
grated Blind Spot Mirror (A) also shows
a larger image of the vehicle.

Ignition switch
F- When the vehicle moves even closer to
your vehicle and is located in the driver's
NOTE
 The door mirror heater can be turned on
blind spot (C), the main mirror (B) does
automatically.
not show an image of the vehicle and For further information, please contact your
only the Integrated Blind Spot Mirror authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
(A) shows an image of the vehicle. On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio, screen operations can
Door mirror heater (if so equipped) be used to make the adjustment.
5
N00549301303
details.
When the rear window defogger switch is
pressed with the engine running, the outside
rearview mirrors are defogged or defrosted. Ignition switch OFF
Current will flow through the heater element N00512401755
inside the mirrors, thus clearing away frost or [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
condensation. The engine is off. The key can be inserted and
key]
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while removed only when the switch is in this posi-
For information on operations for vehicles
the defogger is on. tion.
equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to
The heater will be turned off automatically in “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
approximately 15 to 20 minutes depending on (F.A.S.T.-key): Engine switch” on page 5-18. ACC
the outside temperature.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
Allows operation of electrical accessories
F.A.S.T.-key]
with the engine off.
ON
All accessories can be used.

Starting the engine
START NOTE NOTE

• The time until the power cuts out can be  The key cannot be removed unless the selec-
Engages the starter. Release the key when the changed to approximately 60 minutes. tor lever is set to the “P” (PARK) position,
• The ACC power auto-cutout function can which allows the ignition switch to turn to
engine starts.It will automatically return to
be deactivated. the “OFF” position.
the “ON” position.
For details, we recommend you to consult an
5 NOTE authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. CAUTION
 Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone  If the engine is stopped while driving, the
immobilizer. To start the engine, the ID code Link Display Audio, screen operations can power brake booster will stop functioning
which the transponder inside the key sends be used to make the adjustment. and greater effort for braking will be
must match the one registered to the immobi- Refer to the separate owner’s manual for required. Also, the power steering system
lizer computer. (Refer to “Electronic immo- details. will not function and it will require greater
bilizer” on page 5-4.) effort to manually steer the vehicle.
To remove the key  Do not leave the key in the “ON” position for
a long time when the engine is not running.
N00550901253
ACC power auto-cutout func- This will cause the battery to run down.
When removing the key, first set the selector  Do not turn the key to the “START” position
tion lever to the “P” (PARK) position, and then when the engine is running. It will damage
N00539601130
turn the key to the “OFF” position and the starter motor.
After approximately 30 minutes has elapsed remove it.
with the ignition switch in the “ACC” posi-
tion, the function automatically cuts out the Starting the engine
power for the audio system and other electric
N00512601874
devices that can be operated with that posi-
tion. [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
When the ignition switch is turned from the key]
“ACC” position, the power is supplied again For information on operation for vehicles
to those devices. equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key, refer to
“Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key): Starting” on page 5-12.
NOTE

Starting the engine

[Except for vehicles equipped with the 2. Insert the ignition key.
F.A.S.T.-key]
WARNING 3. Press and hold the brake pedal down
 Never run the engine in a closed or poorly
firmly with your right foot.
ventilated area any longer than is needed
4. Make sure the selector lever is in the “P”
Tips for starting to move your vehicle out of the area. Car-
(PARK) position.
bon monoxide gas, which is odorless and
 Do not operate the starter motor continu- extremely poisonous, could build up and 5. Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
ously for longer than 15 seconds as this cause serious injury or death. tion and make certain that all warning
lights are functioning properly before
could run the battery down or damage the
starting the engine.
5
starter motor. If the engine does not start,
turn the ignition switch back to the CAUTION 6. Turn the ignition switch to the “START”
“OFF”, wait a few seconds, and then try  Do not push-start the vehicle. position without pressing the accelerator
again. Trying repeatedly with the engine  Do not run the engine at high revolutions or pedal. Release the ignition switch when
or starter motor still turning will damage drive at high speeds until the engine has had the engine starts.
a chance to warm up.
the starter mechanism.
 If the engine will not start because the bat-  Release the ignition switch as soon as the NOTE
engine starts. Otherwise, the starter motor  Minor noises may be heard on engine start-
tery is weak or discharged, refer to
will be damaged up. These will disappear as the engine warms
“Jump-starting the engine” (on page 8-2)
up.
for instructions.
 A longer warm up period will only con-
sume extra fuel. The engine is warmed up
Starting the engine
enough for driving when the bar graph of When the engine is hard to start
engine coolant temperature display starts This model is equipped with an electronically
to move or the low coolant temperature controlled fuel injection system. This is a sys- After several attempts, you may experience
indicator goes out. Refer to “Engine cool- tem that automatically controls fuel injection. that the engine still does not start.
ant temperature display” on page 5-147. There is usually no need to depress the accel-
erator pedal when starting the engine. 1. Make sure that all electric devices, such
The starter should not be run for more than as lights, air conditioning blower and rear
15 seconds at a time. window defogger, are turned off.
To prevent battery drain, wait a few seconds
between attempts to restart the engine.
1. Make sure all occupants are properly

seated with seat belts fastened.
Turbocharger operation
2. While depressing the brake pedal, press lever in the “D” (DRIVE) or “R” They are lubricated by engine oil and cooled
the accelerator pedal halfway and hold it (REVERSE) position. by engine oil and coolant. If the engine oil is
there, then crank the engine. Release the This occurs because the transaxle has not not replaced at the specified intervals, the
accelerator pedal, immediately after the warmed up sufficiently; it does not indicate a bearings may seize or emit abnormal noise.
engine starts. problem. If this occurs, place the selector
3. If the engine still will not start, the engine lever in the “P” (PARK) position and let the
could be flooded with too much gasoline. engine idle for at least 10 minutes.
While depressing the brake pedal, push The transaxle will warm up, and you will be
5 the accelerator pedal all the way down able to start normally.
and hold it there, then crank the engine for Do not leave the vehicle during warm-up
5 to 6 seconds. Return the ignition switch operation.
to the “OFF” and release the accelerator
pedal. Wait a few seconds, and then crank
the engine again for 5 to 6 seconds while
Turbocharger operation
N00537301087
depressing the brake pedal, but do not
push the accelerator pedal. Release the
CAUTION 1- Air compressor
ignition switch if the engine starts. If the 2- Compressed air
 Do not run the engine at high speeds (for
engine fails to start, repeat these proce- example, by revving it or by accelerating 3- Cylinder
dures. If the engine still will not start, con- rapidly) immediately after starting it. 4- Turbo fin
tact your local Mitsubishi Motors dealer  Do not stop the engine immediately after 5- Turbine
or a repair facility of your choice for high-speed or uphill driving. First allow the 6- Exhaust gas
assistance. engine to idle to give the turbocharger a
chance to cool down.
Startability of CVT vehicle with Continuously variable
ambient temperature of -22 °F transmission (CVT)
(-30 °C) or lower
Turbocharger
N00560201073
The turbocharger increases engine power by The CVT will automatically and continuously
When the ambient temperature is -22 °F change its gear ratio depending on road and
pushing large amounts of air into the engine’s
(-30 °C) or lower, it may not be possible to driving conditions. This helps achieve
cylinders. The finned parts inside the turbo-
start from a standstill even with the selector smooth driving and excellent fuel efficiency.
charger turn at extremely high speeds and are
subjected to extremely high temperatures.

Continuously variable transmission (CVT)

If your vehicle is equipped with the spor- 3. Move the selector lever to the desired to avoid inadvertent selection of the wrong
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter, you can position. gear.
manually shift the transmission up and down.
Refer to “Sports mode” on page 5-65. NOTE
 The selector lever cannot be moved from “P”
(PARK) to other position if the ignition
DRIVING UPHILL switch is set to the “OFF” or “ACC” posi-
tion, or if the key has been removed, or the
The transmission prevents unnecessary operation mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if 5
upshifts even when the accelerator pedal is the brake pedal is not pressed and held down.
released and ensures smooth driving.
The CVT selects an optimum ratio automati-
DRIVING DOWNHILL cally when the selector lever is in the “D”
(DRIVE) position, depending on the speed of
According to the conditions, the transmission the vehicle and the position of the accelerator The lock button must be pushed
will automatically shift to a lower gear ratio pedal. while the brake pedal is depressed
to achieve stronger engine braking. This may The selector lever (A) has two gates; the main to move the selector lever.
help reduce your need to use the service gate (B) and sports mode gate (C).
The lock button must be pushed to
brake. move the selector lever.
The lock button need not be
Selector lever operation pushed to move the selector lever.
N00560301104
As an additional safety precaution, models

equipped with a CVT have a shift-lock device
WARNING
 If the lock button is always pushed to
that holds the selector lever in the “P”
operate the selector lever, the lever may be
(PARK) position. To move the selector lever
accidentally shifted into the “P” (PARK)
from the “P” (PARK) position to another or “R” (REVERSE) position. Be sure not
position, follow the steps below. to push the lock button when performing
1. Press and hold the brake pedal down. In the main gate, selector lever has four posi- the operations indicated by in the
2. Press and hold the lock button. tions, and is equipped with a lock button (D) illustration.


3. Insert a screwdriver with a cloth over its
WARNING When the selector lever cannot be
tip into the notch (A) of the cover. Pry
 Always press the brake pedal when shift- shifted from the “P” (PARK) posi- gently as shown to remove the cover.
ing the selector lever into a selector position
tion from the “N” (NEUTRAL) position. N00563301075
When beginning to drive, do not shift the
selector lever from the “N” (NEUTRAL) When the selector lever cannot be shifted
position while pressing the accelerator from the “P” (PARK) position to another
position while the brake pedal is pressed and
5 pedal. This will cause the vehicle to
“jump” forward or backward. held down with the ignition switch at the
“ON” position or the operation mode in ON,
the battery may be flat or the shift-lock mech-
NOTE anism may be malfunctioning.
 To prevent mistakes in operating the lever, Immediately have your vehicle checked by an
make sure you stop briefly at each position. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
After operating, check the position in the repair facility of your choice. 4. Depress the brake pedal with the right
multi-information display. If you need to move the vehicle, shift the foot.
 If the brake pedal is not depressed and held, selector lever as follows. 5. Insert a screwdriver in the shift-lock
the shift-lock device activates to prevent the release hole (B). Shift the selector lever to
selector lever from being moved from the 1. Make sure the parking brake is firmly the “N” (NEUTRAL) position while
“P” (PARK) position. pressing the screwdriver down.
applied.
 For a shift indicated by in the illustra- 2. Stop the engine if it is running.
tion, depress the brake pedal before moving
the selector lever. If you attempt to move the
selector lever before depressing the brake
pedal, the selector lever may be immovable.


If the ambient temperature is low, the selector
Selector lever position display lever position display on the multi-informa-
Warning display
N00560401105 N00560501106
tion display may blink when the selector
When the ignition switch is turned to the lever is placed in the “D” (DRIVE), or “R”
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in (REVERSE) position immediately after the
ON, the selector lever position is shown on engine has been started. This indicates that
the multi-information display. the transmission requires warming up. While
the display is blinking, the vehicle will not
move, because the transmission keeps disen- or 5
gaging until the warm up is completed even if
the selector lever is placed in the “D” or “R”
position.
When the selector lever position display is

blinking, perform the following procedure:
When the warning display or the warn-
1. Depress the brake pedal with your right ing display appears on the information screen
foot and place the selector lever in the in the multi-information display while you
“N” (NEUTRAL) position for several are driving, there could be a malfunction in
seconds. the CVT.
2. Keep depressing the brake pedal and then
When the selector lever position place the selector lever in the “D”
display blinks (DRIVE), or “R” (REVERSE) position. If
N00582900044 the selector lever position display stops
blinking, the warm up is completed and
WARNING the transmission will function normally.
 To avoid unintended vehicle movement, 3. If the display is still blinking, repeat steps
keep brake pedal applied with your right
1 and 2 above.
foot and do not depress the accelerator
pedal, while the selector lever position dis-
play is blinking. NOTE
 While the selector lever position display is
blinking, a buzzer will sound intermittently.

CAUTION Selector lever positions WARNING

 If a malfunction occurs in the CVT while N00560601110  Never move the selector lever to the “N”
driving, the warning display or the (NEUTRAL) position while driving since
“P” PARK you could accidentally slip it into the “P”
warning display will appear on the informa-
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position,
tion screen in the multi-information display.
damaging the transmission.
In this case, follow these procedures: This position locks the transmission to pre-  To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
[When warning display is showing] vent the vehicle from moving. The engine can
5 The CVT fluid is overheating. The engine be started in the “P” (PARK) position.
stopped on a slope, the engine should be
started in the “P” (PARK) position, not in
control may activate to lower the CVT fluid “N” (NEUTRAL) position.
temperature, causing the engine revolutions  To prevent rolling, always keep your foot
and vehicle speed to decrease, In this case,
“R” REVERSE
on the brake pedal when the vehicle is in
take one of the following procedures. “N” (NEUTRAL) position, or when shift-
• Slow down your vehicle. Move the lever to this position only after the ing into or out of “N” (NEUTRAL) posi-
• Stop your vehicle in a safe place, put the vehicle has come to a complete stop. tion.
selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position,
and open the engine hood with the engine
running to allow the engine to cool down.
CAUTION
 Never shift into the “P” (PARK) or “R” “D” DRIVE
After a while, confirm that the warning (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
display is no longer showing. It is safe to motion. If the lever is shifted into the “P” This position is used for most city and high-
continue driving if the display is no longer (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position while way driving. The transmission will automati-
showing. If the warning display remains or the vehicle is in motion, the transmission cally and continuously change its gear ratio
flashes frequently, have your vehicle may be damaged.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
depending on road and driving conditions.
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
“N” NEUTRAL CAUTION
[When warning display is showing]  To prevent transmission damage, never shift
It may be that there is something unusual into the “D” (DRIVE) position from the “R”
At this position, the transmission is disen- (REVERSE) position while the vehicle is in
happening in the CVT, causing a safety
device to activate. Have your vehicle
gaged. It is the same as the neutral position on motion.
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi a manual transaxle and should be used when
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your the vehicle is not moving for an extended
choice immediately. length of time during driving, such as in a
traffic jam.
Sports mode NOTE CAUTION

N00560701108 • Push the selector lever from the “D”  Repeated continuous operation of the selec-
Whether the vehicle is stationary or in (DRIVE) position into the manual gate (A) tor lever or the sportronic steering wheel
and push the selector lever back into the paddle shifter will continuously switch shift
motion, sports mode is selected by gently
main gate (B). position.
pushing the selector lever from the “D”
 Shift ranges may not change when the lateral
(DRIVE) position into sports mode gate (A).
paddle shifters are operated at the same time.
To return to “D” (DRIVE) operation, gently
push the selector lever back into the main 5
gate (B). NOTE
In sports mode, gear shifts can be made rap-  Shift ranges can only be selected in a for-
ward direction from 1st to 8th. To reverse or
idly simply by moving the selector lever
park the vehicle, move the selector lever to
backward and forward or using the sportronic the “R” (REVERSE) or “P” (PARK) posi-
steering wheel paddle shifter at the steering tion.
wheel (for vehicles equipped with the spor-  To maintain good running performance, the
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter). In con- transmission may refuse to perform an
trast to a M/T, the sports mode allows gear 1- (SHIFT UP) upshift when the selector lever or the spor-
shifts with the accelerator pedal depressed. Transmission shifts up once by each tronic steering wheel paddle shifter on the
operation. “ (SHIFT UP)” side is pulled at certain
2- (SHIFT DOWN) vehicle speeds. Also, to prevent over-revving
NOTE of the engine, the transmission may refuse to
Transmission shifts down once by each
 You can shift into sports mode with the spor- perform a downshift when the selector lever
tronic steering wheel paddle shifter when the
operation.
or the sportronic steering wheel paddle
selector lever is in the main gate (B) as well.
shifter on the “ (SHIFT DOWN)” side is
Also, you can return to the “D” (DRIVE)
CAUTION pulled at certain vehicle speeds. When this
operation in any of following ways.
happens, a buzzer sounds to indicate that a
When returning to “D” (DRIVE) operation,  Upward shifts do not take place automati-
downshift is not going to take place.
the selector lever position display will cally in sports mode. The driver must make
change to “D” (DRIVE) position. upward shifts in accordance with prevailing
• Pull the sportronic steering wheel paddle road conditions, making sure the engine rev-
shifter on the (SHIFT UP) side for lon- olutions remains below the red zone on the
ger than 2 seconds. tachometer.
• Stop the vehicle.

NOTE Operation of the CVT CAUTION

 Downward shifts are made automatically N00560801109  Do not rev the engine with the brake pedal
when the vehicle slows down. Before the pressed when the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically CAUTION This can damage the CVT.
selected.  Before selecting a position with the engine Also, when you depress the accelerator pedal
Also, the vehicle will automatically return to running and the vehicle stationary, firmly while holding down the brake pedal with the
“D” (DRIVE) operation if the vehicle is depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi- selector lever in the “D” (DRIVE) position,
5 stopped. cle from creeping.
The vehicle will begin to move as soon as the
the engine revolutions may not rise as high
as when performing the same operation with
CVT is engaged, especially when the engine the selector lever in the “N” (NEUTRAL)
Sports mode display position.
speed or idle speed is high, or with the air
N00560901083
conditioning operating.
In sports mode, the currently selected shift Do not release the brake pedal until you are
Passing acceleration
range is displayed on the information screen ready to drive away.
in the multi-information display.  Depress the brake pedal with the right foot at
all times. To gain extra acceleration in “D” (DRIVE)
Using the left foot could cause driver move- position (when passing another vehicle) push
ment delay in case of an emergency. the accelerator to the floor. The CVT will
 To prevent sudden acceleration, never run automatically downshift.
the engine at high revolutions when shifting
from the “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
 Operating the accelerator pedal while the
NOTE
other foot is resting on the brake pedal will  In sports mode, downshifts do not take place
affect braking efficiency and may cause pre- when the accelerator is depressed all the way
mature wear of brake pads. to the floor.
 Use the selector lever in the correct shift
position in accordance with driving condi-
tions. Waiting
Never coast downhill backward in the driv-
ing shift position {“D” (DRIVE) position or For short waiting periods, such as at traffic
sports mode} or coast forward in the “R”
lights, the vehicle can be left in selector lever
(REVERSE) position.
Engine stopping and increased brake pedal
position and held stationary with the service
and steering effort could lead to an accident. brake.

S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) (if so equipped)

For longer waiting periods with the engine conditions through integrated management of
When the CVT makes no speed
running, place the selector lever in the “N” the electronically controlled 4WD, the AYC
(NEUTRAL) position and apply the parking change (Active Yaw Control), the ABS and the ASC.
brake, while holding the vehicle stationary
with the service brake. If the CVT does not shift while driving, or
your vehicle does not pick up enough speed
CAUTION
Prior to moving off after having stopped the  Do not over-rely on the S-AWC. Even the S-
vehicle, make sure that the selector lever is in when starting on an uphill slope, it may be
AWC cannot prevent the natural laws of
“D” (DRIVE) position or Sports mode posi- that there is something unusual happening in
tion. the transmission, causing a safety device to
physics from acting on the vehicle. This sys-
tem, like any other system, has limits and
5
activate. Immediately have your vehicle cannot help you to maintain traction and con-
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors trol of the vehicle in all circumstances. Reck-
CAUTION dealer or a repair facility of your choice. less driving can lead to accidents. It is the
 To avoid transmission overheating, never try
driver’s responsibility to drive carefully.
to keep your vehicle stationary on a hill by
This means taking into account the traffic,
using the accelerator pedal. Always apply NOTE road and environmental conditions.
the parking brake and/or service brake.
 When the warning display and “SLOW
 Do not rev the engine unnecessarily while
the vehicle is stationary. Unexpected acceler- DOWN” or the warning display and
ation may occur if the selector lever is in a “SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the Electronically Controlled 4WD
position other than “P” (PARK) or “N” information screen in the multi-information
(NEUTRAL). display, there could be a malfunction in the The electronically controlled 4WD is a sys-
CVT. Refer to “Continuously variable trans- tem that improves acceleration performance
mission (CVT): Warning display” on page
and stability performance by controlling
Parking 5-63.
front-rear distribution of driving torque with
operating the electronic control coupling
To park the vehicle, first bring it to a com- arranged in the rear differential assembly.
plete stop, firmly apply the parking brake, S-AWC (Super-All Wheel
and then move the selector lever to the “P” Control) (if so equipped)
(PARK) position. N00541301091
S-AWC is an integrated vehicle dynamics

control system that helps enhance driving
performance, cornering performance, and
vehicle stability over a wide range of driving

4-wheel drive operation requires special driv-
NOTE CAUTION ing skills.
 On vehicles equipped with lever type park-  Control of the braking force does not
Carefully read the “4-wheel drive operation”
ing brake, if the parking brake lever is pulled enhance the stopping performance of the
section on page 5-70 and take care to drive
up while the vehicle is moving, the front-rear vehicle, therefore, pay careful attention to
distribution of driving torque control will be the safety of your surroundings when driv- safety.
temporarily suspended, which will allow the ing.
rear wheel to lock easier. S-AWC drive mode-selector
5 N00583000068
S-AWC drive mode The drive mode can be switched by press the
Active Yaw Control (AYC) N00542401099 switch while the ignition switch is in the
Select the drive mode from the following “ON” position or the operation mode in ON.
The AYC is a system with a yaw control three types to suit the driving conditions.
function, that controls the left-right driv-
ing/braking force using the brakes. S-AWC
drive Function
Yaw control function mode
This mode can be used on both
The yaw control function is a function that dry and wet roads. The distri-
enhances vehicle cornering performance and bution of driving/braking
AUTO
vehicle stability with management of vehicle torque to each wheel is auto-
turning power (yaw moment) by controlling matically controlled according
the drive power difference of the left and to the driving condition.
right wheels and the braking force when the If you press the switch, you can change the
This mode is for driving on
vehicle does not turn in response to steering drive mode in the order of AUTO, SNOW,
SNOW slippery road surfaces, such as
input, such as when the steering wheel is GRAVEL, AUTO.
snow-covered roads.
turned quickly or when driving on slippery
This mode is for driving where
road. CAUTION
maximum traction is required.
 Do not operate the drive mode-selector with
GRAVEL This mode is suitable for driv-
the front wheels spinning on a snowy road or
ing on rough roads or driving in similar conditions. The vehicle could
in mud, sand or fresh snow. lunge in an unexpected direction.

CAUTION CAUTION S-AWC operation display

 Driving on dry, paved roads in “GRAVEL”  If the selected drive mode indicator begins N00542501087
and “SNOW” mode causes increased fuel blinking, the drive mode will automatically The S-AWC operation status can be displayed
consumption and noise and vibration. switch to protect the drive-system compo-
on the information screen in the multi-infor-
nents. A warning will also be displayed in
mation display.
the information screen in the multi-informa-
To display the status, press the multi-informa-
NOTE tion display.
tion meter switch to change the information
 The drive mode can be switched while driv-
screen. 5
ing or stopped.
Refer to “Information screen (With the igni-
tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-145.
S-AWC drive mode display
Reduce speed and, if the indicator stops
N00583100043
blinking, you may resume normal driving. Display example
 If the drive mode indicator is blinking, a
problem has occurred with the S-AWC. A
warning will also be displayed in the infor- The S-AWC operation status is displayed.
mation screen in the multi-information dis-
play.
Example: “AUTO” mode is selected.
The currently selected drive mode is dis-

played on the multi-information display. Have your vehicle inspected immediately by
In addition, when the drive mode is changed, an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
the selected mode appears on the interrupt  Make sure that all four tires are the same
display screen of the information screen in specified size, type, and brand, and have no
the multi-information display. significant difference in the amount of wear
The drive mode display will appear on the for all four wheels. Otherwise, the S-AWC Yaw control function display
information screen for a few seconds, and
system may not work properly may be dis- The amount of the yaw moment is displayed
played. as a bar graph.
then the original screen will return.
A, D- Clockwise yaw moment about the
vehicle’s center of gravity
4-wheel drive operation

B, C- Counterclockwise yaw moment climbing ability and engine braking on steep
about the vehicle’s center of gravity slopes. You should try to avoid driving on
NOTE
 Driving on rough roads can be hard on a
steep slopes.
vehicle. Before you leave the pavement, be
Traction control level display Also, you must exercise caution when driving
sure all scheduled maintenance and service
The strength of the traction control opera- on sand and mud and when driving through has been done, and that you have inspected
tion (between the front and rear wheels) is water because sufficient traction may not be your vehicle. Pay special attention to the
displayed in section E of the meter as a bar available in certain circumstances. condition of the tires, and check the tire pres-
graph. Please avoid driving the vehicle through areas
5 where the tires may get stuck in deep sand or
sures.
 Mitsubishi Motors is not responsible to the
WARNING mud. operator for any damage or injury caused or
liability incurred by improper and negligent
 Always concentrate on your driving first.
operation of a vehicle. All techniques of
Keep your eyes and mind on the road. Dis- WARNING vehicle operation depend on the skill and
tractions while driving can lead to an acci-  Do not over-rely on the 4-wheel drive vehi- experience of the operator and other partici-
dent. cles. Even 4-wheel drive vehicles have lim- pating parties. Any deviation from the rec-
its to the system and ability to maintain ommended operating instructions above is at
control and traction. Reckless driving may their own risk.
4-wheel drive operation lead to accidents. Always drive carefully,  Note that the stopping distance required of
taking account of the road conditions. the 4-wheel drive vehicle differs very little
N00530601212
 Improperly operating this vehicle on or from that of the front-wheel drive vehicle.
Your vehicle has been designed primarily for off-pavement can cause an accident or When driving on a snow-covered road or a
use on pavement. rollover in which you and your passengers slippery, muddy surface, make sure that you
But its unique 4-wheel drive system allows could be seriously injured or killed. keep a sufficient distance between your vehi-
you to occasionally travel on unpaved roads, • Follow all instructions and guidelines in cle and the one ahead of you.
to campgrounds, picnic sites, and similar the owner’s manual.  The driving posture should be more upright;
locations. • Keep your speed low and do not drive adjust the seat to a good position for easy
Not only does this ensure better handling on faster than conditions. steering and pedal operation. Be sure to wear
dry, paved roads but also permits better trac- the seat belt.
tion when driving on slippery, wet or snow-  After driving on rough roads, check each
covered roads and when moving out of mud. part of the vehicle and wash it thoroughly
But it is not suitable for heavy off road use or with water. Refer to the “Inspection and
maintenance following rough road opera-
towing in rough conditions.
tion” section and “Vehicle care and Mainte-
It is particularly important to note that 4-
nance” sections.
wheel drive may not give sufficient hill

4-wheel drive operation
CAUTION NOTE CAUTION

 Setting the drive mode-selector to  Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, • If the engine coolant temperature display
“GRAVEL” and “SNOW” position to drive avoid sudden braking, and use engine brak- flashes on the information screen in the
on dry paved road will increase fuel con- ing (downshifting).
multi-information display or the engine
sumption, with possible noise and vibration
power drops suddenly.
generation.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
CAUTION
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
• If the “ ” warning display and “SLOW
5
Turning sharp corners and sharp turning. Skidding occurs and con- DOWN” or the “ ” warning display and
trol of the vehicle could be lost. “SERVICE REQUIRED” appear on the
information screen in the multi-information
When turning a sharp corner in “GRAVEL”
display.
position at low speed, a slight difference in
steering may be experienced similar to feel- Driving on sandy or muddy Refer to “Warning display” on page 5-63.
ing as if the brakes were applied. This is roads

called tight corner braking and results from WARNING
each of the four tires being at a different dis- Set the drive mode-selector to “GRAVEL”  When attempting to rock your vehicle out
tance from the corner. The phenomenon is and then gradually depress the accelerator of a stuck position, be sure that the area
typical of 4-wheel drive vehicles. If this pedal for a smooth start. Keep the pressure on around the vehicle is clear of people and
occurs, either straighten out the steering the accelerator pedal as constant as possible, physical objects. The rocking motion may
wheel or change to another mode. and drive at low speed. cause the vehicle to suddenly launch for-
ward/backward, causing injury or dam-
age to nearby people or objects.
On snowy or icy roads CAUTION
 Do not force the vehicle or drive recklessly
Set the drive mode-selector to “SNOW” in on sandy surfaces. In comparison with nor- NOTE
accordance with the road conditions, and then mal road surfaces, the engine and other
 Avoid sudden braking, sudden acceleration
gradually depress the accelerator pedal for a drive-system components are put under
and sharp turning; such operations could
excessive strain when driving on such a sur-
smooth start. result in the vehicle becoming stuck.
face. This could lead to accidents.
 If any of the following conditions occur
NOTE while the vehicle is being driven, immedi-
 The use of snow tires is recommended. ately park your vehicle in a safe place and
follow these procedures:

Inspection and maintenance following rough road operation

slowly to avoid creating excessive water  Carefully wash the vehicle with water.
NOTE splashing. Drive the vehicle slowly while lightly
 If the vehicle becomes stuck in sandy or
depressing the brake pedal in order to dry
muddy roads, it can often be moved with a
CAUTION out the brakes. If the brakes still do not
rocking motion. Move the selector lever
alternately between the “D” (DRIVE) and  Never drive through water that is deep
function properly, contact an authorized
“R” (REVERSE) positions while pressing enough to cover wheel hubs, axles or exhaust Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
lightly on the accelerator pedal. pipe. Do not change the selector lever posi- ity of your choice as soon as possible to
have the brakes checked.
5  Driving on rough road can cause rust on the
vehicle; wash the vehicle thoroughly as soon
tion while driving through water.
Frequent driving through water can  Remove the insects, dried grass, etc. clog-
as possible after such use. adversely affect the life span of the vehicle; ging the radiator core.
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  After driving through water, check the
dealer or a repair facility of your choice and engine, transaxle and differential oil. If
Climbing/descending sharp take the necessary measures to prepare, the oil or grease is milky or cloudy
grades inspect, and repair the vehicle.
because of water contamination, it must
 After driving through water, apply the brakes
be replaced with new oil.
to be sure they are functioning properly. If
Your vehicle may not provide sufficient hill  Check the inside of the vehicle. If water
the brakes are wet and not functioning prop-
climbing ability and engine braking on steep erly, dry them out by driving slowly while entry is found, dry the carpet etc.
slope. Avoid driving on steep slopes even lightly depressing the brake pedal. Inspect  Inspect the headlights. If water is in the
though the vehicle is an 4-wheel drive vehi- each part of the vehicle carefully. headlight housing, have it drained at an
cle. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice.
Driving through water Inspection and maintenance
N00537800085
following rough road opera- Cautions on the handling of
If the electrical circuits become wet, further
tion 4-wheel drive vehicles
operation of the vehicle will be impossible; N00530801230
N00530700085
therefore, avoid driving through water unless
absolutely necessary. If driving through water After operating the vehicle in rough road con-
is unavoidable, use the following procedure: ditions, be sure to perform the following Tires and wheels
inspection and maintenance procedures:
Check the depth of the water and the terrain Since the driving torque can be applied to the
before attempting to drive through it. Drive  Check that the vehicle has not been dam- four wheels, the driving performance of the
aged by rocks, gravel, etc.

Service brake
vehicle when operating in 4-wheel drive is
greatly affected by the condition of the tires.
Towing Jacking up a 4-wheel drive
vehicle
Pay close attention to the tires.
 Install only the specified tires on all WARNING

wheels. Refer to “Tires and wheels” on  Do not crank the engine while jacking up
page 11-7. the vehicle.
 Be sure all four tires and wheels are the The tire on the ground may turn and the 5
same size and type. vehicle may roll off the jack.
When it is necessary to replace any of the
tires or wheels, replace all four.
 All tires should be rotated before the wear Service brake
difference between the front and rear tires N00517500275
is recognizable.
Good vehicle performance cannot be

Brake pedal
expected if there is a difference in wear
between tires. Refer to “Tire rotation” on Overuse of the brake can cause weakening,
CAUTION resulting in poor brake response and prema-
page 9-17.  Do not tow 4-wheel drive vehicles with the
ture wear of the brake pads.
front or rear wheels on the ground (Type A
 Check the tire inflation pressure regularly. or Type B) as illustrated. This could result in When driving down a long or steep hill, use
damage to the drivetrain, or unstable towing. engine braking by downshifting.
CAUTION If you tow 4-wheel drive vehicles, use Type
 Always use tires of the same size, type, and
C or Type D equipment. WARNING
brand that have no wear differences. Using  Even in “AUTO” drive mode, the vehicle  Do not leave any objects near the brake
tires of different size, type, brands or degree cannot be towed with the front or the rear pedal or let a floor mat slide under it;
of wear, will increase the differential oil tem- wheels on the ground. doing so could prevent the full pedal
perature and result in possible damage to the stroke that would be necessary in an
driving system. Further, the drive train will emergency. Make sure that the pedal can
be subject to excessive loading, possibly be operated freely at all times. Make sure
leading to oil leakage, component seizure, or the floor mat is securely held in place.
other serious failures.

Brake auto hold (if so equipped)
CAUTION WARNING Brake auto hold (if so equipped)

 It is important not to drive the vehicle with  Never coast downhill with the engine OFF. N00592000048
your foot resting on the brake pedal when Keep the engine running whenever your
braking is not required. This practice can vehicle is in motion. If you turn off the When the vehicle is stopped at traffic lights
result in very high brake temperatures, pre- engine while driving, the power brake etc., the vehicle can be held stationary with
mature lining wear, and possible damage to booster will stop working and your brakes the brake auto hold system even if you
the brakes. will not work as well. release your foot from the brake pedal.
5  If the power assist is lost or if either brake
hydraulic system stops working properly,
When the accelerator pedal is depressed, the
brakes are released.
Power brakes take your vehicle to an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
N00517600364
ity of your choice immediately. WARNING
Your vehicle is equipped with power brakes  Do not overly rely on the brake auto hold
for more braking force with less brake pedal system. On steep slope, depress the brake
effort. Brake pad wear alarm pedal firmly because the system may not
Your brakes are designed to operate at full N00550700124
hold the vehicle stationary.
capacity, even if the power assist is not being  Never leave the vehicle while it is being
used. The disc brakes have an alarm that makes a stopped by the brake auto hold system.
If the power assist is not being used, the effort metallic squeal when the brake pads have When leaving the vehicle, apply the park-
needed to press the brake pedal is greater. worn down enough to need service. ing brake and move the selector lever to
If you should lose the power assist for some If you hear this sound, have the brake pads the “P” (PARK) position.
reason, the brakes will still work. replaced at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors  Do not use brake auto hold system when
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. driving on slippery roads. The system may
If the power brake unit or either of the two not hold the vehicle stationary and could
brake hydraulic systems stops working prop- result in an accident.
erly, the rest of the brake system will still WARNING
work, but the vehicle will not slow down as  Driving with worn brake pads will make it
quickly. harder to stop, and can cause an accident. NOTE
You will know this has happened if you find  While operating the brake auto hold system,
you need to press the brake down farther, or you may hear an operation noise to increase
harder when slowing down or stopping, or if braking force when the system detected the
the brake warning light and the warning dis- movement of the vehicle. This does not indi-
play in the multi-information display come cate a malfunction.
on.

How to use brake auto hold NOTE NOTE

• If this warning appears, confirm that all of  If keeping pressing the brake auto hold
the conditions for system operation are met switch after setting the brake auto hold to
To turn on brake auto hold and that there is no malfunction in the sys- ON (stand by), the brake auto hold will
tem. return to OFF as a protection function is
If the brake auto hold switch is pressed while operated.
all of the following conditions are met, the After returning to OFF, the brake auto hold
system will change to the standby state and
will not be switched to ON (Stand by) even if
the brake auto hold switch is pressed. To set
5
the indicator light (A) on the switch comes the brake auto hold to ON, restart the engine
on. and press the brake auto hold switch again.
• If this warning appears, fasten the driver’s
 The ignition switch or operation mode in seat belt.
ON. To activate brake auto hold
 The driver’s seat belt is fastened.
 The driver’s door is closed. When the vehicle is stopped by depressing
the brake pedal with the selector lever in any
position other than “P” (PARK) or “R”
 If any of the following occur while the sys- (REVERSE), the brake auto hold activates
tem is standby state, the brake auto hold sys- and the vehicle will be held stationary.
tem will be turned off automatically and the The brake auto hold indicator light in the
indicator light on the switch goes off. instrument cluster will come on while the
A buzzer will sound and the message will
system activates.
appear on the information screen in the
multi-information display.
• When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
• When the driver’s door is opened.
or
• When there is a malfunction in the system
NOTE
 When the brake auto hold system cannot be
used, a buzzer will sound and the following
warning will appear on the information
screen in the multi-information display.

CAUTION NOTE NOTE

 Release the brake pedal only after the brake  While the vehicle is held stationary with the  If the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
auto hold indicator light has illuminated. brake auto hold system, the Electric parking position or the operation mode is put in OFF
brake will be automatically applied under the with the selector lever in any position other
following conditions, and a buzzer will than “P” (PARK) position, the message may
NOTE sound and the message will appear on the appear on the information screen in the
information screen in the multi-information multi-information display.
 In the following situations, the brake auto
5 hold system may not operate temporarily.
display.
• After approximately 10 minutes has elapsed
If the message appears, shift the selector
lever to the “P” (PARK) position while
• The vehicle is stopped on a slippery road.
with applying the brake auto hold system. depressing the brake pedal.
• The vehicle was stopped while the steering
wheel was turned all the way to the left or
right. • When the driver’s door is opened.
• The vehicle is being turned on a parking lot • When the ignition switch is turned to the
turntable. “OFF” position or the operation mode is
If this occurs, the brake auto hold system put in OFF.
will return to the normal operation if you • When the system detects the vehicle mov-
depress the accelerator pedal and the vehi- ing down a slope. To start the vehicle
cle starts moving again.
 If the following operation is performed, the Depress the acceleration pedal with the selec-
brake auto hold will be deactivated and the tor lever in any position other than “P”
brake auto hold indicator light in the instru- (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
ment cluster goes off. The brakes are released, and the brake auto
• When shifting the selector lever to the “P” If the Electric parking brake cannot be hold indicator light in the instrument cluster
(PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position with applied automatically due to the system mal-
will go off.
depressing the brake pedal. function, the message will appear on the
• When the Electric parking brake is applied information screen in the multi-information
by using the Electric parking brake switch. display. Depress the brake pedal.

Hill start assist

3. Depress the accelerator pedal and the hill
To turn off brake auto hold CAUTION start assist will gradually decrease the
 Do not overly rely on the hill start assist to
Press the brake auto hold switch to turn off braking force as the vehicle starts moving.
prevent backwards movement of the vehicle.
the brake auto hold. The indicator light on the Under certain circumstances, even when hill
switch goes off. start assist is activated, the vehicle may NOTE
If you want to turn off the system while the move backwards if the brake pedal is not suf-  The hill start assist is activated when all of
brake auto hold indicator light is illuminated, ficiently depressed, if the vehicle is heavily the following conditions are met.
press the switch with depressing the brake loaded, or if the road is very steep or slip-
pery.
• The engine is running. 5
pedal. (The hill start assist will not be activated
 The hill start assist is not designed to keep while the engine is starting or immediately
the vehicle stopped in place on uphill slopes after the engine is started.)
NOTE for more than 2 seconds.
• The selector lever is in any position other
 If the brake auto hold system is turned off  When facing uphill, do not rely on using the than “P” (PARK) or “N” (NEUTRAL).
without the brake pedal being depressed, a hill start assist to maintain a stopped position
buzzer will sound and the message will • The vehicle is completely stationary, with
as an alternative to depressing the brake
appear on the information screen in the the brake pedal depressed.
pedal.
multi-information display. • The parking brake is released.
Doing so could cause an accident.
 The hill start assist will not operate if the
 Do not turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
accelerator pedal is depressed before the
or “ACC” position while the hill start assist
brake pedal is released.
is operating. The hill start assist could stop
operating, which could result in an accident.  The hill start assist also operates when
reversing on an uphill slope.
To operate
Hill start assist N00562701144
Warning light/display
N00562801129
N00562601130 1. Stop the vehicle completely using the
brake pedal. If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
The hill start assist makes it easy to start off
2. Release the brake pedal and the hill start tem, the following warning light/display will
on a steep uphill slope by preventing the
assist will maintain the braking force turn on.
vehicle from moving backwards. It keeps the
braking force for approximately 2 seconds applied while stopped for approximately 2
seconds. Warning light
when you move your foot from the brake
pedal to the accelerator pedal. - ASC indicator

Brake assist system

Warning display
CAUTION NOTE
 The brake assist system is not a device  When the anti-lock brake system warning
designed to exercise braking force greater light or only active stability control warning
than its capacity. Make sure to always keep a light illuminate, the brake assist system in
sufficient distance between your vehicle and not functioning.
a vehicle in front of you without relying too
much on the brake assist system.
CAUTION Anti-lock braking system
5  If the warning is displayed, the hill start N00517901351
assist will not operate. Start off carefully. NOTE The anti-lock braking system helps prevent
 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the  Once the brake assist system is operational, the wheels from locking up when braking.
engine. it maintains great braking force even if the This helps maintain vehicle drivability and
Restart the engine and check whether the brake pedal is lightly released. steering wheel handling.
light/display goes out, in which case the hill To stop its operation, completely remove
start assist is again working normally. your foot from the brake pedal.
If they remain displayed or reappear fre-  The brake assist system may become opera- Driving hints
quently, it is not necessary to stop the vehicle tional when the brake pedal is fully
immediately, but the vehicle should be depressed even if it has not been depressed  When using the anti-lock brakes (sudden
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi suddenly. braking), steering is slightly different
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your  When the brake assist system is in use while from normal driving conditions. Use the
choice as soon as possible. driving, you may feel as if the depressed steering wheel carefully.
brake pedal is soft, the pedal moves in small  Always keep a safe distance from the
motions in conjunction with the operation vehicle in front of you. Even if your vehi-
Brake assist system noise, or the vehicle body and the steering cle is equipped with the anti-lock braking
wheel vibrate. This occurs when the brake system, leave a greater braking distance
N00567301145
assist system is operating normally and does
The brake assist system is a device assisting when:
not indicate faulty operation. Continue to
drivers who cannot depress the brake pedal depress the brake pedal.
• Driving on gravel or snow-covered
firmly such as in emergency stop situations  You may hear an operation noise when the
roads.
and provides greater braking force. brake pedal is suddenly or fully depressed • Driving on uneven road surfaces.
while stationary. This does not indicate a
If the brake pedal is depressed suddenly, the malfunction and the brake assist system is
brakes will be applied with more force than operating normally.
usual.

Anti-lock braking system

 Operation of anti-lock braking system is
not restricted situations where brakes are
NOTE CAUTION
 The anti-lock braking system can be used  Any of the following indicates that the anti-
applied suddenly. This system may also
after the vehicle has reached a speed over lock braking system is not functioning and
prevent the wheels from locking when
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). It stops only the standard brake system is working.
you drive over manholes, steel roadwork working when the vehicle slows below (The standard brake system is functioning
plates, road markings, or any uneven road 3 mph (5 km/h). normally.) If this happens, take your vehicle
surface. to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
 When the anti-lock braking system is in
use, you may feel the brake pedal vibrat- Anti-lock braking system warn-
a repair facility of your choice.
• When the ignition switch is in the “ON”
5
ing and hear a unique sound. It may also ing light / display position or the operation mode is put in ON,
feel as if the pedal resists being pressed. N00531601701 the warning light does not come on or it
In this situation, simply hold the brake Warning light remains on and does not go off
pedal down firmly. Do not pump the • The warning light comes on while driving
brake, which will result in reduced • The warning display appears while driving
braking performance.
CAUTION
Warning display If the warning light/display illu-
 The anti-lock braking system cannot prevent minate while driving
accidents. It is your responsibility to take N00531701669
safety precautions and to drive carefully.

 To prevent failure of the anti-lock braking If only the anti-lock braking sys-
system, be sure all four wheels and tires are tem warning light/display illumi-
the same size and the same type. If there is a malfunction in the system, the nate
anti-lock braking system warning light will
come on and the warning display will appear  Avoid hard braking and high-speed driv-
NOTE on the information screen in the multi-infor- ing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
 A whining sound is emitted from the engine mation display. Test the system by restarting the engine
compartment when driving immediately Under normal conditions, the anti-lock brak- and driving at a speed of approximately
after starting the engine. These are the nor- ing system warning light only comes on when
mal sounds the anti-lock braking system
12 mph (20 km/h) or higher.
the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” If the warning light/display then remains
makes when performing a self-check. It does
not indicate a malfunction.
position or the operation mode is put in ON off during driving, there is no abnormal
and goes off a few seconds later. condition.

Electric power steering system (EPS)

However, if the warning light/display do The anti-lock braking system and brake force
Front Rear
not disappear, or if they come on again distribution function may not work, so hard
when the vehicle is driven, have the vehi- braking could make the vehicle unstable.
cle checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Avoid hard braking and high-speed driving.
Motors dealer or repair facility of your Stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact an
choice as soon as possible. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or repair
5 If the anti-lock braking system
warning light/display and brake NOTE
warning light/display illuminate at  The anti-lock braking system warning light
and brake warning light illuminate at the
the same time same time and the warning displays appear
alternately on the information screen in the
Warning light multi-information display. Electric power steering sys-
tem (EPS)
N00568401127
After driving on icy roads The power steering system operates while the
N00529201104 engine is running. It helps reduce the effort
(red)
After driving on snow or icy roads, remove needed to turn the steering wheel.
any snow and ice which may have be left The power steering system has mechanical
Warning display around the wheels. When doing this, be care- steering capability in case the power assist is
ful not to damage the wheel speed sensors lost. If the power assist is lost for some rea-
(A) and the cables located at each wheel. son, you will still be able to steer your vehi-
cle, but you will notice it takes much more
effort to steer. If this happens, have your vehi-
cle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi
choice.

Active stability control (ASC)

Warning display and traction. Please read this section in con-
WARNING junction with the page on the anti-lock brak-
 Do not stop the engine while the vehicle is
ing system, traction control function and skid
moving. Stopping the engine would make
control function.
the steering wheel extremely hard to turn,
possibly resulting in an accident.
Anti-lock braking system  P.5-78
If there is a malfunction in the system, the Traction control function  P.5-82
warning light will come on and the warning Skid control function  P.5-82
NOTE display will appear on the information screen 5
 During repeated full-lock turning of the
in the multi-information display. CAUTION
steering wheel (for example, while you are
Under normal conditions, the warning light  Do not over-rely on the ASC. Even the ASC
manoeuvring the vehicle into a parking
space), a protection function may be acti- come on when the ignition switch is turned to cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
vated to prevent overheating of the power the “ON” position or the operation mode is from acting on the vehicle. This system, like
steering system. This function will make the put in ON, and goes off after the engine has any other system, has limits and cannot help
steering wheel gradually harder to turn. In started. you to maintain traction and control of the
this event, limit your turning of the steering vehicle in all circumstances. Reckless driv-
wheel for a while. When the system has ing can lead to accidents. It is the driver’s
cooled down, the steering effort will return
CAUTION responsibillty to drive carefully, This means
to normal.  If the warning display appears while the taking into account the traffic, road and envi-
engine is running, have the vehicle inspected ronmental conditions.
 If you turn the steering wheel while the vehi-
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or  Be sure to use the same specified type and
cle is stationary with the headlights on, the
a repair facility of your choice as soon as size of tire on all four wheels. Otherwise, the
headlights may become dim. This behavior
possible. It may become harder to turn the ASC may not work properly.
is not abnormal. The headlights will return to
steering wheel.
their original brightness after a short while.  Do not install any aftermarket limited slip
differential (LSD) on your vehicle. The ASC
may stop functioning properly.
Electric power steering system Active stability control
warning light/display (ASC)
N00559100147
Warning light The Active stability control (ASC) takes

overall control of the anti-lock braking sys-
tem, traction control function and skid control
function to help maintain the vehicle’s control
NOTE CAUTION ASC OFF switch

 An operation noise may be emitted from the  When driving a vehicle on a snowy or icy N00559401310
engine compartment in the following situa- road, be sure to install snow tires and drive
tions. The sound is associated with checking the vehicle at moderate speeds. The ASC is automatically activated when the
the operations of the ASC. At this time, you ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
may feel a shock from the brake pedal if you tion. You can deactivate the system by press-
depress it. These do not indicate a malfunc- ing down the ASC OFF switch for 3 seconds
Skid control function
5 tion.
• When the ignition switch is set to the “ON”
N00559301074
or longer.
When the ASC is deactivated, the indica-
position. The skid control function is designed to help
the driver maintain control of the vehicle on tor will turn on. To reactivate the ASC,
• When the vehicle is driven for a while after
slippery roads or during rapid steering momentarily press the ASC OFF switch; the
the engine is turned on.
 When the ASC is activated, you may feel a maneuvers. It works by controlling the engine indicator is turned off.
vibration in the vehicle body or hear a whin- output and the brake on each wheel.
ing sound from the engine compartment.
This indicates that the system is operating
normally. It does not indicate a malfunction. NOTE
 When the anti-lock braking system warning  The skid control function operates at speeds
light is illuminated, the ASC is not active. of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or higher.
Traction control function

N00559200021
On slippery surfaces, the traction control

function prevents the drive wheels from spin-
ning excessive, thus helping the vehicle to
start moving from a stopped condition. It also
CAUTION
 For safety reasons, the ASC OFF switch
provides sufficient driving force and steering
should be operated when your vehicle is
performance as the vehicle turns while press- stopped.
ing the acceleration pedal.  Be sure to keep the ASC on while driving in
normal circumstances.

NOTE CAUTION NOTE

 Using the ASC OFF switch turns off both the  When display/indicator blinks, ASC is  When a spare tire has been put on your vehi-
stability control function and the traction cle, the gripping ability of the tire will be
operating, which means that the road is slip-
control function. lower, making it more likely that the dis-
pery or that your vehicle’s wheels are begin-
 When moving out of mud, sand or fresh ning to slip. If this happens, drive slower. play/indicator will blink.
snow, pressing the accelerator pedal may not
 If the temperature in the braking system con-
allow the engine speed to increase. In such
tinues to increase due to continuous brake
situations, temporarily turning off ASC with ASC warning light/display 5
the ASC OFF switch will make it easier to control on a slippery road surface, the N00546601158
move out your vehicle. indicator will blink.
To prevent the brake system from overheat-
If an abnormal condition occurs in the sys-
 If you continue to press the ASC OFF switch
ing, the brake control of the traction control tem, the following warning light/display will
after the ASC is turned off, the “mistaken
operation protection function” will activate function will be temporarily suspended. turn on.
and the ASC will turn back on. The engine control of the traction control
function and normal brake operation will not Warning light
be affected.
Park your vehicle in a safe place. When the - ASC indicator
ASC operation display or ASC temperature in the braking system has come
OFF indicator down, the indicator will be turned off and - ASC OFF indicator
N00559501252
the traction control function will start operat-
ASC operation display/ASC indicator ing again.
-
The display/indicator will blink when Warning display
the ASC is operating.
ASC OFF indicator NOTE
-
This indicator will turn on when the  The indicator may come on when you
ASC is turned off with the ASC OFF start the engine. This means that the battery
switch. voltage momentarily dropped when the
engine was started. It does not indicate a
malfunction, provided that the display goes
out immediately.

Cruise control
CAUTION Cruise control Cruise control switches

 The system may be malfunctioning. N00518301668
Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the
Cruise control is an automatic speed control
engine. Restart the engine and check whether
the light/display goes out. If they go out,
system that keeps a set speed. It can be acti-
there is no abnormal condition. If they do not vated at speeds from approximately 20 mph
go out or if they turn on frequently, it is not (30 km/h). Cruise control does not work at
speeds below approximately 20 mph
5 necessary to stop the vehicle immediately,
but you should have your vehicle inspected (30 km/h).
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
a repair facility of your choice as soon as
possible.
CAUTION
 When you do not wish to drive at a set speed,
turn off the cruise control for safety.
 Do not use cruise control when driving con- A- CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch
Towing ditions will not allow you to stay at the same Used to turn on and off the cruise con-
N00546301083 speed, such as in heavy traffic or on roads trol.
that are winding, icy, snow-covered, wet, B- “SET -” switch
CAUTION slippery, on a steep downhill slope. Used to reduce the set speed and to set
 If the 2WD vehicle is towed with the ignition the desired speed.
switch in the “ON” position or the operation C- “RES +” switch
mode in ON and only the front wheels or NOTE Used to increase the set speed and to
only the rear wheels raised off the ground,
 Cruise control may not be able to keep your return to the original set speed.
the ASC may operate, resulting in an acci-
dent. When towing the 2WD vehicle with the
speed on uphills or downhills. D- “CANCEL” switch
front wheels raised, keep the ignition switch  Your speed may decrease on a steep uphill. Used to deactivate the set speed driving.
You may use the accelerator pedal if you
in the “OFF” or “ACC” position or the oper-
ation mode in ACC or OFF. When towing want to stay at your set speed.
the vehicle with the rear wheels raised, keep  Your speed may increase to more than the set NOTE
the ignition switch in the “ACC” position or speed on a steep downhill. You have to use  When operating the cruise control switches,
the operation mode in ACC. the brake to control your speed. As a result, press the cruise control switches correctly.
Refer to “Towing” on page 8-11. the set speed driving is deactivated. The set speed driving may be deactivated
automatically if two or more switches of the
cruise control are pressed at the same time.

Cruise control
The “SET” indicator appears on the infor-
To activate RES + switch
mation screen of the multi-information
N00518401454
display.
1. With the ignition switch in the “ON” posi- Push up and hold the “RES +” switch (C)
tion or the operation mode in ON, press while driving at the set speed, and your speed
the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF switch will then gradually increase.
(A) to turn on the cruise control. The indi- When you reach your desired speed, release
cator display appear on the information the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
screen of the multi-information display set. 5
will come on.
NOTE
 When you release the “SET -” switch (B),
the vehicle speed will be set.
To increase your speed in small amounts,
push up the “RES +” switch (C) for less than
approximately 1 second and release it.
2. Accelerate or decelerate to your desired To increase the set speed
Each time you push up the “RES +” switch
N00518501400
speed, then push down and release the (C), your vehicle will go approximately
“SET -” switch (B) when the indicator There are two ways to increase the set speed. 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
display appear on the information screen
of the multi-information display. The
Accelerator pedal
vehicle will then maintain the desired
speed.
While driving at the set speed, use the accel-
erator pedal to reach your desired speed and

Cruise control
then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and
release the switch momentarily to set a new
desired cruising speed.
To slow down your speed in small amounts,

push down the “SET -” switch (B) for less
than approximately 1 second and release it.
To temporarily increase or
Each time you push down the “SET -” switch decrease the speed
(B), your vehicle will slow down by approxi- N00541701109
To decrease the set speed mately 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

N00518601339
To temporarily increase the speed
There are two ways to decrease the set speed. Brake pedal
Depress the accelerator pedal as you would
normally. When you release the pedal, you
SET - switch While driving at the set speed, use the brake
will return to your set speed.
pedal, which disengages the cruise control,
then push down the “SET -” switch (B) and
Push down and hold the “SET -” switch (B)
release the switch momentarily to set a new
while driving at the set speed, and your speed
desired cruising speed.
will slow down gradually.
When you reach your desired speed, release
the switch. Your new cruising speed is now
set.

Cruise control
The set speed driving is deactivated automati-
cally in any of the following ways.
 When your speed slows to approximately

10 mph (15 km/h) or more below the set
speed because of a hill, etc.
 When your speed slows to approximately
20 mph (30 km/h) or less.
 When the active stability control (ASC) 5
starts operating.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)”
on page 5-81.
NOTE
 In some driving conditions, the set speed To deactivate
driving may be deactivated. If this happens, N00518801650
WARNING
refer to “To activate” on page 5-85 and  Although the set speed driving will be
The set speed driving can be deactivated as deactivated when shifting to the “N”
repeat the speed setting procedure.
follows: (NEUTRAL) position, never move the
selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
 Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF position while driving.
To temporarily decrease the speed switch (A) (Cruise control will be turned You would have no engine braking and
off.) could cause a serious accident.
Depress the brake pedal to decrease the  Press the “CANCEL” switch (D).
speed. To return to the previously set speed,  Depress the brake pedal. Also, the set speed driving may be deacti-
push up the “RES +” switch (C). vated as follow:
Refer to “To resume the set speed” on page
5-88.  When the engine speed rises and
approaches the tachometer’s red zone (the
red-colored part of the tachometer dial).

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) (if so equipped)
CAUTION Adaptive Cruise Control

 When the set speed driving is deactivated
automatically in any situation other than
System (ACC) (if so equipped)
N00576800064
those listed above, there may be a system
malfunction.
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
Press the CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF
switch to turn off the cruise control and have
maintains a set speed with no need for you to
use the accelerator pedal. Using a sensor (A),
5 your vehicle inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility the system also measures the relative speed
of your choice. and distance between your vehicle and a vehi-
cle in front, and maintains a set following dis-
tance between your vehicle and the vehicle in
To resume the set speed front by automatically decelerating your vehi-
N00518901387
cle if it becomes too close to the vehicle in
front.
If the set speed driving is deactivated by the Under either of the following conditions, The cruising set speed can be set from 20 to
condition described in “To deactivate” on however, using the switch does not allow you 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h). The distance can
page 5-87, you can resume the previously set to resume the previously set speed. In these be selected from four levels.
speed by push up the “RES +” switch (C) situations, repeat the speed setting procedure: If the vehicle in front decelerates, the ACC
while driving at a speed of approximately 20
will automatically apply limited braking to
mph (30 km/h) or higher.  The CRUISE CONTROL ON/OFF maintain the distance, and if the front vehicle
The “SET” indicator appears on the informa- switch is pressed. then accelerates, the ACC will automatically
tion screen of the multi-information display.  The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” accelerate your vehicle up to the set speed. If
position or the operation mode is put in your vehicle is approaching too close to the
OFF. front vehicle, a buzzer will sound and a warn-
 Indicator go off. ing is shown in the multi-information display.
When the ACC detects no vehicle ahead, the
set speed will be maintained.
Conventional cruise control mode without the
distance control can also be selected.
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic
braking.

Cruise control switch NOTE

N00577000047  Operate the individual switches correctly and
one after another.
The ACC may be turned off or its control
function may be cancelled if two or more
switches are pressed concurrently
5
ACC indicators
N00577100048
While the ACC is turned on, indicators for

WARNING the ACC are shown in the multi-information
 Before using the ACC, read this entire sec- display.
1- ACC ON/OFF switch
tion to understand the limitations of this
Used to turn on and off the ACC sys-
system. Failure to follow instructions
tem.
could result in an accident.
2- “SET -” switch
 Never rely solely on the ACC. The ACC is
not a collision avoidance system or an Used to set a desired speed or to reduce
automatic driving system. It is designed to the set speed.
use only limited braking and is never a 3- “RES +” switch
substitute for your safe and careful driv- Used to resume the control function
ing. Always be ready to apply the brakes after cancelling the ACC or the conven-
manually. tional cruise control.
Also used to increase the set speed.
4- “CANCEL” switch
Used to cancel the control function of 1- ACC indicator:
the ACC or the cruise control. Indicating that the ACC is turned on.
5- ACC distance switch 2- Control state indicator:
Used to set or change the following dis- Indicating that ACC is activated.
tance between your vehicle and a vehi- Two types of indication; “SET” and
cle in front. “HOLD” (stationary vehicle hold state)


3- Set speed indicator: 5-Following distance indicator: State
Indicating the set speed. Indicating the following distance.
Stand by Active
If the set speed is not set, “---” is Two states: “Stand by” and “Active”
shown. When a front vehicle is detected while
4- Front vehicle indicator: the ACC is activated, the Active follow-
Indicating when the ACC detects a ing distance indicator shown in the illus-
vehicle ahead. tration below will illuminate.
When a front vehicle is detected while When a front vehicle is detected while
5 the ACC is activated, the Active front the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
How to use ACC
vehicle indicator shown in the illustra- canceled, the Stand by following dis-
N00577200065
tion below will illuminate. tance indicator will illuminate.
When a front vehicle is detected while
the ACC is not activated or the ACC is
To turn on ACC
canceled, the Stand by front vehicle State
When the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi-
indicator will illuminate. Stand by Active tion or the operation mode in ON, press the
ACC ON/OFF switch.
State
Display
Stand by Active
Vehicle in
front detected


The ACC indicators will appear in the multi- While the ACC system is turned on (in the
information display.
NOTE standby state), if you push down the “SET -”
 Every time the operation mode is turned off,
switch when a vehicle in front is detected
the ACC is turned off and the set speed is
while your vehicle is stopped and you are
erased.
depressing the brake pedal, “HOLD” will
appear and the vehicle speed will be set to
NOTE To activate ACC control 20 mph (30 km/h).
 Every time the ignition switch is in the
“OFF” position or the operation mode in
With the ACC turned on, push down the 5
“SET -” switch while driving, and when your
OFF, the ACC is turned off.
vehicle reaches your desired speed, release
the “SET -” switch. The ACC will activate You can set the speed anywhere from approx-
and initiate the speed control to maintain the imately 20 to 110 mph (30 to 180 km/h).
To turn off ACC
set speed. While a vehicle in front is being detected and
Press the ACC ON/OFF switch to turn off the your vehicle speed is between approximately
ACC. 0 to 20 mph (0 to 30 km/h), you can activate
the ACC. In this case, the set speed will be set
at 20 mph (30 km/h).
The ACC cannot otherwise be activated while
your vehicle is traveling less than 20 mph
(30 km/h) or greater than 110 mph
(180 km/h).
NOTE
 When any of the following conditions are
The set indicator comes on, the set speed is present, the ACC will not activate.
indicated and the following distance indicator • When your vehicle speed is more than
changes to the active display. 110 mph (180 km/h).
• When your vehicle is driven at speeds
NOTE between approximately 0 to 20 mph (0 to
 The ACC can be turned off even while the 30 km/h) and the ACC is not detecting a
ACC is active. vehicle in front.
• When ASC is in the OFF position.

NOTE When ACC detects a vehicle in

• While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated. front within the set distance
• When the selector lever is in positions other N00581400042
than “D” (DRIVE).
The ACC will maintain the distance to the
• While the brake pedal is depressed (only
while the vehicle is moving). front vehicle and will apply the brakes auto-
matically when the system judges braking is WARNING
• While the parking brake is applied.
necessary. The distance can be selected from  Never leave your vehicle while the ACC
5 • When the ACC system has judged that the
four levels. system is in the stationary vehicle hold
performance for detecting a front vehicle is
state. When leaving the vehicle, apply the
degraded.
parking brake and move the selector lever
• When an abnormality in the ACC system to the “P” (PARK) position.
has been detected.
When the front vehicle stops, the ACC will
• When the driver’s door is opened.
automatically apply the brakes to stop your NOTE
• When the vehicle is stopped on a steep
vehicle.  When the ACC system is in the stationary
slope.
After the vehicle stops, the ACC system auto- vehicle hold state, the stop lights will illumi-
matically enters the stationary vehicle hold nate.
When ACC detects no vehicle state. “HOLD” appears.  While the ACC system is in the stationary
vehicle hold state, the vehicle will not start
in front within the set distance moving again unless you press the “RES+”
N00581300038
switch or depress the accelerator pedal.
The speed of your vehicle will be maintained  When depressing the brake pedal while the
at the speed you have set. The speed can be While the ACC system is in the stationary automatic brake is applied, the brake pedal
set between approximately 20 to 110 mph (30 vehicle hold state, if it is possible to resume will feel firm. This is normal. Depress the
to 180 km/h). following the vehicle in front because it has brake pedal harder to apply greater braking
started moving, “ACC READY TO force.
 During the automatic braking, operation
NOTE RESUME” will appear on the information
sounds may be heard. This is normal.
 If the vehicle speed exceeds the set speed on screen of the multi-information display. To
 If the turn-signal lever is operated while the
a down slope, the system will automatically start moving again, press the “RES+” switch
ACC is active, the system may accelerate the
apply the brake to maintain the vehicle set or depress the accelerator pedal. vehicle to assist you in passing a vehicle in
speed. front.

NOTE WARNING WARNING

 If the vehicle in front starts moving within • When driving on a curve.  When the ACC is not being used, turn off
2 seconds after stopping, your vehicle will the system to avoid unexpected ACC acti-
start moving. vation.
 Never operate the ACC from outside the
When the ACC no longer detects a vehicle in vehicle.
front, the buzzer will sound, the vehicle sym-  The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
bol in the display will disappear and your
vehicle will slowly accelerate to the set
and/or give the approach alarm in the fol-
lowing cases.
5
speed.  When the vehicle in front has changed its • When an object other than a vehicle,
course or lane, if a stationary vehicle such as a pedestrian, is in front.
appears in front your vehicle, the ACC • When a malfunction is detected in the
will not decelerate your vehicle. system.
 The ACC will not decelerate your vehicle
in the following cases, but will give the
WARNING Approach alarm approach alarm.
 Your vehicle may accelerate up to the set N00576900052 • When the front vehicle is stationary or
speed in the following situations. Apply
While the ACC is activated, if your vehicle is moving at an extremely slow speed.
the brake, if necessary, to slow down.
approaching too closely to the vehicle in • When your brake system has a problem,
• When your vehicle no longer follows the
front, the ACC gives a warning by sounding a such as overheating.
vehicle in front, e.g. at a freeway exit or
when your vehicle or the vehicle in front buzzer and displaying a message. Apply the  The ACC may not be able to maintain the
set speed or the distance to a vehicle in
changes its lane. brakes to maintain the appropriate distance to
front and may not alert the driver, if the
the vehicle in front.
system cannot detect the front vehicle
properly. Typical situations include:
• When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
close distance.
• When a vehicle in front is not completely
in your path.
• When a vehicle in front is towing a
trailer.
• When a motorcycle or a bicycle is in
front.

WARNING WARNING CAUTION

• When a vehicle in front is a truck loaded • When driving on a winding road.  To maintain proper performance of the ACC:
with freight that protrudes rearward • Always clean the surface of the radar sen-
from the cargo bed. sor.
• When the height of a vehicle in front is • Avoid impacting the radar sensor or its sur-
extremely low or the road clearance of rounding area.
the vehicle is extremely high. • Do not put a sticker on the radar sensor or
5 • When driving on a road with alternating
up and down surfaces.
its surrounding area.
• Do not paint the radar sensor.
• When driving on a curve.  Never use the ACC in the following situa- • Do not install a grill guard.
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road. tions: • Do not modify the radar sensor or its sur-
• When driving in a tunnel. • In heavy traffic. rounding area.
• When driving in construction zones. • On winding roads. • Always use tires of the same size, same
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed • On slippery roads, such as icy, snow-cov- type, and same brand, and which have no
down with the weight of passengers and ered or dirt roads. significant wear differences.
luggage • In adverse weather conditions, such as • Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
• For up to 2 minutes after starting driv- rain, snow or sand storms, etc.
ing. • On steep downslopes.
• When driving in curved sections of road • When the inclination of a road fre- To increase the set speed
including their entrance/outlet or run- quently changes. N00581500043
ning beside a closed lane in a traffic work
• When the approach alarm frequently
or similar zone. There are two ways to increase the set speed.
sounds.
• When your vehicle is towed or is towing
another vehicle. By using the “RES +” switch:
• When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers. The set speed will increase by 1 mph
• When tire inflation pressures are not (1.6 km/h) every time you push up the
adequate. “RES +” switch while the ACC is activated.
• When the temporary spare tire is being If you hold the switch pushed up, the set
• When the surface of the sensor is covered used.
with dirt, snow, ice, etc. speed increases in 5 mph (8 km/h) incre-
• When the radar sensor and/or its sur-
• When a front vehicle or an oncoming ments.
rounding area are damaged or deformed.
vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt.


When the vehicle speed reaches your desired
speed, push down and release the “SET -”
To decrease the set speed
N00581600044
switch and release the accelerator pedal; the
new speed is then set in the system. There are two ways to decrease the set speed.
By using the “SET -” switch:
The set speed will decrease by 1 mph 5

(1.6 km/h) every time you push down the
“SET -” switch while the ACC is activated. If
you hold the switch pushed down, the set
NOTE speed decreases in 5 mph (8 km/h) incre-
ments.
 There is some time lag until the vehicle
begins accelerating to the new set speed after
the set speed has been changed.
 The set speed can be changed even while
your vehicle is following a vehicle in front WARNING
using the ACC. In this case, however,  The ACC braking control and approach
although the set speed itself is increased, alarm functions will not work while the
your vehicle will not accelerate. accelerator pedal is depressed.
 While the ACC system is in the stationary
vehicle hold state, the vehicle speed cannot
be set. NOTE
 The set speed indicator in the multi-informa-
tion display will show “---” while the accel-
By using the accelerator pedal: erator pedal is depressed.
 If the “SET -” button is not pushed down NOTE
while depressing the accelerator pedal, your  There is some time lag until the vehicle
When the accelerator pedal is depressed
vehicle speed will return to the set speed, begins decelerating after the set speed has
while driving with the ACC control working,
after the accelerator pedal is released. When been changed.
you can accelerate the vehicle beyond the
the accelerator pedal is released, the ACC
presently set speed.
braking control and approach alarm func-
tions may not immediately work.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The set speed can be changed even while  The ACC control will not resume after  The set speed indication on the display turns
your vehicle is following a vehicle in front releasing the brake pedal. to “---” when the accelerator pedal is
using the ACC. In this case, however, depressed. This indication remains as long as
although the set speed itself is decreased, the pedal is in a depressed position.
your vehicle will not decelerate.  In certain conditions, the braking control and
To temporarily accelerate the
 While the ACC system is in the stationary alarming functions of ACC may not work for
vehicle
5 vehicle hold state, the vehicle speed cannot
be set. N00582800030
a short while after releasing the accelerator
pedal.
Simply depress the accelerator pedal to tem-
By using the brake pedal: porarily accelerate the vehicle. Releasing the
pedal to restart the ACC control. To cancel ACC control
N00581700074
By depressing the brake pedal while the ACC
There are two ways to cancel the ACC con-
is activated, the ACC control is canceled and
trol.
your vehicle speed will decrease.
At the point where the vehicle speed reaches  By pressing the “CANCEL” switch.
your desired speed, push down and release  By depressing the brake pedal.
the “SET -” switch; the new speed is then set
in the system.
WARNING
 The ACC braking control and approach
alarm functions will not work while the
accelerator pedal is depressed.


In any of the situations listed below, the ACC  When the system detects the vehicle mov-
NOTE control is automatically canceled, a buzzer ing down a slope while the vehicle is in
 You can also cancel the ACC control by
sounds and a message is shown in informa- the stationary vehicle hold state.
pressing the ACC ON/OFF switch. If this
tion screen of the multi-information display.
switch is pressed while the ACC is ON, the
If the ACC system judges that the stationary
ACC will be turned off.
If the ACC system is in the stationary vehicle vehicle hold state can no longer be main-
 If you press the “CANCEL” switch or ACC
hold state, it will also be automatically can- tained on a steep slope after your vehicle
ON/OFF switch to cancel the stationary
celed and the Electric parking brake will stops when the vehicle in front stops, the sta-
vehicle hold state, the vehicle will start
creeping. operate. tionary vehicle hold state is cancelled and a 5
warning appears on the information screen of
When the ACC is canceled, the “SET” indi- the multi-information display.
cator goes off and the following distance indi- Depress the brake pedal.
cator turns to the standby display. The front
vehicle indicator also turns to the standby dis-
play when a front vehicle is detected.
If the detection performance of the ACC sys-

tem has degraded, such as in the following
 When the ASC is turned off. situations, or if the ACC system judges that it
 While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated. can temporarily not operate, the ACC system
 When the selector lever is in a position operation will be cancelled automatically, and
other than “D” (DRIVE). then a buzzer will sound and a message will
 When the parking brake is applied. appear to inform the driver.
 When the driver’s seat belt is unfastened.
 When the driver’s door is opened.
 When the ACC no longer detects any
vehicle in front while it is in the stationary
vehicle hold state.
 When the vehicle is in the stationary vehi-
cle hold state for 10 minutes or more. This can occur when


 The brake system is overheating due to ON, contact your authorized Mitsubishi moving again, push up the “RES +” switch or
continuous brake control on long down- Motors dealer. depress the accelerator pedal.
hill slope.
5 NOTE
To resume the control
 When any of the following conditions are
This can occur when N00581800062
present, the ACC control cannot be resumed.
After the ACC control has been canceled with • When your vehicle speed is more than
 In adverse weather conditions, such as the ACC turned on, the ACC control can be 110 mph (180 km/h).
rain, snow or sand storms, etc. resumed by pushing up and releasing the • When your vehicle is driven at speeds
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, “RES +” switch. between approximately 0 to 20 mph (0 to
adhere to the surface of the sensor. 30 km/h) and the ACC is not detecting a
 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is vehicle in front.
splashing water, snow or dirt. • When ASC is in the OFF position.
 Driving on a nonbusy road with a few • While ABS, ASC or TCL is activated.
vehicles and obstacles in front. • When the selector lever is in positions other
than “D” (DRIVE).
If the display keeps showing the message, • While the brake pedal is depressed.
there is a possibility that the ACC has a mal- • While the parking brake is applied.
function. Contact your authorized Mitsubishi • When the ACC system has judged that the
Motors dealer. performance for detecting a front vehicle is
degraded.
When the ACC system detects an abnormal- • When an abnormality in the ACC system
ity in the system, the ACC system will be has been detected.
While the ACC system is in the stationary
turned off, a buzzer will sound and a message • While the brake pedal is depressed, the
vehicle hold state, if it is possible to resume
will be displayed in the multi-information vehicle will not start moving again even if
following the vehicle in front because it has
display. the driver operates the switches.
started moving, “ACC READY TO
If the message remains after the operation
RESUME” will appear on the meter. To start
mode is put in OFF, and then turned back to


For operation of the cruise control, refer to
To change the following dis- “Cruise control” on page 5-84.
Long
tance
N00581900047
NOTE
Every time you press the ACC following dis-  The conventional cruise control does not
tance setting switch, the set following dis- sound or display the approach alarm, will not
tance changes in order. Even after turning off adjust your vehicle speed, and does not con-
the ACC system or putting the operation
mode in OFF, the system retains your last
trol the distance between your vehicle and a
vehicle in front.
5
selected following distance setting in mem-
ory.
General information
N00582100059
Short
FCC ID: OAYARS4A (for vehicles sold in
the U.S.A.)
IC: 4135A-ARS4A (for vehicles sold in the
Canada)
To activate conventional cruise
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
control Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
N00582000045
RSS standard(s).
Press and hold the ACC ON/OFF switch Operation is subject to the following two con-
while the operation mode is in the ON posi- ditions.
tion. A buzzer will sound and the multi-infor-
NOTE mation display will show the following  This device may not cause harmful inter-
 Actual distance will vary depending on your ference.
indicator.
vehicle speed and the front vehicle speed.
The distance will become longer when the
vehicle speeds are higher.
The following distance indicator shows the The conventional cruise control is turned off
level of the following distance: when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is turned off.

Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) (if so equipped)

When the FCM judges that a collision with
CAUTION the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
WARNING
 Changes or modifications not expressly  Before using the FCM, read this entire
highly unavoidable, the system will apply
approved by the party responsible for com- section to fully understand the limitations
emergency braking to reduce the severity of
pliance could void the user’s authority to of this system. Failure to follow instruc-
operate the equipment. the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col- tions could result in an accident.
lision.  The FCM is designed to help avoid certain
Stop lights are illuminated during automatic frontal collisions or reduce the crash
braking.
5 Forward Collision Mitiga- speed in such collisions. It is not a substi-
tute for your safe and careful driving.
tion system (FCM) (if so Under certain circumstances, the system
may not operate or may not detect cor-
equipped)
rectly a vehicle or a pedestrian in front.
N00577300079
When your vehicle is approaching a vehi-
cle or a pedestrian too closely, take all nec-
The Forward Collision Mitigation system
essary actions to avoid a collision, such as
(FCM) is designed to help reduce the risk of a braking and steering, regardless of
collision with a vehicle or a pedestrian whether the FCM is activated or not.
straight ahead of your vehicle. The FCM uses Never rely on the FCM to prevent a colli-
a sensor (A) to determine the distance and sion.
relative speed to a vehicle and a pedestrian in  Never attempt to test the operation of the
front. The FCM is not designed as an auto- FCM. Doing so could cause an accident,
matic driving system or as a collision avoid- resulting in serious injury or death.
ance system.
When your vehicle is approaching a vehicle
or a pedestrian straight-ahead in your path
and the FCM judges that there is the risk of a
collision, the system will give audible and
visual warnings.
When the FCM judges that a collision with
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is
imminent, the system will automatically
apply moderate braking to warn you to apply
the brakes immediately.

Forward collision warning FCM braking function WARNING

function N00577700086  If the ASC is turned off, the FCM braking
N00577400054
When the FCM judges that a collision with function will not operate. Refer to “Active
the vehicle or the pedestrian straight-ahead is stability control” on page 5-81.
If the system judges that there is a risk of
imminent, the FCM will automatically apply  If the brake pedal is not depressed within
your vehicle colliding with a vehicle or the
moderate braking to warn the driver to apply 2 seconds after your vehicle has been
pedestrian in front, this function warns you of
the brakes immediately. stopped by the FCM, a warning buzzer
the potential hazard with visual and audible
alarms. If the FCM judges that the collision is highly will sound and the brakes activated by the
FCM will automatically be released.
5
When this function is triggered, a buzzer unavoidable, it will automatically apply
Apply the brakes as necessary to keep
sounds and, at the same time, a “BRAKE” emergency braking to reduce the severity of your vehicle stationary.
message appears on the information screen of the collision and, if possible, to avoid the col-  The FCM will not activate and will not
the multi-information display. lision. provide either warning or braking in cer-
The FCM will also prepare to provide quick While the FCM applies emergency braking, a tain situations. Some of these include:
brake response and greater brake force when buzzer sounds and “BRAKE!” message is • When the selector lever is in the “P”
you apply the brakes. displayed in the information screen of the (PARK) or “R” (REVERSE) position.
multi-information display. • When an object other than a vehicle or a
Once the FCM braking has activated, the fol- pedestrian is in front.
lowing message will appear on the informa- • When the FCM has detected a problem
tion screen of the multi-information display. in the system.
• When a vehicle or a pedestrian suddenly
cuts in front of your vehicle.
The forward collision warning function oper-  The FCM may or may not detect a motor-
ates at the following vehicle speeds: cycle, bicycle or wall depending on the sit-
uation. The FCM is not designed to detect
 Against a vehicle: Approximately 10 to these objects.
112 mph (15 to 180 km/h). The FCM braking function operates at the  The forward collision warning function
 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 5 to following vehicle speeds: and/or the FCM braking function may not
40 mph (7 to 65 km/h). activate in certain situations. Some of
 Against a vehicle: Approximately 3 to these include:
112 mph (5 to 180 km/h). • When a vehicle suddenly appears just in
 Against a pedestrian: Approximately 3 to front of your vehicle.
40 mph (5 to 65 km/h). • When a vehicle cuts into your path at a
close distance.


• When a vehicle ahead is not completely • When the system recognizes driver’s • If the pedestrian is wearing loose-fitting
in your path. steering, accelerating, braking or gear clothes.
• When your vehicle changed lanes, and shifting actions as evasive actions to • If part of a pedestrian’s body is hidden,
your vehicle approached immediately avoid collision. such as when holding an umbrella, large
behind the vehicle ahead. • When the rear of your vehicle is weighed bag, etc.
• When a vehicle ahead is towing a trailer. down with the weight of passengers and • If a pedestrian bends forward, sits or lies
5 • When a vehicle ahead is a truck loaded luggage.
• Up to several seconds after starting driv-
on the road.
with freight that protrudes rearward • When a pedestrian is pushing/pulling
from the cargo bed. ing. something, such as a stroller, bicycle or
• When the height of a vehicle ahead is • In adverse weather conditions, such as wheelchair.
extremely low or its road clearance is rain, snow, fog or sand-storm. • When pedestrians gather in a group.
extremely high. • When the windshield of the sensor por- • When a pedestrian clothing appears to
• When a vehicle ahead is extremely dirty. tion is covered with dirt, water droplets, be nearly the same color or brightness as
• When a vehicle ahead is covered with snow and ice, etc. its surroundings.
snow. • When a vehicle ahead or an oncoming • When a pedestrian is very close to an
• When a vehicle ahead has a large glass vehicle is splashing water, snow or dirt. object, such as a vehicle.
surface. • When using a windshield washer. • When a pedestrian is in a dark area, such
• When a vehicle ahead does not have • If windshield wipers are not Mitsubishi as at night or in a tunnel.
reflectors (light reflector) or the position Motors Genuine parts or equivalent. • When a pedestrian is walking fast or
of the reflector is low. • When the sensor becomes extremely hot running.
• When a vehicle ahead is a car carrier or or cold. • When a pedestrian suddenly rushes in
a similar shaped vehicle. • If the battery becomes weak or runs front of the vehicle.
• When accelerating and decelerating down. • When the position of a pedestrian is close
quickly. • When the sensor is affected by strong to the edge of the vehicle.
• When driving on a slippery road covered light, such as direct sunlight or the head-  When the system recognizes driver’s
by rain water, snow, ice, etc. lights of an oncoming vehicle. steering or accelerating actions as evasive
• When driving on a road with alternating  The FCM may not detect a pedestrian in actions to avoid a collision, FCM control
up and down steep slopes. certain situations. Some of these include: and alarm functions may be canceled.
• When driving on a curve. • If the pedestrian is shorter than approxi-  In certain situations, though there is little
• When driving on a bumpy or rough road. mately 3.2 feet (1 m) or taller than or no risk of a collision, the FCM may
• When driving in dark areas, such as in a approximately 6.5 feet (2 m). activate. Examples include:
tunnel or at night. • When overtaking a vehicle.


• When driving on a curve. • When a vehicle in the next lane becomes • When your vehicle is towed or your vehi-
• When there is a road side object (B) that positioned directly in front of your vehicle tows another vehicle.
reflects the radar sensor signal, such as a cle due to winding road conditions. • When your vehicle is carried on a truck.
road sign. • When your vehicle is on a chassis dyna-
mometer or free rollers.
• If the windshield on or surrounding the
sensor is cracked or scratched. 5
NOTE
• When passing through an area that  When depressing the brake pedal while auto-
• When approaching a gate, a railroad objects may contact the vehicle, such as matic braking is applied, the brake pedal will
crossing, an underpass, a narrow bridge, thick grass, tree branches, or a banner. feel firm. This is normal. Depress the brake
manhole lid or a speed bump. • When there are patterns on the road that pedal harder to apply greater braking force.
• When driving under an overpass or may be mistaken for a vehicle or a pedes-  During the automatic braking, operating
pedestrian bridge. trian. sounds may be heard. This is normal.
• When driving in a narrow tunnel. • When a vehicle cuts into your path in the
• When driving in a parking structure. detecting range of the sensor.
• When approaching a slope where the • When an oncoming vehicle is positioned
incline changes significantly. straight ahead of your vehicle on a
• When trying to stop your vehicle very curved road.
close to a vehicle or an object in front. • When the FCM detects a long object car-
• When passing a vehicle, a pedestrian or ried on your vehicle, such as skis or a
an object closely. roof carrier.
• When driving through fog, steam, smoke
or dust.
 The FCM should be tuned off if any of the
following situations occur:
• When using an automatic car wash.
• When the tires are not properly inflated.
• When the emergency spare tire is used.

FCM ON/OFF switch To turn on/off the FCM To change forward collision warn-
N00577800074 ing distance
This switch is used to turn on or off the FCM, Every time the ignition switch is turned to the
and also to select the distance which will trig- “ON” position or the operation mode is put in
ON, the FCM will automatically be turned The distance to the vehicle ahead which trig-
ger the forward collision warning function. gers the forward collision warnings can be
on.
To turn off the FCM, press and hold the FCM selected from three levels (FAR, MIDDLE or
NEAR).
5 ON/OFF switch. The following message will
To change the distance mode, push the FCM
appear on the information screen of the multi-
ON/OFF switch. Every time the switch is
information display and the indicator will pushed, the distance mode will be switched.
come on in the instrument cluster. The selected distance mode is shown on the
information screen of the multi-information
display.
Distance mode: FAR
To turn on the FCM again, press the FCM

ON/OFF switch. The indicator on the
instrument cluster will go off, and a current
distance mode for the forward collision warn-
ing will be shown in the information screen Distance mode: MIDDLE
of the multi-information display.


Distance mode: NEAR  Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow, ice,
mist or dew condensation adhere to the
NOTE
 The “DRIVER ASSISTANCE CAMERA
windshield of the sensor portion.
BLOCKED” message may temporarily
 In adverse weather conditions, such as
appear on the information screen when the
rain, snow, sand storms, etc. sensor cannot detect a vehicle, a pedestrian
 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is or an object within range. This is not a mal-
splashing water, snow or dirt. function. When a vehicle or an object comes
NOTE  Driving on a nonbusy road with a few within range, the FCM function will resume
5
 Actual distance which triggers the forward vehicles and obstacles in front. and the message will go off.
collision warnings will vary depending on
your vehicle speed and the front vehicle The following message will appear on the
speed. The distance will become longer information screen of the multi-information When the system cannot operate
when the vehicle speeds are higher. display and the indicator will come on in temporarily
 The distance which will trigger the FCM
the instrument cluster. N00595100024
braking function cannot be adjusted.
If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
able for some reason, the following message
will appear on the information screen of the
System problem warning
multi-information display, the indicator
N00594800024
will come on in the instrument cluster, and
If there is a malfunction in the system, a or
the FCM will automatically be turned off.
warning will appear on the information
screen of the multi-information display
depending on the situation.
When the camera and radar can-

not detect accurately When the sensor performance returns, the
If the message continues showing, there is a
N00594900025 FCM functions will resume operation.
possibility that the FCM has a malfunction.
When the FCM system determines that it can- If the message continues showing, there is a
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
not detect objects properly, the FCM will possibility that the sensor has a malfunction.
dealer for inspection of the system.
become inoperative. Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
This can occur when: dealer for inspection of the sensor.

Sensor is too hot or cold FCM deactivation due to fault NOTE

N00595200025 N00595300026  If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
If the system becomes temporarily unavail- If the FCM detects a malfunction in the sys- extremely hot (after prolonged exposure to
able due to the high or low temperature of the tem, either of the following messages will direct sunlight, for example), the “FCM
sensor, the following message will appear on appear on the information screen of the multi- SERVICE REQUIRED” message may
the information screen of the multi-informa- appear.
information display, the indicator will
After the temperature of the sensor or its sur-
tion display, the indicator will come on in come on in the instrument cluster, and the
5 the instrument cluster, and the FCM will FCM will automatically be turned off.
rounding area has been in range, if the mes-
sage remains even after restarting the engine,
automatically be turned off. please contact an authorized Mitsubishi
After the temperature of the sensor has been Motors dealer.
in range, the system will automatically return
to operation.
Handling of the sensor
N00593400052
The sensor (A) is located inside the wind-

shield and front bumper as shown in the illus-
tration.
If the message continues showing, there is a The sensor is shared in the following sys-
possibility that the FCM has a malfunction. tems:
Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors If the message remains even after the ignition
dealer for inspection of the sensor. switch is turned to the “OFF” position and  Forward Collision Mitigation system
then turned back to “ON” position or the (FCM)*
operation mode is put in OFF, and then turned  Lane Departure Warning (LDW)*
back to “ON”, please contact your authorized  Automatic High Beam (AHB)*
Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)*
*: if so equipped
If the display keeps showing the message,
there is a possibility that the FCM has a mal-
function.
dealer.

CAUTION CAUTION
• Do not apply an impact or load on the sen- • Do not spray glass cleaner on the sensor.
sor or its surrounding area. Also, do not spill liquid, such as a bever-
• Do not put anything including a sticker or age, on the sensor.
film to the outer side of windshield in front • Do not install an electronic device, such as
of or surrounding the area of the sensor. an antenna, or a device that emits strong
Also, do not put anything including a electric waves, near the sensor.
sticker of film to inner side of the wind-
shield under the sensor.
• Always use tires of the same size, same
type and same brand, and which have no
5
significant wear differences.
• Do not modify the vehicle’s suspensions.
 If the windshield in front of the sensor or in
the surrounding area of the sensor is cracked
or scratched, the sensor may not detect an
object properly. This could cause a serious
accident. Turn off the FCM and have your
vehicle inspected as soon as possible at an
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the If you need to replace the windshield, con-
sensor and sensor mounting screw. tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
• The sensor front cover should not be modi-  The sensor emits infrared rays when the
fied or painted. operation mode is in ON. Do not look into
• Do not cover the sensor mounted area with the sensor by using optical goods such as a
a license plate or anything such as a grill magnifying glass. The infrared ray might
CAUTION guard, etc. injure your eyes.
 To maintain proper performance of the FCM, • If the windshield is misted, remove the mist
LDW and AHB; from the windshield by using the defogger
switch.
Laser radar specifications
• Always keep clean the windshield and front
bumper. • Maintain the wiper blades in good condi-
If the inside of the windshield where the tion. Refer to “Wiper blades” on page 9-39. Laser classification
sensor is installed becomes dirty or fogged, When replacing the wiper blades, use only
contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts or equiva-
Max average power 45 mW
dealer. lent.
• Do not dirty or damage the sensor. Pulse duration 33 ns

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (with Lane Change Assist) (if so equipped)
Wavelength 905 nm side where the Blind Spot Warning light is
illuminated, the Blind Spot Warning light will
WARNING
Divergent angle blink and the system will beep three times to  Never rely solely on the BSW system when
28° x 12°
(horizon x vertical) alert the driver.
changing lanes. BSW is an aid only. It is
not a substitute for your safe and careful
Depending on the relative speed between driving. Always check visually behind and
Laser classification label your vehicle and a vehicle in the next lane, all around your vehicle for other vehicles.
the BSW will detect up to approximately The performance of the BSW may vary
230 feet (70 m) from your vehicle (Lane
5 Change Assist).
depending on driving, traffic and/or road
conditions.
Detection areas
N00592300054
The BSW uses two sensors (A) located inside

the rear bumper.
The detection areas are shown as illustrated.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

(with Lane Change Assist) (if
so equipped)
N00592200053
The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) is a driving WARNING

aid system that alerts the driver when another  Before using the BSW, read this entire sec-
tion to fully understand the limitations of
vehicle which may not be visible through the
this system. Failure to follow instructions
outside rearview mirror is traveling in the could result in an accident.
next lane behind your vehicle.
When a vehicle in the next lane is traveling at
same speed or faster in the detection areas,
the Blind Spot Warning light in the corre-
sponding outside rearview mirror will illumi-
nate. If the turn signal lever is operated to the

WARNING WARNING
• When the heights of the next lane and • When a bicycle carrier or accessory is
your lane are different. installed to the rear of the vehicle.
• Immediately after the BSW has been • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
turned on. (while the vehicle is parked for a long
• Immediately after the engine switch is period of time under a blazing sun or in
turned on. cold weather).
• Under adverse weather conditions, such 5
as rain, snow, strong winds, snow or sand
storm. CAUTION
• When your vehicle becomes too close to  To maintain proper performance of the BSW,
another vehicle. follow the instructions below.
• While multiple vehicle are overtaking • Always clean the bumper surface around
your vehicle. the sensor.
• When driving near a pot hole and tram- • Avoid impacting the sensor or its surround-
line. ing area.
• When a surrounding vehicle or an • Do not put a sticker on the sensor or its sur-
oncoming vehicle is splashing water, rounding bumper surface.
snow or dirt. • Do not paint the sensor or its surrounding
• When driving on a curve including the bumper surface.
beginning and the end of the curve. • Do not modify the sensor or its surrounding
• When driving on a road with alternating area.
up and down steep slopes.  If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
WARNING • When driving on a bumpy or rough road. sensor may have been damaged and the BSW
 In certain situations, the BSW may not • When the rear of your vehicle is weighed may not function properly. Have the vehicle
detect a vehicle in the detection areas or down or your vehicle is leaning to the inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
the detection may be delayed. Some of right or left due to the weight of passen- dealer.
these include; gers and luggage or the improper adjust-
• When a small motorcycle or a bicycle is ment of tire pressure.
behind your vehicle. • When the bumper surface around the To operate
• When a vehicle is traveling alongside of radar sensor is covered with dirt, snow
N00593500053
your vehicle at nearly the same speed for and ice, etc.
prolonged periods of time.
ON and “ON” is selected in the “BSW” set-
When the sensor detects an
ting screen, the BSW indicator light in the
instrument cluster comes on and the BSW approaching vehicle
enters the standby state. When the BSW indicator light in the instru-
When “OFF” is selected in the “BSW” set- ment cluster is on, if a vehicle is approaching
ting screen, the BSW indicator light in the your vehicle in the detection area, the Blind
instrument cluster goes off and the BSW Spot Warning light in the outside rearview
turns off.
5 To turn the BSW ON/OFF, follow the proce-
mirror illuminates.
If the turn signal lever is operated to the side
dure below. where the Blind Spot Warning light is illumi-
1. Switch to the function setting screen. nated, the Blind Spot Warning light will blink
If you turn the BSW ON/OFF, the Rear Cross and the system will beep three times to alert
Refer to “Multi-information display
Traffic Alert (RCTA) also turns ON/OFF at the driver.
switches” on page 5-142.
the same time.
Refer to “Changing the function settings”
on page 5-152.
2. Press the switch or switch several
NOTE
 When the operation mode is set to OFF, the
times to switch to the “BSW” screen. selected condition just before setting to OFF
Then, press the switch to the setting is retained.
selection screen.  The BSW operates when all of the following
conditions are met.
3. Press the switch or switch to
• The ignition switch is turned to the “ON”
select “ON” or “OFF”, and then press the
position or the operation mode is put in ON.
switch to confirm the setting. • The selector lever is in positions other than
“P” (PARK) and “R” (REVERSE).
Indicator light • The speed of your vehicle is approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher. NOTE
 The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
rearview mirror may come on or blink in the
following conditions.
• When driving very near the guardrail or the
concrete wall.

NOTE When there is a malfunction in the When the sensor is temporarily

• When driving on the entrance and outlet of system or the sensor not available
the tunnel or very near the wall or near the N00592700045 N00592800046
evacuation area inside the tunnel.
• When turning a intersection in a town area.
• Under adverse weather conditions (rain,
snow, sand storm etc.).
• When the your vehicle drives with blowing 5
up the water, snow or sand etc. on the road. When the warning display appears, the sensor
• When driving near a curb, pot hole and When the warning display appears, the BSW is temporarily not available for some reason
tramline. does not operate normally because there are such as the environmental condition or
 Set the BSW to OFF when towing. some malfunctions in the system or the sen- increase of the sensor temperature. When the
 The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside sor. Have the vehicle inspected at an autho- warning display does not disappear after
rearview mirror may not look due to strong rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as soon as waiting for a while, contact an authorized
direct sunlight or the glare from the head- possible. Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
lights of vehicles behind you during night
driving.
NOTE
 When the warning display appears, the BSW
System problem warning will be deactivated.
N00592400042
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual

warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.
The warnings are combined with the Rear
Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system.

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped)
When there is a foreign objects on (1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
Rear Cross Traffic Alert
the sensor (2) This device must accept any interference (RCTA) (if so equipped)
N00592900050
received, including interference that may N00593000058

The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is an
aid system for backing up. When the RCTA
system detects vehicles approaching from
5 CAUTION
sides while your vehicle is reversing, the
When the warning display appears, the radar  FCC Warning
Blind Spot Warning lights in outside rearview
sensor cannot detect a vehicle traveling side Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
mirrors on both sides will blink and a buzzer
by side or an approaching vehicle, because will sound to alert the driver. A warning mes-
foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, pliance could void the user’s authority to
operate the equipment. sage will also appear on the information
adhere to the bumper surface around the sen- screen of the multi-information display.
sor.
Remove a dirt, freezing or foreign material on For vehicles sold in Canada
the bumper surface around the sensor. Applicable law: Canada 310
When the warning display does not disappear
after having cleaned the bumper surface This device complies with Industry Canada
around the sensor, contact an authorized licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
General information (1) This device may not cause interference,

N00593900057 and
For vehicles sold in U.S.A. (2) This device must accept any interference,
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A including interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
Rules. Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz
Operation is subject to the following two con- Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
ditions:

WARNING Detection areas

 Never rely solely on the RCTA when back-
ing up. The RCTA is an aid system. It is The detection area is shown as illustrated.
not a substitute for your safe and careful
driving. Always check visually behind and
all around your vehicle for other vehicles,
persons, animals or obstructions.
The performance of the RCTA may vary
depending on driving, traffic and/or sur-
5
rounding conditions.
NOTE
 The Blind Spot Warning lights in the outside
rearview mirrors on both sides will blink,
even when only one vehicle is approaching
from one side.
WARNING
 Before using the RCTA, read this entire
section to fully understand the limitations
of this system. Failure to follow instruc- CAUTION
tions could result in an accident.  In certain situations, the RCTA may not
detect a vehicle in the detection areas. Some
of these situations include;
• When the reversing speed of your vehicle is
approximately 11 mph (18 km/h) or higher.

BK0252700US.book 114 ページ２０１７年１０月１２日　木曜日　午後１時２分
CAUTION To operate General information

• When an approaching vehicle speed is N00594000055
approximately 4 mph (7 km/h) or less. 1. Press the BSW switch while the operation
For vehicles sold in U.S.A.
• If the sensor detection area is blocked by a mode is put in ON.
FCC ID: OAYSRR3A
nearby object, such as wall or parked vehi- (Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To
cle. operate” on page 5-109.) This device complies with Part 15 of FCC
• When a vehicle is approaching from 2. When the selector lever is moved to the Rules.
5 straight behind your vehicle. “R” (REVERSE) position, the RCTA will Operation is subject to the following two con-
• When your vehicle is exiting from an operate. ditions:
angled parking spot.
NOTE (1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and
 Set the RCTA to OFF when towing.
(2) This device must accept any interference
 The Blind Spot Warning light in the outside
rearview mirror may not look due to strong received, including interference that may
direct sunlight or the glare from the head- cause undesired operation.
lights of vehicles behind you during night
driving.
CAUTION
• Immediately after the RCTA has been  FCC Warning
turned on.
• Immediately after the operation mode has
When a problem is detected in Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for com-
been put in ON. the system pliance could void the user’s authority to
• When the bumper surface around the sensor operate the equipment.
is covered with dirt, snow and ice, etc. If the system detects a problem, a warning is
• When the sensor becomes extremely hot or displayed on the information screen in the
cold, such as after the vehicle has been For vehicles sold in Canada
multi-information display. Applicable law: Canada 310
parked for a prolonged time under the blaz-
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): Sys-
ing sun or in cold weather.
tem problem warning” on page 5-111. This device complies with Industry Canada
 If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
sensor may have been damaged and the licence-exempt RSS standard(s).
RCTA may not function properly. Have the Operation is subject to the following two con-
vehicle inspected at an authorized Mitsubishi ditions:
Motors dealer.

BK0252700US.book 115 ページ２０１７年１０月１２日　木曜日　午後１時２分
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) (if so equipped)

(1) This device may not cause interference, To turn on the LDW, press the LDW switch.
and The indicator (white) will appear on the
(2) This device must accept any interference, information screen of the multi-information
including interference that may cause display.
undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 - 24.25 GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts 5
Lane Departure Warning
(LDW) (if so equipped)
WARNING
N00577900062 To turn off the LDW, press the LDW switch.
 Never rely solely on the LDW. The LDW is
The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) is a not a collision avoidance system and is not The indicator on the information screen of
driving aid system to help prevent uninten- a substitute for your safe and careful driv- the multi-information display will then go
tional lane departure. The LDW is designed ing. out.
to read lane markers by using a sensor (A)  Before using the LDW, read this entire To return the LDW to “ON”, press the LDW
under certain conditions. The LDW will give section to understand the limitations of switch again.
you both visual and audible warnings when this system. Failure to follow instructions
your vehicle is leaving or has left the lane. could result in an accident.
To turn on/off the LDW

N00578000057
NOTE
 The LDW is turned on when the vehicle is
shipped from the factory.
 The currently selected LDW setting (on or
off) is stored even when the ignition switch
is turned to the “OFF” position or the opera-
tion mode is put in OFF.

Operation of the LDW Lane departure warning WARNING

N00581100049 N00581200066  The LDW will not function when no lane
The LDW, when turned ON, is capable of While the indicator in the information dis- marker exists, such as at an intersection
play is lit in green, if your vehicle is leaving or near a toll booth.
recognizing the lane in which your vehicle is
or has left the lane, a buzzer will sound inter-  The LDW may not operate correctly in the
travelling and issuing an audible warning
following situations and the LDW may not
when your vehicle begins to leave that travel mittently, “LANE DEPARTURE” will appear
give warnings or may give false warnings:
lane. When operating, the indicator on the on the information screen of the multi-infor-
5 information screen in the multi-information mation display and the indicator will be
• When lane markers are not clearly visi-
ble due to rain, snow, fog, dark area, etc.
display will be changed from white to green. flashing in yellow. • When the road surface is shiny.
However, the LDW will not operate in the • When old lane markers remain on the
following situations even if the LDW indica- road surface.
tor appears: • When the lane markers are double lines
or the shape of the lane markers are
 The vehicle speed is less than approxi- complicated.
mately 38 mph (60 km/h). • When driving in an extremely narrow
 The turn signal lever is being operated or lane.
has been operated in the past 7 seconds. • When the distance between your vehicle
 The hazard warning light is being oper- and a vehicle in front is short.
ated or has been operated in the past • When driving into the sun light.
7 seconds. • When driving on curves.
NOTE • When driving on bumpy roads.
 The warnings will not continue for more than
• When driving in construction zones.
3 seconds, even if your vehicle continues
• When passing through a place where the
leaving the lane.
brightness suddenly changes, such as at
 If the lane markers are only on one side of
the entrance to or exit of a tunnel.
the road, the LDW will operate only for the
• When the headlights of an oncoming
appropriate side where the lane marker is
vehicle are very bright.
drawn.
• When the rear of your vehicle is weighed
(white) (green) down with the weight of passengers and
luggage.
• When the headlights of your vehicle are
not clean or are not properly aimed.

WARNING Sensor is too hot or cold Windshield is dirty

• When the front windshield is not clean.
• When the front windshield wipers do not
The alarm shown below is displayed if the The alarm shown below is displayed if the
clean the windshield properly. system becomes temporarily unavailable due system becomes temporarily unavailable due
to the high or low temperature of the sensor. to the dirty windshield of the sensor portion.
After temperature of the sensor has been in After having cleaned the windshield, the sys-
CAUTION range, the system will automatically return to tem will automatically return to operation.
 To maintain proper function of the LDW: operation. If the alarm continues showing, there is a pos- 5
• Always keep the windshield and the head- If the alarm continues showing, there is a possibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con-
lights clean. sibility that the LDW has a malfunction. Con- tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
• Do not put anything, such as a sticker, on tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for inspection of the sensor.
the front windshield in front of the sensor. for inspection of the system.
• Avoid applying a shock or load to the sen-
sor.
• Do not attempt to detach or disassemble the
sensor.
• Use only Mitsubishi Motors Genuine parts
when replacing the windshield wipers.
NOTE
 When driving conditions are not suitable to
use the LDW, turn off the LDW.

N00578100058
If a problem occurs with the system, a visual

warning specific to the type of the problem is
given together with an audible alarm.

Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
LDW deactivation due to fault Tire pressure monitoring NOTE

If the LDW is deactivated due to a malfunc- system (TPMS)  The TPMS is not a substitute for regularly
checking tire inflation pressures.
tion in the system, the either alarm shown N00530201641
Be sure to check the tire inflation pressures
below is displayed. Contact your authorized The tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) as described in “Tires” on page 9-12.
Mitsubishi Motors dealer for inspection of the uses tire inflation pressure sensors (A) on the  The tire inflation pressure sensor (B) is
system. wheels to monitor the tire inflation pressures. installed in the illustrated location.
The system only indicates when a tire is sig-
5 nificantly under-inflated.
• On vehicles equipped with Type 1 sensor
which has the metallic air valve (C), replace
grommet and washer (D) with the new ones
when the tire is replaced.
• On vehicles equipped with Type 2 sensor
which has the rubber air valve (E), replace
rubber air valve (E) with new one when the
tire is replaced.
NOTE
 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes
extremely hot (after prolonged exposure to
direct sunlight, for example), the “LDW WARNING
SERVICE REQUIRED” message may  The compact spare wheel does not have a
appear. tire inflation pressure sensor.
If the message remains even after the tem- When the spare tire is used, the TPMS will
perature of the sensor or its surrounding area not work properly.
has been in range, please contact an autho- See an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. dealer as soon as possible to replace or
repair the original tire.


warning light normally illuminates and goes
NOTE off a few seconds later.
CAUTION
For details, please contact your authorized  If the tire pressure monitoring system warn-
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. If one or more of the vehicle tires (except for ing light does not illuminate when the igni-
the spare tire) is significantly under-inflated, tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
Type 1 the operation mode is put in ON, it means
the warning light will remain illuminated
that the tire pressure monitoring system is
while the ignition switch is in the “ON” posi- not working properly. Have the system
tion or the operation mode is put in ON.
Refer to “If the warning light / display illumi-
inspected by an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
5
nates while driving” on page 5-120 and take In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
the necessary measures. system may be preventing the monitoring of
the tire pressure. Avoid sudden braking,
sharp turning and high-speed driving.
NOTE  If a malfunction is detected in the tire pres-
Type 2  In addition, the warning display is displayed
sure monitoring system, the tire pressure
monitoring system warning light will blink
mation display.
for approximately 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. The warning light
will issue further warnings each time the
engine is restarted as long as the malfunction
exists.
Check to see whether the warning light goes
off after few minutes driving.
If it then goes off during driving, there is no
Tire pressure monitoring sys- problem.
tem warning light / display However, if the warning light does not go
N00532701389 off, or if it blinks again when the engine is
restarted, have the vehicle inspected by an
In such situations, a malfunctioning of the
system may be preventing the monitoring of
When the ignition switch is turned to the the tire pressure. For safety reasons, when
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in the warning light appears while driving,
ON, the tire pressure monitoring system avoid sudden braking, sharp turning and
high-speed driving.


Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency allow the TPMS to continue to function prop-
NOTE and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- erly.
 In addition, the warning display is displayed
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
mation display.
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
If the warning light / display
responsibility to maintain correct tire pres- illuminates while driving
sure, even if under-inflation has not reached N00532801579
the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS 1. If the tire pressure monitoring system
5 low tire pressure telltale. warning light illuminates, avoiding hard
braking, sharp steering maneuvers and
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a high speeds. You should stop and adjust
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the tires to the proper inflation pressure as
should be checked monthly when cold and the system is not operating properly. The soon as possible. Adjust the spare tire at
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- TPMS malfunction indicator is combined the same time. Refer to “Tires” on page
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the with the low tire pressure telltale. 9-12.
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. When the system detects a malfunction, the
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute NOTE
than the size indicated on the vehicle placard and then remain continuously illuminated.  In addition, the warning display is displayed
or tire inflation pressure label, you should This sequence will continue upon subsequent on the information screen in the multi-infor-
determine the proper tire inflation pressure vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction mation display.
for those tires.) exists.  When inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has When the malfunction indicator is illumi- sure, do not apply excessive force to the
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring nated, the system may not be able to detect or valve stem to avoid breakage.
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire signal low tire pressure as intended.  After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
pressure telltale when one or more of your sure, always reinstall the valve cap on the
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
tires is significantly under-inflated. valve stem.
of reasons, including the installation of Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure tell- replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the get into the valve, resulting in damage to the
tale illuminates, you should stop and check vehicle that prevent the TPMS from function- tire inflation pressure sensor.
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate ing properly. Always check the TPMS mal-  Do not use metal valve caps, which may
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a sig- function telltale after replacing one or more cause a metal reaction, resulting in corrosion
nificantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that and damage of the tire inflation pressure sen-
overheat and can lead to tire failure. the replacement or alternate tires and wheels sors.


 A window tint that affects the radio wave
NOTE NOTE signals is installed.
 Once adjustments have been made, the warn-  To avoid the risk of damage to the tire infla-
ing light will go off after a few minutes of tion pressure sensors, have any punctured
driving. tire repaired by an authorized Mitsubishi NOTE
Motors dealer. If the tire repair is not done by  Tire inflation pressures vary with the ambi-
2. If the tire pressure monitoring system an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is ent temperature. If the vehicle is subjected to
warning light remains illuminated after not covered by your warranty. large variations in ambient temperature, the
you have been driving for approximately
20 minutes after you adjust the tire infla-
 Do not use an aerosol puncture-repair spray
on any tire.
tire inflation pressures may be under-inflated
(causing the warning light / display come on)
5
tion pressure, one or more of the tires may Such a spray could damage the tire inflation when the ambient temperature is relatively
have a puncture. Inspect the tire and if it pressure sensors. low. If the warning light / display comes on,
has a puncture, have it repaired by an Have any puncture repaired by an authorized adjust the tire inflation pressure.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer as Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
soon as possible.
The tire pressure monitoring system may not Whenever the tires and wheels
WARNING work normally in the following circum- are replaced with new ones
 If the warning light / display illuminates stances: N00532900081
while you are driving, avoid hard braking, If new wheels with new tire inflation pressure
sharp steering maneuvers and high  A wireless facility or device using the
same frequency is near the vehicle. sensors are installed, their ID codes must be
speeds.
 Snow or ice is stuck inside the fenders programmed into the tire pressure monitoring
Driving with an under-inflated tire
and/or on the wheels. system. Have tire and wheel replacement per-
adversely affects vehicle performance and
can result in an accident.  The tire inflation pressure sensor’s battery formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
is dead. dealer to avoid the risk of damaging the tire
 Wheels other than Mitsubishi genuine inflation pressure sensors. If the wheel
CAUTION wheels are being used. replacement is not done by an authorized
 Wheels that are not fitted with tire infla- Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it is not covered by
 If a tire has a puncture, replace that tire with
the spare tire. Driving on a punctured tire tion pressure sensors are being used. your warranty.
could lead to an accident.  Wheels whose ID codes are not memo-
 The warning light / display may not illumi- rized by the vehicle are used.
nate immediately in the event of a tire blow-  Compact spare tire is fitted as a road
out or rapid leak. wheel.


Rules and Industry Canada licence-exempt
CAUTION 3. Press the switch or switch to
RSS standard(s).
 The use of non-genuine wheels will prevent select the “ID 1” or “ID 2”, and then press
Operation is subject to the following two con-
the proper fit of the tire inflation pressure and hold the switch for approximately ditions.
sensors, resulting air leakage or damage of 3 seconds or more to confirm the setting.
the sensors.
ference.
5 Tire ID set change received, including interference that may
N00584300042
In case that 2 sets of tire inflation pressure
sensor ID are registered in the receiver, the
valid tire ID set can be changed by following
CAUTION
 Changes or modifications not expressly
procedure.
approved by the manufacturer for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
1. Switch to the function setting screen.
ate the equipment.
Refer to “Multi-information display 4. The valid tire ID set is changed, and the
switches” on page 5-142. number of the tire pressure monitoring
Refer to “Changing the function settings” system (TPMS) SET indicator is changed.
on page 5-152.
NOTE
 The tire ID set is NOT changed, in case that
times to switch to the “TPMS ID” screen.
only 1 set of ID is registered.
Then, press the switch to the setting
selection screen.
General information
N00533001233
Your tire pressure monitoring system oper-

ates on a radio frequency subject to Federal
Communications Commission (FCC) Rules
(For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) and Industry
Canada Rules (For vehicles sold in Canada).
This device complies with part 15 of FCC
Parking sensors (Front/Rear) (if so equipped)
Parking sensors WARNING CAUTION

(Front/Rear) (if so equipped)  The parking sensors are parking aid only.
It is not a substitute for your visual confir-
• When the ambient temperature has rapidly
changed.
N00589800042
mation. • When the sensor is frozen.
Parking sensors will alert the driver with an The system is not designed to detect chil- • When the system detects ultrasonic noise,
intermittent or continuous buzzer sound when dren, pedestrians, bicycles and pets. The such as the noise from motorcycle engines,
the vehicle approaches an object and the sen- area within which the system can detect is brakes, radios, pouring rain, splashing
sor detects that object during parking. The very limited, and objects outside the
detection area, such as under the bumper
water or tire chains. 5
system incorporates eight ultrasonic sensors • When the sensor is extremely hot or cold
or around either corner of the bumper, (after the vehicle has been parked for a long
(A) on the front and rear bumpers.
cannot be detected. The sensors of the sys- period of time under a blazing sun or in
tem may not be able to detect certain cold weather).
objects.
• When the vehicle is driven on a rough road
 Never rely solely on the parking sensors to including a bumpy, gravel, hilly, or grassy
clear the area in front and to the rear of surface.
your vehicle. Always check visually in
• When the vehicle is too close to an object.
front and to the rear of your vehicle for
• Immediately after the engine switch is
persons, animals, obstructions or other
turned on.
vehicles.
 The parking sensors may not properly detect
Failure to do so can result in damage to
certain objects including;
your vehicle, serious injury or death.
• A thin object such as a wire net or rope.
• An object that absorbs ultrasonic sound
CAUTION waves, such as snow.
WARNING  The parking sensors may not operate prop-
• An object with sharp angles.
erly in a certain situation. Some examples • An object with a smooth surface, such as
 Before using the parking sensors, read this
are: glass.
entire section to fully understand the limi-
tations of this system. Failure to follow • The sensors or surroundings have been • A low height object such as a curb.
instructions could result in an accident. wiped by hand.  If the bumper has experienced an impact, the
• The stickers or accessories have been sensor area may have damage and the park-
attached to the sensors or surroundings. ing sensors may not function properly. Have
the vehicle inspected at an authorized
• The sensors or surroundings are covered
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
with ice, snow, or mud.
of your choice.

Detection areas Normal mode Towing hitch mode
The detection areas are within approximately If your vehicle is equipped with a towing
WARNING 24 inches (60 cm) (A) from the front and cor- hitch and part of the towing hitch is close to
 The detection areas described below are ner sensors and 49 inches (125 cm) (B) from the center sensors (e. g. European type towing
for reference only. The actual detection the back sensors. hitch), the center sensor may detect the tow-
areas may vary depending on the shape, ing hitch and the alarm beeps may sound
5 size and position of the object being
detected. Certain objects may not be
though there is no obstacle behind the vehi-
cle. To avoid this detection, the parking sen-
detected, even if the object is within the sors can be switched to the towing hitch
detection area described below. Also false mode.
alerts may sound depending on the sur-
The detection areas are within approximately
rounding environment.
24 inches (60 cm) (A) from the front and cor-
ner sensors, and 49 inches (125 cm) (B) from
“Normal mode” and “Towing hitch mode” for the back sensors. The system will not detect
a vehicle equipped with a towing hitch can be the areas (C), within approximately 8 inches
selected. (20 cm) (D) from the rear bumper.

NOTE To operate When the parking sensor detects

 The ultrasonic sensors do not detect objects N00590000044 an obstacle
in areas directly below or very close to the When the engine switch is tuned on, the park-
bumpers. If the height of an object is lower ing sensors will be automatically tuned on When a sensor detects an object;
than the sensors, the sensors may not con- and the operation indicator light (A) will be
tinue detecting it while the vehicle is illuminated.  The system will alarm the driver by inter-
approaching the object, even if the sensors
To turn off the parking sensors, press the mittent beeps.
have initially detected it.
“SONAR” switch. The operation indicator As the vehicle moves closer to the object,
the alarm will switch to shorter beeps and
5
light will go off.
To switch to the towing hitch mode and return To turn back on the parking sensors, press the then to a continuous beep.
to the normal mode, refer to “Changing the “SONAR” switch again. When the vehicle is too close to an object,
detection mode” on page 5-126. the alarm may no longer sound or it may
return to intermittent beeps from a contin-
uous beep.
 Also, in the multi-information display, an
indicator corresponding to the sensor
detecting the object will be blinking.
1- Corner sensor
2- Front sensor
3- Back sensor


Front and corner sensor Back sensor (When the “Towing hitch
mode” is selected)
Changing the detection mode
Distance to an Warning dis- N00590100045
obstacle play/sound cycle Distance to an Warning dis-
If your vehicle is equipped with a towing
Approximately 24 to obstacle play/sound cycle
hitch and part of the towing hitch is close to
16 inches (60 to 40 Intermittent Approximately 49 to the center sensors (e. g. European type towing
cm) 40 inches (125 to Intermittent hitch), the center sensor may detect the tow-
Approximately 16 to 100 cm) ing hitch and alarm beeps may sound though
5 12 inches (40 to 30 Fast intermittent Approximately 40 to there is no obstacle behind the vehicle. To
cm) 24 inches (100 to Fast intermittent avoid this detection, the parking sensors can
60 cm) be switched to the towing hitch mode.
Within approxi-
mately 12 inches Continuous Within approxi- To switch to the towing hitch mode;
(30 cm) mately 24 inches Continuous While the selector lever is in the “R”
(60 cm) (REVERSE) position, turn off the parking
Back sensor (When the “normal mode” is sensors by pressing the “SONAR” switch,
selected) then press and hold the “SONAR” switch
CAUTION
Distance to an Warning dis- approximately 3 seconds or more and release
 The distances are for reference only. The
obstacle play/sound cycle actual distance may vary due to various fac-
it. A buzzer will sound twice to indicate the
tors, such as the temperature, humidity or the detection mode is switched to the towing
Approximately 49 to
shape of the object being detected. hitch mode. To turn on the parking sensors,
32 inches (125 to Intermittent
press the “SONAR” switch again.
80 cm)
Approximately 32 to To return to the normal mode;
NOTE
16 inches (80 to 40 Fast intermittent While the selector lever is in the “R”
 When more than one object is detected, all
cm) indicators corresponding to the sensors
(REVERSE) position, turn off the parking
Within approxi- detecting the objects will be blinking in the sensors by pressing the “SONAR” switch,
mately 16 inches Continuous multi-information display and a buzzer will then press and hold the “SONAR” switch
(40 cm) sound according to the closest object. approximately 3 seconds or more and release
it. A buzzer will sound once to indicate the
detection mode is returned to the normal
mode. To turn on the parking sensors, press
the “SONAR” switch again.

Rear-view camera
Also, the indicator light (A) on the “SONAR”
NOTE switch will continue blinking until the sensor
WARNING
 The detection mode will not change if you  Never rely solely on the rear-view camera
resumes functioning.
keep the “SONAR” switch pressed for to clear the area behind your vehicle.
Have the vehicle inspected at an authorized
10 seconds or more. Always check visually behind and all
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility around your vehicle for persons, animals,
 In the normal mode, even after the
“SONAR” switch has been pressed to turn of your choice. obstructions or other vehicles. Failure to
off the parking sensors, the two rear center do so can result in vehicle damage, serious
sensors will continue functioning while the
selector lever is in the “R” (REVERSE) posi-
injury or death.
 The rear-view camera is an aid system for
5
tion. backing up, but it is not a substitute for
your visual confirmation.
 The view on the screen is limited, and
When a problem is detected objects outside the view, such as under the
bumper or around either corner of the
N00590200046
bumper end, cannot be seen on the screen.
If the system detects a problem with a sensor,
a warning is displayed in the multi-informa-
tion display and a buzzer will sound for
approximately five seconds. Location of rear-view camera
The rear-view camera (A) is in the liftgate, at
Example: Rear corner sensor (left) malfunction-
Rear-view camera the left side of the liftgate handle.
N00546201330
ing
When the selector lever is in the “R”
(REVERSE) position with the ignition switch
in the “ON” position, or the operation mode
is put in ON, the rear-view image will be dis-
played on the screen of the Smartphone Link
Display Audio.
When the selector lever is shifted out of the
“R” (REVERSE) position, the rear-view
image will go off.

Rear-view camera
CAUTION Reference lines on the screen CAUTION

 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the Reference lines and upper surface of the rear lens. As a result, images and distances shown
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a bumper (A) are displayed on the screen. on the screen are not exact.
clean, soft cloth.  Actual distance may be different from dis-
 To avoid damaging the camera;  Red line (B) indicates approximately tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
• Do not rub the cover excessively or polish 20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear bumper. depending on the loading condition of the
5 it by using an abrasive compound.  Two Green lines (C) indicate approxi-
mately 8 inches (20 cm) outside of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
The reference lines for distance and vehicle
• Do not disassemble the camera.
• Do not splash hot water directly on the lens. vehicle body. width are based on a level, flat road surface.
• Do not spray the camera and its surround-  Short transverse lines (1 to 3) indicate dis- In the following cases, objects shown on the
tance from the rear bumper. screen will appear to be farther off than they
ings with high-pressure water.
actually are.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
closed when backing up.
down with the weight of passengers and
luggage in the vehicle. (Case 1)
• When there is an upward slope at the back.
(Case 2)
Case 1
1- Approximately at the rear edge of the

rear bumper (if so equipped)
2- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm)
3- Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) A- Actual objects
B- Objects shown on the screen

Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped)
Case 2 Multi Around Monitor (if so

equipped)
N00587200068
The Multi Around Monitor system uses four

cameras, “Front-view camera”, “Side-view
cameras (right and left)” and “Rear-view
A- Actual objects camera”, and displays composite views from 5
B- Objects shown on the screen those cameras on the Smartphone Link Dis-
play Audio.
The Multi Around Monitor system will assist
CAUTION NOTE the driver to park the vehicle in a narrow or
 The reference lines for distance and vehicle  Mirror image is displayed on the screen. parallel parking space.
width are intended to indicate the distance to  On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link
a flat object such as a level, flat road surface. Display Audio, it is possible to change the
They may not indicate correct distance display language of the screen.
WARNING
depending on the shape of an obstacle.  Before using the Multi Around Monitor
For details, please refer to the separated
For example, when there is an object behind system, read this entire section to fully
owner’s manual.
the vehicle that has upper sections projecting understand the limitations of this system.
 Under certain circumstances, it may become
in the direction of the vehicle, the reference Failure to follow instructions could result
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
lines on the screen will indicate that point A in an accident.
when the system is functioning correctly.
is the farthest point and point B is the closest  The Multi Around Monitor system is an
• In a dark area, such as at night.
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and B aid system to help observe around the
• When water drops or condensation are on vehicle. It is not a substitute for your
are actually the same distance from the vehi-
the lens. visual confirmation.
cle, and point C is farther off than point A
• When sun light or headlights shine directly  Never rely solely on the Multi Around
and B.
into the lens. Monitor system. The view on the screen is
limited, and objects outside the view can-
not be seen on the screen.

CAUTION CAUTION
 Before using the Multi Around Monitor,  To avoid damaging the camera;
make sure that all doors and the liftgate are • Do not rub the cover excessively or polish
closed and the outside mirrors are unfolded. it by using an abrasive compound.
If an outside mirror is folded and/or if a front • Do not disassemble the camera.
door and/or the liftgate is open, the areas dis- • Do not splash hot water directly on the lens.
played on the Multi Around Monitor will not
• Do not spray the camera and its surround-
5 be appropriate.
ings with high-pressure water.
• Make sure that the liftgate is securely
closed when backing up.
Location of each camera  Do not attach anything on the camera and/or
surrounding areas. Doing so will disturb the
camera.
A- Rear-view camera
B- Front-view camera
C- Side-view camera
CAUTION
 If the camera lens gets dirty, a clear image
cannot be obtained. As necessary, rinse the
lens with clean water and gently wipe with a
clean, soft cloth.

Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor

N00587300030
The range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras is limited to the area shown in the illustrations. It cannot show around the both sides and
the lower part of the front and rear bumpers, etc. While driving, be sure to visually confirm safety around the vehicle.
Range of view of the Multi Around Monitor cameras

5
A: Front-view camera
B: Side-view camera (Right)
C: Side-view camera (Left)
D: Rear-view camera

Types of views of the Multi Bird’s eye-view/Front-view mode

Around Monitor
N00587400031 Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and
the front of the vehicle are displayed.
Wide-rear-view mode
5 Wide-angle view of the area behind the vehi-

cle is displayed using the entire screen.
Side-view/Rear-view mode
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle

and behind the vehicle are displayed.
Side-view/Front-view mode
Views of the passenger’s side of the vehicle

Two different types of views are displayed on and the front of the vehicle are displayed.
the left side and the right side respectively.
Bird’s eye-view/Rear-view mode
Views of the surroundings of the vehicle and

behind the vehicle are displayed.

NOTE Operation with the switch

 If the atmospheric temperature is extremely
hot or extremely cold, the camera images When the camera switch (A) is pressed, the
may not be clear. bird’s eye-view/front-view is displayed.
There is no abnormality.
 If a wireless device is installed near the cam-
era, the camera images may cause electrical
system interference and the system may stop
functioning properly.
5
How to use the Multi Around

CAUTION Monitor
 The camera uses a special lens. As a result, N00587500058
images and distances shown on the screen The Multi Around Monitor can only be used
are not exact.
when the operation mode is put in ON.
NOTE
NOTE Operation with the selector lever  If there is no operation for 3 minutes after
 Because the cameras have a special lens, the the Multi Around Monitor is displayed by
lines on the ground between parking spaces When you move the selector lever to the “R” pressing the switch with the selector lever in
may not look parallel on the screen. (REVERSE) position, the wide-rear-view is other than “R” (REVERSE), the display dis-
 Under certain circumstances, it may become displayed on the Smartphone Link Display appears.
difficult to see an image on the screen, even
Audio. When you move the selector lever to
when the system is functioning correctly.
any other position, the display disappears.
• In a dark area, such as at night. Switching of the screen (Selector
• When water drops or condensation are on
the lens. NOTE lever is “R” (REVERSE))
• When sun light or headlights shine directly  The passenger’s side screen can be switched
into the lens. to the side-view by pressing the camera If the camera switch is pressed, the mode of
• When a fluorescent light shines directly switch on the steering wheel. Multi Around Monitor is switched as follows.
into the lens.


Wide-rear-view mode  Bird’s eye-
view/Rear-view mode  Side-view/Rear-
How to read the screen
N00587600046
view mode
In any mode other than the Bird’s eye-view
mode, the lines in the screen give the follow-
Switching of the screen (Selector ing information. Use them only as a guide.
lever is other than “R”
(REVERSE)) Wide-rear-view mode
5
If the camera switch is pressed, the mode of
Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-
Multi Around Monitor is switched, Wide-
cle width and upper surface of the rear bum- 1- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) from
rear-view mode  Bird’s eye-view/Front-
per (A) are displayed on the screen. the rear edge of the rear bumper
view mode  Side-view/Front-view mode 
OFF 2- Approximately 79 inches (200 cm) from
 The Red line (B) indicates approximately the rear edge of the rear bumper
20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear edge of
NOTE the rear bumper.
 When you move the selector lever to the “R”  The Two Green lines (C) indicate the CAUTION
(REVERSE) position with the front-view approximately vehicle width.  If the camera and/or its surrounding area
mode displayed on the driver’s side screen,  The Orange line (D) indicates an expected have experienced an impact, the Multi
the driver’s side screen switches to the rear- course when the vehicle is reserved with Around Monitor system may not function
view mode. When you shift the selector lever the steering wheel turned. It disappears correctly. Have the vehicle inspected by an
to any other position, the driver’s side screen when the steering wheel is in the neutral authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
switches to the front-view mode.
position.
 When the camera switch is pressed at the
 The approximate distance from the vehi-
vehicle speed of approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher, only the side-view can
cle body is as follows: Front-view mode
be displayed on the passenger’s side screen.
 The front-view will not be displayed when Reference lines for the distance and the vehi-
the vehicle speed exceeds approximately cle width and upper surface of the front bum-
6 mph (10 km/h). per (A) are displayed on the screen.
 The display of the view may be delayed dur-
ing switching of the screen.


 The Red line (B) indicates approximately
20 inches (50 cm) from the front edge of
NOTE
the front bumper.
 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the
approximate vehicle width.
 The Orange lines (D) indicates an
expected course when the vehicle moves
forward with the steering wheel turned. It
disappears when the steering wheel is in
5
the neutral position.
 The approximate distance from the vehi-
cle body is as follows: Rear-view mode from the rear edge of the rear bumper
N00587700034
Reference lines for the distance and the vehi- from the rear edge of the rear bumper
cle width and upper surface of the rear bum-
per (A) are displayed on the screen.
CAUTION
 The Red line (B) indicates approximately  The rear-view camera uses a wide-angle
20 inches (50 cm) behind the rear edge of lens. As a result, images and distances shown
the rear bumper. on the screen are not exact.
 The Two Green lines (C) indicate the  Never rely solely on the reference lines. The
approximately vehicle width. reference lines indicating distance and vehi-
 The Orange line (D) indicates an expected cle width are based on a level, flat road sur-
course when the vehicle is reserved with face.
1- Approximately 39 inches (100 cm) from
the steering wheel turned. It disappears Actual distance may be different from dis-
the front edge of the front bumper
when the steering wheel is in the neutral tance indicated by the lines on the screen,
position. depending on the loading condition of the
vehicle and road surface condition.
NOTE  The approximate distance from the vehi-
Also, your vehicle width indicated by the
 When the expected course lines are dis- cle body is as follows: reference lines may be different from the
played in the front-view, the expected course actual vehicle width.
lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye-
view (Front: solid line, Rear: broken line).

CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

For example; • When there is a downward slope behind the • When the vehicle is approaching a truck,
In the following cases, objects shown on the vehicle, objects shown on the screen will the reference lines indicate that your vehi-
screen will appear to be farther off than they appear to be closer than they actually are. cle will clear the truck. In reality, the truck
actually are. is in your path.
• When the rear of the vehicle is weighed
down with the weight of passengers and
5 luggage in the vehicle.
A: Actual objects
B: Objects shown on the screen
A: Actual objects
• When there is an upward slope behind the
vehicle.
A: Actual objects

CAUTION NOTE Side-view mode

• When there is an object behind the vehicle  When the expected course lines are dis- N00587900036
that has upper sections projecting in the played in the rear-view, the expected course Reference lines for the vehicle width and the
direction of the vehicle, the reference lines lines are also displayed in the bird’s eye- front end of the vehicle are displayed on the
on the screen will indicate that point A is view (Front: broken line, Rear: solid line). screen.
the farthest point and point B is the closest
point to the vehicle. In reality, point A and 1- Approximate vehicle width including
B are actually the same distance from the
vehicle, and point C is farther off than point
the door mirror. 5
2- Approximate location of the axle center
A and B.
of the front wheel.
3- Approximate 20 inches (50 cm) from the
front edge of the front bumper.

Bird’s eye-view mode CAUTION NOTE

N00588000034  The bird’s eye-view is a composite image • An object having a height from the road
An overhead view in which the vehicle is from images captured by the “Front-view surface may seem to appear from the joint
looked down is displayed so that you can eas- camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and of the view composition processing
ily identify the location of your vehicle and left)” and “Rear-view camera”. As a result, regions.
the course to enter the parking space. objects may appear to be farther away than  The brightness of the views from each cam-
they actually are. Also, an object may appear era may vary depending on the illuminance
5 to be in a direction and/or location different
from actual. In addition, blind spots exist in
conditions.
 An object above the camera is not displayed.
proximity of the vehicle.  The object displayed in the Front-view mode
Even if the screen indicates that there is a or the Rear-view mode may not be displayed
space between your vehicle and an object, in the Bird’s eye-view mode.
there may actually be less or no space.
 The view in the Bird’s eye-view mode may
Always check visually behind and all around be displaced from its true position when the
your vehicle. mounting location and angle of each camera
 The view at a section near each corner on the are changed.
Bird's eye-view is combined from the edge  The lines on the road may appear to be dis-
of the view captured by each camera. As
placed or bent at the joint of the views.
result, an object indicated in the section may
be unclear, and it may disappear/reappear on
the screen. To change the vehicle icon color
in the bird’s eye-view
N00594200028
NOTE
It is possible to change the vehicle icon color
 In the Bird’s eye-view mode, since the views
captured by the four cameras, “Front-view in the bird’s eye-view.
camera”, “Side-view cameras (right and
left)” and “Rear-view camera” are processed
1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place.
based on a level flat road surface, an image
may be displayed as follows: CAUTION
• An object appears to have fallen down and  For reasons of safety, do not operate the
looks longer or larger. switch while driving.

Instrument cluster
2. Press the switch (A) to display the bird’s
eye-view/front-view.
NOTE Speedometer
• When you place the gearshift lever or the N00519101272
selector lever in the “R” (REVERSE) posi- The speedometer shows the vehicle speed in
tion.
miles per hour (mph) or kilometers per hour
• When you do not operate anything for 30
(km/h).
seconds.
• The operation mode is put in OFF.
Type A 5
Instrument cluster
N00519001444
3. Press and hold down the switch (A) until

the vehicle icon blinks to enter the selec-
tion mode of the vehicle icon color in the
bird’s eye-view.
4. Press the switch until the desired color
appears on the display. Type B
Each time you press the switch, the vehi-
cle icon color in the bird’s eye-view will
change to the next one. 1- Tachometer  P.5-140
5. When it is changed to your desired color, 2- Multi-information display
press and hold the switch (A) for a few  P.5-140
seconds. This completes the setting. Information screen display list 
P.5-161
NOTE 3- Speedometer P.5-139
 When the selection mode is in the following 4- Rheostat illumination button 
situations, the vehicle icon color does not P.5-140
change.

Multi-information display
Tachometer Meter illumination control NOTE

N00519201303 N00554901293  The brightness level of the instruments is
The tachometer shows engine revolutions per Each time you press this button, there is a stored when the ignition switch is turned to
the “OFF” position or the operation mode is
minute. This allows the driver to determine sound and the brightness of the instruments
put in OFF.
the most efficient selector position and engine changes.
 If you press and hold the button for longer
speed combinations.
than approximately 2 second when the front
This gauge also assists in evaluating engine
5 performance.
side-marker lights are illuminated, the
brightness level changes to the maximum
level. Pressing and holding the button for
longer than approximately 2 second again
returns the brightness level to the previous
level.
On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link
Display Audio, the map screen color may not
be switched to nighttime setting when the
meter illumination brightness level is at the
maximum.
1- Brightness level
2- Rheostat illumination button
N00555001419
CAUTION NOTE The multi-information display displays warn-

 The red zone indicates an engine speed  You can adjust to 8 different levels for when ings, the odometer, trip odometer, service
beyond the range of safe operation. the front side-marker lights are illuminated reminder, engine coolant temperature, fuel
and when they are not. remaining, outside temperature, selector lever
Select the correct selector position to control  If the vehicle is equipped with the automatic position, average and instant fuel consump-
the engine speed so that the tachometer indi- light control, the light switch is in a position tion, driving range, average speed, etc.
cator does not enter the red zone. other than the “OFF” position and it is suffi-
ciently dark outside the vehicle, the meter It is also possible to change elements such as
illumination switches automatically to the the language and units used on the multi-
adjusted brightness. information display.

[With ignition switch or operation mode in
OFF]
1- Warning display screen  P.5-146

2- Information screen  P.5-143
Interrupt display screen  P.5-146
3- Door ajar warning display screen
 P.5-147
4- Odometer  P.5-148
5- “ ” mark indicator  P.5-146

[With ignition switch or operation mode in ON]
1- S-AWC drive mode display screen (if 10- Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
display screen (if so equipped)
NOTE
so equipped)  P.5-69  The fuel units, outside temperature units,
2-  P.5-88
Warning display screen  P.5-146 display language, and other settings can be
11- ECO indicator  P.5-151 changed.
3- Lane Departure Warning (LDW) dis-
12- “ ” mark indicator  P.5-146 Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
play screen (if so equipped) P.5-115
4- ECO mode indicator display screen 13- Fuel remaining display screen page 5-152.
 P.5-198  P.5-147
5- Information screen  P.5-143 14- Outside temperature display screen
6- Selector lever position display  P.5-148 Multi-information display
 P.5-63 switches
7- Engine coolant temperature display N00555101234
 P.5-147 Each time the multi-information display
8- Odometer  P.5-148 switches are operated, the buzzer sounds and
9- Cruise control display screen  P.5-84 the multi-information display changes

between information such as warnings, trip
odometer, average and instant fuel consump-
tion, distance range.
It is also possible to change elements such as
the language and units used on the multi-
information display by operating the multi-
information display switches.
5
Information screen (With the ignition switch in “OFF” position or the operation mode in OFF)
N00555301207
Press the switch to display the information screen. Then, press the switch or switch to switch the display screen in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display

1- Trip odometer  P.5-148

2- Trip odometer  P.5-148
3- ECO score display  P.5-152
4- Service reminder  P.5-148
5- Redisplay of a warning display screen  P.5-146
Information screen (With the ignition switch is turned from the “OFF” position to the “ON” position
or the operation mode is changed from OFF to ON)
5 N00555801260
When the ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position or the operation mode is put in ON, the display screen switches in the following order.
*: When the inspection time has arrived

1- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is OFF
2- System check screen  P.5-150
3- Screen when the ignition switch or the operation mode is ON
4- Service reminder  P.5-148

Information screen (With the ignition switch or the operation mode in ON)
N00556201261
Press the switch or switch to switch the display screen in the following order.
*: When there is a warning display 6- ECO score display  P.5-152

7- S-AWC operation display (if so
NOTE
1- Trip odometer  P.5-148  While driving, the service reminder are not
2- equipped)  P.5-69
Trip odometer  P.5-148 displayed even if you operate the multi-
8- Service reminder  P.5-148 information display switches. Always stop
3- Driving range display  P.5-150
9- Function setting screen  P.5-152 the vehicle in a safe place before operating.
ECO drive assist display  P.5-151
10- Redisplay of a warning display screen
4- Average fuel consumption display
 P.5-146
 P.5-150
ECO drive assist display  P.5-151
5- Average speed display  P.5-151
Instant fuel consumption display 
P.5-151

NOTE Returning to the display screen from Redisplay of a warning display

 While driving, the function setting screen is before the warning display screen
not displayed even if you operate the multi- N00579600034
information display switches. Even if the cause of the warning display is
Always park the vehicle in a safe place, not eliminated, you can return to the screen When the warning is displayed, if you
firmly apply the parking brake and put the that was displayed before the warning dis- press the switch or switch a few
selector lever into the “P” (PARK) position play. times, the warning display screen you
5 before operating the function setting screen.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
switched from is redisplayed.
If you press the switch, the display screen
page 5-152.
switches to the screen display from before the
 When there is information to be announced, Other interrupt displays
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and warning and the warning (A) is also dis- N00579700022
the screen display is switched. played.
The operation status of each system is dis-
Refer to “Interrupt display screen” on page
5-146.
played on the information screen.
For further details, refer to the appropriate
page in the warning display list.
Interrupt display screen Refer to “Other interrupt displays” on page
N00556301246 5-177.
Warning display warning display screen

N00555201248
When there is information to be announced,
such as a system fault, the tone sounds and This is displayed when you press the
the information screen is switched to the switch and return from the warning display
warning display screen. screen to the previous screen.
If you want to switch the display This mark is also displayed if there is another
Refer to the warning list and take the neces-
sary measures. warning other than the one displayed.
Warning display screens with the “ ” mark When the cause of the warning display is
Refer to “Warning display list” on page
displayed in the upper right of the screen can
5-162. eliminated, the warning goes out automat-
be switched. If you want to switch the dis-
When the cause of the warning display is ically.
eliminated, the warning display goes out play, press the switch for approximately
automatically. 2 seconds or more.

NOTE CAUTION
 When the warning is displayed, the warn-  Always make sure that the warning display
goes out before beginning to drive.
ing display screen can be redisplayed on the
information screen.
Refer to “Information screen (with the igni-
tion switch in “OFF” position or the opera- Engine coolant temperature
tion mode in OFF)” on page 5-143. display
Refer to “Information screen (with the igni-
N00578200020
5
tion switch or the operation mode in ON)” on
page 5-145. Shows the engine coolant temperature.
If the coolant becomes hot, “ ” will blink. F- Full
Pay careful attention to the engine coolant E- Empty
Door ajar warning display temperature display while you are driving.
screen
N00529700043 CAUTION CAUTION
 Running out of gas could damage the cata-
 If the engine is overheating, “ ” will blink. lytic converter. If the warning display
In this case, the bar graph is on the red zone. appears, refuel as soon as possible.
Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place
and take the required measures. Refer to
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4. NOTE
If any of the doors or the liftgate is not com-  It may take several seconds to stabilize the
pletely closed, this displays the open door or display after refilling the tank.
liftgate.
Fuel remaining display screen  If fuel is added with the ignition switch or
N00556601210 the operation mode in ON, the remaining
If the speed increases to approximately 5 mph
Shows the amount of fuel remaining. fuel display may incorrectly indicate the fuel
(8 km/h) or higher with a door ajar, a tone level.
will sound four times to inform you that a  The arrow (A) indicates that the fuel tank
door is ajar. filler door is located on the left side of the
vehicle. (Refer to “Filling the fuel tank” on
page 3-3.)

more. Only the currently displayed value will
Fuel remaining warning display NOTE be reset.
N00578300063  The display setting can be changed to the
When the fuel level runs low, the information preferred units (°F or °C). Example
screen switches to the interrupt display of the Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
page 5-152.
If trip odometer is displayed, only trip
fuel remaining warning display and the mark
 Depending on factors such as the driving odometer will be reset.
(B) on the fuel remaining display flashes. If
conditions, the displayed temperature may
the warning display appears, refuel as soon as  Both trip odometers and can
5 possible.
vary from the actual outside temperature.
count up to 9999.9 miles/kilometers.
When a trip odometer goes past
Odometer 9999.9 miles/kilometers, it returns to
N00574901026
0.0 miles/kilometers.
 When disconnecting the battery terminal,
Shows the total distance traveled.
the memories of trip odometer displays
and are cleared, and their displays
Trip odometer return to “0.0 miles/kilometers”.
N00575001053
Shows the distance traveled between two Service reminder

points.
N00556701338
Usage examples for trip odometer , trip
Displays the approximate time until the next
odometer
NOTE It is possible to measure two currently trav-
recommended periodic inspection. “---” is
 On hills or curves, the display may be incor- displayed when the inspection time has
eled distances, from home using trip odome- arrived.
rect due to the movement of fuel in the tank.
ter and from a particular point on the way
using trip odometer .
Outside temperature display
screen To reset the trip odometer
N00556501118
Shows the temperature outside the vehicle. To return the display to “0”, hold down the
switch for approximately 2 seconds or

NOTE At that time, when the ignition switch is

 The service reminder time can be modified
switched from the “OFF” position to the
by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer,
“ON” position or the operation mode is
to adjust for severe usage, etc. Refer to
“Severe maintenance schedule” in your vehi- changed from OFF to ON, the warning
cle’s Warranty and Maintenance Manual. For display is displayed for a few seconds on
further information, please contact your the information screen. 2. Press and hold the switch (for approxi-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. mately 2 seconds or more) to display “ ” 5
and make it flash. (If there is no operation
for approximately 10 seconds with this
indicator flashing, the display returns to
the previous screen.)
3. After your vehicle is inspected at an
3. With this indicator flashing, if you press
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer, it
displays the time until the next periodic the switch, the screen switches from “-
inspection. --” to “CLEAR”. After that, the time until
the next periodic inspection is shown.
To reset
1. Shows the time until the next periodic The “---” display can be reset while the igni-
inspection. tion switch or the operation mode is in OFF.
When the display is reset, the time until the
NOTE next periodic inspection is displayed and the
warning display is no longer displayed when
 Shows the distance in units of 100 miles
(100 km) and the time in units of 1 month. the ignition switch is switched from the
“OFF” position to the “ON” position or the
operation mode is changed from OFF to ON.
2. This informs you that a periodic inspec-
tion is due. Contact an authorized
1. When you press the switch or
switch, the information screen switches to
ity of your choice to have the system
the service reminder display screen.
checked.
Refer to “Warning display list” on page
CAUTION 5-162.
NOTE
 The customer is responsible for making sure  The display setting can be changed to the
that regular inspections and maintenance and preferred units (miles or km).
periodic inspections and maintenance are Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
performed. page 5-152.
Inspections and maintenance must be per-
formed to prevent accidents and malfunc-
Average fuel consumption dis-
5 tions.
play
Driving range display
N00575301027
N00575201026
NOTE Shows the approximate driving range (how This displays the average fuel consumption
 The “---” display cannot be reset while the from the last reset to the present.
many more miles or kilometers you can
ignition switch or the operation mode is in There are 2 types of mode settings of manual
ON.
drive). When this driving range falls below
30 miles (50 km), “---” is displayed. reset and automatic reset.
 When “---” is displayed, after a certain dis-
Refuel as soon as possible. Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver-
tance and a certain period of time, the dis-
age fuel consumption and average speed” on
play is reset and the time until the next
page 5-154.
periodic inspection is displayed. NOTE For information on how to change the aver-
 If you accidentally reset the display, consult  The driving range is determined based on the
an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for age fuel consumption display setting, refer to
fuel consumption data. This may vary
assistance. “Changing the function settings” on page
depending on the driving conditions and hab-
its. Treat the distance displayed as just a
5-152.
rough guideline.
System check screen  When you refuel, the driving range display is NOTE
N00578400048 updated.  The average fuel consumption display can be
However, if you only add a small amount of reset separately in both auto reset mode and
fuel, the correct value will not be displayed. manual reset mode.
“ON” position or the operation mode is put in Fill to a full tank whenever possible.  “---” is displayed when the average fuel con-
ON, the system check screen is displayed for  When your vehicle is stopped on an sumption cannot be measured.
approximately 4 seconds. If there is no fault, extremely steep hill, the driving range value  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset
the information screen is displayed. may, change. This is due to the movement of mode”.
If there is a fault, the screen changes to warn- fuel in the tank and does not indicate any
ing display. breakdown.

sumption, it can help you drive with the better
NOTE NOTE fuel consumption.
 Average fuel consumption may vary depend-  The average speed display can be reset sepa-
ing on the driving conditions (road condi- rately in both auto reset mode and manual
tions, how you drive, etc.) The actual fuel reset mode. NOTE
consumption may differ from the fuel con-  “---” is displayed when the average speed  When the instant fuel consumption cannot be
sumption displayed, so treat the fuel con- cannot be measured. measured, a bar graph is not shown.
sumption displayed as just a rough guideline.  The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset  The display setting can be changed to the
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase
from memory the manual reset mode or auto
mode”. preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),
L/100km or km/L}.
5
 The display setting can be changed to the
reset mode setting for the average fuel con- preferred units (mph or km/h). Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
sumption display. Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-152.
 The display setting can be changed to the page 5-152.  It is possible to cancel the green bar graph.
preferred units {mpg (US), mpg (UK),  Disconnecting the battery cable will erase Refer to “Changing the function settings” on
L/100km or km/L}. from memory the manual reset mode or auto page 5-152.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
page 5-152. play.
ECO indicator
Average speed display N00568701032
N00578500023 Instant fuel consumption dis- This indicator will be displayed when fuel-
This displays the average speed from the last play efficient driving is achieved.
reset to the present. N00578600037
There are 2 types of mode setting of manual While driving, the instant fuel consumption is ECO Drive Assist
reset and automatic reset. shown with a bar graph. N00578700038
Refer to “Changing the reset mode for aver- The “ ” mark in the instant fuel gauge
age fuel consumption and average speed” on This function displays how fuel-efficiently
shows the average fuel consumption. you are driving under different driving condi-
page 5-154. When the instant fuel consumption surpasses
For the method for changing the average tions.
the average fuel consumption, the instant fuel The ECO drive assist display will change as
speed display setting, refer to “Changing the consumption is displayed with a green bar
function settings” on page 5-152. follows if you do fuel-efficient driving using
graph. the accelerator in a way well matched with
Be conscious of maintaining the instant fuel the vehicle speed.
consumption above the average fuel con-

[When the ignition switch is turned to the Refer to “Information screen” on page
“OFF” position or the operation mode is put 5-145.
ECO drive level in OFF]
The display shows the overall ECO score the
function has counted from the time when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” position
to the time when it is turned to the “OFF” or
Low High “ACC” position, or from the time when the
5 operation mode is set to ON to the time when CAUTION
it is set to OFF.  For safety, stop the vehicle before operating.
While driving, even if you operate the multi-
information display switches ( , , ),
NOTE the function setting screen is not displayed.
ECO drive level
 The ECO drive assist is displayed only when
vehicle is driven with the selector lever in
the “D” (DRIVE) position or when vehicle is 3. Press the switch to switch to the top
driven in the sport mode (for vehicles screen (A) for the menu screens. Then,
equipped with sportronic steering wheel pad-
dle shifter).
press the switch or switch to
Low High switch to the menu screens (B).
ECO Score
N00578800055
ECO score indicates the points you have

scored on fuel-efficient driving by the num- Changing the function settings
N00556801283
ber of leaves as follows:
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place.
[When the ignition switch or the operation Firmly apply the parking brake and move
mode is ON] the selector lever into the “P” (PARK)
The display shows the score you achieved in position.
the last several minutes. 2. When you press the switch or
switch, the information screen switches to
the function setting screen.
5- Changing the language on other system 12- Returning to the factory settings 
: switch
to match the multi-information display P.5-159
: switch or switch (if so equipped)  P.5-156
6- Operation sound setting  P.5-157 NOTE
1- Changing the reset mode for average 7- Changing the time until “REST  If no operations are made within approxi-
fuel consumption and average speed  REMINDER” is displayed  P.5-158 mately 30 seconds of the menu screen being
8- Changing the turn signal sound  displayed, the display returns to the function
P.5-154 setting screen.
2- Changing the fuel consumption display P.5-158
unit  P.5-155 9- Changing the instant fuel consumption
3- Changing the temperature unit  display  P.5-158
P.5-155 10- Blind Spot Warning (BSW): To operate
4- Changing the display language  (if so equipped)  P.5-109
P.5-156 11- Tire ID set change  P.5-122

4. After switching to the menu screen (B) for 2. Press the switch or switch several  When the following operation is per-
the setting you want to change, press the times to switch to the “AVERAGE FUEL formed, the mode setting changes auto-
switch to switch to the setting selec- CONSUMPTION RESET MODE” matically from manual to auto.
tion screen. For further details on the screen. Then, press the switch to [Except for vehicles equipped with the
operation methods, refer to the each sec- switch to the setting selection screen. F.A.S.T.-key]
tions.
Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
tion from the “ACC” or “OFF” position.
5 NOTE
 If the battery is disconnected, these function [For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
settings are reset from memory to the factory key]
settings automatically (except “Blind Spot Change the operation mode to ON from
Warning (BSW): To operate”, “Reset of low
ACC or OFF.
tire pressure warning threshold” and “Tire
ID set change”).
 You cannot select an item that is displayed Auto reset mode
dimly on the menu.
 When the average fuel consumption and
average speed are being displayed, if you
Changing the reset mode for aver- select the reset mode, and then press the press and hold the switch, these calcu-
age fuel consumption and average switch to confirm the setting.
lations will be reset to zero.
speed  When the engine switch or the operation
The setting is changed to the selected mode is in the following conditions, the
N00557001266
reset condition.
average fuel consumption display and the
You can change the mode condition for the
average speed display will automatically
average fuel consumption and average speed Manual reset mode reset.
display to “Auto reset” or “Manual reset.”
 If you press and hold the switch when [Except for vehicles equipped with the
the average fuel consumption and average F.A.S.T.-key]
speed are displayed, these calculations The ignition switch has been set to the
on page 5-152.
will be reset to zero. “ACC” or “OFF” position for approxi-
mately 4 hours or more.

[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- 2. Press the switch or switch several The distance and speed units are also changed
key] times to switch to the “FUEL CON- in the following combinations to match the
The operation mode has been in ACC or SUMPTION UNIT” screen. Then, press selected fuel consumption unit.
OFF for approximately 4 hours or more.
the switch to switch to the setting Distance Speed
selection screen. Fuel
(driving (average
NOTE economy
range) speed)
 The average fuel consumption display and
average speed display can be reset separately km /L km km /h 5
in both auto reset mode and manual reset L /100 km km km /h
mode.
 Disconnecting the battery cable will erase mpg (US) mile (s) mph
from memory the manual reset mode or auto mpg (UK) mile (s) mph
reset mode setting for the average speed dis-
play and average fuel consumption display.
 The initial (default) setting is “Auto reset Changing the temperature unit
mode”. N00557201213
The temperature display unit can be switched.

Changing the fuel consumption 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
select the units, and then press the
display unit switch to confirm the setting.
N00557101195 on page 5-152.
The setting is changed to the selected unit.
The fuel consumption display unit can be 2. Press the switch or switch several
changed. The distance, speed, and amount times to switch to the “TEMPERATURE
units are also changed to match the selected NOTE
 The display units for the driving range, the
UNIT” screen. Then, press the switch
fuel consumption unit. to switch to the setting selection screen.
average fuel consumption, the average speed
1. Switch to the function setting screen. and the instant fuel consumption are
Refer to “Changing the function settings” changed, but the units for the indicating nee-
dle (speedometer), the odometer and the trip
on page 5-152.
odometer will remain unchanged.
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically
set to {mpg (US) or L/100 km}.

Changing the display language NOTE

N00557301201  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
The language of the multi-information dis- the language setting is erased and is automat-
play can be changed. ically set to ENGLISH.
 If “---” is selected in the language setting, a
1. Switch to the function setting screen. warning message is not displayed when there
Refer to “Changing the function settings” is a warning display or interrupt display.
5 on page 5-152.
times to switch to the “LANGUAGE”
Changing the language on other
screen. system to match the multi-infor-
3. Press the switch or switch to mation display (if so equipped)
Then, press the switch to switch to the
select the units, and then press the setting selection screen. N00529801344
switch to confirm the setting.

The language used in Multi Around Monitor
The setting is changed to the selected tem-
(if so equipped) can be changed automatically
perature unit.
to the same language as that shown in the
multi-information display.
NOTE
 The temperature value on air conditioner 1. Switch to the function setting screen.
panel is switched in conjunction with outside Refer to “Changing the function settings”
temperature display unit of the multi-infor- on page 5-152.
mation display.
However, “°F” or “°C” are not shown to tem-
perature display of an air conditioner.
 If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
the unit setting is erased and is automatically 3. Press the switch or switch to
set to °F (°C). select the desired language, and then press
the switch to confirm the setting.
The setting is changed to the selected lan-
guage.

2. Press the switch or switch several NOTE 2. Press the switch or switch several
times to switch to the “LANGUAGE • When “ON” (language cooperation: times to switch to the “OPERATION
SYNC” screen. Then, press the switch enabled) has been selected, the language for SOUND” screen. Then, press the
to switch to the setting selection screen. Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) is switch to switch to the setting selection
automatically changed to the language screen.
selected for the multi-information display.
However, this changing function may not
work depending on the language selected
for the multi-information display.
5
• When “OFF” (language cooperation: dis-
abled) has been selected, the language for
Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) is
not automatically changed to match the lan-
guage selected for the multi-information
display.
 The language on the audio system’s display
3. Press the switch or switch to does not automatically change when you
select “ON” (language cooperation: enabled)
select the setting, and then press the in the language cooperation control. 3. Press the switch or switch to
switch to confirm the setting.
select the sound, and then press the
Operation sound setting switch to confirm the setting.
NOTE N00557401172 The setting is changed to the selected con-
 If the battery is disconnected, the language You can change the operation sounds of the dition.
cooperative control is automatically set to multi-information display switches and rheo-
“ON” (language cooperation: enabled). stat illumination button. NOTE
 The language cooperation setting can be  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
switched in the following manner. 1. Switch to the function setting screen. the operation sound setting is erased and is
Refer to “Changing the function settings” automatically set to ON (operation sound
on page 5-152. on).

NOTE 3. Press the switch or switch to

 The operation sound setting only deactivates select the time, and then press the
the operation sound of the multi-information switch to confirm the setting.
display switches and rheostat illumination The setting is changed to the selected
button. The warning display and other time.
sounds cannot be deactivated.
NOTE
5 Changing the time until “REST  If the battery is disconnected, the memory of
REMINDER” is displayed the unit setting is erased and is automatically
N00557501186 set to the “OFF”.
 The drive time is reset when the ignition
The time until the display appears can be
switch is in the “OFF” position or the opera- 3. Press the switch or switch to
changed. tion mode is in OFF.
select the sound, and then press the
1. Switch to the function setting screen. switch to confirm the setting.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” The setting changes to the selected turn
on page 5-152. Changing the turn signal sound signal sound.
N00563501107
It is possible to change the turn signal sound.
times to switch to the “REST Changing the instant fuel con-
REMINDER” screen. Then, press the 1. Switch to the function setting screen. sumption display
switch to switch to the setting selection Refer to “Changing the function settings” N00563601052
screen. on page 5-152. It is possible to change the bar graph setting

2. Press the switch or switch several of the instant fuel consumption display.
times to switch to the “TURN SIGNAL
SOUND” screen. Then, press the Refer to “Changing the function settings”
switch to switch to the setting selection on page 5-152.
screen.

2. Press the switch or switch several 2. Press the switch or switch several NOTE
times to switch to the “INSTANT FUEL times to switch to the “FACTORY • “TEMPERATURE UNIT”: °F (Fahrenheit)
CONSUMPTION DISPLAY” screen. RESET” screen. Then, press the or °C (Celsius)
Then, press the switch to switch to the switch to switch to the setting selection • “LANGUAGE”: ENGLISH
setting selection screen. screen. • “LANGUAGE SYNC”: ON
• “OPERATION SOUND”: ON
• “REST REMINDER”: OFF
• “TURN SIGNAL SOUND”: SOUND 1 5
• “INSTANT FUEL CONSUMPTION DIS-
PLAY”: ON
 “BSW” and “TPMS ID” cannot be returned
to their factory settings.
3. Press the switch or switch to 3. Press the switch or switch to

select the setting, and then press the select “RESET”, and then press and hold
switch to confirm the setting. the switch for approximately 5 sec-
The setting changes to the selected bar onds or more to confirm the setting.
graph setting. The buzzer sounds and all of the function
settings are returned to the factory set-
Returning to the factory settings tings.
N00557601233
Many of the function settings can be returned NOTE

to their factory settings.  The factory settings are as follows.
• “AVERAGE FUEL CONSUMPTION
1. Switch to the function setting screen. RESET MODE”: AUTO
Refer to “Changing the function settings” • “FUEL CONSUMPTION UNIT”: mpg
on page 5-152. (US) or (L/100 km)

Indicator light, warning light, and information screen display list

N00557701090
Indicator and warning light list

N00557801352
1- Position indicator  P.5-180 7- Forward Collision Mitigation system 12- Electric parking brake warning light
2- Turn signal indicators/hazard warning (FCM) OFF indicator (if so equipped) (yellow) (if so equipped)  P.5-181
lights  P.5-180  P.5-104 13- Active stability control (ASC) indicator
3- Front fog light indicator  P.5-180 8- Charging system warning light  P.5-83
4- High beam indicator  P.5-180  P.5-183 14- Active stability control (ASC) OFF
5- Automatic High Beam (AHB) indicator 9- Electric power steering system (EPS) indicator  P.5-83
(if so equipped)  P.5-191 warning light  P.5-80 15- Anti-lock braking system warning light
6- LED headlight warning light (if so 10- Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator  P.5-79
equipped)  P.5-190 light (if so equipped)  P.5-108 16- Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)
11- Information screen display warning light  P. 4-36
 P.5-161


17- Engine malfunction indicator (“SER-
VICE ENGINE SOON” or “Check
engine light”)  P.5-182
18- Seat belt reminder/warning light
 P.4-18
19- Tire pressure monitoring system warn-
ing light  P.5-119
20- Brake auto hold indicator (if so
equipped)  P.5-74
5
21- Brake warning light (red)  P.5-181
Information screen display

N00557901122
When there is information to be announced, such as light reminder, the tone sounds and the screen switches to the displays shown below.
Refer to the appropriate page and take the necessary measures.
When the cause of the warning display is eliminated, the warning display goes out automatically.
Refer to Warning display list on page 5-162.
Refer to Other interrupt displays on page 5-177.
NOTE
 In the following cases, a warning may be displayed on the information screen and the buzzer may sound for a few seconds, at times.
This is caused by the system picking up interference such as strong electromagnetic waves or noise, and is not a functional problem.
• An extremely strong electromagnetic wave is received from a source such as an illegal radio set, a spark from a wire, or a radar station.
• Abnormal voltage or a static electricity discharge is generated by the operation of your vehicle’s electronics (including after-market parts).
If the warning display has occurred a number of times, take your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your choice and
have the system checked.

Warning display list

N00558001306
Screen Cause Do this (Reference)

 You have forgotten to remove the key from the igni-  Remove the key.
tion switch. Refer to “Key reminder system” on page 5-33.
5
 You have forgotten to turn off the lights. Refer to “Light auto-cutout function (headlights and
other lights)” on page 5-190.
 The washer fluid is running low.  Replenish the container with washer fluid.
Refer to “Washer fluid” on page 9-9.
Refer to “Capacity” on page 11-7.
 There is a malfunction in the LED headlights.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system.
Refer to “LED headlight warning light” on page
5-190.
 The system has received the customer key program- Refer to “Customer key programming (Except for vehi-
ming request correctly and is currently processing cles sold in Canada)” on page 5-5.
the registration request. Refer to “Customer F.A.S.T.-key programming (Except
for vehicles sold in Canada)” on page 5-27.


 There is a fault in the F. A. S. T.-key. Refer to “Free-hand Advanced Security Transmitter
(F.A.S.T.-key)” on page 5-12.


Engine switch is pressed  Although the engine switch was pressed, the keyless  Touch the keyless operation key to the engine
one time operation key could not be detected. switch.
Refer to “If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operating prop-
erly” on page 5-25.
5
Engine switch is pressed
two times or more
 The engine switch is pressed to stop the engine and  Place the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position
the selector lever is in a position other than the “P” to put the operation mode in OFF.
(PARK) position.
 There is a fault in the EPS.  Have the vehicle inspected by an authorized

Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice as soon as possible.
Refer to “Electric power steering system (EPS)” on
page 5-80.
 There is a fault in the Anti-lock braking system.  Avoid sudden braking and high-speed driving, park
the vehicle in a safe place, and take corrective mea-
sures.
Refer to “Anti-lock braking system warning
lights/display” on page 5-79.


 The tire pressure in one of the tires (except spare Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page
tire) is low. 5-119.
 There is a fault in the tire pressure monitoring sys- Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System” on page
tem. 5-119. 5
 One of the doors or the liftgate is not completely  Close the door or liftgate.
closed. Refer to “Door ajar warning display screen” on page
The open door is displayed. 5-147.
 The engine hood is open.  Close the engine hood.

Refer to “Engine hood” on page 9-3.
 There is a fault in the electronic immobilizer (Anti-  Put the operation mode in OFF, and then start the
theft starting system). engine again.
If the warning is not cancelled, please contact an
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil-
ity of your choice.


 The driver’s door is open when the operation mode  Put the operation mode in OFF.
is in any mode other than OFF. Refer to “Operation mode ON reminder system” on
page 5-34.
 An attempt was made to lock all the doors and the  Put the operation mode in OFF.
liftgate when the operation mode is in any mode Refer to “Operation mode OFF reminder system” on
other than OFF. page 5-20.
5
 There is a fault in the electrical system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
or a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
 The engine is overheated.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
measures.
Refer to “Engine overheating” on page 8-4.
 The automatic transaxle or CVT fluid temperature is  Park the vehicle in a safe place and take corrective
increased. measures.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission
(CVT)” on page 5-60.
 The seat belt is not fastened when the ignition switch  Wear your seat belt properly.
or operation mode is in ON. Refer to “Driver’s seat belt reminder/warning light
and display” on page 4-18.


 There is a fault in the fuel system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
 The vehicle is being driven with the parking brake  Release the parking brake. Refer to “Brake warning
still applied. display” on page 5-183. 5
 The brake fluid level is low.  Park the vehicle in a safe place and inspect it.
 There is a fault in the brake system.  If the light still illuminates after the inspection, con-
tact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Brake warning display” on page 5-183.
 There is a fault in the Electric parking brake.  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an
Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-47.
 The parking brake cannot be applied temporarily due Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-47.
to repeated operation of the Electric parking brake
switch within a short time.
 You try to release the Electric parking brake switch Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page 5-47.
without depressing the brake pedal.


 The Electric parking brake has been automatically Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-74.
applied.
 The brake auto hold is automatically cancelled. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-74.
5
 There is a fault in the Electric parking brake system  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer to
or the brake auto hold system. The brake auto hold have the system checked.
cannot be used. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-74.
 The Electric parking brake is not automatically  When the ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
applied because there is a fault in the Electric park- position or the operation mode is put in OFF, place
ing brake system. the selector lever in the “P” (PARK) position and
depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual with
the right foot.
Then, operate the ignition switch or the engine
switch.
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
checked.
Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-74.


 The brake auto hold system does not turn on because  Press the brake auto hold switch after fastening the
the driver’s seat belt is not fastened. driver’s seat belt.
 The brake auto hold system does not turn off because  Depress the brake pedal more firmly than usual with
the brake pedal is not pressed. the right foot. Then, press the brake auto hold switch. 5
 There is a fault in the engine oil circulation system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
or a repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Oil pressure warning display” on page
5-184.
 There is a fault in the charging system.  Park your vehicle in a safe place as soon as possible
or a repair facility of your choice for assistance.
Refer to “Charging system warning display” on page
5-184.
 There is a fault in the SRS airbag or the pre-tensioner  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system. repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked, immediately.
Refer to “SRS warning light/display” on page 4-36.


 There is a fault in the active stability control (ASC).  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
checked.
Refer to “Active stability control (ASC)” on page
5-81.
 There is a fault in the hill start assist.  Have the vehicle checked at an authorized
5 Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
Refer to “Hill start assist” on page 5-77.
 There is a fault in the S-AWC system.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
checked.
Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)” on
page 5-67.
 There is a fault in the CVT.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a

checked.
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission
(CVT)” on page 5-60.
 The S-AWC system is hot. Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control)” on page
5-67.


 The fuel is running low.  Refuel as soon as possible.
Refer to “Fuel remaining display screen” on page
5-147.
 The outside temperature is 37 °F (3 °C) or less.  Be careful driving on frozen ground.

 The ground may be frozen even when this warning is 5
not displayed, so drive carefully.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) has  Increase the following distance by depressing the
detected the approach of the vehicles in front. brake pedal or marking other decelerating control.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC):
Approach alarm” on page 5-93.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) has  Take appropriate action such as depressing the brake
detected the danger of collision. to avoid collision.
Refer to “Forward collision warning function” on
page 5-101.
 The Electric parking brake cannot be applied auto-  Depress the brake pedal as soon as possible.
matically. Refer to “Brake auto hold” on page 5-74.


 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control Refer to “How to use ACC” on page 5-90.
is active.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) control

5 is automatically canceled and the system is placed in
the standby state.
 Conditions for the start of control are not met, the

Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot start
the control.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot

start the control because the speed is out of speed
range.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) cannot

start the control because not detected the approach of
the vehicles in front.
 The Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) is tem-

porarily unavailable due to conditions such as the
adhesion of contaminants to the sensor.
This is not a malfunction.


 There is a fault in the Adaptive Cruise Control Sys-  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tem (ACC). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “When ACC detects a vehicle in front
within the set distance” on page 5-92.
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, adhere to  Remove a foreign object on the bumper surface
the bumper surface around the sensor. around the sensor. 5
When the warning display does not disappear after
having cleaned the bumper surface around the sen-
sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
Refer to “To cancel ACC control” on page 5-96.
 There is a fault in the Forward Collision Mitigation  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
system (FCM). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch: FCM deactivation
due to fault” on page 5-106.
the bumper surface around the sensor. around the sensor.
sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system
(FCM): System problem warning” on page 5-105.


 FCM braking function of the Forward Collision Mit- Refer to “FCM braking function” on page 5-101.
igation system (FCM) has been activated.
 The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) is

5 temporarily unavailable for some reason.
This is not a malfunction.
 The Lane Departure Warning (LDW) has detected Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” on page
that your vehicle is about to leave or has left the lane. 5-115.
 There is a fault in the Lane Departure Warning  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
(LDW). repair facility of your choice to have the system
checked.
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW)” on page
5-115.
 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) sensor is temporar-  When the warning display does not disappear after
ily not available for some reason such as the environ- waiting for a while, contact an authorized Mitsubishi
mental condition or increase of the sensor Motors dealer.
temperature. Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When the sen-
sor is temporarily not available” on page 5-111.


 The Blind Spot Warning (BSW) does not operate  Immediately have your vehicle inspected at an
normally because there are some malfunctions in the authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
sensor or the system. Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is
a malfunction in the system or the sensor” on page
5-111.
the bumper surface around the sensor. around the sensor. 5
sor, contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
Refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW): When there is
a foreign objects on the sensor” on page 5-112.
 The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) is detected the  Pay special attention to the rear of your vehicle.
vehicle approaching your vehicle. Refer to “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” on page
5-112.
 There is a fault in the sensor.  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.

Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System
problem warning” on page 5-117.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System


 The Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM),  After the temperature of the sensor has been in
Lane Departure Warning (LDW) and Automatic range, the system will automatically return to opera-
High Beam (AHB) is temporarily unavailable due to tion.
the high or low temperature of the sensor. Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system
Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System
5 problem warning” on page 5-117.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System
 The sensor is temporarily unavailable due to condi- Refer to “Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM):
tions such as the adhesion of contaminants to the System problem warning” on page 5-105.
sensor or windshield. Refer to “Lane Departure Warning (LDW): System
This is not a malfunction. problem warning” on page 5-117.
Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System prob-
lem warning” on page 5-194.
 There is a fault in the system of automatic high  Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
beam. Refer to “Automatic High Beam (AHB): System

Other interrupt displays

N00558201340

 When starting the engine, the selector  Place the selector lever in the “P”
lever is in a position other than the “P” (PARK) position, depress and hold the
(PARK) or the “N” (NEUTRAL) posi- brake pedal with the right foot, and then
tion, or you pressed the engine switch press the engine switch to start the 5
without depressing the brake pedal. engine.
Refer to “Starting and stopping the
engine” on page 5-23.
 When communication was successful Refer to “If the F.A.S.T.-key is not operating
after the F.A.S.T.-key was touched to the properly” on page 5-25.
engine switch.
The operation status of each system is displayed on the information screen. For further details, refer to the appropriate page for each system.
NOTE
 When operating each system, confirm that the operation status of the system has changed on the information screen. However, the operation status of the
system may not be displayed immediately after the warning display appears even if the system is operated.


Screen System operation status Reference
 When “AUTO” mode of S-AWC is Refer to “S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Con-
selected. trol)” on page 5-67.
 When “SNOW” mode of S-AWC is

5 selected.
 When “GRAVEL” mode of S-AWC is

selected.
 When the ECO mode is activated. Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 5-198.
 When the parking sensor detects an Refer to “Parking sensors (Front/Rear)” on

obstacle. page 5-123.


Screen System operation status Reference
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page
system (FCM) is activated or the timing 5-104.
of an alarm is changed.
 When the Forward Collision Mitigation Refer to “FCM ON/OFF switch” on page
system (FCM) is deactivated. 5-104.
This informs you that a periodic inspection is due.
Screen Do this
Have an inspection made by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. For further details,
refer to “Service reminder” on page 5-148.

Indicators
The rest time can be set.
Screen Do this
Park the vehicle in a safe place, turn off the engine, and take a rest.
Use this display as rough guide for taking rests during a long drive.
The interval from the start of your trip until this message is displayed can be set.
Refer to “Changing the function settings” on page 5-152.
5 The display and buzzer alert the driver when the set time is reached. If you continue to drive
without having a rest, the buzzer sounds approximately every 5 minutes to encourage you to
take a rest.
 In the following cases, the time driven is reset and the display returns to the previous
display screen. After this, when the set time is reached again, the display and buzzer
encourage you to take a rest.
• The buzzer sounds three times.
• The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” position or the operation mode is put in
OFF.
• The multi-information display switches are held (for approximately 2 seconds or
more).
Indicators NOTE Front fog light indicator

N00519900127  If the indicator flashes faster than usual or if N00520201273
the indicator stays on without flashing, check This indicator comes on while the front fog
for a malfunctioning turn signal light bulb or
Turn signal indicators/Hazard turn signal connection.
lights are on.
warning lights
N00520000216 Position indicator
The arrows will flash in time with the corre- High beam indicator N00551301094
sponding exterior turn signals when the turn N00520100086 This indicator light illuminates while the
signal lever is used. A blue light comes on when the headlights parking lights are on.
are on high beam.
Both arrows will flash when the hazard warn-
ing flasher switch is pressed.

Warning lights
Warning lights CAUTION CAUTION

N00520300147  If the brake warning light and the Anti-lock • Should the brakes fail, use engine braking
braking system warning light are illuminated to reduce your speed and observe the fol-
at the same time, the braking force distribu- lowings.
Brake warning light (red) and tion function will not operate, so the vehicle [Vehicles with the parking brake of the
buzzer may be destabilized during sudden braking lever type]
N00520401565 under the following conditions. Carefully pull the parking brake lever.
This light comes on when the ignition switch • When the brake warning light does not go
out even when the parking brake is
[Vehicles with the Electric parking brake]
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
5
is turned to the “ON” position (engine off) or switch.
released.
the operation mode is put in ON. Refer to “Electric parking brake” on page
• When the brake warning light stays on
When the engine is started, the light should while driving. 5-47.
go off a few seconds later. A warning is also • If the above occurs, avoid sudden braking
displayed in the multi-information display. Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
and high-speed driving. Park the vehicle in
The warning light also illuminates after start- stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
a safe place, and contact an authorized
ing the engine under the following condi- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
tions. of your choice as soon as possible. Electric parking brake warning
 The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
 When the parking brake is still applied. following manner when brake performance
light (yellow) (if so equipped)
 When the brake fluid level is low. is deteriorated. N00591200043
 When the brake system circuit is not • Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
This warning light will illuminate when there
working properly. you press down on the brake pedal harder
is a fault in the Electric parking brake system.
than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
may go all the way to the floor. Normally, this warning light illuminates
When the vehicle is moving at more than
when the operation mode is put in ON, and
5 mph (8 km/h) and parking brake applied, a
goes off in a few seconds.
buzzer will sound to inform the driver that the
parking brake is not properly release.
Before driving, be sure that the parking brake

is fully released and brake warning light is
off.

Warning lights
indicator comes on and stays on after refuel-
CAUTION ing, stop the engine and check that the cap is
CAUTION
 When the warning light remains on or does  If the engine malfunction indicator comes on
properly tightened. (Turn the cap clockwise
not come on, there is the possibility that the while the engine is running, avoid driving at
until you hear clicking sounds.)
parking brake cannot be operated or high speeds.
released. Immediately contact the nearest If this indicator does not go off after several During vehicle operation with the indicator
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. When seconds or lights up while driving, have the on, the vehicle may not accelerate when you
the warning light comes on during driving, system checked as soon as possible at an depress the accelerator pedal.
5 immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors repair facility of your choice.
When the vehicle is stationary with the indi-
cator on, you must depress the brake pedal
dealer. If you inevitably have to park, park more firmly than usual since the engine
the vehicle on level and stable ground, shift idling speed is higher than usual and a vehi-
the selector lever in “P” (PARK) position
CAUTION cle with continuously variable transmission
and place chocks or blocks.  Driving for a long time with the engine mal- (CVT) has a stronger tendency to creep for-
function indicator on may cause more dam- ward.
age to the emission control system. This
could also affect fuel economy and drivabil-
Engine malfunction indicator ity.
NOTE
(“SERVICE ENGINE SOON”  If this indicator does not come on when the
 Do not disconnect the battery cable when the
ignition switch is turned to the “ON” posi-
or “Check engine light”) tion or the operation mode is put in ON, have
engine malfunction indicator (“SERVICE
N00520501856 ENGINE SOON” or “Check engine light”) is
the system checked at an authorized
on.
This indicator is a part of the onboard diag- Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
The engine electronic control module stores
nostic (OBD) system which monitors the of your choice.
critical OBD information (especially exhaust
emissions, engine control system or continu- emission data), which may be lost if the bat-
ously variable transmission (CVT) control tery cable is disconnected while the engine
system. If a problem is detected in one of malfunction indicator is on. This will make it
these systems, this indicator illuminates or difficult to diagnose the cause of future prob-
flashes. When the ignition switch is turned to lems.
the “ON” position or the operation mode is
put in ON, this indicator normally comes on
and goes off after the engine has started.
This indicator will come on if the fuel tank

filler cap is not properly tightened. If this

Information screen display

This warning is displayed if the vehicle is
Charging system warning light being driven with the parking brake still
CAUTION
N00520601349  If this warning stays on and does not go out
applied. The brake warning light in the instru-
This light comes on in the event of a malfunc- while driving, there is a danger of ineffective
ment cluster only comes on when the parking
braking. If this happens, park the vehicle in a
tion in the charging system or when the igni- brake is applied. safe place, and contact an authorized
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position For details, refer to “Brake warning light Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
(engine off) or the operation mode is put in (red) and buzzer” on page 5-181. of your choice.
ON. The warning is also displayed in the
multi-information display. When the engine
 If the brake warning display, brake warning
5
is started, the light should go out. Check to
CAUTION light, and the Anti-lock braking system
warning light are illuminated at the same
 If a vehicle is driven without releasing the
make sure that the light has gone out before time, the braking force distribution function
parking brake, the brakes will overheat,
driving. resulting in ineffective braking and possible
will not operate, so the vehicle may be desta-
bilized during sudden braking. Avoid sudden
brake failure.
braking and high-speed driving. Park the
CAUTION If this warning is displayed, release the park-
vehicle in a safe place, and contact an autho-
 If the warning light stays on while the engine ing brake.
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place facility of your choice.
as soon as possible and contact an authorized  The vehicle should be brought to a halt in the
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility following manner when brake performance
of your choice to have the system checked. is deteriorated.
• Confirm that the vehicle slows down when
you press down on the brake pedal harder
Information screen display than usual. In some cases, the brake pedal
N00558301077
When the ignition switch is turned to the may go all the way to the floor.
ON, if the brake fluid is low, this warning is
Brake warning display displayed.
N00558401182
The brake warning light in the instrument
cluster also illuminates.
For details, refer to “Brake warning light
(red) and buzzer” on page 5-181.

Head Up Display (HUD) (if so equipped)
CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION

• Should the brakes fail, use engine braking  If warnings are displayed while the engine is  If this warning display comes on when the
to reduce your speed and observe the fol- running, park your vehicle in a safe place as engine oil level is proper, have your vehicle
lowings. soon as possible and contact an authorized checked at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
[Vehicles with the parking brake of the Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
lever type] of your choice to have the system checked.
Carefully pull the parking brake lever.
5 [Vehicles with the Electric parking brake] NOTE
Keep pulling the Electric parking brake
switch. (Refer to “Electric parking brake”
Oil pressure warning display  The oil pressure warning display does not
N00558701127 show the amount of oil. The oil level must be
on page 5-47.) checked using the dipstick.
Depress the brake pedal to illuminate the
stop lights to alert the vehicles behind you.
Head Up Display (HUD) (if so
Charging system warning dis- equipped)
play If the engine oil pressure drops while the N00594300029
N00558601126 engine is running, the warning display is dis- The Head Up Display (HUD) shows informa-
played on the information screen in the multi- tion on a transparent display so that you can
information display. easily check the following information while
looking ahead when driving.
CAUTION
 If the vehicle is driven while the engine oil is
Displayed information:
If there is a fault in the charging system, the low, or the oil level is normal but the warn-
 Vehicle speed
warning display is displayed on the informa- ing is displayed, the engine may overheat
and damage may result.  Auto-speed (cruise) control information
tion screen in the multi-information display.  Speed limiter information
The charge warning light in the instrument  If the warning is displayed while the engine
is running, park your vehicle in a safe place  Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC)
cluster also illuminates. information
as soon as possible and check the engine oil
level.

Example WARNING CAUTION

 Always stop the vehicle in a safe place  Do not affix a sticker, label, etc., to the dis-
before operating the HUD. If you operate play. They could block the display or
it while driving, your attention to the road obstruct the opening or closing operation,
ahead may be affected, resulting in an resulting in a malfunction. Also, the sensor
accident. (A) that adjusts the brightness of the display
 Do not spray water or spill beverages in may not function correctly, causing the dis-
the HUD. If the switches, wires, or electri-
cal components become wet, they could
play to be difficult to see.
5
malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
If you accidentally spill a beverage, wipe
1- Display up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
2- Speed display screen ately consult an authorized Mitsubishi
3- Information display screen Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
choice.
When a warning is displayed on the informa-
tion screen in the meter, a warning will also
be displayed on the HUD. CAUTION  Do not shine a bright light onto the light-
receiving portion of the sensor (A). The sen-
 When opening or closing the display, do not
sor could malfunction.
Examples of displayed warnings: touch the moving parts. Otherwise, your
 If you drop an object into the storage space
hands could be caught, resulting in personal
for the display and cannot retrieve it, or if the
 Door ajar warning injury.
display was closed while an object was in the
 Seat belt reminder  Do not place any objects near the HUD. The
storage space and can no longer be opened,
 Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) objects could prevent the display from open-
warning ing or obstruct the opening operation, result-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
ing in a malfunction.
 Forward Collision Mitigation system have the system checked.
 Never open, close, or adjust the angle of the
(FCM) warning
display manually. Applying a strong force to
 Lane Departure Warning (LDW) the display could result in a malfunction.
Refer to “Indicator light, warning light, and

information screen display list” on page
5-160.

NOTE Using the HUD

 When you are wearing sunglasses, the dis-
play may be difficult to see. Remove your
sunglasses or adjust the brightness of the dis- NOTE
play.  If the display does not open or close when
Refer to “Adjusting the brightness of the dis-
the switch is pushed, check that there are
play” on page 5-187.
no objects near the display obstructing its
5  If the battery is disconnected or the battery
voltage is low, the display will return to the
movement. If the display does not open or
close even though there are no obstructions,
default angle and may be difficult to see. If
this occurs, adjust the angle of the display.
Refer to “Adjusting the angle of the display”
have the system checked.
on page 5-187.
 It may be difficult to see the display depend-
NOTE
ing on the weather conditions (rain, snow,  If the HUD was open when the ignition
direct sunlight, temperature, etc.). If this Opening the display switch was turned to the “OFF” position or
occurs, adjust the angle and brightness of the the operation mode was put in OFF, the HUD
display. 1. With the ignition switch is in “ON” posi- will open automatically when the ignition
Refer to “Adjusting the angle of the display” tion or the operation mode is in ON, push switch is turned to the “ON” position or the
on page 5-187 and “Adjusting the brightness operation mode is put in ON.
the switch to open the display.
of the display” on page 5-187.  If the HUD was close when the ignition
switch was turned to the “OFF” position or
the operation mode was put in OFF, the HUD
will not open automatically when the igni-
tion switch is turned to the “ON” position or
the operation mode is put in ON.
Closing the display
1. When the display is open, push the

switch.
2. The launch screen will be displayed, and
then information will be displayed.


of the display to raise or lower the position
where the information is displayed.
2. The ending screen will be displayed, and

then the display will close.
Handling the HUD
A special coating is applied to the display and

Adjusting the brightness of the mirror surface. Use a finely textured, soft
NOTE display cloth, such as an eyeglass cleaning cloth.
 When the ignition switch is turned to the
“OFF” position or the operation mode is put
in OFF, the HUD will close automatically.
When the display is open, push the side or CAUTION
side of the switch to adjust the bright-  Do not use cleaners or protectants that con-
ness of the display. The brightness can be tain silicone or wax. If these cleaners and
protectants are used on the display or mirror
Adjusting the angle of the display adjusted to 16 different levels.
surface, the coating could be scratched and
come off.
When the display is open, push the side or
side of the switch to adjust the angle

Combination headlights and dimmer switch
Combination headlights and Type 1 NOTE

dimmer switch Rotate the switch to operate the lights.
 Once the daytime running light come on,
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
N00522501922
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
Headlights ACC.
5 NOTE [When the engine is not running, or when the

engine is running but the parking brake is not
 Do not leave the headlights and other lights
on for a long period of time when the engine
released]
is not running. The battery will run down.
The engine starts when the lights are off.
 When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
becomes foggy. This is the same as when OFF All lights off
window glass mists up on a humid day, and The combinations of switch operations and Parking, tail, front and rear side-
does not indicate a problem. When the light illuminated lights differ in accordance with marker lights, license plate and
is switched on, the heat will dry out the fog. the following conditions. instrument panel lights on
However, if water collects inside the light,
have it checked by an authorized Mitsubishi [When the engine is started, and the parking Headlights and other lights on
Motors dealer or a repair facility of your brake is released]
choice.
The daytime running lights illumi-
OFF
nated
The daytime running lights illumi-
nated
Tail, front and rear side-marker lights,
license plate and instrument panel
lights on
Headlights and other lights on

Type 2 The daytime running lights illumi- NOTE

nated  The sensitivity of the automatic on/off con-
Rotate the switch to operate the lights. Tail, front and rear side-marker trol can be adjusted.
lights, license plate and instrument For further information, please contact your
panel lights on authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
As your vehicle is equipped with Smart-
phone Link Display Audio, screen operations
5
NOTE can be used to make the adjustment.
 Once the daytime running light come on,
details.
they do not go out until the ignition switch is
 Do not cover the sensor (A) for the automatic
turned to the “OFF” or “ACC” position or
on/off control by affixing a sticker or label to
the operation mode is changed to OFF or
the windshield.
ACC.
The combinations of switch operations and

illuminated lights differ in accordance with [When the engine is not running, or when the
the following conditions. engine is running but the parking brake is not
released]
[When the engine is started, and the parking
brake is released] The engine starts when the lights are off.
The daytime running lights illumi- OFF All lights off

OFF  If the lights do not turn on or off with the
nated Headlights and other lights turn on switch in the “AUTO” position, manually
The daytime running lights illumi- AUTO and off automatically in accor- operate the switch. Have the system checked
dance with outside light level. by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
nated (when it is light outside the
vehicle) Parking, tail, front and rear side-
AUTO
Headlights and other lights turn on marker lights, license plate and
and off automatically in accor- instrument panel lights on
dance with outside light level.


[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-
Light auto-cutout function key]
LED headlight warning light (if
(headlights and other lights) The operation mode is changed to OFF or so equipped)
N00532601652 ACC and the driver’s door is not opened. N00584500044
 If the following operation is performed
with the combination headlights and dim- This warning light will illuminate when there
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position,
NOTE is a malfunction in the LED headlights.
 The light auto-cutout function can be deacti-
the lights automatically turn off.
5 vated.
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
[Except for vehicles equipped with the
dealer for details.
F.A.S.T.-key] For vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” Link Display Audio, adjustments can be
or “ACC” position or the key is removed made using screen operations. For further
from the ignition switch and the driver’s details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.
door is opened.
[For vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.- When you want to keep the lights
key]
The operation mode is changed to OFF or
on:
ACC and the driver’s door is opened.
If the combination headlights and dimmer NOTE
 If the following operation is performed  If the warning light illuminates, there may be
switch is turned to the “ ” or “ ” posi-
a malfunction in the unit. Contact an autho-
with the combination headlights and dim- tion again after the engine is turned off, the
mer switch in the “ ” or “ ” position, approximately 3-minute auto-cutout function facility of your choice to have the system
the lights automatically turn off after described above will not work. The lights (the checked.
approximately 3 minutes. parking lights, tail lights and license plate
lights) will stay on and will not turn off auto-
[Except for vehicles equipped with the matically.
F.A.S.T.-key]
Headlight reminder buzzer
N00549801252
The ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
or “ACC” position or the key is removed [When using a key to start the engine]
from the ignition switch and the driver’s If the driver’s door is opened with the key in
door is not opened. the “OFF” or “ACC” position or removed


from the ignition switch while the lights are
on, the tone will sound to remind you to turn
Automatic High Beam (AHB) (if
off the lights. so equipped)
N00591300060
[When using the F.A.S.T.-key to start the
engine] The Automatic High Beam (AHB) turns the
If the driver’s door is opened with the opera- high beam light on or off automatically
tion mode is put in OFF or ACC, or if the according to surrounding light conditions.
operation mode is changed to OFF while the The sensor (A) detects lights, such as the 5
lights are on, the tone will sound to remind lights of an oncoming vehicle, a vehicle
you to turn off the lights. ahead or street lights.
In either case, the lights will turn off automat-

ically and so will the tone. Or you can turn Headlight flasher
the light switch to the “OFF” position to stop N00550001225
the tone. You can flash the high beams by pulling the
lever gently toward you (2). The lights will
Dimmer (high/low beam go back to normal when you let go. While the
change) high beam is on, you will see a blue light on
N00549901178
the instrument panel.
To change the headlights from high beam to
low beam and vice versa, pull the turn signal NOTE
lever to (1). Switch the headlights to low  You can flash the high beams by pulling the
beam as a courtesy whenever there are lever toward you, even if the light switch is WARNING
off.  Do not rely solely on the AHB. Always
oncoming vehicles, or when there is traffic
 If you turn the lights off with the head lights observe surrounding traffic and light con-
moving ahead of you. An illuminated blue
set to high beam illumination, the headlights ditions. If necessary, manually turn the
light in the instrument cluster indicates when high beams on or off.
are automatically returned to their low beam
the headlights are on high beam. setting. Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam
change)” on page 5-191.


3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
How to use the AHB
AHB will be activated.
N00593600054
1. Rotate the light switch to “ ” position

or “AUTO” position when the engine is Switching to high beam
running.
1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you.
2. The AHB indicator will go off and the
NOTE high beam indicator illuminates.
5  If the headlights are on when the light switch
3. The AHB switch is pressed again, the
is in the “AUTO” position, the AHB works.
AHB will be activated.
2. Press the AHB switch.

The AHB is activated and the indicator is NOTE Automatic switching conditions
N00593700055
illuminated.  You can switch the headlight beams
If the AHB switch is pressed again, the (high/low) manually by operating the lever The high beam headlights illuminate when all
AHB will be deactivated and AHB indica- even if the AHB is working. of the following conditions are met:
tor will go off. Refer to “Dimmer (high/low beam change)”
on page 5-191.  Your vehicle speed exceeds approxi-
If the lever is operated manually, the AHB mately 33 mph (53 km/h).
indicator will go off and the AHB will be  It is dark ahead of your vehicle.
deactivated.  There are no vehicles in front or oncom-
Refer to “Manual switching” on page 5-192. ing vehicles, or none of their exterior
 The AHB is not deactivated when you pull lights are illuminating.
the lever slightly (operation of the headlight
flasher).
The low beam headlights illuminate when
any of the following conditions occur:
 Manual switching  Your vehicle speed does not exceed
approximately 28 mph (45 km/h).
Switching to low beam  It is bright ahead of your vehicle.
 An exterior light of a vehicle in front or
1. Pull the turn signal lever toward you. oncoming vehicle is illuminating.
2. The AHB indicator will go off.

NOTE NOTE NOTE

 The headlights may not be switched from  The AHB recognizes environmental condi- • When lights of the vehicle in front or head-
high beam to low beam under the following tions by sensing a light source ahead of your lights of an oncoming vehicle blend into the
circumstances. vehicle. Therefore, you may feel like some- other lights.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is thing is not quite right when the headlight • The rear end of a vehicle in front (such as a
hindered by any object such as continuous beams are switched automatically. container truck) reflect a strong light.
bends, elevated median/island, traffic signs,  The system may not detect a light vehicle • Your vehicle's headlight is broken or dirty.
roadside trees.
• Your vehicle passes an oncoming vehicle
such as a bicycle.
 The system may not detect an ambient
• Your vehicle is inclined due to a flat tire or 5
towing.
suddenly on a bend with poor visibility. brightness precisely. This causes the traffic • The warning display appears.
• Another vehicle crosses ahead of your vehi- to be dazzled by high beam or the low beam (Refer to “System problem warning” on
cle. to be maintained. In such cases, you should page 5-194.)
 The headlights may remain at low beam (or switch the headlight beams manually.  Observe the precautions below to maintain
be switched from high beam to low beam) • In bad weather (heavy rain, fog, snow or good usage conditions:
when a reflective object (e.g. street light, sandstorm). • Do not attempt to disassemble the sensor.
traffic signal, noticeboard and signboard) • The windshield is dirty or fogged up. • Do not affix a sticker or label on the wind-
reflects light. • The windshield is cracked or broken. shield near the sensor.
 Any of the following factors may influence • The sensor is deformed or dirty. • Avoid overload.
the headlight beam switching timing: • A light, which is similar to the headlights or • Do not modify your vehicle.
• How brightly the exterior lights of a vehicle tail lights, is shining around your vehicle. • When the windshield is replaced, use the
in front or oncoming vehicle illuminate. • A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is Mitsubishi Motors genuine parts.
• Movement or direction of a vehicle in front driven without lights, the exterior lights are
or oncoming vehicle. dirty or discolored, or the direction of the To adjust the sensitivity of the sensor
• Only right or left exterior light of a vehicle headlight beams is adjusted improperly.
in front or oncoming vehicle is illuminat- • It becomes dark and bright suddenly and The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporar-
ing. continuously around your vehicle. ily lowering in the following ways.
• A vehicle in front or oncoming vehicle is a • Your vehicle is driven on uneven surfaces.
motorcycle. • Your vehicle is driven on a winding road. 1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and the
• Road conditions (gradient, bends and road • A reflective object such as a noticeboard or ignition switch is turned to the “OFF”
surface). a mirror reflects a light ahead of your vehi- position or the operation mode is put in
• The number of occupants and luggage load. cle. OFF.


2. Press the AHB switch more than 15 times [When the sensor is malfunctioning]  Sensor is too hot or cold
within 5 seconds after operation mode is
turned on. If the system becomes temporarily unavail-
able due to the high or low temperature of the
sensor, the following warning display will
appear.
N00593800056
After the temperature of the sensor has been
If a problem occurs with the system, the fol-
5 lowing warning display will appear to the
NOTE in range, the system will automatically return
 If the sensor or its surrounding area becomes to operation.
type of the problem. If the warning display does not disappear
extremely high temperature when parking
the vehicle under a blazing sun, the “AHB after waiting for a while, there is a possibility
 The AHB deactivation due to fault SERVICE REQUIRED” warning display that the AHB has a malfunction. Contact an
may appear. authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
If a failure is detected in the system, the fol- If the message remains even after the tem- inspection of the system.
lowing warning display will appear and the perature of the sensor or its surrounding area
AHB will automatically be turned off. has been in range, please contact an autho-
rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
If the warning display remains even after the
ignition switch is turned to the “OFF” posi-
tion or the operation mode is put in OFF and
then turned back to ON, please contact an
[When the AHB is malfunctioning]

 Windshield is dirty onds after the UNLOCK button on the key is

pressed when the combination headlights and
Coming home light
N00547301194
If the AHB determines that its performance dimmer switch is in the “OFF” or “AUTO”
has been degraded, the warning display will position (vehicles equipped with the auto- This function turns on the headlights in the
appear. matic light control). The welcome light func- low beam setting for approximately 30 sec-
This can occur when: tion will operate only when it is dark outside onds after the ignition switch is turned to the
the vehicle. “OFF” position or the operation mode is put
 Foreign objects, such as dirt, snow or ice, in OFF.
adhere to the windshield of the sensor 5
portion. NOTE 1. Turn the combination headlights and dim-
 In adverse weather conditions, such as  While the welcome light function is operat- mer switch to the “OFF” or “AUTO”
ing, perform one of the following operations position (vehicles equipped with the auto-
rain, snow, sandstorms, etc.
to cancel the function.
 A front vehicle or an oncoming vehicle is matic light control).
• Press the LOCK button on the key.
splashing water, snow or dirt. 2. Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-
position or put the operation mode in
When the sensor performance returns, the mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position. OFF. Also, if a key was used to start the
AHB will resume operation. • Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi- engine, remove the key from the ignition
tion or put the operation mode in ON. switch.
If the warning display does not disappear
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: 3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition
after waiting for a while, there is a possibility
• The headlights can be set to come on in the switch to the “OFF” position or putting
that the sensor has a malfunction. Contact an
low beam setting.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for the operation mode in OFF, pull the turn
• The welcome light function can be deacti-
inspection of the sensor. signal lever toward you.
vated.
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.
Display Audio, screen operations can be
used to make the adjustment.
details.
Welcome light
N00563201263
This function turns on the front side-marker

and parking lights for approximately 30 sec-

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped)

4. The headlights will come on in the low
beam setting for approximately 30 sec-
NOTE
For details, consult a Mitsubishi Motors
onds. After the headlights go off, the
dealer.
headlights can be turned on again in the
low beam setting for approximately Display Audio, screen operations can be
30 seconds by pulling the turn signal lever used to make the adjustment.
toward you within 60 seconds of turning Refer to separate owner’s manual for details.
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
5 or putting the operation mode in OFF. To
turn on the headlights again after 60 sec- Headlight leveling switch (if
onds of turning the ignition switch to the so equipped)
“OFF” position or putting the operation
mode in OFF, repeat the process from step
N00537101131
WARNING
1. The direction of the headlight beam (the  To avoid distraction while driving, always
direction in which the light shines) alters perform headlight adjustments before
according to the number of people and the vehicle operation.
NOTE load in the vehicle. Lower the headlight angle
 While the coming home light function is if it is too high due to the number of people
operating, perform one of the following
and/or the load in the vehicle so that the head- NOTE
operations to cancel the function.  Start adjusting when the knob is at the “0”
lights’ glare does not distract the drivers of
• Pull the turn signal lever toward you. position (when the beam is at its highest).
approaching vehicles. First set the light
• Turn the combination headlights and dim-  Keep the knob in the “0” position except
switch to the “ ” position, then turn the
mer switch to the “ ” or “ ” position when using the knob to lower the headlight
or put the operation mode in ON.
headlight leveling switch knob to lower the
beam angle.
• Turn the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
beam. The greater the number on the head-
 Always return the knob to the “0” position
tion or put the operation mode in ON. light leveling switch knob, the lower the when the load is removed and the people
 It is possible to modify functions as follows: beam will point. have left the vehicle.
• The time that the headlights remain on can Set the switch to the appropriate position so
be changed. that the headlight beam is level with the road.
• The coming home light function can be Turn signal lever
deactivated.
N00522601604
When changing lanes, or to making a gradual

turn, hold the lever in the “lane change” posi-
Hazard warning flasher switch

tion (1). It will return to the neutral position
when you let go. Use the full position (2)
NOTE Hazard warning flasher
when making a normal turn. The lever will  A light in the instrument panel flashes to
show when the front and rear turn signal
switch
return to the neutral position when the turn is N00522701344
lights are working properly.
complete. There may be times when the lever If this light flashes faster than usual, check
does not return to the neutral position. This for a burned out turn signal light bulb or mal-
usually happens when the steering wheel is functioning connection in the signal.
turned only slightly. You can easily return the
lever by hand.
If the panel light does not come on when the
lever is moved, check for a blown fuse or a
5
Also, when you move the lever to (1) slightly burned out bulb in the panel.
then release it, the turn signal lights and the Have the system inspected by your autho-
indicator light in the instrument cluster will rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
flash three times.
• Deactivate the turn signal light 3-flash
function for lane changes. If you press the flasher switch, the front and
• Adjust the time required to operate the rear turn signals will flash intermittently, and
lever for the 3-flash function. so will the hazard warning lights. This is an
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors emergency warning system and should not be
dealer for details.
used when the vehicle is in motion, except for
For vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio, adjustments can be
emergencies.
made using screen operations. For further If you need to leave your vehicle, the flashers
details, refer to the separate owner’s manual. will keep working after the ignition switch is
 It is possible to change the tone of a sound- removed or the operation mode is put in OFF.
ing buzzer as the turn signal lights flash.
Refer to “Changing the turn signal sound” on NOTE
page 5-158.
 If the flashers are used for several hours, the
battery will run down. This could make it
difficult or impossible to restart your vehicle.

ECO mode switch
ECO mode switch NOTE NOTE

N00579300057  Even if the ECO mode is operating, you can  If the headlights are switched to high beam,
select normal operation of the air condi- the front fog lights will go out; they will illu-
ECO mode is an eco-driving support system
tioner. minate again when the headlights are
which automatically controls the engine and For further information, please contact your switched back to low beam.
air conditioning system to improve fuel effi- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.  If the light switch is rotated to the “OFF” or
ciency.
“ ” position while the front fog lights are
5 The ECO mode starts working by pressing Front fog light switch illuminated, they will automatically turn off.
They can be turned back on again by rotating
the ECO mode switch when the ignition N00522801488
the combination headlights and dimmer
switch or operation mode is in ON. The front fog lights illuminate only when the switch back to “ ” position, and turning
Push the switch again and the ECO mode will headlights are on low beam. the knob in the direction of the “ON” posi-
cancel. Turning the knob in the direction of the “ON” tion.
While the ECO mode is working, an ECO position turns on the front fog lights as well  Do not use fog lights except in conditions of
mode indicator will be turned on. as the indicator in the instrument cluster. To fog, otherwise excessive light glare may
turn them off, turn the knob in the direction of temporarily blind oncoming vehicle drivers.
the “OFF” position.
The knob will return to the neutral position
when it is released. Wiper and washer switch
N00523001780
CAUTION
 If the washer is used in cold weather, the
washer fluid sprayed against the glass may
freeze, which may hinder visibility. Warm
the glass with the defroster before using the
washer.
NOTE
 Since the air conditioning operation is con-
trolled while the ECO mode is operating,
you may feel that effectiveness of the air
conditioner is weak.

Wiper and washer switch
Windshield wipers Except for vehicle with rain sensor To adjust intermittent intervals
The windshield wiper and washer can be With the lever in the “INT” (speed sensitive
NOTE operated with the ignition switch or the oper- intermittent operation) position, the intermit-
 To ensure a clear rearward view, the rear ation mode is in ON or ACC. tent intervals can be adjusted by turning the
window wiper will automatically perform If the blades are frozen to the windshield, do knob (A).
several continuous operations if the selector not operate the wipers until the ice has melted
lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE) position
while the windshield wipers are operating.
and the blades are freed, otherwise the wiper 5
motor may be damaged.
Refer to “Rear window wiper and washer”
on page 5-203.
1- Fast
2- Slow
MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once. NOTE
OFF- Off  The speed-sensitive-operation function of
INT- Intermittent (Speed sensitive) the windshield wipers can be deactivated.
LO- Slow For further information, please contact your
HI- Fast authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
repair facility of your choice. On vehicles
equipped with Smartphone Link Display
Audio, screen operations can be used to
make the adjustment.
Refer to separate owner’s manual for details.

Misting function Vehicle with rain sensor Rain sensor
The misting function can be used when the The windshield wipers can be operated with Can only be used when the ignition switch or
ignition switch or the operation mode is in the ignition switch or the operation mode is in the operation mode is in ON.
ON or ACC. ON or ACC.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or If the lever is put in the “AUTO” position, the
The wipers will operate once if the wiper rear window, do not operate the wipers until rain sensor (A) will detect the extent of rain
lever is raised to the “MIST” position and (or snow, other moisture, dust, etc.) and the
5 released. This operation is useful when it is
the ice has melted and the blades are freed,
wipers will operate automatically.
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged.
drizzling, etc. The wipers will continue to Keep the lever in the “OFF” position if the
operate while the lever is held in the “MIST” windshield is dirty and the weather is dry.
position. Wiper operation under these conditions can
scratch the windshield and damage the wip-
ers.
MIST- Misting function

The wipers will operate once.
OFF- Off
AUTO- Auto-wiper control
Rain sensor
The wipers will automatically
operate depending on the degree of CAUTION
wetness on the windshield.  With the ignition switch or the operation
LO- Slow mode in ON and the lever in the “AUTO”
HI- Fast position, the wipers may automatically oper-
ate in the situations described below.

CAUTION NOTE To adjust the sensitivity of the rain sensor

• When cleaning the outside surface of the  In the following cases, the rain sensor may
windshield, if you touch the rain sensor. be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked With the lever in the “AUTO” position, it is
• When cleaning the outside surface of the at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or possible to adjust the sensitivity of the rain
windshield, if you wipe with a cloth the rain a repair facility of your choice. sensor by turning the knob (B).
sensor. • When the wipers operate at a constant inter-
• When using an automatic car wash. val despite changes in the extent of rain.
• A physical shock is applied to the wind- • When the wipers do not operate even
though it is raining.
5
screen or the rain sensor.
 The wipers may automatically operate when
If your hands get trapped, you could suffer things such as insects or foreign objects are
injuries or the wipers could malfunction. Be affixed to the windshield on top of the rain
sure to turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” sensor or when the windshield is frozen.
position or put the operation mode in OFF, or Objects affixed to the windshield will stop
move the lever to the “OFF” position to deac- the wipers when the wipers cannot remove
tivate the rain sensor. them. To operate the wipers again, move the
lever to the “LO” or “HI” position.
Also, the wipers may operate automatically “+”- Higher sensitivity to rain
NOTE due to strong direct sunlight or electromag- “-”- Lower sensitivity to rain
 To protect the rubber parts of the wipers, this netic wave. To stop the wipers, move the
operation of the wipers does not take place lever to the “OFF” position.
even if the lever is put in the “AUTO” posi-
tion when the vehicle is stationary and the
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors NOTE
dealer or a repair facility of your choice
ambient temperature is approximately 32 °F  Automatic wiper operation (rain sensitive)
when replacing the windshield glass.
(0 °C) or lower. can be changed to intermittent operation,
either vehicle speed sensitive or not vehicle
 Do not cover the sensor by affixing a sticker
speed sensitive.
or label to the windshield. Also, do not put
For further information, please contact your
any water-repellent coating on the wind-
shield. The rain sensor would not be able to
detect the extent of rain, and the wipers
might stop working normally.
Display Audio, screen operations can be
used to make the adjustment.
details.


The wipers will operate once if the lever is
Misting function
moved to the “AUTO” position and the knob
Move the lever in the direction of the arrow (C) is turned in the “+” direction when the
and release, to operate the wipers once. ignition switch or the operation mode is in
ON.
Use this function when you are driving in
mist or drizzle.
The wipers will operate once if the lever is
5 raised to the “MIST” position and released
when the ignition switch or the operation
mode is in ON or ACC. The wipers will con-
tinue to operate while the lever is held in the
“MIST” position. NOTE
• Intelligent washer can be deactivated.
Refer to “Intelligent washer” on page
5-203.
• The wipers can be set to operate again after
approximately 6 seconds.
Windshield washer
These functions are not activated when the
N00504601413
vehicle is shipped from the factory.
The windshield washer can be operated with To activate or deactivate these functions,
the ignition switch or the operation mode in please contact your authorized Mitsubishi
ON or ACC. Motors dealer.
The washer fluid will be sprayed onto the On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link
windshield by pulling the lever toward you. Display Audio, screen operations can be
When the wipers are not in operation or in used to make the adjustment.
intermittent operation, by pulling the lever
details.
toward you, the wipers will operate several
times while the washer fluid is being sprayed.

Intelligent washer INT- The wiper operates continuously for

several seconds then operates inter-
NOTE
 If the knob is in the “OFF” position, turn the
mittently at intervals of approxi-
By releasing the lever soon after pulling it knob to the “INT” position twice quickly to
mately 8 seconds. operate the rear window wiper continuously.
toward you, the washer fluid will be sprayed
- Washer fluid will be sprayed onto the (continuous operation mode)
several times while the wipers are operating rear window glass while the knob is Turn the knob to the “OFF” position to stop
several times. turned fully in either direction. the rear window wiper continuous operation.
Intelligent washer will stop operating with When the washer fluid is sprayed, the
any operation of the lever. wiper will automatically operate two
 The wiper intermittent operation time can be
adjusted.
5
or three times. See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Rear window wiper and washer dealer for details.
N00523201476 NOTE Link Display Audio, adjustments can be
The rear window wiper and washer can be  The rear window wiper will automatically made using screen operations. For further
operated when the ignition switch or the perform several continuous operations if the details, refer to the separate owner’s manual.
operation mode is in ON or ACC. selector lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE)
 The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
position while the windshield wipers or the
engine compartment.
Turn the knob to operate the rear window rear window wiper is operating. (automatic
Check the fluid level regularly and refill if
wiper. operation mode)
necessary. (Refer to “Washer fluid” on page
After the automatic operation, the rear win-
9-9.)
dow wiper will stop operating if the knob is
in the “OFF” position. If the knob is in the
“INT” position, the rear window wiper will Precautions to observe when
return to the intermittent operation.
It is possible to set the rear window wiper to
using wipers and washers
N00523501277
perform the automatic operation only if the
selector lever is put in the “R” (REVERSE)
position while the rear window wiper is
CAUTION
operating with the knob in the “INT” posi-  If the washer is used in cold weather, the
tion. washer fluid sprayed onto the glass might
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors freeze, blocking your view. Heat the glass
dealer for details. with the defroster before using the washer.
OFF- Off

Electric rear window defogger switch

If you need the defogger for more than 15 to
NOTE Electric rear window defog- 20 minutes, press the switch again. This will
 Do not use the wipers when the windshield is
dry. This could scratch the glass and wear the
ger switch add 15 to 20 more minutes.
N00523701514
wiper blades prematurely.
 Before using the wipers in cold weather, The rear window defogger can be used when CAUTION
check to be sure that the wiper blades are not the engine is running.  The rear window defogger is not designed to
frozen to the windshield or rear window. The indicator light (A) will come on when melt snow. Remove any snow manually
5 Using the wipers while the blades are frozen
could cause the wiper motor to burn out.
you press the electric rear window defogger before using the rear window defogger.
 Use the rear window defogger only after the
switch. Electric current will flow through the
 If the moving wipers become blocked part- heating wires on the rear window to help engine has started and is running. Be sure to
way through a sweep by ice or other deposits clear away moisture or frost. turn the defogger switch off immediately
on the glass, the wipers may temporarily stop after the window is clear to save on battery
operating to prevent the motor from over- power.
heating. In this case, park the vehicle in a  Do not place stickers, tape, or other items
safe place, turn the ignition switch to the that are attached with adhesive over the grid
“OFF” position or put the operation mode in wires on the rear window.
OFF, and then remove the ice or other depos-  When cleaning the inside rear window, use a
its. soft cloth and wipe lightly over the grid
Because the wipers will start operating again wires.
after the wiper motor cools down, check that
the wipers operate before using them.
 Avoid using the washer for more than 20 sec-
onds at a time. Do not operate the washer
NOTE
when the washer fluid reservoir is empty or  The mist can also be removed from the out-
the pump may fail. side rearview mirrors when the rear window
After approximately 15 to 20 minutes of defogger switch is pressed. (Refer to “Door
 During cold weather, add a recommended
operation, the system will shut off automati- mirror heater” on page 5-57.)
washer solution that will not freeze in the
washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise the washer cally.
may not work or may be damaged. To switch the defogger OFF before 15 to
 Replace the wiper blades when they are 20 minutes have passed, press the switch
worn. Use the proper size replacement again. The indicator light will go out and the
blades. For further information, please con- defogger will turn off.
tact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer.

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped)
NOTE Heated steering wheel

 It is possible to change the setting to make
the rear window defogger operate automati-
switch (if so equipped)
N00589100045
cally when ambient temperature becomes
low while the engine is running, even if you The heated steering wheel contains internal
do not push the rear window defogger heaters in the rim. Heating areas are shown in
switch. the illustration.
It operates automatically only once after
turning the ignition switch to the “ON” posi-
5
tion or putting the operation mode in ON.
If you choose this setting, the door mirror
heater will also operate automatically at the
same time. WARNING
For further information, please contact your  Persons who are unable to feel tempera-
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. ture change or skin pain due to age, ill-
On vehicles equipped with Smartphone Link ness, injury, medication, fatigue or other
Display Audio, screen operations can be physical conditions or who have sensitive
used to make the adjustment. skin may suffer burns when using the
Refer to the separate owner’s manual for heated steering wheel. To reduce the risk
details. of burns, people with such conditions must
: Heating area use care when using the heated steering
wheel.
The heated steering wheel can be operated
when the ignition switch or operation mode is
in ON. CAUTION
 If water or any other liquid is spilled on the
To turn on the heated steering wheel, push the
steering wheel, allow it to dry thoroughly
heated steering wheel switch. The heated before attempting to use the heated steering
steering wheel will operate for approximately wheel. Turn the heated steering wheel off
30 minutes and then it will automatically turn immediately if it appears to be malfunction-
off. ing during use.
The indicator light (A) will illuminate while  Also be aware that using the heated steering
the heated steering wheel is operating. wheel with the engine off may run the bat-
tery down.

Horn switch
Horn switch USB input terminal

N00523801195 N00566701184
To honk the horn, press around the “ ” mark You can connect your USB memory device or
on the steering wheel. iPod* to play music files stored in the USB
memory device or iPod.
This section explains how to connect and
remove a USB memory device or iPod.
5
How to connect a USB memory
device
N00566801185 NOTE
 Do not connect the USB memory device to
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn
the USB input terminal directly.
the ignition switch to the “OFF” position The USB memory device may be damaged.
or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Connect a commercially available USB
connector cable (B) to the USB memory 4. To remove the USB connector cable, turn
device (A). the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF first and
perform the installation steps in reverse.
How to connect an iPod

N00566901216
1. Park your vehicle in a safe place and turn

the ignition switch to the “OFF” position
or put the operation mode in OFF.
2. Connect the connector cable to the iPod.
3. Connect the USB connector cable (B) to

the USB input terminal (C).

Sun visors
NOTE Sun visors Vanity mirror

 Use a genuine connector cable from Apple N00524601406
Inc. Pull the sun visor downward (1) to reduce
front glare while driving. To reduce side Type 1
3. Connect the connector cable (A) to the glare, turn the visor to the side (2).
USB input terminal (B). A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun
visor.
Operating the lid of the vanity mirror will 5
automatically turn on the mirror light (A).
4. To remove the connector cable, turn the NOTE

ignition switch to the “OFF” position or  Pull the sun visor sideways to eliminate side
put the operation mode in OFF first and glare farther to the rear. (if so equipped)
perform the installation steps in reverse.
CAUTION
 If the lid of the vanity mirror with light is
Types of connectable devices kept open for prolonged periods of time, the
and supported file specifica- vehicle’s battery will be discharged.
tions
N00567001126
For details, please refer to the separated

owner’s manual for “Smartphone Link Dis-
play Audio” or the “DISPLAY AUDIO”.

12 V power outlets
Type 2 12 V power outlets Type 1

N00525001700
A vanity mirror is fitted to the back of the sun Accessories can be operated when the igni-
visor. CAUTION tion switch or the operation mode is in ON or
 Be sure to use a “plug-in” type accessory ACC.
operating at 12 V and at 120 W or less.
When using more than one socket at the
Center console
5 same time, make sure the total power con-
sumption of the electrical accessories does
not exceed 120 W at 12 V.
 Also be aware that using electronic equip-
ment with the engine off may run the battery
down.
 When the power outlet is not in use, be sure
to close the power outlet cover or replace the
cap. This will prevent the power outlet from
becoming clogged and short circuiting.
Card holder
To use a “plug-in” type accessory, open the
Cards can be slipped into the holder (B) on cover or remove the cap, and insert the plug
the sun visor. in the power outlet.
NOTE
 Two 12V power outlets can be used simulta-
neously.

HomeLink® Wireless Control System (if so equipped)
Type 2 calling the toll-free HomeLink®-Hotline at 1- NOTE

800-355-3515.
 You can program a maximum of 3 devices.
Accessories can be operated in all ignition To change or replace any of the 3 devices
switch positions or all operation modes. WARNING after it has been initially programmed, you
must first erase the current settings.
 Do not use HomeLink® with any garage
See “Clearing the programmed information”
Floor console door opener that lacks safety stop and
on page 5-213 or “Reprogramming a single
reverse features as required by U.S. Fed-
eral Regulations. A garage door opener HomeLink® button” on page 5-213. 5
which cannot detect an object in the path
of a closing garage door and then auto-
matically stop and reverse, does not meet
current U.S. Federal Regulations. Using a
garage door opener without these features
increases the risk of serious injury or
death.
 During programming, your garage door
or gate may open or close. Make sure that
people and objects are clear of the garage
HomeLink® Wireless Con- door or gate that you are programming.
trol System (if so equipped) 1- HomeLink® button 1
N00554301066
NOTE 2- HomeLink® button 2
HomeLink® Wireless Control System is a  Once HomeLink® is programmed, retain the 3- HomeLink® button 3
registered trademark of Gentex Corporation. original transmitter for future programming
HomeLink® provides a convenient way to procedures (for example, new vehicle pur-
chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the pro-
replace up to 3 hand-held radio-frequency
(RF) transmitters used to activate devices grammed HomeLink® buttons should be
erased for security purposes. Refer to “Clear-
such as gate operators, garage door openers,
ing the programmed information” on page
entry door locks, security systems, even home
5-213.
lighting. Additional HomeLink® information
can be found at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by

Before programming Home-

Link®
N00584600029
 Some garage door openers manufactured

after 1995 have “rolling code protection”.
To program a garage door opener
equipped with “rolling code protection”;
5 you will need to access the garage door
opener motor to press the motor’s “Learn”
or “Smart” buttons. For convenience, use
a ladder and another person to assist you.
 It is recommended that a new battery be NOTE NOTE
placed in the hand-held transmitter of the  You do not need to continue holding the  Some hand-held transmitters may actually
device being programmed to HomeLink® HomeLink® button. train better from a distance of 6 to 12 inches
 If the indicator light does not flash, refer to (15 to 30 cm). Keep this in mind if you have
for quicker training and accurate trans-
“Clearing the programmed information” on difficulty with the programming process.
mission of the radio-frequency signal.
page 5-213.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
Programming a new Home- 2. Position the end of your hand-held trans- button while watching the indicator light
Link® mitter (B) 1 to 3 inches (2 to 8 cm) away (A). Continue pressing the button until the
indicator light (A) changes from slowly
from the HomeLink® button while keep-
N00584700046
flashing orange to either rapidly flashing

To program HomeLink® to operate a garage ing the indicator light in view.
green (rolling code) or continuously lit
door, gate, entry door opener, home or office
green (fixed code). Now you may release
lighting, you need to be at the same location
the hand-held transmitter button.
as the device.
1. Press the HomeLink® button that you

would like to program. The indicator light
(A) will flash orange slowly.


• If the device does not operate, continue
NOTE NOTE
with “Programming a new HomeLink®”
 Some devices may require you to replace this  In the event that there are still programming
steps 5 to 7 to complete the program- difficulties or questions, additional Home-
“Programming a new HomeLink®” step 3
ming of a rolling code equipped device.
with procedures noted in the “Gate operator / Link® information and programming videos
Canadian programming” section. If the indi- 5. At the garage door opener receiver can be found online at www.homelink.com,
cator light does not change to rapidly flash- (motor-head unit) in the garage, locate the www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by
ing green or continuously lit green after “Learn” or “Smart” button. This can usu- calling the HomeLink® Hotline.
performing these steps, contact HomeLink® ally be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the motor-head unit
5
at www.homelink.com.
(see the garage door opener manual to
identify the “Learn” button.)
Gate operator/Canadian pro-
4. Press the HomeLink® button that was just 6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or gramming
programmed and observe the indicator “Smart” button. (The name and color of N00584800021
light. the button may vary by manufacturer.) Canadian radio-frequency laws require trans-
• If the indicator light continuously illumi- There are typically 30 seconds to initiate mitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
nates green, programming is complete step 7. several seconds of transmission - which may
and your device should operate when the 7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press, not be long enough for HomeLink® to pick
HomeLink® button is pressed and hold for 2 seconds and release the pro- up the signal during programming. Similar to
released. grammed HomeLink® button. Repeat the this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
• If the indicator light rapidly flashes “press/hold/release” sequence a second are designed to “time-out” in the same man-
green, firmly press, hold for 2 seconds time, and, depending on the brand of the ner.
and release the programmed HomeLink® garage door opener (or other rolling code The indicator LED on the hand-held transmit-
button. Repeat the “press/hold/release” equipped device), repeat this sequence a ter will go off when the device times out indi-
sequence a second time, and, depending third time to complete the programming cating that it has finished transmitting.
on the brand of the garage door opener process. If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-
(or other rolling code equipped device), HomeLink® should now activate your culties programming a gate operator or
repeat this sequence a third time to com- rolling code equipped device. garage door opener by using the “Program-
plete the programming process. At this ming” procedures, replace “Programming a
point if your device operates, program-
new HomeLink®” step 3 with the following:
ming is complete.


3. Once the door has stopped, press and
NOTE release the “Learn” or “Smart” button on
 If programming a garage door opener or gate
the garage door opener (refer to your
operator, it is advised to unplug the device
garage door opener owner’s manual for
during the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
sible overheating. the location of the “Learn” button). Both
the HomeLink® garage door operation
3. Press and release - every 2 seconds indicators will flash rapidly green upon
5 (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the successful synchronization with the door
opener (within 5 seconds).
HomeLink® indicator light changes from
slowly flashing orange to either rapidly flash-
ing green (rolling code) or continuously lit 1. Within 5 seconds after successfully pro-
Operating HomeLink®
green (fixed code). Now you may release the gramming the garage door opener (refer
N00585000020
hand-held transmitter button. To operate, simply press and release the pro-
Proceed with “Programming a new Home- to “Programming a new HomeLink®”
section), both garage door operation indi- grammed HomeLink® button. Activation will
Link®” step 4 to complete. cators (A) will flash rapidly green indicat- now occur for the trained device (i.e. garage
ing that the garage door feedback has door opener, gate operator, security system,
Additional steps for program- been enabled. entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.).
If the indicators do not flash, perform For convenience, the hand-held transmitter of
ming a door system with feed- the device may also be used at any time.
steps 2 and 3 while pressing the Home-
back
Link® button up to the first 10 times after
N00584900022
successful programming. Garage door feedback
The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv- 2. Press and release the programmed Home- N00585200022
ing garage door status from compatible Link® button to activate the door. You The HomeLink® has the capability of receiv-
garage door opener systems. Check your now have 1 minute in which to complete ing garage door status from compatible
garage door opener manual for the available step 3. garage door opener systems. Refer to “Addi-
feature and HomeLink® compatibility. Also tional steps for programming a door system
for a listing of compatible systems contact with feedback” on page 5-212.
HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com Garage door status is then displayed with
indicators (A).


The HomeLink® has the capability of listen- 1. Press and hold the 2 outer HomeLink®
ing to these messages at a range up to 820.2 buttons for at least 10 seconds. The indi-
feet (250 m) (open line of sight), but range cator will change from continuous yellow
may be reduced by obstacles such as houses to rapidly flashing green.
or trees. You may have to slow your vehicle 2. Release both buttons.
speed to receive the CLOSED or OPENED
message feedback from the garage door NOTE
opener. If the unit is out of range before
receiving either the UP or DOWN message
 Do not hold for longer than 20 seconds. 5
from the door opener, both the UP and
3. HomeLink® is now in the training (or
DOWN indicators will flash red followed by
learning) mode and can be programmed at
The indicators will illuminate/blink in a continuous lit orange indicator in the direc-
any time beginning with “Programming a
response to the following conditions: tion the door was last moving.
Recall of the door state after initial feedback new HomeLink®” step 1.
: Blinking : Illuminates is possible by simultaneously pressing either
HomeLink® buttons 1 and 2 or buttons 2 and Reprogramming a single
Garage door opener closing
(orange)
3 for 2 seconds. The last recorded message HomeLink® button
will be displayed for 3 seconds, again follow- N00585400024
Garage door opener closed ing the garage door status indication of the
(green) figure above. To reprogram a HomeLink® button, complete
the following.
Out of range
(red) Clearing the programmed 1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
information button. Do not release the button.
Garage door opener opening 2. The indicator light will begin to slowly
(orange) N00585300049
To erase programming from the 3 buttons flash orange after 20 seconds. The Home-
Garage door opener opened (individual buttons cannot be erased but can Link® button can be released at this point.
(green)
be “reprogrammed” as outlined below), fol- Proceed with “Programming a new
Out of range low the steps noted: HomeLink®” step 2.
(red)

Interior lights
NOTE CAUTION Interior lights

 If you do not complete the programming of a  The transmitter has been tested and complies N00525301673
new device to the button, it will revert to the with FCC and IC rules.
previously stored programming. Changes or modifications not expressly NOTE
For questions or comments, visit approved by the party responsible for com-  Be aware that leaving the light illuminated
www.homelink.com, pliance could void the user’s authority to with the engine off may run the battery
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex, or by operate the device. down.
5 calling the HomeLink® Hotline. Never leave the vehicle without checking
that the light is off.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
General information environment. End Users must follow the spe-
N00585600042 cific operating instructions for satisfying RF
exposure compliance. This transmitter must
Your HomeLink® system operates on a radio
be at least 8 inches (20 cm) from the user and
frequency subject to Federal Communica-
must not be co-located or operating in con-
tions Commission (FCC) Rules (For vehicles
junction with any other antenna or transmit-
sold in U.S.A.) and Industry Canada Rules
ter.
(For vehicles sold in Canada). This device
The term “IC:” before the certification/regis-
complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and
tration number only signifies that Industry
RSS-210 of the Industry Canada Rules. Oper-
Canada technical specifications were met.
ation is subject to the following two condi-
tions. 1- Cargo room light  P.5-216
2- Dome light (rear)  P.5-216
 This device may not cause harmful inter- 3- Dome light (front)/Reading lights
ference.  P.5-215
 This device must accept any interference 4- LED interior illumination (Smartphone
that may be received, including interfer- tray)
ence that may cause undesired operation. 5- LED interior illumination (Front drink
holder)

Interior lights
 The doors and the liftgate are closed
Dome light (front)/Reading while the ignition switch is in the
NOTE
lights “ON” position or the operation mode
 The time until the light goes off can be
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
N00525401544
is in ON. Motors dealer for details. For vehicles
 The driver’s door is closed while the equipped with the Smartphone Link Display
Dome light (front) lock knob is in the lock position, after Audio, adjustments can be made using
all the other doors are closed. screen operations. For details, refer to the
 The doors and the liftgate are closed
and the power door lock function is
5
used to lock the doors. 3-
 The key button is used to lock the The dome light stays off regardless of any
doors. door or the liftgate being opened or closed.
 In vehicles equipped with the
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift- Reading lights
gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.- N00537601194
key.
When the light switch is in the off position,
push the switch (A) to turn on the light. Push
1- NOTE the switch again to turn off the light.
The dome light illuminates regardless of  When the engine is started using the key
any door or the liftgate being opened or while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you
remove the key, the dome light will illumi- Front
closed.
nate for approximately 30 seconds then go
2- off.
When any of the doors or the liftgate is  When the engine is started using the
opened, the dome light illuminates; when F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are
any of them are closed, the dome light closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,
goes off after approximately 30 seconds. the dome light will illuminate for approxi-
However, the light goes off immediately mately 30 seconds and then go off.
if:

Interior lights
 The door and the liftgate are closed
Dome light (rear) and the power door lock function is
3-
N00525801359
The dome light stays off regardless of any
used to lock the doors. door or the liftgate being opened or closed.
Rear  The keyless entry system key is used
to lock the doors.
 In vehicles equipped with the Cargo room light
F.A.S.T.-key, the doors and the lift- N00526101199
gate are locked using the F.A.S.T.- When the liftgate is opened, the cargo room
5 key. light illuminates; when it is closed, it goes
out.
NOTE
 When the engine is started using the key
while the doors and liftgate are closed, if you
remove the key, the dome light will illumi-
1- nate for approximately 30 seconds then go
The dome light illuminates regardless of off.
any door or the liftgate being opened or  When the engine is started using the
F.A.S.T.-key while the doors and liftgate are
closed.
closed, if the operation mode is put in OFF,
2- 
the dome light will illuminate for approxi-
When any of the doors or the liftgate is mately 30 seconds and then go off.
opened, the dome light illuminates;  When the dome light switch is in the “ON”
when any of them are closed, the dome position, the light will not go off, even when
light goes off after approximately 30 sec- all the doors and the liftgate are closed.
onds. However, the light goes off imme-  The time until the light goes off can be
diately if:
LED interior illumination
adjusted. See your authorized Mitsubishi
 The door and the liftgate are closed Motors dealer for details. For vehicles (Front drink holder)
while the ignition switch is in the equipped with the Smartphone Link Display N00536901060
“ON” position or the operation mode Audio, adjustments can be made using When the light is illuminated with the light
is in ON. screen operations. For details, refer to the
switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” posi-
 The driver’s door is closed while the tion, the LED interior illumination (Front
lock knob is in the lock position, drink holder) illuminates.
after all the other doors are closed.

Storage spaces
Interior light* auto-cutout Storage spaces

function N00526401600
N00526301511
CAUTION
*: Dome light (front)/Reading lights, dome
 Never leave lighters, carbonated drink cans,
light (rear), cargo room light, LED interior or spectacles in the cabin when parking the
illumination (Front drink holder) and LED vehicle in hot sunshine. The cabin will
interior illumination (Smartphone tray). become extremely hot, so lighters and other
flammable items may catch fire and
5
 If interior lights are left on with the igni- unopened drink cans (especially carbonated
tion switch in the “OFF” position or the beverages, including beer) may rupture. The
operation mode in OFF, the lights go off heat may also deform or crack plastic specta-
automatically after approximately 30 min- cle lenses and other spectacle parts that are
LED interior illumination utes. made of plastic.
(Smartphone tray)  The lights come on again if the ignition  Keep the lids of storage spaces closed while
N00595400027 switch or the engine switch is operated, if driving the vehicle. A lid or the contents of a
any door or liftgate is opened or closed, or storage space could otherwise cause injuries
When the light is illuminated with the light during a sudden stop.
if the keyless entry or F.A.S.T.-key is
switch in the “ ”, “ ”, or “AUTO” posi-
operated.
tion, the LED interior illumination (Smart-
phone tray) illuminates. NOTE
NOTE  Do not leave valuables in any storage space
 The interior light auto-cutout function can be when leaving the vehicle.
deactivated. The time until the lights auto-
matically go off can be adjusted. See your
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for
details.
Link Display Audio, adjustments can be
made using screen operations. For details,
refer to the separate owner’s manual.

Storage spaces
Glove compartment
N00551501344
WARNING
 An open glove compartment door can
cause a serious injury or death to the front
passenger in an accident, even if the pas-
5 senger is wearing his/her seat belt. Always
keep the glove compartment door closed
when driving.
1- Floor console box

2- Glove compartment To open, pull the lever (A).
Card holder
There is a card holder on the inside of the

glove compartment.

Drink holders
Floor console box Drink holders For the rear seat (if so equipped)
N00551601303 N00527301521 N00537001231
To open the console box, lift the release lever This drink holder is located in the rear seat
(A) and raise the lid. WARNING arm rest.
The floor console box can also be used as an  Do not spray water or spill beverages Pull the arm rest down to use the drink holder.
arm rest. inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
5
up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
ately consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
The drink holder is designed for holding cups

or drink-cans securely in its holes.
For the front seat
The drink holder is located in front of the

floor console.

Bottle holders
Bottle holders
N00527301534
WARNING
 Do not spray water or spill beverages
inside the vehicle. If the switches, wires, or
electrical components become wet, they
5 could malfunction or cause a vehicle fire.
up as much liquid as possible and immedi-
ately consult an authorized Mitsubishi
Motors dealer.
NOTE
 Do not store a cup or drink can in the bottle
CAUTION holder.
 Drinking beverages while driving your vehi-  Make sure all lids are tightly closed when 2. Remove the cover from the mounting
cle is distracting and can cause an accident. storing beverages that are in plastic bottles, grooves, and the cover will be rolled back
 Vibration and shaking while driving may etc. into the retracted position.
cause beverages to spill. Be very careful, as  Some beverages may not be stored, depend-
spilling hot beverages could cause burns. ing on the size and shape of the plastic bot-
tles, etc. NOTE
 Do not place anything on the cargo area
There are bottle holders located on both sides cover.
of front and rear doors.
Cargo area cover (if so
equipped) To change position
N00528301182
There are 2 installation holes (B) for the

To use cargo area cover.
1. Pull out the spring-loaded cover and insert
it in the mounting grooves (A) on both
sides.

Cargo area cover (if so equipped)

2. After changing the position, gently shake
the entire cargo area cover to make sure it
To remove
is securely retained. 1. Roll back the cargo area cover.
2. Move one of the sliders (C) toward the
NOTE inside of the vehicle and lift it to remove
 If the rear seat touches the cargo area cover, the cargo area cover.
move the cargo area cover rearward.
The cargo area cover could be damaged if it
supports the seatback of the rear seats. 5
1. Move one of the sliders (C) towards the

inside of the vehicle, and fit the protrud-
ing portion (D) into the installation hole
that is to be used. Move the opposite
slider in the same fashion.
To refit
To refit the cargo area cover, follow the

removal steps in reverse. Gently shake the
entire cargo area cover after fitting it to make
sure it is securely retained.

Assist grips
To store Assist grips Coat hooks

N00559001097 N00553601189
The cover can be fitted at the indicated posi- The assist grips (located above the doors on There is a coat hook on the rear seat assist
tion when not in use. the headliner) are not designed to support grip of the driver’s side.
The cover can be stored above the luggage body weight. They are intended for use only
floor board. while seated in the vehicle.
5
WARNING
 Do not put a hanger or any heavy or
CAUTION pointed object on the coat hook. If the cur-
 Do not use the assist grips when getting into tain airbag was activated, any such item
or out of the vehicle. The assist grips could could be propelled away with great force
detach causing you to fall. and could prevent the curtain airbag from
inflating correctly. Hang clothes directly
on the coat hook (without using a hanger).
Make sure there are no heavy or sharp
objects in the pockets of clothes that you
hang on the coat hook.

Luggage hooks
Luggage hooks
N00528501272
There are hooks on the sides of the luggage

area for use in securing luggage.
A- Tab
NOTE
 To avoid damage to the convenient hook, do 2. Hook the strap (B) of the luggage floor
not hang objects that weight more than 6.6 board onto the top of the vehicle as shown
pounds (3 kg). to secure the luggage floor board.
CAUTION Luggage floor board

 Do not load the luggage higher than the top
N00527601029
of the seatback.
1. Hold the tab (A) and lift the luggage floor
Be sure that luggage is firmly secured.
Restricted rear vision or flying objects enter- board.
ing the passenger compartment during sud-
den braking could result in a serious
accident.
B- Strap
Convenient hook
N00574701024
Light items of luggage can be hung from the

hook.

Driving safety
Driving precaution ...........................................................................6-2

Fuel economy ...................................................................................6-2
Driving, alcohol and drugs ..............................................................6-2
Floor mat ..........................................................................................6-3
Vehicle preparation before driving ..................................................6-4 6
Safe driving techniques ....................................................................6-4
Driving during cold weather ............................................................6-5
Braking ............................................................................................6-5
Parking .............................................................................................6-6
Loading information ........................................................................6-6
Cargo loads ....................................................................................6-10
Trailer towing ................................................................................6-11
Driving precaution
to perform satisfactorily in off-road condi-  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
Driving precaution tions. mended pressures.
N00629301119
Always drive safely and steer the vehicle  When driving a 4-wheel drive vehicle on
carefully. Avoid operating the vehicle in a highways or dry improved roads, set the
WARNING manner that might require sharp turns or drive mode to “AUTO”.
 Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of  For freeway driving, maintain a speed of
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
Avoid abrupt maneuvers and excessive
this type, failure to operate this vehicle cor- approximately 50 mph (80 km/h) when
speed. Always buckle up. rectly can result in loss of control or vehicle traffic, roadway and weather conditions
rollover. safely permit.
6 Your vehicle has been designed for both nor-
In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is sig-  Keep your air cleaner filter clean and your
nificantly more likely to die than a person vehicle lubricated according to the recom-
mal and occasional off-road use. However,
wearing a seat belt. Before starting the vehi- mendations in this manual.
avoid driving the vehicle through areas where
cle, always make certain that you and all your  Always keep your vehicle well main-
the tires may get stuck in deep sand or mud as
passengers are properly wearing their seat tained. A poorly maintained engine
your vehicle is designed primarily for use on
belts (with children in the rear seat, in appro- wastes fuel and costs money.
pavement, unlike a conventional off-road
priate restraints).  Never overload your vehicle.
vehicle.
Keep in mind that 2-wheel drive vehicles are
less capable than 4-wheel drive vehicles for Fuel economy Driving, alcohol and drugs
driving on muddy, slippery, wet or snow-cov- N00628801218 N00628900049
ered roads. Fuel economy is dependent on many factors. Drunk driving is one of the most frequent
Your personal driving habits can have a sig- causes of accidents.
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
nificant effect on your fuel consumption. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired
and a narrower track, which enables them to
Several recommendations for achieving the even with blood alcohol levels far below the
perform in a wide variety of off-road situa-
greatest fuel economy are listed below. legal minimum. If you have been drinking,
tions. Because of the higher ground clear-
don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-
ance, these vehicles have a higher center of  Whenever accelerating from a stop, drinking driver, call a cab or a friend, or use
gravity, which makes them handle differently always accelerate slowly and smoothly. public transportation. Drinking coffee or tak-
than ordinary vehicles when driving on pave-  When parked for even a short period, do ing a cold shower will not make you sober.
ment. They are not designed to maneuver or not idle the engine. Shut it off. Similarly, prescription and nonprescription
corner at the same speed on pavement as con-  Plan your trips to avoid unnecessary drugs affect your alertness, perception and
ventional 2-wheel drive passenger cars any stops. reaction time. Consult with your doctor or
more than low-slung sports cars are designed
6-2 Driving safety

Floor mat
pharmacist before driving while under the 2. Align the floor mat with the installation
influence of any of these medications. holes over the retaining clips.
WARNING
 Always install the mat with the correct
3. Secure the floor mat with retaining clips.
side facing down.
WARNING  Never install a second mat over or under
 NEVER DRINK AND DRIVE. an existing floor mat.
Your perceptions are less accurate, your  Do not use a floor mat designed for
reflexes are slower and your judgment is another model vehicle even if it is a
impaired. Mitsubishi Motors Genuine floor mat.
 Before driving, be sure to check the fol-
lowing: 6
Floor mat • Periodically check that the floor mat is
properly secured with the retaining clips.
N00628601072
If you remove the floor mat while clean-
The original equipment floor mat provided ing the inside of your vehicle or for any
with your vehicle was specifically designed other reason, always check the condition
for your vehicle. of the floor mat after it has been rein-
Always properly position the floor mat and
NOTE stalled.
 The shape of the mat and the number of
assure it does not interfere with operation of • While the vehicle is stopped with the
retaining clips may vary depending on the engine off, check that the floor mat is not
the pedals. Always use the retaining clip on
vehicle model. interfering with the pedals by depressing
the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
mat. When used, this clip will help prevent the pedals fully.
the floor mat from moving forward and possi- WARNING
bly interfering with the operation of the ped-
 If a floor mat is the wrong size or is not
als. To prevent the floor mat from moving properly installed, it can interfere with the
forward and possibly interfering with the operation of the pedals. Interference with
operation of the pedals, Mitsubishi Motors the pedals can cause unintended accelera-
Genuine floor mats are recommended. tion and/or increased stopping distances
resulting in a crash and injury. Always
make sure the floor mat does not interfere
To install the floor mat with the accelerator or brake pedal.
N00628701103
 Always use the retaining clip on the
1. Place the floor mat to fit the shape of the driver’s floorboard to secure the floor
floorboard. mat.
Driving safety 6-3

Vehicle preparation before driving

signal indicators and high-beam indicators on
Vehicle preparation before Defrosters the instrument panel.
driving
Check these by selecting the defroster mode,
N00629001800
and set the blower switch on high. You should Fluid leaks
For a safer and more enjoyable trip, always
be able to feel the air blowing against the
check for the following: Check the ground under the vehicle after
windshield.
Refer to “Defrosting or defogging (wind- parking overnight, for fuel, water, oil, or
Seat belts and seats shield, door windows)” on page 7-13, 7-22. other leaks. Make sure all the fluid levels are
correct. Also, if you can smell fuel, you need
6  Before starting the vehicle, make certain to find out why immediately and have it
that you and all passengers are seated and Tires fixed.
wearing their seat belts properly (with
children in the rear seat, in appropriate Check all the tires for heavy tread wear or
restraints), and that all the doors and the uneven wear patterns. Look for stones, nails, Safe driving techniques
liftgate are locked. glass, or other objects stuck in the tread. Look N00629201147
 Move the driver’s seat as far backward as for any tread cuts or sidewall cracks. Check Even this vehicle’s safety equipment, and
possible, while keeping good visibility, the wheel nuts for tightness, and the tires your safest driving, cannot guarantee that you
and good control of the steering wheel, (including spare tire) for proper pressure. can avoid an accident or injury. However, if
brakes, accelerator, and controls. Check Replace your tires before they are heavily you give extra attention to the following
the instrument panel indicators and multi- worn out. areas, you can better protect yourself and
information display for any possible prob- As your vehicle is equipped with a tire pres- your passengers:
lem. sure monitoring system, there is a risk of
 Similarly, the front passenger seat should damage to the tire inflation pressure sensors  Drive defensively. Be aware of traffic,
also be moved as far back as possible. when the tire is replaced on the rim. Tire road and weather conditions. Leave plenty
 Make sure that infants and small children replacement should, only, be performed by an of stopping distance between your vehicle
are properly restrained in accordance with authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer. and the vehicle ahead.
all laws and regulations.  Before changing lanes, check your mir-
rors, blind spots, and use your turn signal
Lights light.
 While driving, watch the behavior of
Have someone watch while you turn all the other drivers, bicyclists, and pedestrians.
exterior lights on and off. Also check the turn
6-4 Driving safety

Driving during cold weather

 Always obey applicable laws and regula-  Warm the engine sufficiently. After start-
tions. Be a polite and alert driver. Always ing the engine, allow a short warm-up
When brakes are wet
leave room for unexpected events, such as time to distribute oil to all cylinders. Then
sudden braking. drive your vehicle slowly. Check the brake system while driving at a
 If you plan to drive in another country, Stay at low speeds at first so that the low speed immediately after starting, espe-
obey their vehicle registration laws and transaxle, transfer case and rear axle oil cially when the brakes are wet, to confirm
make sure you will be able to get the right have time to spread to all lubrication they work normally.
fuel. points. A film of water can be formed on the brake
 Check the engine antifreeze. discs and prevent normal braking after driv-
ing in heavy rain or through large puddles, or
Driving during cold weather If there is not enough coolant because of a
after the vehicle is washed. If this occurs, dry
6
leak or from engine overheating, add
N00629400445
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long the brakes out by driving slowly while lightly
 Check the battery. At the same time, Life Coolant Premium or equivalent. depressing the brake pedal.
check the terminals and wiring. During Please read this section in conjunction
extremely cold weather, the battery will with the “Engine coolant” on page 9-7.
not be as strong. Also, the battery power When driving in cold weather
level may drop because more power is

WARNING On snowy roads, ice can form on the braking

used for cold starting and driving.
 Never open the radiator cap when the
Before driving the vehicle, check to see if system, making the brakes less effective.
radiator is hot. You could be seriously
the engine runs at the proper speed and if burned. While driving in such conditions, pay close
the headlights are as bright as normally. attention to surrounding vehicles and to the
Charge or replace the battery if necessary. condition of the road surface. From time to
During extreme cold weather, it is possi- time, lightly depress the brake pedal and
ble that a very low battery could freeze.
Braking check how effective the brakes are.
N00629501528

WARNING All the parts of the brake system are critical

When driving downhill
 The battery gives off explosive hydrogen to safety. Have the vehicle serviced by an
gas. Any spark or flame can cause the bat- authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
tery to explode, which could cause serious repair facility of your choice at regular inter- It is important to take advantage of the engine
injury or death. vals according to the “WARRANTY AND braking by downshifting while driving on
Always wear protective clothes and a face MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. steep downhill roads in order to prevent the
mask when working with your battery, or brakes from overheating.
let a skilled mechanic do it.
Driving safety 6-5

Parking
Parking WARNING Do not keep the steering wheel

N00629601398  Leaving the engine running risks injury or fully turned for a long time
death from accidentally moving the selec-
tor lever or the accumulation of toxic
Parking on a hill exhaust fumes in the passenger compart- More effort could be required to turn the
ment. steering wheel.
When parking on a hill, set the parking brake, Refer to “Electric power steering system
and turn the front wheels toward the curb on a (EPS)” on page 5-80.
downhill, or away from the curb on an uphill. Where you park
6 If necessary, apply chocks to the wheels.
Loading information
Be sure that the parking brake is firmly set
Your front bumper can be damaged if you N00629901450
when parked and that the selector lever is in
scrape it over curbs or parking stop blocks. It is very important to know how much
the “P” (PARK) position.
Be careful when traveling up or down steep weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is
When parking on a hill, it is important to set
slopes where your bumper can scrape the called the vehicle capacity weight and
the parking brake before moving the selector
road. includes the weight of all occupants, cargo
lever to the “P” (PARK) position. This pre-
vents loading the parking brake against the (including the roof load), non-factory-
transaxle. When this happens, it is difficult to WARNING installed options, and the tongue weight of
move the selector lever out of the “P”  Do not park your vehicle in areas where the trailer, if any, being towed. The tire and
(PARK) position. combustible materials such as dry grass or loading information placard located on the
leaves can come in contact with a hot driver’s door sill of your vehicle will show
exhaust, since a fire could occur. how much weight it may properly carry.
Parking with the engine run-
ning WARNING
When leaving the vehicle  Never overload your vehicle. Overloading
Never leave the engine running while you can damage your vehicle, adversely affect
take a short nap or rest. Also, never leave the Always carry the key and lock all doors and vehicle performance, including handling
engine running in a closed or poorly venti- the liftgate when leaving the vehicle unat- and braking, cause tire failure, and result
lated place. tended. in an accident.
Always try to park your vehicle in a well lit
area. It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
6-6 Driving safety

Loading information
 Vehicle maximum load on the tire: load  Production options weight: the combined
on an individual tire that is determined by weight of those installed regular produc-
distributing to each axle its share of the tion options weighing over 5 lbs (2.3 kg)
maximum loaded vehicle weight and in excess of those standard items which
dividing by two. they replace, not previously considered in
 Vehicle normal load on the tire: load on an curb weight or accessory weight, includ-
individual tire that is determined by dis- ing heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof
tributing to each axle its share of the curb rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.
weight, accessory weight, and normal  Normal occupant weight: 150 lbs (68 kg)
occupant weight and dividing by two. *times the number of specified occupants 6
 Maximum loaded vehicle weight: the sum (3 in the case of your vehicle)
of -  Occupant distribution: Occupant distribu- This placard shows the maximum number of
(a) Curb weight; tion within the passenger compartment (In occupants permitted to ride in your vehicle as
(b) Accessory weight; your vehicle the distribution is 2 in front, well as “the combined weight of occupants
(c) Vehicle capacity weight; and 1 in rear seat) and cargo” (A), which is called the vehicle
(d) Production options weight. capacity weight. The weight of any non-fac-
*:150 lbs (68 kg) is the weight of one per-
 Curb weight: the weight of a motor vehi- tory installed options, as well as the tongue
son as defined by U.S.A. and Canadian
cle with standard equipment including the weight of a trailer being towed and roof load
regulations.
maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and cool- is included in the definition of “cargo” when
ant. determining the vehicle capacity weight. This
 Accessory weight: the combined weight placard also tells you the size and recom-
(in excess of those standard items which Tire and loading information mended inflation pressure for the original
may be replaced) of automatic transaxle, placard equipment tires on your vehicle. For more
power steering, power brakes, power win- N00630101423 information, refer to “Tires” on page 9-12.
dows, power seats, radio, and heater, to
the extent that these items are available as The tire and loading information placard is
factory-installed equipment (whether located on the inside sill of the driver’s door.
installed or not).
 Vehicle capacity weight: the rated cargo
and luggage load plus 150 lbs (68 kg)
*times the vehicle’s designated seating
capacity.
Driving safety 6-7

Loading information
Type 1 5. Determine the combined weight
Steps for Determining Correct
of luggage and cargo being loaded
Load Limit
N00630201222
on the vehicle. That weight may
1. Locate the statement “The com- not safely exceed the available
bined weight of occupants and cargo and luggage load capacity
cargo should never exceed XXX calculated in Step 4.
kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
placard. trailer, load from your trailer will
6 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
Type 2 cargo and luggage load capacity
3. Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from of your vehicle.
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For exam-
ple, if the “XXX” amount equals
1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lbs. passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650
lbs. (1400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650
lbs.)
6-8 Driving safety

Loading information
NOTE
 The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage and towing capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants. This table is for illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating and load carry capacity of your
vehicle.
 For the following example the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
 Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition, gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear axles must not be exceeded. For further information
on GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the “Specifications” section of this manual.
Driving safety 6-9

Cargo loads
Cargo loads WARNING WARNING

N00629700435  To reduce the risk of serious injury or  Make sure that the weight of luggage and
death, the combined weights of the driver, the roof carrier do not exceed the maxi-
passengers and cargo and must never mum roof load, 110 lb (50 kg). If the maxi-
Cargo load precautions exceed the vehicle capacity weight. mum roof load is exceeded, this could
N00630301119
 Exceeding the vehicle capacity weight will cause damage to the vehicle or result in an
To determine the cargo load capacity for your adversely affect vehicle performance, accident.
vehicle, subtract the weight of all vehicle including handling and braking, and may  The total weight of all occupants and lug-
occupants from the vehicle capacity weight. cause an accident. gage, including your roof load, must not
6 For additional information, if needed, refer to  Do not load cargo or luggage higher than exceed the vehicle capacity weight. For
more information, refer to “Tire and load-
“Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit” the top of the seatback. Be sure that your
cargo or luggage cannot move when your ing information placard” on page 11-3.
on page 6-8.
vehicle is in motion.  Roof load is determined by adding the
DO NOT USE the Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
Having either the rear view blocked, or weight of the roof carrier and the weight
ing and Gross Axle Weight Rating numbers your cargo being thrown inside the cabin of the luggage placed on the roof carrier.
listed on the safety certification label located if you suddenly have to brake can cause a  For additional information, refer to
on the inside sill of the driver’s door as the serious accident or injury or death. “Maximum roof load” on page 11-5.
guide for passengers and/or cargo weight.  Put cargo or luggage in the cargo area of
your vehicle. Try to spread the weight
evenly. CAUTION
 Do not load luggage directly onto the roof.
Use a roof carrier that properly fits your
Loading cargo on the roof vehicle.
N00630401165 For installation, refer to the instruction man-
ual provided with the roof carrier.
WARNING  Place the luggage on the carrier so that its
 Weight placed on the roof of the vehicle weight is distributed evenly with the heaviest
will raise the vehicle’s center of gravity items on the bottom. Do not load items that
and adversely affect its handling charac- are wider than the roof carrier.
teristics. As a result, driving errors or
emergency maneuvers could lead to a loss
of control and result in an accident. Drive
slowly and avoid excessive maneuvers
such as sudden braking or quick turning.
6-10 Driving safety

Trailer towing
CAUTION CAUTION Vehicle capacity weight

 Before driving and after traveling a short dis-  Do not lose control of your vehicle when
tance, always check the load to make sure it towing a trailer. The vehicle capacity weight is printed on the
is securely fastened to the roof carrier. • Always use proper equipment. tire and loading information placard as “com-
Stop the vehicle periodically and check that • Always drive carefully. bined weight of occupants and cargo”.
the load remains secure. If the load is not  Damage to your vehicle caused by improper The weight includes the weight of all occu-
secure, it could fall from the vehicle and equipment or driving is not covered by your
damage your vehicle, another vehicle or cre-
pants and the total weight it can carry.
warranty. For more information, refer to “Tire and load-
ate a road hazard.
ing information placard” on page 6-7.
6
NOTE Weight limits Maximum trailer weight
 To prevent wind noise or reduction in gas
Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight,
mileage, remove the roof carrier when not in
maximum trailer weight (A), maximum Recommendations for towing up to this limit
use.
tongue weight (B) and Gross Axle Weight are as follows.
 Before using an automatic car wash, check
with the attendant to determine if the roof Rating (GAWR).
carrier should be removed. Vehicle condi-
Maximum trailer weight
 Be sure that adequate clearance is main- tion
tained for raising the sunroof and/or liftgate With brake 2,000 lb
when installing a roof carrier. (For vehicle 1 or 2 persons (907 kg)
with sunroof only) seated Without brake 1,250 lb
(567 kg)
With brake 1,499 lb
Trailer towing 3–5 persons (680 kg)
N00629801374
seated Without brake 1,250 lb
Towing a trailer will adversely affect your (567 kg)
vehicle’s handling, performance, braking,
durability and driving economy (fuel con-
sumption, etc.).
If you do tow a trailer with this vehicle, be
sure to use proper equipment and cautious
steering and braking for safe driving.
Driving safety 6-11
Trailer towing
tribution of the load in the trailer. This can be
Tongue weight NOTE
checked by separately weighing the loaded
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that sway
The tongue weight of any trailer is important trailer and then the tongue.
control be used whenever you are towing, to
because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. improve towing stability.
The vehicle capacity weight includes any Gross axle weight rating (GAWR) For further information, please contact your
cargo you may carry, and the people who will authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
be riding in the vehicle. If you will tow a The GAWRs are printed on the certification
trailer, you must include the tongue weight of label which is riveted on the door sill on the
the trailer in your calculation of the vehicle driver’s side. Safety chains
6 capacity weight. For more information Refer to “Vehicle labeling” on page 11-2.
regarding vehicle capacity weight, refer to
A safety chain must always be used between
“Tire and loading information placard” on
Trailer hitches the towing vehicle and the trailer. Leave suf-
page 6-7.
ficient slack in the chain for turns. The chain
Do not exceed the maximum tongue weight
should cross under the trailer tongue to pre-
for your vehicle. Choose a proper hitch and ball, and make vent the tongue from dropping to the ground
sure it is installed at a height that is compati- in case it becomes damaged or separated.
Vehicle condi- ble with the trailer.
Maximum tongue weight For correct safety chain procedures, consult
tion Use a good equalizing hitch which uniformly your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer.
With brake 200 lb (91 kg) distributes the trailer tongue load throughout
1 or 2 persons the frame.
Without brake 125 lb
seated CAUTION
(57 kg)
 Never tow a trailer without using a safety
With brake 150 lb (68 kg) WARNING chain securely attached to both the trailer
3–5 persons  If you make any holes in the body of your
Without brake 125 lb and the vehicle. If the coupling unit or hitch
seated vehicle for installing a trailer hitch, be ball experiences a problem, the trailer may
(57 kg)
sure to seal the holes later when you separate from your vehicle.
remove the hitch. If you don’t seal them,
After you’ve loaded your trailer, weigh the deadly carbon monoxide (CO) from your
trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see exhaust can enter your vehicle. Refer to
if the weights are proper. “Exhaust system” on page 9-22.
Keep the trailer tongue load at 10 % of the
loaded trailer weight for dead weight hitches.
Tongue loads can be adjusted by proper dis-
6-12 Driving safety

Trailer towing
Maintenance when trailer tow- Trailer lights Operating hints

ing
Trailer lights and equipment must comply
with federal, state, and local regulations.
WARNING
Your vehicle will need service more often  If you have a rear window open and you
when you’re towing a trailer. Refer to “WAR- Check with your local recreational vehicle
tow a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
RANTY AND MAINTENANCE MAN- dealer for the requirements in your area, and
monoxide gas which you cannot see or
UAL”. Especially important in trailer use only equipment designed for your vehi- smell could come into your vehicle. It can
operation are automatic transaxle fluid, cle. cause unconsciousness or death. Refer to
engine oil, rear axle oil, belt, cooling system
Since lighting and wiring vary by trailer type
“Exhaust system” on page 9-22.
To maximize your safety when towing a
6
and brake system. Each of these is covered in
and brand, you should have a qualified tech- trailer:
this manual.
nician install a suitable connector between the • Have your exhaust system inspected for
For details, please refer to the “Vehicle care
vehicle and the trailer. Improper equipment or leaks, and make necessary repairs before
and maintenance” section.
installation can cause damage to your vehi- starting on your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts
cle’s electrical system and affect your vehicle • Keep the rear windows closed.
and bolts are tight.
warranty. • If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window or another opening,
Trailer brakes Additional trailer equipment
drive with your front, main heating or
cooling system on and with the blower on
any speed. This will bring fresh, outside
Mitsubishi Motors recommends that any air into your vehicle. Do not use recircu-
Many states and Canadian provinces require
trailer having a total weight of 1,250 lb lation because it only recirculates the air
special outside mirrors when towing a trailer.
(567 kg) or more be equipped with its own inside your vehicle. Refer to “Air selec-
Even if not required, you should install spe-
electric or surge-type brakes. tion switch” on page 7-9.
cial mirrors if you cannot clearly see behind
If you choose electric brakes, be sure they are you, or if the trailer creates a blind spot.
electrically actuated. Do not attempt to tap
into your vehicle’s hydraulic system. No mat-
Ask your trailer sales or rental agency if any Driver preparation
other items are recommended or required for
ter how successful it may seem, any attempt
your towing situation. Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of
to attach trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic system will lower braking effec- experience.
tiveness and create a potential hazard. Before setting out for the open road, you’ll
want to get to know your trailer. Acquaint
Driving safety 6-13

Trailer towing
yourself with the feel of handling and braking Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal
with the added weight of the trailer. Always
Passing well in advance.
keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving
is now a good deal longer and not nearly as You’ll need more passing distance up ahead
responsive as your vehicle is without a trailer. when you’re towing a trailer. And, because Overheating
you’re a good deal longer, you’ll need to go
much farther beyond the passed vehicle Towing a trailer puts additional burden on the
Vehicle preparation before you can return to your lane. engine and transaxle, which may cause over-
heating. Following are some suggestions to
Before you start, check the trailer hitch, reduce overheating:
6 safety chains, tires and mirror adjustment.
Backing up
Cause of over-
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with Solution
heating
Tire one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left,
Air conditioning on Turn off
just move that hand to the left. To move the
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the trailer to the right, move your hand to the Highway speeds Reduce speed
cold inflation pressure listed in the manual. right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, Select lower gear posi-
You’ll find these numbers on the tire and have someone guide you. Going up hills
tion
loading information placard at the sill of the
driver’s door. Stop-and-go city With the vehicle
Refer to “Tire inflation pressures” on page
Making turns traffic stopped, shift to the
9-15. “N” (NEUTRAL)
position and idle the
CAUTION engine at high idle.
 Making sharp turns while towing a trailer
Following distance could cause the trailer to come in contact
When towing at high altitudes, engine coolant
with the vehicle. Your vehicle could be dam-
aged. Avoid making sharp turns while tow- and automatic transaxle fluid will overheat at
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ing a trailer. a lower temperature than at normal altitudes.
ahead as you would when driving your vehi- If you turn your engine off immediately after
cle without a trailer. This can help you avoid towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
situations that require heavy braking and sud- When you’re turning with a trailer, make
your vehicle may show signs similar to over-
den turns. wider than normal turns to help prevent the
heating. To avoid this, let the engine run
trailer from striking shoulders, curbs, road
while parked (preferably on level ground)
signs, trees or other objects.
6-14 Driving safety
Trailer towing
with the automatic transaxle in the “P” that the selector lever is in the “P” (PARK)
(PARK) position for a few minutes before position. Avoid parking on a hill with a
turning the engine off. trailer, but if it cannot be avoided, do so only
after performing the following:
 If the engine coolant temperature indica-
tor flashes on the information screen in 1. Apply the brakes and keep them applied.
the multi-information display or the 2. Have someone place chocks or blocks
engine power drops suddenly, refer to under both the vehicle and trailer wheels.
“Engine overheating” on page 8-4. 3. When the chocks or blocks are in place,
release your brakes slowly until the
 If the warning display or warning chocks or blocks absorb the load.
6
display illuminates, refer to “Warning dis- 4. Apply the parking brake firmly.
play” on page 5-63. 5. Set the selector lever to the “P” (PARK)
position and turn off the engine.
Driving on hills
When restarting out after parking on a hill:
Reduce speed and downshift before you start 1. Check that the selector lever is set to the
down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t “P” (PARK) position.
downshift, prolonged or frequent application 2. Start the engine. Be sure to keep the brake
of the brakes can cause reduced braking effi- pedal depressed.
ciency and performance. 3. Set the selector lever to the “D” (DRIVE)
position or “R” (REVERSE) position.
You can tow in “D” (DRIVE) position. How-
4. Release the parking brake and brake pedal
ever, you may want to shift the selector lever
and slowly pull or back away from the
to the 3rd or a lower position, under heavy
chocks or blocks. Stop and apply your
loads or hilly conditions.
brakes.
5. Have someone retrieve the chocks or
Parking blocks.
Always place chocks or blocks under both the

vehicle and trailer wheels when parking. Be
sure that the parking brake is firmly set and
Driving safety 6-15

Comfort controls
Important air conditioning operating tips ........................................7-2

Vents ................................................................................................7-2
Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped).....................................7-6
Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning
(if so equipped) ..........................................................................7-15
Air purifier .....................................................................................7-23 7
Important air conditioning operating tips
Important air conditioning Air conditioning system refrig- During a long period of disuse
operating tips erant and lubricant recommen-
N00733701375 dations The air conditioner should be operated for at
least five minutes each week, even in cold
CAUTION If the air conditioner seems less effective than
weather. This includes the quick defrosting
 The engine speed may increase when the air mode. Operating the air conditioning system
usual, the cause might be a refrigerant leak.
conditioner is operating. weekly maintains lubrication of the compres-
Have the system inspected by your authorized
With increased engine speed, a CVT sor internal parts to keep the air conditioner
equipped vehicle will creep to a greater Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility
in the best operating condition.
degree than with a lower engine speed. Fully of your choice.
depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehi-
7 Vents
cle from creeping. CAUTION
N00729901318
 The air conditioning system in your vehicle
1. Park the vehicle in the shade whenever must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-
possible. Parking in the hot sun makes the 1234yf and the lubricant PAG46A.
vehicle interior extremely hot which then Use of any other refrigerant or lubricant will
requires more time to cool. If it is neces- cause severe damage and may require replac-
sary to park in the sun, open the windows ing your vehicle’s entire air conditioning
system.
for the first few minutes of air condition-
The release of refrigerant into the atmo-
ing to expel the hot air. sphere is not recommended.
2. Afterwards, keep the windows closed The new refrigerant HFO-1234yf in your
when the air conditioner is in use. The vehicle is designed not to harm the earth’s
entry of outside air through open windows ozone layer. However, it may contribute
will reduce cooling efficiency. slightly to global warming. 1- Center vents
3. When running the air conditioner, make It is recommended that the old refrigerant be
2- Side vents
sure the air intake, which is located in saved and recycled for future use.
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tions such as leaves. Leaves collected in
the air-intake chamber may reduce air
flow and plug the water drains.
7-2 Comfort controls

Vents
Air flow and direction adjust- Side vents Changing the mode selection
ments N00736401706
N00730201379 Move the knob (A) to make adjustments. To change the position and amount of air
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the flowing from the vents, press the MODE
Center vents outside as far as possible. switch or defogger switch. Refer to “MODE
switch” on page 7-9, “Defogger switch” on
Left Right page 7-9.
Move the knob (A) to make adjustments.
These symbols are used in the next several
To close the vent, move the knob (A) to the
illustrations to demonstrate the quantity of air
inside as far as possible.
coming from the vents.
: Small amount of air from the vents 7
: Medium amount of air from the vents
: Large amount of air from the vents
Face position
1- Close
2- Open Air flows only to the upper part of the passen-
ger compartment.
NOTE
1- Close
 On rare occasions, air from the vents of an
2- Open air-conditioned vehicle may be foggy. This is
only due to moist air cooling suddenly and
does not indicate a problem.
 Do not let drinks or other liquids get into the
vents as they could prevent the air condition-
ing from operating normally.
Comfort controls 7-3

Vents
Foot/Face position Foot position Foot/Defroster position
Air flows to the upper part of the passenger Air flows mainly to the leg area. Air flows to the leg area, the windshield and
compartment, and flows to the leg area. the door windows.
NOTE NOTE
 The foot/face air flow ratio can be adjusted  The foot/defroster air flow ratio can be
with the mode selection in the “ ” posi- adjusted with the mode selection in the
tion. “ ” position.
For further information, we recommend you For further information, we recommend you
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. dealer or a repair facility of your choice.
On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone On vehicles equipped with the Smartphone
Link Display Audio, screen operations can Link Display Audio, screen operations can
be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the be used to make the adjustment. Refer to the
separate owner’s manual for details. separate owner’s manual for details.

Vents
Defroster position
Air flows mainly to the windshield and the

door windows.

Automatic air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00731501441
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
N00711801709
1- Temperature control switch  P.7-3 9- OFF switch  P.7-12

2- MODE switch  P.7-9 10- Temperature display  P.7-8
3- Air conditioning switch  P.7-10 11- Mode selection display  P.7-9
4- Blower speed selection switch  P.7-7 12- Air conditioning indicator  P.7-10
5- Air selection switch  P.7-9 13- Blower speed display  P.7-7
6- Defogger switch  P.7-9
7- AUTO switch  P.7-12
8- Electric rear window defogger switch
 P.5-204

NOTE NOTE Blower speed selection switch

 There is an interior air temperature sensor  In extreme cold, the air conditioning control N00736901219
(A) in the illustrated position. panel screen may operate sluggishly. This Press of the blower speed selection
Never place anything over the sensor, since does not indicate a problem.
switch to increase the blower speed.
doing so will prevent it from functioning It will disappear when the vehicle interior
properly. temperature rises to a normal temperature. Press of the blower speed selection
switch to decrease the blower speed.
The selected blower speed (A) will be shown
in the display.
7
1
NOTE
 Since the air conditioning operation is con- 2
conditioner is insufficient. 1- Increase
Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 2- Decrease
P.5-198.
 Even during ECO mode operation, you can
select normal operation of the air condi-
tioner.
be used to change the setting. Refer to the
separate owner’s manual for details.


air conditioning switch to match your per-
Temperature control switch NOTE sonal preferences.
N00737001451  When the engine coolant temperature is low,
Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Press of the temperature control switch to the air temperature from the heater will be
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for
increase the temperature. cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if
you have selected warm air with the switch. assistance.
Press of the temperature control switch to Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
To prevent the windshield and windows from
decrease the temperature. switch (Changing the function setting)” on
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to
The selected temperature (A) will be shown “ ” and the blower speed will be reduced page 7-11.
in the display. while the system is operating in the AUTO Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
mode. (Changing the function setting)” on page
 When you feel that it is hotter or colder than 7-10.
7 the set temperature, you may adjust it to your
preference.
For further information, we recommend you
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting, the air selection and the
air conditioner will be automatically changed
as follows.
Also, if the air selection is operated manually
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
NOTE ation will be selected.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
 The temperature value of the air conditioner
to the highest setting)
is switched in conjunction with the outside
Outside air will be introduced and the air
temperature display unit of the multi-infor-
conditioner will stop.
mation display.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
page 5-155. to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioner will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and

Mode switch Defogger switch NOTE

N00737101250 N00703401067  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
To change the amount of air flowing from the When this switch is pressed, the mode conditioning system automatically operates
vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the changes to the “ ” mode and the blower and outside air (as opposed to recirculated
MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes speed will be set at the maximum automati- air) is selected. This automatic switching
cally. The indicator light (A) will come on control is carried out to prevent misting of
to the next one in the following sequence:
and the “ ” mode is shown in the display the windows even if “Disable automatic air
“ ”“ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” conditioning control” or “Disable automatic
“ ”. The selected mode is shown in the dis- (B).
air selection control” is set. Refer to “Person-
play (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selec- alizing the air conditioning switch (Changing
tion” on page 7-3. the function setting)” on page 7-11, “Person-
alizing the air selection (Changing the func-
tion setting)” on page 7-10.
7
 The indicator light (A) will go off when
adjusting the blower speed.
Air selection switch

N00737201424
Normally, use the outside air position to keep

the windshield and side windows clear and to
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind-
shield.
To change the air selection, simply press the

air selection switch.
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF}

Outside air is introduced into the passen-
ger compartment.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON}
Air is recirculated inside the passenger
compartment.


• When the setting has changed from
NOTE enabled to disabled, the system will beep
 When the engine coolant temperature rises to
three times and the indicator light will
a certain level, the air selection is automati-
flash three times.
cally switched to the recirculation position
and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this • When the setting has changed from dis-
time, the system will not switch to the out- abled to enabled, the system will beep
side position even if the air selection switch two times and the indicator light will
is pushed. flash three times.
On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
 Personalizing the air selection phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-
ations can also be used to change the
(Changing the function setting)
7 When the air conditioning turns on, the air N00712300052 setting. Refer to the separate owner’s
selection is controlled automatically. When manual for details.
You can change the following functions to
the air conditioning turns off, the air selection match your preference.
automatically goes back to the outside posi- NOTE
tion.  Enable automatic air selection control:  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
If high cooling performance is desired, or if When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air selection control”.
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in selection switch will also be automatically  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
some way, use the recirculation position. controlled. selection will automatically change to the
Switch to the outside position every now and outside air position, even if the system is set
then to keep the windows from fogging up.  Disable automatic air selection control: to “Disable automatic air selection control”,
Even when the AUTO switch is pressed, in order to prevent windows from fogging
the air selection switch will not be auto- up.
CAUTION matically controlled.
 Using recirculated air for a long time may
cause the windows to fog up.  Changing the settings: Air conditioning switch
Press the air selection switch for approxi- N00737301470
mately 10 seconds or longer.
NOTE When the setting has changed, the system
Push the switch, and the air conditioning
 If the mode selection is set “ ” position, will beep and the indicator light will flash. compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator
you cannot turn the air conditioner off or (A) will be shown in the display.
select the recirculation position.
This prevents the windows from fogging up.

 Personalizing the air conditioning On vehicles equipped with the Smart-

phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-
switch (Changing the function set-
ting)
N00712200051
setting. Refer to the separate owner’s
manual for details.
match your preference.
NOTE
 Enable automatic air conditioning control:  The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
When the AUTO switch is pressed, or conditioning control”.
when the temperature control switch has  When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
been set to the minimum temperature, the conditioner will run automatically, even if
Push the switch again and the air condition- air conditioning switch is automatically the system is set to “Disable automatic air 7
ing compressor will stop and the indicator controlled. conditioning control”, in order to prevent
goes off. windows from fogging up.
 Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
NOTE
The air conditioning switch is not auto-
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
matically controlled, unless the air condi-
ing compressor, the “ ” indicator blinks.
tioning switch is used.
Press the air conditioning switch once to turn
it off, then once more to turn it back on. If  Changing the settings:
the“ ” indicator does not blink, there is Press the air conditioning switch for
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked approximately 10 seconds or longer.
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
 For example, sometimes after using a high-
pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
and the “ ” indicator blinks temporarily.
Wait for a while, press the air conditioning
switch once to turn the system off, then once flash three times.
more to turn it back on. Once the water evap- • When the setting has changed from dis-
orates, the blinking will stop. abled to enabled, the system will beep
two times and the indicator light will
flash three times.
AUTO switch OFF switch Operating the air conditioning

N00703501055 N00703601043
system (automatic mode)
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi- Push the switch to turn off the air condition- N00731701557
cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec- ing system.
tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/
outside air selection, temperature adjustment,
and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all
controlled automatically. The selected mode
and the blower speed are not shown in the
display.
In normal conditions, use the system in the

AUTO mode and follow these procedures:
1. Push the AUTO switch.

2. Set the temperature control switch to the
desired temperature. The temperature can
be set within a range of around 61 (LO) to
89 (HI) (when the outside temperature
unit of the multi-information display
shows °F) or 17 (LO) to 31 (HI) (when the
outside temperature unit of the multi-
information display shows °C).
The vents, recirculated/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment, and ON/OFF
of air conditioner will be controlled automati-
cally.

Defrosting or defogging (wind- 2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-

NOTE tion.
 Set the temperature at approximately 75 shield, door windows) 3. Select your desired blower speed by
(when the outside temperature unit of the N00732401577
multi-information display shows °F) or 24
pressing the blower speed selection
(when the outside temperature unit of the CAUTION switch.
multi-information display shows °C) under 4. Select your desired temperature by press-
 For safety, make sure you have a clear view
normal conditions. through all the windows. ing the temperature control switch.
 When the engine coolant temperature is low, 5. Push the air conditioning switch.
the air temperature from the heater will be
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if To remove frost or mist from the windshield
and door windows, use the MODE switch or  For quick defrosting
you have selected warm air with the temper-
ature switch. To prevent the windshield and defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”). 7
windows from fogging up, the vent mode
will be changed to “ ” and the blower  For ordinary defrosting
speed will be reduced.
Use this setting to keep the windshield and
door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
Operating the air conditioning leg area heated (when driving in rain or
snow).
system (manual mode)
N00731801170
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-

trolled manually by setting the blower speed
selection switch and the MODE switch to the 1. Push the defogger switch.
desired positions. To return to automatic 2. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
operation, press the AUTO switch. tion.
NOTE
 While the “ ” indicator light is on, the air
conditioning compressor will run automati-
cally. The outside air position will also be
1. Set the air selection switch to the outside
selected and the blower speed will be set at
position.
the maximum automatically.

NOTE
 If the “ ” indicator light is on, you cannot
turn the air conditioner off or select the recir-
culation position. This prevents the windows
from fogging up.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
side vents toward the door windows.
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
to the maximum cool position. This will
blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
up.
7

Dual-zone automatic climate control air conditioning (if so equipped)

N00731501454
The air conditioner can only be used while the engine is running.
Control panel
N00711801712
1- Driver’s side temperature control 7- Defogger switch  P.7-18 14- Air conditioning indicator  P.7-20
switch  P.7-17 8- AUTO switch  P.7-21 15- Blower speed display  P.7-16
2- MODE switch  P.7-18 9- SYNC switch  P.7-17 16- Passenger’s side temperature display
3- Blower speed selection switch  10- Electric rear window defogger switch  P.7-17
P.7-16  P.5-204
4- Air conditioning switch  P.7-20 11- OFF switch  P.7-21
5- Passenger’s side temperature control 12- Driver’s side temperature display
switch  P.7-17  P.7-17
6- Air selection switch  P.7-19 13- Mode selection display  P.7-18

NOTE NOTE Blower speed selection switch

 There is an interior air temperature sensor  In extreme cold, the air conditioning control N00736901222
(A) in the illustrated position. panel screen may operate sluggishly. This Press of the blower speed selection
Never place anything over the sensor, since does not indicate a problem.
switch to increase the blower speed.
doing so will prevent it from functioning It will disappear when the vehicle interior
properly. temperature rises to a normal temperature. Press of the blower speed selection
switch to decrease the blower speed.
The selected blower speed (A) will be shown
in the display.
NOTE
 Since the air conditioning operation is con-
conditioner is insufficient. 1- Increase
Refer to “ECO mode switch” on page 2- Decrease
P.5-198.
 Even during ECO mode operation, you can
select normal operation of the air condi-
tioner.
be used to change the setting. Refer to the
separate owner’s manual for details.


air conditioning switch to match your per-
Temperature control switch NOTE sonal preferences.
N00737001464  When the engine coolant temperature is low,
Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
Press of the temperature control switch to the air temperature from the heater will be
dealer or a repair facility of your choice for
increase the temperature. cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if
you have selected warm air with the switch. assistance.
Press of the temperature control switch to Refer to “Personalizing the air conditioning
To prevent the windshield and windows from
decrease the temperature. switch (Changing the function setting)” on
fogging up, the vent mode will be changed to
The selected temperature (A) will be shown “ ” and the blower speed will be reduced page 7-20.
in the display. while the system is operating in the AUTO Refer to “Personalizing the air selection
mode. (Changing the function setting)” on page
 When you feel that it is hotter or colder than 7-19.
the set temperature, you may adjust it to your 7
preference.
For further information, we recommend you
 To control the driver’s side and the
consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors passenger’s side temperature inde-
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. pendently
 When the temperature is set to the highest or
the lowest setting, the air selection and the When the indicator light (A) goes off by
air conditioner will be automatically changed pressing the passenger’s side temperature
as follows. control switch (B) or the SYNC switch, the
Also, if the air selection is operated manually driver’s side and the passenger’s side temper-
after an automatic changeover, manual oper-
ature can be controlled independently of each
NOTE ation will be selected.
other.
• Quick Heating (When the temperature is set
 The temperature value of air conditioner is
to the highest setting)
switched in conjunction with outside temper-
Outside air will be introduced and the air
ature display unit of the multi-information
conditioner will stop.
display.
Refer to “Changing the temperature unit” on • Quick Cooling (When the temperature is set
page 5-155. to the lowest setting)
Inside air will be recirculated and the air
conditioner will operate.
The above indicates the factory settings. You

can personalize the air selection switch and

Mode switch Defogger switch

N00737101263 N00703401070
To change the amount of air flowing from the When this switch is pressed, the mode
vents, press the MODE switch. Each time the changes to the “ ” mode and the blower
MODE switch is pressed, the mode changes speed will be set at the maximum automati-
to the next one in the following sequence: cally. The indicator light (A) will come on
“ ”“ ”“ ”“ ”“ ” and the “ ” mode is shown in the display
“ ”. The selected mode is shown in the dis- (B).
play (A). Refer to “Changing the mode selec-
tion” on page 7-3.
7
NOTE
 When the indicator light (A) comes on by
pressing the SYNC switch, the passenger’s
side temperature will be controlled to the
same setting temperature as the driver’s side.
When the indicator light (A) illuminates, if
the driver’s side temperature control switch
is pressed, the passenger’s side setting tem-
perature will be synchronized to the driver’s
side.

NOTE NOTE
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air  When the engine coolant temperature rises to
conditioning system automatically operates a certain level, the air selection is automati-
and outside air (as opposed to recirculated cally switched to the recirculation position
air) is selected. This automatic switching and the indicator light (A) comes on. At this
control is carried out to prevent misting of time, the system will not switch to the out-
the windows even if “Disable automatic air side position even if the air selection switch
conditioning control” or “Disable automatic is pushed.
air selection control” is set. Refer to “Person-
alizing the air conditioning switch (Changing
 Personalizing the air selection
the function setting)” on page 7-20, “Person-
(Changing the function setting)
alizing the air selection (Changing the func-
tion setting)” on page 7-19.
When the air conditioning turns on, the air N00712300065 7
selection is controlled automatically. When You can change the following functions to
 The indicator light (A) will go off when
adjusting the blower speed. the air conditioning turns off, the air selection match your preference.
automatically goes back to the outside posi-
tion.  Enable automatic air selection control:
Air selection switch If high cooling performance is desired, or if When the AUTO switch is pressed, the air
N00737201437
the outside air is dusty or contaminated in selection switch will also be automatically
some way, use the recirculation position. controlled.
Normally, use the outside air position to keep Switch to the outside position every now and
the windshield and side windows clear and to then to keep the windows from fogging up.  Disable automatic air selection control:
quickly remove fog or frost from the wind- Even when the AUTO switch is pressed,
shield. the air selection switch will not be auto-
CAUTION matically controlled.
To change the air selection, simply press the  Using recirculated air for a long time may
air selection switch. cause the windows to fog up.  Changing the settings:
Press the air selection switch for approxi-
 Outside air {Indicator light (A) OFF} mately 10 seconds or longer.
Outside air is introduced into the passen- NOTE When the setting has changed, the system
ger compartment.  If the mode selection is set to the “ ” posi- will beep and the indicator light will flash.
 Recirculated air {Indicator light (A) ON} tion, you cannot turn the air conditioner off
Air is recirculated inside the passenger or select the recirculation position.
compartment. This prevents the windows from fogging up.


• When the setting has changed from  Personalizing the air conditioning
enabled to disabled, the system will beep
switch (Changing the function set-
ting)
flash three times. N00712200064
• When the setting has changed from dis-
abled to enabled, the system will beep
match your preference.
flash three times.  Enable automatic air conditioning control:
On vehicles equipped with the Smart- When the AUTO switch is pressed, or
phone Link Display Audio, screen oper- when the temperature control switch has
ations can also be used to change the been set to the minimum temperature, the
7 setting. Refer to the separate owner’s Push the switch again and the air condition- air conditioning switch is automatically
manual for details. ing compressor will stop and the indicator controlled.
goes off.
NOTE  Disable automatic air conditioning con-
trol:
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air NOTE
selection control”. The air conditioning switch is not auto-
 If a problem is detected in the air condition-
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air matically controlled, unless the air condi-
ing compressor, the “ ” indicator blinks.
selection will automatically change to the tioning switch is used.
Press the air conditioning switch once to turn
outside air position, even if the system is set it off, then once more to turn it back on. If
to “Disable automatic air selection control”,  Changing the settings:
the“ ” indicator does not blink, there is Press the air conditioning switch for
in order to prevent windows from fogging
no problem. If it does blink, have it checked approximately 10 seconds or longer.
up.
at an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
When the setting has changed, the system
will beep and the indicator light will flash.
 For example, sometimes after using a high-
Air conditioning switch pressure car wash, the condenser can get wet,
N00737301483 enabled to disabled, the system will beep
and the “ ” indicator blinks temporarily.
Push the switch, and the air conditioning three times and the indicator light will
Wait for a while, press the air conditioning
switch once to turn the system off, then once flash three times.
compressor will turn on. The “ ” indicator
more to turn it back on. Once the water evap- • When the setting has changed from dis-
(A) will be shown in the display.
orates, the blinking will stop. abled to enabled, the system will beep
flash three times.

On vehicles equipped with the Smart-
OFF switch
phone Link Display Audio, screen oper-
N00703601056
setting. Refer to the separate owner’s Push the switch to turn off the air condition-
manual for details. ing system.
NOTE
 The factory setting is “Enable automatic air
conditioning control”.
 When the defogger switch is pressed, the air
conditioner will run automatically, even if
the system is set to “Disable automatic air 7
conditioning control”, in order to prevent
windows from fogging up.
AUTO switch
N00703501068
When the AUTO switch is pressed, the indi-

cator light (A) comes on and the mode selec-
tion, blower speed adjustment, recirculated/
outside air selection, temperature adjustment,
and air conditioner ON/OFF status are all
controlled automatically. The selected mode
and the blower speed are not shown in the
display.

Operating the air conditioning NOTE Defrosting or defogging (wind-

system (automatic mode)  Set the temperature at approximately 75 shield, door windows)
N00731701560
(when the outside temperature unit of the N00732401580
multi-information display shows °F) or 24
(when the outside temperature unit of the CAUTION
multi-information display shows °C) under  For safety, make sure you have a clear view
normal conditions. through all the windows.
 When the engine coolant temperature is low,
the air temperature from the heater will be
cool/cold until the engine warms up, even if To remove frost or mist from the windshield
you have selected warm air with the temper- and door windows, use the MODE switch or
7 ature switch. To prevent the windshield and defogger switch (“ ” or “ ”).
windows from fogging up, the vent mode
will be changed to “ ” and the blower  For ordinary defrosting
speed will be reduced.
In normal conditions, use the system in the Use this setting to keep the windshield and
AUTO mode and follow these procedures: door windows clear of mist, and to keep the
Operating the air conditioning leg area heated (when driving in rain or
1. Push the AUTO switch. system (manual mode) snow).
2. Set the temperature control switch to the N00731801125
desired temperature. The temperature can
Blower speed and vent mode may be con-
be set within a range of around 61 (LO) to
trolled manually by setting the blower speed
89 (HI) (when the outside temperature
selection switch and the MODE switch to the
unit of the multi-information display
desired positions. To return to automatic
shows °F) or 17 (LO) to 31 (HI) (when the
operation, press the AUTO switch.
outside temperature unit of the multi-
information display shows °C).
The vents, recirculated/outside air, blower

speed, temperature adjustment, and ON/OFF
of the air conditioner will be controlled auto-
matically.

Air purifier
1. Set the air selection switch to the outside
position.
NOTE NOTE
 While the “ ” indicator light is on, the air  Operation in certain conditions such as driv-
2. Set the MODE switch to the “ ” posi-
conditioning compressor will run automati- ing on a dusty road and frequent use of the
tion. air conditioner can lead to reduction of ser-
cally. The outside air position will also be
3. Select your desired blower speed by vice life of the filter. When you feel that the
selected and the blower speed will be set at
pressing the blower speed selection air flow is lower than normal or when the
the maximum automatically.
switch. windshield or windows start to fog up easily,
 If the “ ” indicator light is on, you cannot
4. Select your desired temperature by press- replace the air filter.
turn the air conditioner off or select the recir-
ing the temperature control switch. Contact your authorized Mitsubishi Motors
culation position. This prevents the windows
5. Push the air conditioning switch. dealer or a repair facility of your choice for
from fogging up.
assistance.
 To defog quickly, direct the air flow from the
 For quick defrosting side vents toward the door windows. 7
 When defrosting, do not set the temperature
to the maximum cool position. This will
blow cool air on the window glass and fog it
up.
Air purifier
N00733801217
The air conditioning system is equipped with

an air filter to remove pollen and dust.
The air filter’s ability to collect pollen and
dirt is reduced as it becomes dirty, so replace
1. Push the defogger switch.
it periodically. For the maintenance interval,
2. Set the temperature to the highest posi-
refer to the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-
tion.
NANCE MANUAL”.

For emergencies
If the vehicle breaks down ...............................................................8-2

If the operation mode cannot be changed to OFF
(vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key) ...................................8-2
Jump-starting the engine ..................................................................8-2
Engine overheating ..........................................................................8-4
Jack and tools ...................................................................................8-5
How to change a tire ........................................................................8-6
Towing ...........................................................................................8-11 8
Operation under adverse driving conditions ..................................8-12
Fuel Pump Shut-off System ...........................................................8-13
If the vehicle breaks down
If the vehicle breaks down If the operation mode can- WARNING

N00836301230
not be changed to OFF  To reduce the risk of igniting flammable
gas that may be emitted from the battery,
If your vehicle breaks down on the road,
move to the shoulder and turn on the hazard
(vehicles equipped with the carefully read this section before jump-
warning flashers. If there is no shoulder, or F.A.S.T.-key) starting the vehicle.

 Do not try to start your vehicle by pushing
the shoulder is not safe, drive in the right lane N00860700029
or towing. This can cause an accident
slowly with the hazard lights flashing, until If the operation mode cannot be changed to resulting in serious injury or death and
you come to a safe stopping place. Keep the OFF, perform the following procedure. can damage the vehicle.
flashers flashing.
1. Move the selector lever to the “P”
If the engine stops/fails
(PARK) position, and then change the NOTE
operation mode to OFF.  Do not use jumper cables if they have dam-
8 2. One of the other causes could be low bat- age or corrosion.
If the engine stops, there will be no power tery voltage. If this occurs, the keyless
assist to the steering and brakes, making these entry system, keyless operation function,
difficult to use. 1. Take off any metal jewelry such as watch
and steering lock will also not operate.
bands or bracelets that might create an
 The brake booster will not work, so the accidental electrical contact.
brakes will not grip well. The brake pedal 2. Position the vehicles close enough
will be harder to press than usual. together so that the jumper cables can
 Since there is no power steering assist, the Jump-starting the engine reach, but be sure the vehicles aren’t
steering wheel will be hard to turn. N00836401840 touching each other.
If the engine cannot be started because the
CAUTION
When the engine fails at the battery is weak or dead, you can start it with
 Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-
the battery from another vehicle using jumper
intersection cables. volt battery. If the other system isn’t 12-volt,
both systems can be damaged.
Get help from your passengers, bystanders,
etc. to push the vehicle and move it to a safe 3. Set the parking brake firmly on your vehi-
area. cle and move the selector lever into the
“P” (PARK) position.
8-2 For emergencies

Jump-starting the engine

4. Set the parking brake firmly on the other 8. Connect one end of the other jumper cable
vehicle. Put the automatic transaxle in “P” to the negative (-) terminal of the
(PARK) or the manual transaxle in “N” booster battery (B), and then connect the
(Neutral). other end to the designated ground
5. Turn the ignition switch (the engine location of the vehicle with the discharged
switch) on each vehicle to the “LOCK” or battery (A) at the point farthest from the
“OFF” position. battery.
NOTE WARNING
 Turn off all lights, heater, and other electrical  Be sure to follow the proper order when
loads. This will avoid sparks and help save connecting the batteries, of:
both batteries.
WARNING   
6. Make sure your battery electrolyte is at  Make sure that the jumper cables and  Make sure that the connection is made 8
your clothing are clear of the cooling fans to the correct designated location (as
the proper level. (Refer to “Battery” on shown in the illustration) properly. If the
and drive belts. Entanglement with the
page 9-10.) connection is directly made to the negative
fans or belts can cause serious personal
injury. (-) terminal of the battery, the flammable
WARNING gases from inside the battery might catch
 If the electrolyte fluid is not visible, or fire and explode, causing personal injury.
looks frozen, DO NOT ATTEMPT JUMP NOTE  When connecting the jumper cable, do not
STARTING!! connect the positive (+) cable to the nega-
 Open the terminal cover before connecting
The battery might split open or explode if tive (-) terminal. Sparks can make the bat-
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of
the temperature is below the freezing tery explode.
the battery.
point or if it is not filled to the proper
(Refer to “Battery” on page 9-10.)
level.
 Use the proper cables suitable for the battery 9. Start the engine in the vehicle providing
size. the boost. Let the engine idle a few min-
7. Connect one end of one jumper cable Otherwise heat damage to the cables could utes, then start the engine in the vehicle
to the positive (+) terminal of the dis- result. with the discharged battery.
charged battery (A), and then connect the 10. After the engine is started, disconnect the
other end to the positive (+) terminal cables in the reverse order from the way
of the booster battery (B). you connected them.
For emergencies 8-3

Engine overheating
3. Check that the cooling fan is running. If
Charging the battery by using As your vehicle has anti-lock the fan is not turning, stop the engine
an external battery charger brakes immediately and contact an authorized
If you drive your vehicle with a low battery ity of your choice for assistance.
WARNING charge after the engine has been started by
 Always remove the battery from your
using jumper cables, the engine may misfire. WARNING
vehicle when the battery is charged by an
This can cause the anti-lock braking system  To avoid personal injury, keep hands, hair,
external battery charger.
warning light to blink on and off. This is only jewelry and clothes away from the cooling
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
due to the low battery voltage. It is not a fan. The cooling fan can start at any time.
from the battery because the battery could
explode. problem with the brake system. If this hap-
 Keep your work area well vented when pens, fully charge the battery and ensure the 4. If you see steam or spray coming from
charging system is operating properly. under the hood, turn off the engine.
8 charging or using the battery in an
enclosed space. 5. If you do not see steam or spray coming
 Remove all the caps before charging the from under the hood, leave the engine on
battery.
Engine overheating until the high coolant temperature warn-
N00836501421
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro- ing goes off. After the high coolant tem-
sive diluted sulfuric acid. If electrolyte When the engine is overheating, the informa- perature warning has gone off, you can
comes in contact with your hands, eyes, tion screen in the multi-information display start driving again. If the high coolant
clothes, or the painted surface of your will be interrupted and the engine coolant temperature warning stays on, turn off the
vehicle, thoroughly flush with water. If temperature warning display will appear. engine.
electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
immediately and thoroughly with water, Also “ ” will blink.
and get prompt medical attention. If these warnings are displayed: WARNING
 Always wear protective clothing and gog-  Before raising the engine hood, check to
gles when working near the battery. 1. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Turn on see if there is steam or spray coming from
 Keep the battery out of the reach of chil- the hazard warning flashers. under the hood. Steam or spray coming
dren. 2. With the engine still running, carefully from an overheated engine could seriously
raise the engine hood to vent the engine scald you.
compartment. Do not open the hood until there is no
steam or spray.
8-4 For emergencies

Jack and tools

6. When you do not see any more steam or 10. Replace the radiator cap and tighten it
spray, open the hood. Look for obvious fully. Check the engine coolant tempera-
Tools
leaks, such as a split radiator hose. Be ture display on the multi-information dis-
careful as components will be hot. Any play. You can start driving again when the
leak source must be repaired. high coolant temperature warning does
7. If there is no obvious leak source, check not come on.
the coolant level in the engine coolant 11. Have the system inspected by your autho-
reserve tank. If there is none, or if it is too rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair
low, slowly add coolant. facility of your choice.
8. If the engine coolant reserve tank needs
coolant, you will probably also need to
add coolant to the radiator. Do not loosen
Jack and tools
N00836601435
or remove the radiator cap until the engine
has cooled down. 1- Bar 8
Storage 2- Wheel nut wrench
WARNING
 Removing the radiator cap could scald The tools and jack are stored under the lug-
you with escaping hot water or steam. gage floor board of the luggage compartment. Removing and storing the jack
When checking the radiator level, cover
the cap with a cloth before trying to
remove it. Turn it slowly counterclock-
wise, without pressing down, to the first
To remove
notch. The pressure in the system will then
1. Lift up the luggage floor board. Refer to
be let out. When the pressure is COM-
PLETELY LET OUT, press down and
“Luggage floor board” on page 5-223.
keep turning the cap counterclockwise 2. Retract the jack and remove it from its
until it comes off. installation fitting (A).
9. Start the engine, and slowly add coolant,

up to the bottom of the filler neck. Use 1- Tools
plain water if you have to (and replace it 2- Jack
with the right coolant as soon as possible).
For emergencies 8-5

How to change a tire

N00836901904
Before changing a tire, first stop your vehicle

To retract in a safe, flat location.
1. Park the vehicle on level and stable

ground.
2. Set the parking brake firmly.
3. Move the selector lever to the “P”
(PARK) position and turn the ignition
switch (the engine switch) to the “OFF”
position. WARNING
8 To store 4. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and  Be sure to apply chocks or blocks to the
set up a warning sign, such as a warning correct tire when jacking up the vehicle. If
1. Retract the jack, then return it to its origi- triangle or flashing signal lights, at an the vehicle moves while jacked up, the
nal position. adequate distance from the vehicle, and jack could slip out of position, leading to
2. Extend the jack and firmly secure it in its have all your passengers leave the vehicle. an accident.
storage area, then lower the luggage floor 5. To prevent the vehicle from rolling when
board. it is raised on the jack, place chocks or
blocks (A) at the tire that is diagonally NOTE
opposite from the tire (B) you are chang-  The chocks shown in the illustration do not
ing. come with your vehicle. It is recommended
that you purchase chocks or blocks and keep
To retract them in the vehicle for use if needed.
 If chocks or blocks are not available, use
stones or any other objects that are large
enough to hold the wheel in position.
To extend
6. Get the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench
ready.
(Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5.)
8-6 For emergencies

Spare tire information CAUTION CAUTION

N00849601341  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can  Do not use tire chains with your compact
cause an accident. If you have no choice but spare tire. Using a chain could cause damage
Compact spare tire to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep to your vehicle and loss of the chains.
your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
The compact spare tire is stored under the correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to To remove the spare tire
luggage floor board of the luggage compart- “Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15. N00849701384
ment. It is designed to save space in the lug-  The compact spare tire should be used only 1. Lift up the luggage floor board. Refer to
gage compartment. Its lighter weight makes it temporarily. While the compact spare tire is “Luggage floor board” on page 5-223.
easier to use if a flat tire occurs. being used, the tire pressure monitoring sys- 2. To remove the spare tire, remove the
tem will not function properly. Have the tire installation clamp (A) by turning it coun-
replaced or repaired at an authorized terclockwise.
WARNING Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility 8
 Tires, including the spare tire, degrade of your choice as soon as possible.
over time with age even when they are not  Do not go over 50 mph (80 km/h) when driv-
being used. It is recommended that tires ing with the compact spare tire.
over 6 years old generally be replaced  Avoid sudden starting and braking when
even if damage is not obvious. driving with the compact spare tire.
 Do not drive through automatic car washes
and over obstacles that could possibly dam-
CAUTION age the underside of your vehicle. Because
 While the compact spare tire is stowed, the the compact spare tire is smaller than the
inflation pressure should be checked at least original tire, there is less clearance between
once a month to assure that it remains at the the ground and your vehicle.
recommended inflation pressure. See the tire  Because the compact spare tire is designed
and loading information placard attached to only for your vehicle, do not use it on any
the driver’s door sill. Refer to “Tire and load- other vehicle. To change a tire
ing information placard” on page 11-3.  Do not put the compact spare tire on a differ- N00849801532
ent wheel, and do not put standard tires, 1. Loosen the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
snow tires, wheel covers or trim rings on the wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
compact spare tire. Otherwise, you could yet.
damage these parts or other parts on your
vehicle.
For emergencies 8-7

WARNING
 Do not use the jack on a tilted or soft sur-
face.
Otherwise, the jack might slip and cause
personal injury. Always use the jack on a
flat, hard surface. Before setting the jack,
make sure there are no sand or pebbles
under the jack base.
NOTE
2. Place the jack under one of the jacking  Put the spare tire under the vehicle body near 4. Check that the flange portion at the jack-
points (A) shown in the illustration. Use the jack. This makes it safer if the jack slips ing point fits in the groove at the top of
8 the jacking point closest to the tire you out of position. the jack.
wish to change. Insert the bar (D) into the wheel nut
wrench (E). Then put the end of the bar
into the shaft’s jack end, as shown in the
illustration.
Slowly rotate the wheel nut wrench until
the tire is raised slightly off the ground
surface.
3. Rotate the jack by hand until the flange

portion (B) fits in the groove (C) at the top
of the jack.
WARNING
 Set the jack only at the positions shown
here. If the jack is set at a wrong position,
it could dent your vehicle or the jack
might fall over and cause personal injury.
8-8 For emergencies


6. Clean out any mud, etc. on the hub sur- 7. Turn the wheel nut clockwise by hand to
WARNING face (F), hub bolts (G) or in the installa- initially tighten them.
 Stop jacking up the vehicle as soon as the
tion holes (H) in the wheel, and then Temporarily tighten the wheel nuts by
tire is raised off the ground. It is danger-
mount the spare tire. hand until the flange parts of the wheel
ous to raise the vehicle any higher.
nuts make light contact with the wheel
 Do not get under your vehicle while using
the jack. and the wheel is not loose.
 Do not bump the raised vehicle or leave it
sitting on the jack for a long time. Both
are very dangerous.
 Do not use a jack except the one that came
with your vehicle.
 The jack should not be used for any pur-
pose other than to change a tire.
 No one should be in your vehicle when 8
using the jack.
 Do not start or run the engine while your
vehicle is on the jack. WARNING
 Do not turn the raised wheel. The tires  Mount the spare tire with the valve stem
that are still on the ground could turn and (I) facing outward. If you cannot see the NOTE
make your vehicle fall off the jack. valve stem (I), you have installed the  Flange nuts can be temporarily used on the
wheel backwards. compact spare tire as shown in the illustra-
Operating the vehicle with the spare tire tion, but return to the original wheel and tire
5. Remove the wheel nuts with the wheel nut
installed backwards can cause vehicle as soon as possible.
wrench, then take the wheel off.
damage and result in an accident.
CAUTION
 Handle the wheel carefully when changing
the tire, to avoid scratching the wheel sur-
face.
For emergencies 8-9


10. Lower the jack all the way and remove it.
11. Check the tire inflation pressure. The rec-
ommended tire pressure for your vehicle
is listed on the tire and loading informa-
tion placard attached to the driver’s door
sill as shown in the illustration. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.
9. Tighten the nuts in the order shown in the

CAUTION illustration until each nut has been tight-
8  Never apply oil to either the wheel bolts or
ened to the torque listed here.
the nuts or they will tighten too much.
65 to 80 ft-lb (88 to 108 N•m)
NOTE
 On vehicles with aluminum wheels, if all 4
aluminum wheels are changed to steel CAUTION
wheels, use tapered nuts.  Driving with an improperly inflated tire can
cause an accident. If you have no choice but
8. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire to drive with an under-inflated tire, keep
touches the ground, by rotating the wheel your speed down and avoid sudden steering
or braking, if possible. Inflate the tire to the
nut wrench counterclockwise.
correct pressure as soon as possible. Refer to
“Tire inflation pressures” on page 9-15.
 After changing the tire and driving the vehi-
CAUTION cle approximately 620 miles (1,000 km),
 Never use your foot or a pipe extension to retighten the wheel nuts to make sure that
apply added force to the wheel nut wrench they have not come loose.
when tightening the wheel nuts. If you do so,
you can over-tighten the wheel nuts and
damage the wheel, wheel nuts and hub bolts.
8-10 For emergencies

Towing
CAUTION NOTE Towing

 If the steering wheel vibrates when driving  On vehicles with a T155/90D16 or N00837002026
after changing the tire, have the tire checked T155/80D17 size spare tire, the clamp can-
for balance at an authorized Mitsubishi not be used for a normal size tire.
If your vehicle needs to be
choice.
3. Have your damaged tire repaired as soon
towed
 Do not mix one type of tire with another or
as possible.
use a different size from the one listed. This If towing is necessary, we recommend you to
would cause early wear and poor handling.
have it done by a commercial tow truck ser-
To store the flat tire, jack, bar vice.
To store the spare tire and wheel nut wrench When towing is required, transport the vehi-
N00832300033 N00850001202 cle using a tow truck.
1. Lift up the luggage floor board. Refer to Store the flat tire in the luggage compartment. Incorrect towing equipment could damage 8
“Luggage floor board” on page 5-223. your vehicle.
2. Store the spare tire under the luggage
floor board. To store the spare tire, fit the
NOTE
 The clamp cannot be used for a normal size CAUTION
installation clamp (A) by turning it clock-  Do not attempt to be towed by another vehi-
tire.
wise. cle with a rope.
 When storing a normal size flat tire in the
space for the spare wheel under the luggage
floor board, the luggage floor board will be
positioned higher than usual. NOTE
 Your vehicle cannot tow any other vehicle.
Reverse the removing procedure when stor-
ing the jack, bar and wheel nut wrench. There may be local regulations concerning
Refer to “Jack and tools” on page 8-5. towing in your area.
Obey the regulations of the area where you
are driving your vehicle.
For emergencies 8-11

Operation under adverse driving conditions
CAUTION Towing a front-wheel drive vehi-

 This vehicle must not be towed with the driv- cle with front wheels off the
ing wheels on the ground (Type B) as illus- ground (Type C)
trated.
This could result in damage to the driving
system. Release the parking brake.
 Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with the Set the selector lever to the “N” (NEUTRAL)
rear wheels on the ground (Type C) as illus- position.
trated. This could result in damage to the
driving system or the vehicle lurching for-
Do not tow all-wheel drive vehicles with
ward while being towed. Operation under adverse
this style.
If you tow all-wheel drive vehicles, use only driving conditions
Type D or E equipment.
8
N00837201786
 [For front-wheel drive vehicle equipped with
the active stability control (ASC)]
If the vehicle is towed with the ignition If your vehicle becomes stuck in
switch in the “ON” position or the operation sand, mud or snow
mode in ON and only the front wheels raised
off the ground (Type C), the ASC may oper-
ate, resulting in an accident. When towing If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, sand,
the vehicle with the front wheels raised, keep or mud, it can often be moved by a rocking
the ignition switch or the operation mode as motion. Rock your vehicle back and forth to
follows. free it.
[Except for vehicles equipped with the Do not rev the engine or spin the wheels.
F.A.S.T.-key] Constant efforts to free a stuck vehicle can
Towing the vehicle by a tow The ignition switch is in “OFF” or “ACC” cause overheating and transaxle failure. Let
truck position. the engine idle for a few minutes to cool the
[Vehicles equipped with the F.A.S.T.-key]
transaxle before trying again.
The operation mode is in OFF or ACC.
If your vehicle is still stuck after several rock-
CAUTION ing attempts, call for a commercial tow truck
 This vehicle must not be towed by a tow service.
truck using sling lift type equipment (Type
A) as illustrated. Using a sling lift will dam-
age the bumper and front end.

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
WARNING On snowy or icy roads CAUTION

 When trying to rock your vehicle out of a  Do not depress the accelerator pedal rapidly.
stuck position, make sure that there are no  When driving on a road covered with The vehicle could start moving when it
people nearby. The rocking motion can snow or ice, use snow tires. Tire chains breaks free from the ice, possibly resulting in
make your vehicle suddenly lurch forward cannot be used on your vehicle. There an accident.
or backward, and injure any bystanders. may be state or local regulations about
using snow tires. Always check the regu-
lations in your local area before using On a bumpy or rutted road
On wet roads them. Refer to “Snow tires” on page 9-18
and “Tire chains” on page 9-18.  Drive as slow as possible when driving on
 Drive slowly. Do not make sudden starts bumpy, rutted roads or over potholes.
CAUTION or stops, sharp turns, or slam on the
 Avoid flooded roads. Water is often deeper
than it looks, and you could be seriously hurt
brakes.
 Allow extra distance between your vehi-
CAUTION 8
by driving into flood water.  Driving on bumpy, rutted roads or over pot-
cle and the vehicle in front of you, and
holes can damage the tires and wheels.
 When driving in rain, on water-covered avoid sudden braking. Wheels with low-profile tires or under-
roads, or through a car wash, water could get  If a skid occurs when the accelerator inflated tires are especially at risk for dam-
into the brake discs and make them fail tem-
pedal is depressed, take your foot off the age.
porarily. In such cases, lightly press the
pedal. Steer gently in the direction of the
brake pedal to see if they are working prop-
erly. If they are not, press the pedal lightly skid.
several times while driving to dry the brake  Your vehicle is equipped with an anti-lock Fuel Pump Shut-off System
pads or linings, then check them again. braking system (ABS). Hold the brake
N00860600031
 When driving in rain, a layer of water may pedal down firmly and keep it depressed.
form between the tires and the road surface Do not pump the brake pedal which will WARNING
(hydroplaning). This loosens your tires’ grip result in reduced braking performance.  Before attempting to restart the engine
on the road, making it difficult to steer or  After parking on snowy or icy roads, it after a collision, always inspect the ground
brake properly. When driving on a wet road: may be difficult to move your vehicle due under the vehicle for leaking fuel. If a fuel
• Drive your vehicle at a safe speed. to the brake being frozen. Depress the leak is found or a fuel odor is detected, do
• Do not drive on worn tires. accelerator pedal little by little to move not restart the engine.
• Always keep the tires at the correct infla- the vehicle when safe to do so.
tion pressures.
For emergencies 8-13

Fuel Pump Shut-off System
WARNING
 Mitsubishi Motors recommends that your
vehicle be inspected by an authorized
Mitsubishi Motors dealer after any colli-
sion.
In the event of a collision causing frontal air-

bag deployment, the fuel pump shut-off sys-
tem will activate to stop fuel supply to the
engine.

Vehicle care and maintenance
Service precautions ..........................................................................9-2

Catalytic converter ...........................................................................9-2
Engine hood .....................................................................................9-3
View of the engine compartment .....................................................9-5
Engine oil and oil filter ....................................................................9-5
Engine coolant .................................................................................9-7
Air cleaner filter ...............................................................................9-8
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid ............................9-8
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models) .............................................9-9
Rear axle oil (All-wheel drive models) ...........................................9-9 9
Washer fluid .....................................................................................9-9
Brake fluid .......................................................................................9-9
Battery ............................................................................................9-10
Tires ...............................................................................................9-12
Brake pedal free play .....................................................................9-19
Parking brake lever stroke (if so equipped)....................................9-19
Wiper blades ..................................................................................9-19
Emission-control system maintenance ..........................................9-20
General maintenance .....................................................................9-21
For cold and snowy weather ..........................................................9-22
Fusible links ...................................................................................9-23
Fuses ..............................................................................................9-23
Replacement of light bulbs ............................................................9-27
Vehicle care precautions ................................................................9-35
Cleaning the inside of your vehicle ...............................................9-35
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle .............................................9-36
Service precautions
*: Front of the vehicle
Service precautions WARNING
 Handling your vehicle’s parts and materi-
WARNING
N00937301502
als in the wrong way can injure you. Ask
Taking regular care of your vehicle will pre-  When checking or servicing the inside of an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
serve its value and appearance as long as pos- the engine compartment, be sure the or a repair facility of your choice if you
sible. engine is stopped and has had a chance to have questions.
cool down.
You can do some of the maintenance work  If you need to work in the engine compart-
yourself, and the rest should only be per- ment with the engine running, be espe-
formed by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors cially careful that your clothing, hair, etc.
dealer or a repair facility of your choice. does not get caught in the cooling fans,
If you discover a malfunction or other prob- drive belts, or other moving parts.
lem, have it corrected by an authorized  After performing the maintenance work,
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facility make sure that no tools or cloths are left
of your choice. behind in the engine compartment.
9 This section describes the maintenance If they are left behind, a fire or damage to
the vehicle may occur.
inspections that you can do yourself, if you so
 The cooling fans can turn on automati-
desire. Follow the instructions and precau-
cally even if the engine is not running.
tions for each procedure.
Turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” Have you purchased the Mitsubishi Motors
position or put the operation mode in OFF
Diamond Care Protection Plan? The Plan
to be safe while you work in the engine
compartment.
supplements your new vehicle warranties.
 Do not smoke or allow open flames around
See your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
fuel or the battery. The fumes are flamma- for details.
ble.
 Be extremely careful when working
around the battery. It contains poisonous
Catalytic converter
N00937401486
and corrosive sulfuric acid.
 Do not get under your vehicle while it is on The catalytic converter requires you to use
a jack. Always use properly rated automo- unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
tive jack stands. destroy the emission-control effectiveness of
A- Cooling fans the converter.
B- Caution label
9-2 Vehicle care and maintenance

Engine hood
Normally, the catalytic converter does not  Do not try to start the engine by pushing  In unusual situations involving major
require maintenance. However, it is important or towing the vehicle. If the battery is engine problems, a burning odor may
to keep the engine properly tuned for the con- weak or run down, use jumper cables to indicate severe and abnormal catalytic
verter to continue to work properly. properly start the engine. converter overheating. If this occurs, stop
Refer to “Jump-starting the engine” on in a safe place, shut the engine off and let
CAUTION page 8-2. the vehicle cool. Once the engine is cool,
 Damage to the catalytic converter can result
 Do not idle the engine with any spark plug immediately take your vehicle to an
if your vehicle is not kept in proper operating wires disconnected or removed, such as authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
condition. If the engine malfunctions or mis- when performing diagnostic tests. repair facility of your choice for service.
fires, or if your vehicle performance suffers,  Do not idle the engine for a long time if it
have it serviced promptly. Running your is idling roughly or otherwise obviously
vehicle when it is overheated may result in malfunctioning.
Engine hood
damage to the converter and vehicle.  To prevent damage to the catalytic con- N00937501650
verter from unburned gas, do not race the

engine when turning off the ignition To open
WARNING switch.
9
 Do not park or run your vehicle in areas  Stop driving the vehicle if you think the Use the engine hood release lever (located
where combustible materials such as dry performance is noticeably low, or the under the instrument panel near the driver’s
grass or leaves can come in contact with a engine has a malfunction such as with the door) to unlock the engine hood.
hot exhaust, since a fire could occur. ignition, etc. If you are not able to stop
 Do not put undercoat paint on the cata- driving immediately, slow down and drive Pull the lever toward you to release the
lytic converter. engine hood latch.
for only a short time. Have your vehicle
checked at an authorized Mitsubishi
To reduce the possibility of catalytic con- Motors dealer or a repair facility of your
verter damage: choice as soon as possible.
 Use UNLEADED GASOLINE ONLY of
the type recommended in “Fuel selection”
on page 3-2.
 Do not drive with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of gas could damage
the catalytic converter.
Vehicle care and maintenance 9-3

Engine hood
WARNING
 Never use the release lever to unlatch the
engine hood while the vehicle is in motion.
 Do not drive your vehicle unless the
engine hood is locked.
Release the lever and lift the engine hood.
Slowly lower the engine hood approximately

CAUTION 8 inches (20 cm), then let it drop from its own
 Always insert the support prop into the hole
weight.
specially made for it. Propping the engine
9 hood at any other place could cause the prop
to slip out and lead to an accident. CAUTION
 The hood prop can fall out if the hood is  Be careful not to trap your hands or fingers
lifted by a strong wind. when closing the engine hood.
 Make sure the engine hood is firmly closed
before driving.
NOTE To close If you drive without the engine hood com-
 To prevent damage to the engine hood and pletely closed, it could open up while driv-
wipers, make sure the wipers are at resting ing.
position when you open the engine hood. Disengage the prop from the engine hood and
put it back in its retainer.
Support the engine hood with the hood prop. NOTE
Insert the hood prop securely into the opening  If this does not close the engine hood prop-
under the hood marked with an arrow. erly, drop it again from a slightly higher
position.
 Do not push down strongly on the engine
hood. Depending on how strongly or where
you push down, you could create a dent in
the vehicle body.

View of the engine compartment

8- Continuously variable transmission
NOTE (CVT) fluid level dipstick
 If you drive with the engine hood left open, a Good
warning display appears on the information
screen in the multi-information display. Engine oil and oil filter
N00937702082
To check and refill engine oil
It is normal for an engine to use oil. You may

need to add oil between the recommended oil
View of the engine compart- change intervals. Before starting the engine,
ment check the engine oil level. Refill if necessary. CAUTION
 Overfilling will cause oil aeration and loss of
N00937601808
To check the oil level, remove the dipstick, oil pressure, which could damage the engine.
wipe it off, and gently reinsert it all the way. 9
Slowly pull the dipstick straight out and
check the oil level by checking the upper sur- WARNING
face of the dipstick. The oil level must not go  Used engine oil is poisonous, and can dam-
above the line on the dipstick. age your skin. Prolonged and repeated
contact may cause serious skin disorders,
including dermatitis and cancer. Do not let
NOTE used oil touch your skin and wash thor-
 If it is difficult to verify the oil level, wipe oughly after working with it.
off the dipstick and reinsert it. Wait a  Keep used oil out of the reach of children.
moment and then recheck the oil level by
1- Engine oil level dipstick checking the upper surface of the dipstick.
2- Engine oil filler cap
3- Engine coolant reservoir
NOTE
4- Washer fluid reservoir If the level does not reach the line which  Engine oil consumption is greatly influenced
shows the minimum amount of oil required, by payload, engine speed, etc.
5- Brake fluid reservoir
6- Air cleaner filter remove the oil filler cap on the cylinder head
7- Battery cover, and fill to within the “Good” range.

Engine oil and oil filter

This mark appears on the top of the oil con-
NOTE tainer and tells you two important things
 The engine oil will deteriorate rapidly if the
about the oil.
vehicle is subjected to severe conditions (for
example, repeated operation on rough roads,
in mountainous regions, on roads with many API service symbol
uphill and downhill gradients, or over short
distances). Consequently, the oil will require
earlier replacement in accordance with the
schedule in the “WARRANTY AND MAIN-
TENANCE MANUAL”.
Engine oil identification mark Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic

Engine Oil is recommended for optimum fuel
Mitsubishi Motors recommends using only economy and cold weather starting.
9 engine oils with the ILSAC certification sym- 1- The upper part indicates the quality of If Mitsubishi Motors Genuine 0W-20 Syn-
bol on the front of the container. the oil. thetic Engine Oil is not available, 5W-20
2- The center part indicates the SAE grade grade oils displaying the ILSAC certification
of the oil viscosity. can be used. However, Mitsubishi Motors
ILSAC certification symbol Genuine 0W-20 Synthetic Engine Oil should
be used at the next oil change to maintain
Recommended engine oil vis- optimum fuel economy and cold weather
starting.
cosity
Use engine oil with the proper thickness for To replace the oil filter
the outdoor temperatures where you will be
driving. The oil filter should be replaced at the time or
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
If you cannot find oils with the ILSAC certi-
Only use high quality replacement filters on
fication symbol, use an API classification SN
this vehicle. The manufacturer’s specifica-
oil with the following label.
tions for Mitsubishi Motors Genuine oil fil-

Engine coolant
ters require that the filter can withstand a rust formation on all metals, including alumi-
pressure of 256 psi (1.8 MPa). A Mitsubishi num, and prevents clogs in some parts of the
Motors Genuine oil filter is the best replace- FULL engine.
ment filter. If you need to add coolant often, or if the
Follow the installation instructions printed on level in the reserve tank does not drop when
the filter. the engine cools, the cooling system should
LOW be pressure-tested for leaks. Take your vehi-
cle to an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer
Engine coolant or a repair facility of your choice for testing.
N00937801653
To check the coolant level CAUTION

 Do not use alcohol or methanol antifreeze or
any engine coolants that contain them. Using
The engine coolant reserve tank (A) lets you the wrong antifreeze can corrode aluminum
quickly see when you need to add coolant.
When the engine is cold, the level of the cool-
parts.
 The required concentration of anti-freeze dif-
9
ant in the reserve tank should be between the fers depending on the expected ambient tem-
FULL and LOW marks. The radiator usually perature.
*: Front of the vehicle Above -31 °F (-35 °C): 50 % concentration
stays full so there is no reason to remove the
of anti-freeze
radiator cap (B) except when you check the
Below -31 °F (-35 °C): 60 % concentration
coolant freeze point or replace the antifreeze
coolant.
To add coolant of anti-freeze
You can check the concentration level with a
gauge from an automotive supply store, or
Use “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long your authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or
Life Coolant Premium” or equivalent*. service station can check it for you.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based  Do not use water to adjust the concentration
non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and of coolant.
non-borate coolant with long life hybrid  Do not top off the tank with plain water only.
organic acid technology Water by itself boils at a lower temperature
and does not stop rust or freezing. If the
water freezes, it will damage your cooling
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Coolant provides system. Do not use tapwater. It can cause
excellent protection against corrosion and corrosion and rust.

Air cleaner filter

 If the engine coolant temperature does not
Radiator cap rise after the engine is warmed-up, take
NOTE
 Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Parts are recom-
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
The radiator cap must be sealed tight to pre- mended when replacing the air cleaner filter.
vent losing coolant, which may result in  After replacing the air cleaner filter, make
choice to have the thermostat checked,
sure that the hinges at the bottom of the
engine damage. Only use a Mitsubishi and replaced if necessary. cover are firmly set.
Motors Genuine Parts radiator cap, or an
approved equivalent.
Air cleaner filter
WARNING N00937901553
 Wait for the engine to cool down before The air cleaner filter will get dirty and dusty
opening the radiator cap. Otherwise hot from use and not filter properly. Replace it
steam or boiling coolant could spray up with a new filter using the schedule in the
from the radiator and scald you. “WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL”.
9
1. Unclamp and take out the air cleaner fil-
Points to remember ter.
3. Put the duct back on in its original posi-
tion.
 Do not overfill the reserve tank.
 Your vehicle uses a special radiator cap
that stays sealed and lets the coolant flow Continuously variable
from the reserve tank back to the radiator transmission (CVT) fluid
when the engine cools down. If you need N00938101145
to change the cap, use the exact same The continuously variable transmission
kind. (CVT) should be maintained and serviced by
 Check the coolant freeze point in the radi- an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a
ator with the proper gauge, and only when repair facility of your choice to obtain the
it is safe. If you add antifreeze, the con- best performance and longest life. It is impor-
tents of the reserve tank must be protected tant that the transmission fluid is kept at the
against freezing. 2. Install the air cleaner filter and put the correct level.
 Keep the front of the radiator and con- cover back on in its original position.
denser clean.

Transfer oil (All-wheel drive models)

Check the washer fluid level at regular inter-
Fluid type Fluid type vals and add washer fluid to reservoir if nec-
essary.
Use only “Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Open the reservoir cap and check the fluid
CVTF-J4” transmission fluid to ensure opti- Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API level with the dipstick.
mum transmission performance. GL-5
Viscosity
CAUTION range
SAE 80
 Using the improper transaxle fluid may dam-
age the transaxle. EMPTY
Rear axle oil (All-wheel
drive models)
Special additives N00915201295 FULL
Whenever the oil level is checked, add oil as

Do not use any fluid additives to the trans-
necessary to maintain the proper level.
9
mission.
Fill with the oil according to the table below.
When freezing weather is anticipated, flush
out the water in the reservoir by operating the
Transfer oil (All-wheel drive Fluid type pump. Fill the reservoir with windshield anti-
models) freeze (not radiator antifreeze), and operate
N00938401308 the system for a few seconds to flush out the
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine
Whenever the transfer oil level is checked, residual water.
Lubricant Super Hypoid Gear Oil API
add oil as necessary to maintain the proper GL-5
level. Fill with the oil according to the fol-
Viscosity Brake fluid
lowing table. SAE 80
range N00938701301
To check the fluid level

Washer fluid
N00938601401
Check the fluid level in the reservoir.
The windshield and rear window washer fluid The fluid level must be between the “MAX”
reservoir is in the engine compartment. and “MIN” marks on the reservoir.

Battery
WARNING repair facility of your choice.
 Take care in handling brake fluid as it is
harmful to the eyes, may irritate your skin
and will damage painted surfaces. Wipe NOTE
up spills immediately. If brake fluid gets  After replacing the battery, the electronic
on your hands or in your eyes, flush imme- control system data for the automatic trans-
diately with clean water. Follow up with a axle, etc., will be erased.
doctor as necessary. As a result, shifting may be rough.
Shifting will become smoother after several
changes in speed.
CAUTION
The fluid level falls slightly with wear of the  Do not let any petroleum-based fluid touch,
brake pads, but this does not indicate any mix with, or get into the brake fluid. This Checking battery electrolyte
will damage the seals.
abnormality. level
 Use only the listed brake fluid. Different
9 If the fluid level falls markedly in a short
brands of brake fluid have different addi-
length of time, it indicates leaks from the
tives, and these can cause a chemical reac- The electrolyte level must be between the
brake system.
tion. Do not mix brands of brake fluid. limits shown on the outside of the battery. Fill
If this occurs, have the vehicle checked by an
 Keep the reservoir tank cap closed to keep it with distilled water as needed. The inside of
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a the brake fluid from evaporating. the battery is divided into several compart-
ments. Take the cap off of each compartment
and fill to the mark.
Fluid type Battery Do not fill above the top line because a spill
N00939101979
during driving could cause damage.
Use the recommended brake fluid conform- The condition of the battery is very important
ing to DOT 3 or DOT 4. The reservoir cap for quick starting and to keep the vehicle’s
must be tightly sealed to keep dirt and water electrical system working properly. Check the
out. battery regularly.
If battery performance is suspect, have the

battery and charging system tested by an

Battery
facility of your choice before the start of cold
weather. If necessary, have it charged. This
WARNING
 Never disconnect the battery while the
will provide more reliable starting, and longer
engine is running, or you could damage
battery life.
the vehicle’s electrical parts.
 Never short-circuit the battery. This could
Disconnection and connection cause it to overheat and be damaged.
 Keep sparks, cigarettes, and flames away
from the battery because the battery could
To disconnect the battery cable, stop the
explode.
engine. Disconnect the negative (-) terminal
 Electrolyte (battery acid) is made of corro-
first, then the positive (+) terminal. To recon- sive diluted sulfuric acid. If it spills on
nect the battery, first connect the positive (+) nearby parts, it can crack, stain, or dis-
WARNING terminal and then the negative (-) terminal, color them. And if it gets on your skin or
 If the battery is dead, be sure to check the before starting the vehicle. in your eyes, it can cause burns or blind-
battery electrolyte level before connecting ness. Please observe the following han-
booster cables.
NOTE dling instructions: 9
 After checking the battery electrolyte • If electrolyte gets on plastic parts or
 Open the terminal cover (A) before discon-
level, make sure the caps are fitted other nearby parts, wipe it off with a soft
necting or connecting the positive (+) termi-
securely. cloth or chamois soaked in a solution of
nal of the battery.
 If any of the caps has a loose fit, replace water and neutral detergent then imme-
 Loosen the nut (B) and then disconnect the diately rinse the affected parts with
the battery.
battery cable from the positive (+) terminal. plenty of water.
• If electrolyte gets on your hands or
clothes, rinse thoroughly with water. If
During cold weather electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush them
with water immediately and get immedi-
The battery is weaker in cold temperatures. ate medical attention.
This has to do with its chemical and physical  Open doors and windows in any closed
properties and is why a very cold battery, space where you may be charging or
especially one with a low charge, will have a working with the battery.
hard time starting your vehicle.  Always wear protective clothing and gog-
It is recommended that you have your battery gles when working with the battery, or
and charging system checked by an autho- have a skilled automobile technician do it.
Tires
 Recommended inflation pressure: the
WARNING Tires inflation pressure for optimum tire perfor-
 If you are quick-charging your battery, N00939201664
mance.
first disconnect the battery cables.
 Intended outboard sidewall:
 In order to prevent a short-circuit, be sure WARNING • The sidewall that contains a whitewall,
to disconnect the negative (-) terminal  Driving with tires that are worn, damaged
first, and reconnect it last. bears white lettering or bears manufac-
or improperly inflated is dangerous.
 If the electrolyte level is very low, have the These tire conditions will adversely affect
turer, brand, and/or model name molding
battery checked at an authorized vehicle performance. that is higher or deeper than the same
Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a repair facil- These tire conditions can also cause a molding on the other sidewall of the tire,
ity of your choice. tread separation or blowout which may or
 Battery posts, terminals and related acces- result in an accident causing serious • The outward facing sidewall of an asym-
sories contain lead and lead compounds. injury or death. metrical tire that has a particular side
Wash hands after handling.  Tires, including the spare tire, degrade that must always face outward when
over time with age even when they are not mounted on a vehicle.
being used.  Passenger car tire: a tire intended for use
9 NOTE It is recommended that tires over 6 years on passenger cars, multipurpose passen-
 Check each battery terminal for corrosion. old generally be replaced even if damage
ger vehicles, and trucks that have a gross
You can prevent further corrosion by wash- is not obvious.
vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of
ing with a solution of baking soda and water. 10,000 pounds or less.
Grease the posts and clamps after cleaning or It is important to familiarize yourself with the  Light truck (LT) tire: a tire designated by
tightening them. following terms: its manufacturer as primarily intended for
 Ensure the battery is securely installed and
use on lightweight trucks or multipurpose
cannot be moved. Also check each terminal  Cold tire pressure:
for tightness. passenger vehicles.
• The measured pressure after the vehicle
 If you will not be driving your vehicle for a  Tread: portion of a tire that comes into
has been parked for at least three hours,
long period of time, remove the battery and contact with the road.
or
store it in a place where the battery fluid will  Tread rib: a tread section running circum-
• The measured pressure when the vehicle
not freeze. The battery only should be stored ferentially around a tire.
is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after
with a full charge.  Tread separation: pulling away of the
having been parked for three hours.
 Before cleaning the battery, tighten all the tread from the tire carcass.
filler port caps to keep dirt and moisture out.  Maximum pressure: the maximum per-
 Carcass: the tire structure, except tread
missible cold tire inflation pressure for
and sidewall rubber which, when inflated,
this tire.
bears the load.

Tires
 Sidewall: portion of a tire between the Aspect ratio in percent (%)
tread and bead.
Tire Markings
 Section width: the linear distance between
65 Ratio of section height to sec-
the exteriors of the sidewalls of an tion width of tire.
inflated tire, excluding elevations due to Construction code
labeling, decoration, or protective bands.
•“R” means radial construc-
 Bead: the part of the tire that is made of
steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply R tion.
cords and that is shaped to fit the rim. •“D” means diagonal or bias
 Ply: a layer of rubber-coated parallel construction.
cords.
15 Rim diameter in inches (in)
 Cord: the strands forming the plies in the
tire.
 Rim: a metal support for a tire or a tire 1- Size Designation NOTE
and tube assembly upon which the tire 2- Service Description
beads are seated. 3- Maximum Load
 European/Japanese metric tire 9
 Rim diameter: nominal diameter of the 4- Maximum Pressure sizing is based on European/Jap-
bead seat. 5- U.S. DOT Safety Standards Code anese design standards. Tires
 Groove: the space between two adjacent (TIN) designed to these standards have
tread ribs. 6- Treadwear, Traction and Temperature the tire size molded into the
Grades sidewall beginning with the sec-
tion width. The letter “P” is
Size Designation absent from this tire size desig-
nation.
EXAMPLE: P215/65R15 Example: 215/65R15 96H.
Passenger car tire size based
P
on U.S.A. design standards
Section width in millimeters
215
(mm)

Tires
NOTE Speed symbol WARNING

 LT (Light Truck) -metric tire A symbol indicating the  Overloading of your tire is
sizing is based on U.S.A. design range of speeds at which a dangerous. Overloading can
standards. The size designation tire can carry a load corre- cause tire failure, affect vehi-
for LT-metric tires is the same as sponding to its load index cle handling, and increase
for P-metric tires except for the under certain operating con- your stopping distance. Use
letters “LT” that are molded into ditions. tires of the recommended load
H
the sidewall preceding the size The maximum speed corre- capacity for your vehicle.
designation. sponding to the speed symbol Never overload them.
Example: LT235/85R16. should only be achieved
 Temporary spare tires are high under specified operating
pressure compact spares conditions. (i.e. tire pressure, Maximum Pressure
9 designed for temporary emer- vehicle loading, road condi-
tions and posted speed limits) Maximum Pressure indicates the
gency use only. Tires designed
maximum permissible cold tire infla-
to this standard have the letter
Maximum Load tion pressure for this tire.
“T” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M. Maximum load indicates the maxi- Tire Identification Number (TIN)
mum load this tire is designed to
carry. The TIN may be found on one or
Service Description
both sides of the tire but the date
EXAMPLE: 95H code may only be on one side. Look
for the TIN on the outboard side of
Load index
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the
A numerical code associated
95 TIN is not found on the outboard side
with the maximum load a tire
then you will find it on the inboard
can carry.
side of the tire.

Tires
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD Treadwear, Traction and Temper- Temperature
1504
ature Grades
Department of Transporta- The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
tion and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
Treadwear generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
This symbol certifies that the heat when tested under controlled conditions
tire is in compliance with the The treadwear grade is a comparative rating on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
DOT based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
U.S. Department of Trans- Sustained high temperature can cause the
under controlled conditions on a specified
portation tire safety stan- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
government test course. For example, a tire tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
dards, and is approved for graded 150 would wear one and one-half to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
highway use. (11/2) times as well on the government course sponds to a level of performance which all
Code representing the tire as a tire graded 100. The relative performance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
MA manufacturing location. of tires depends upon the actual conditions of eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
(2 digits) their use, however, and may depart signifi- Grades B and A represent higher levels of 9
cantly from the norm due to variations in performance on the laboratory test wheel than
Code representing the tire driving habits, service practices and differ- the minimum required by law.
L9
size. (2 digits) ences in road characteristics and climate.
ABC
Code used by tire manufac- Tire inflation pressures
D
turer. (1 to 4 digits) Traction N00939302008
Number representing the The traction grades, from highest to lowest, Proper tire inflation pressure is essential for
15 week in which the tire was are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the safe and satisfactory operation of your
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as vehicle. The wrong tire pressure will cause
manufactured. (2 digits) problems in three major areas:
measured under controlled conditions on
Number representing the specified government test surfaces of asphalt
 Safety
04 year in which the tire was and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
Too little pressure increases flexing in the
manufactured. (2 digits) traction performance.
tire and can cause tire failure. Too much
pressure can cause a tire to lose its ability
to cushion shock. Objects on the road and
potholes could then cause tire damage that
may result in tire failure.
Tires
 Economy Item Tire size Front Rear  Keep your tires inflated to the recom-
The wrong tire pressure can cause uneven mended pressures. (See the tire and load-
wear patterns in the tire tread. These Compact T155/90D16 420 KPA, 60 ing information placard attached to the
abnormal wear patterns will reduce the spare tire T155/80D17 PSI driver’s door sill.)
tread life, and the tire will have to be  Stay within the recommended load limits.
Tire pressures should be checked, and
replaced sooner.  Make sure that the weight of any load in
adjusted if necessary, at least once a month.
Too little pressure also makes it harder for your vehicle is evenly distributed.
Pressures should be checked more often
the tire to roll, and this uses up more fuel.  Drive at safe speeds.
whenever weather temperatures change
 Ride comfort and vehicle stability  After filling your tires to the correct pres-
severely, because tire pressures change with
The superior riding experience built into sure, check them for damage and air
outdoor temperatures. The pressures listed
your vehicle partly depends on the correct leaks. Be sure to reinstall the caps on the
are always “cold inflation pressure”.
tire pressure. Too much pressure gives an valve stems.
Cold inflation pressure is measured after the
uncomfortable and jarring ride. Too little
vehicle has been parked for at least three
pressure feels as if your vehicle is slow to
respond.
hours or is driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) Replacing tires and wheels
9 Unequal tire pressures can make steering
after having been parked for three hours. N00939601509
Cold inflation pressure must not go above the

your vehicle uneven and unpredictable. CAUTION
maximum values molded into the tire side-
wall. After driving several miles, your tire  Avoid using different size tires from the one
The tire pressure for your vehicle under nor- listed and the combined use of different
mal driving conditions is listed on the placard inflation pressure may increase 2 to 6 psi (14
types of tires, as this can affect driving
attached to the driver’s door sill. to 41 kPa) from the cold inflation pressure.
safety.
(Refer to “Tire and loading information plac- Do not let air out of the tires to get back to the
Refer to “Tires and wheels” on page 11-7.
ard” on page 11-3.) specified cold pressure, or your tires will be
 On all-wheel drive vehicles, always use tires
The recommended inflation pressures under too low. of the same size, same type, and same brand,
normal driving conditions should be used for Check your tires each time you refuel. If one and which have no wear differences. Using
the tires listed below. tire looks lower than the others, check the tires that differ in size, type, brand or the
pressure for all of them. degree of wear, will increase the differential
Item Tire size Front Rear You should also take the following safety pre- oil temperature, resulting in possible damage
cautions: to the driving system. Further, the drive train
240 240 will be subjected to excessive loading, possi-
P215/70R16
Normal tire KPA, KPA, bly leading to oil leakage, component sei-
P225/55R18 zure, or other serious problems.
35 PSI 35 PSI

Tires
 Rotate your tires regularly as described in
CAUTION the “Tire rotation” section on page 9-17.
NOTE
 Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels  Tire wear indicators can have different marks
should be used, because your vehicle is and locations depending on the tire manufac-
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys- Tread wear indicator turer.
tem. N00939800184
Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Tire rotation
N00939901560
To even out the wear on your tires and make

NOTE them last longer, Mitsubishi Motors Corpora-
 On vehicles with Electric parking brake, tion recommends that you rotate your tires at
16 inch steel wheels cannot be used on your the mileage listed in the “WARRANTY AND
vehicle because they interfere with brake MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
parts. However, the timing for tire rotation may
Additionally, 16 inch aluminum wheels may vary according to your vehicle condition, 9
not be used on your vehicle depending on the road surface conditions, and your own per-
1- Location of the tread wear indicator
type, even if they are Mitsubishi Motors
2- Tread wear indicator sonal driving habits. Any time you notice
Genuine wheels.
unusual wear, rotate your tires as soon as pos-
Consult an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
dealer with specific questions on wheels that sible.
Tread wear indicators are built into the origi-
can be used on your vehicle. nal equipment tires on your vehicle to help When rotating tires, check for uneven wear,
you know when your tires should be replaced. damage, and wheel alignment. Abnormal
Many states have laws requiring that you wear is usually caused by a wrong tire pres-
Tire maintenance replace your tires at this point. sure, wheels that are not aligned properly,
N00939700141 These indicators are molded into the bottom wheels that are out-of-balance, or severe
The following maintenance steps are recom- of the tread grooves and will appear when the braking.
mended: tire tread is worn down to 1/16 inch (1.6 Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
mm). dealer or a repair facility of your choice to
 Check tire pressures regularly. When the bands appear next to one another in find out the reason for uneven tread wear.
 Have regular maintenance done on the two or more places, replace your tires.
wheel balance and front and rear suspen- The first tire rotation is the most important
sion alignment. one. It will allow all your tires to wear evenly.

Tires
should also be installed on all four wheels.
Tires that do not have arrows showing rotation CAUTION Otherwise your safety and vehicle handling
direction  If the tires have arrows (A) indicating the
can be reduced.
correct direction of rotation, swap the front
Even where laws may permit it, never exceed
and rear tires on the left-hand side of the
Front the maximum speed rating of the tire.
vehicle and the front and rear tires on the
right-hand side of the vehicle separately.
Keep each tire on its original side of the CAUTION
Tires that have arrows showing rotation direction vehicle. When installing the tires, make sure  Only Mitsubishi Motors Authorized wheels
the arrows point in the direction in which the should be used, because your vehicle is
wheels will turn when the vehicle moves for- equipped with a tire pressure monitoring sys-
Front ward. Any tire whose arrow points in the tem.
wrong direction will not perform to its full Use of another type of wheel risks air leaks
potential. and sensor damage, as it will not be possible
to install the tire pressure sensor properly.
Front
9
CAUTION
 A compact spare tire can be installed tempo-
Tire chains
N00940101139
rarily in place of a tire that has been removed
during the tire rotation. However, it must not
be included in the regular tire rotation CAUTION
sequence.  Tire chains cannot be used on your vehicle.
 Avoid the combined use of different types of The clearance between the chains and the
tires. Using different types of tires can affect body is not sufficient to allow proper clear-
vehicle performance and safety. ance, and the vehicle body might be dam-
aged.
Snow tires
N00940001460
In some areas of the country, snow tires are

required for winter driving. If snow tires are
required in your area, you must choose snow
tires of the same size and type as the original
tires provided with your vehicle. Snow tires

Brake pedal free play
Brake pedal free play Parking brake lever stroke Wiper blades
N00940300293
(if so equipped) N00940701236
To check the brake pedal free play (A), turn Check the wiper blades occasionally. Clean
N00940401288
off the engine and press the brake pedal sev- them regularly to remove deposits of salt and
eral times with your foot. Then press the Check the parking brake lever travel occa-
sionally. To check this, pull the lever up road film. Use a sponge or cloth and a mild
pedal down with your fingers until you first detergent or non-abrasive cleaner to clean the
feel resistance. slowly and count the number of clicks of the
ratchet. Parking brake lever stroke: blades and glass areas.
8 notches (clicks) Replace the blades if they continue to streak
Brake pedal free play:
(Parking brake adjustment when pulled with or smear.
.1 to .3 inch (3 to 8 mm)
the force of 200 N)
Also check to see if the lever stays gripped by NOTE
the ratchet after pulling.  Do not run the wipers on dry glass for a long
time. This wears out the rubber and can
scratch the glass.
9
Checking or replacing the rear

window wiper blade
1. Turn the ignition switch to the “ACC”
position or put the operation mode in ON.
If the free play is not within these limits, take
2. Operate the rear wiper using the rear win-
your vehicle to an authorized Mitsubishi
dow wiper and washer switch, and when
the rear wiper is within the mark (A) on
choice for adjustment.
the rear window, turn the ignition switch
WARNING
to the “OFF” position, or put the opera-
 Continued operation of the vehicle with
tion mode in OFF.
the parking brake lever out of adjustment
may result in the vehicle moving when Refer to “Rear window wiper and
unattended. washer” on page 5-203.

Emission-control system maintenance
Emission-control system NOTE

maintenance  To meet government regulations and pro-
mote cleaner air, your vehicle is equipped
N00940800328
with an onboard diagnostic system (OBD).
Your vehicle is equipped with an emission- The engine electronic control module that
control system that meets all the requirements controls OBD functions stores various data
of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (especially about the exhaust emissions).
and Environment Canada. The emission-con- This data will be erased if the battery cable is
trol system is made of: disconnected, which could make a rapid
diagnosis difficult. Do not disconnect the
 a positive crankcase ventilation system battery cable when the engine malfunction
indicator (“SERVICE ENGINE SOON” or
 an evaporative emission-control system
“Check engine light”) is ON.
CAUTION  an exhaust emission-control system
 If the rear wiper is not stopped within the
To be sure the emission-control system works
9 mark (A), the wiper arm will contact the roof
spoiler and you will not be able to lift the properly, have your vehicle inspected and Spark plugs
wiper arm. If you forcefully try to lift the maintained by an authorized Mitsubishi N00940900231
wiper arm, the wiper arm and roof spoiler Motors dealer or a repair facility of your Spark plugs must fire properly to ensure
could be damaged or the painted surfaces choice. This should be done at the time or proper engine performance and emission-
could be scratched. mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND control.
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. Do not reuse spark plugs by cleaning or
These, and all the other “general” mainte- regapping. Spark plugs should be replaced at
During cold weather nance services listed in this manual, need to the mileage specified in the “WARRANTY
be performed to keep your vehicle running AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL”.
If the blades are frozen to the windshield or properly and reliably.
rear window, do not operate the wipers until You should also have an inspection and ser- NOTE
the ice has melted and the blades are freed, vice any time you suspect a malfunction.
 Use the recommended or equivalent spark
otherwise the wiper motor may be damaged. plugs listed under “Engine specifications” on
page 11-6. Use of other plugs could cause
engine damage, loss of performance or radio
noise.

General maintenance
high heat sources such as the exhaust mani- there are other parts which do not usually
Fuel hoses fold. need regular maintenance.
N00941000040
But, if any of these parts stops working prop-
Check the hose surfaces for any heat and erly, your vehicle performance could suffer.
mechanical damage, hard and brittle rubber,
WARNING
 If you see a fuel leak or if you smell fuel,
Have these items checked if you notice a
cracking, tears, cuts and abrasions. Pay spe- problem with them.
do not run the engine. Any spark (includ-
cial attention to the hoses closest to high heat ing from the ignition), flame or smoking
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Check material could cause an explosion or fire. If you have any questions, see your autho-
all the hose connections, such as clamps and Call an authorized Mitsubishi Motors rized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for assistance.
couplings, to make sure they are secure and dealer or a repair facility of your choice
that there are no leaks. If you see any wear or for assistance.
Disc brake pads
damage, replace the hoses immediately.
N00941600059
Good brakes are essential for safe driving.

Intake valve clearance Evaporative emission control Check the brake pads for wear. For good
N00950100050 system (except evaporative braking performance, replace the brake pads 9
Have the valve clearance checked at an emission canister) with the same type pads as the originals.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the N00941400187
mileage specified in the “WARRANTY AND If the fuel-vapor vent line is clogged or dam- Brake hoses
MAINTENANCE MANUAL”. aged, the fuel-vapor mixture will escape, pol- N00941700076
If the engine sounds abnormally loud, have luting the air.
adjustments made by an authorized Brake hoses and tubing should be checked
Have the system checked at an authorized for:
Mitsubishi Motors dealer. Mitsubishi Motors dealer at the mileage spec-
ified in the “WARRANTY AND MAINTE-  Severe surface cracking, scuffing or worn
Fuel system (tank, pipe line and NANCE MANUAL”. spots. If the fabric casing of the hose is
connection, and fuel tank filler showing through any cracks or worn spots
General maintenance in the rubber hose cover, the hose should
cap) be replaced. The brakes can fail if the
N00941300173 N00941501299
hose wears through.
Check these regularly for damage or leaks in The next pages list the maintenance service  Improper installation may cause twisting,
the fuel lines and connections. Check the fuel recommended by Mitsubishi Motors Corpo- or wheel, tire or chassis interference.
tank filler cap for damage or looseness. Pay ration. In addition to the general maintenance
special attention to the fuel lines closest to that needs to be performed at the times listed,
For cold and snowy weather

 The underside or rear of the vehicle is nism until all the movable surfaces are cov-
Ball joint, steering linkage damaged ered.
seals, drive shaft boots Also, put a light coat of the same grease on
N00941800093 Also check the exhaust system each time the the safety catch wherever moving parts touch.
Check the following parts for damage and vehicle is raised for lubrication, oil changes,
grease leaks: or required service. Any open seams or loose
connections could let dangerous exhaust For cold and snowy weather
 Ball joint boots of the suspension and fumes seep into the luggage and passenger N00942601141
steering linkage compartments.

 Bellows on both ends of the drive shaft Ventilation slots
Check for any of the following
Exhaust system conditions: The ventilation slots in front of the wind-
N00942201118 shield should be brushed clear after a heavy
 Check for holes or exhaust gas leaks snowfall so that the operation of the heating
9 WARNING caused by corrosion or damage. and ventilation systems will not be impaired.
 Carbon monoxide gas from your vehicle’s  Check the joints and connections for
exhaust is poisonous. Breathing these looseness or exhaust gas leaks.
fumes can cause unconsciousness or death.
Weatherstripping
 Check the rubber hangers and brackets for
damage.
To prevent freezing of the weatherstripping
The best way to keep carbon monoxide gas
on the doors, engine hood, etc., they should
from entering inside your vehicle is to have Hood lock release mechanism be treated with silicone grease.
the engine exhaust system properly serviced.
Have a competent mechanic inspect the com- and safety catch
plete exhaust system and nearby body areas N00942501124
Additional equipment (For
for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispo- The hood lock release mechanism and hood regions where snow is encoun-
sitioned parts if you notice any of the follow- safety catch should be checked, cleaned, and
ing: oiled when needed for easy movement and to tered)
prevent rust and wear. Use Multipurpose
 A change in the sound of the exhaust sys- Grease NLGI Grade 2 sparingly for all sliding It is a good idea to carry a shovel or a short-
tem parts of the hood latch and release lever. handled spade in the vehicle during the win-
 The smell of exhaust fumes inside the Work the grease into the hood lock mecha- ter so that you can clear away snow if you get
vehicle stranded. A small hand-brush for sweeping

Fusible links
snow off the vehicle and a plastic scraper for individual circuit is equipped with a fuse. The
the windshield, rear window, and side win- fuse blocks are located in the passenger com-
dows are also useful. partment and in the engine compartment.
Fusible links Passenger compartment

N00942700291
The fusible links will melt to prevent a fire if The fuse block in the passenger compartment
a large current attempts to flow through cer- is located behind the fuse lid in front of the
tain electrical systems. driver’s seat at the position shown in the illus-
In case of a melted fusible link, see your tration.
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer or a Pull the fuse lid to remove it.
repair facility of your choice for inspection
and replacement. Fuse load capacities
For the fusible links, please refer to “Fuse N00954801443
load capacities” on page 9-23. This fuse list shows the names of the electri- 9
cal systems and their fuse capacities.
WARNING There are spare fuses in the fuse block cover
 Fusible links must not be replaced by any in the engine compartment. Always replace a
other device. Failing to fit the correct fus- blown fuse with one of the same capacity as
ible link may result in fire in the vehicle, the original.
property destruction and serious or fatal
injuries at any time.
A- Fuse block
Fuses
N00942801967
Engine compartment
Fuse block location The fuse block in the engine compartment is

located as shown in the illustration.
Press the lock lever (1) and remove the fuse
To prevent damage to the electrical system
block cover (2).
from short-circuiting or overloading, each
Fuses
Sym- Capac- *: Fusible link
Passenger compartment fuse loca- No. Electrical system
tion table bol ity
 Some fuses may not be installed on your
8 Rear window wiper 15 A vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
or specifications.
9 Sunroof 20 A
 The table above shows the main equip-
10 Ignition switch 10 A ment corresponding to each fuse.
11 Option 10 A
Engine compartment fuse location
Hazard warning
12 15 A table
flasher
13 4-wheel drive system 10 A
Fuse block
Stop lights
14 15 A
(Brake lights)
9 15 Gauges 10 A
16 SRS airbag 7.5 A
17 Radio 15 A
Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system
bol ity 18 Control unit relay 7.5 A
Power window con- Interior lights
1 30 A* 19 15 A
trol (Room lights)
2 Defogger 30 A* 20 Back-up lights 7.5 A
Behind the fuse block cover
3 Heater 30 A Heated outside
21 7.5 A
rearview mirrors
4 Windshield wipers 30 A
Outside rearview
5 Door locks 25 A 22 10 A
mirrors
6 — — — Cigarette lighter/
23 15 A
7 12 V power outlet 15 A 12 V power outlet

Fuses
Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac- Sym- Capac-
No. Electrical system No. Electrical system No. Electrical system
bol ity bol ity bol ity
Electric parking 17 Engine control unit 7.5 A 32 Injector 20 A
1 30 A*
brake
18 Alternator 7.5 A 33 ETV 15 A
Electric parking
2 30 A* 19 Radiator fan motor 40 A* #1 — Spare fuse 10 A
brake
Anti-lock braking Audio system ampli- #2 — Spare fuse 15 A
3 40 A* 20 30 A
system fier #3 — Spare fuse 20 A
Anti-lock braking 21 — — —
4 30 A* *: Fusible link
system 22 IOD IOD 30 A
5 Power seat 30 A* Air conditioning  Some fuses may not be installed on your
23 30 A*
condenser fan motor vehicle, depending on the vehicle model
6 Heated seats 30 A or specifications.
24
Battery current sen-
7.5 A  The table above shows the main equip-
9
7 Starter 30 A* sor
ment corresponding to each fuse.
Heated steering Electric parking
8 15 A
wheel brake/Adaptive The fuse block does not contain spare 7.5 A,
25 / 7.5 A
9 Headlight washer 20 A Cruise Control 25 A or 30 A fuses. If one of these fuses
(ACC) burns out, substitute with the following fuse.
10 Security horn 20 A 7.5 A: 10 A spare fuse
Headlight (high
26 10 A 25 A: 20 A spare fuse
11 Automatic transaxle 20 A beam) (right)
30 A: 30 A audio system amplifier fuse
12 Horn 10 A Headlight (high
27 10 A When using a substitute fuse, replace with a
beam) (left)
13 Sunshade 20 A fuse of the correct capacity as soon as possi-
28 Turbo actuator 20 A ble.
14 Front fog lights 15 A
29 ENG/POWER 20 A
Daytime running
15 10 A 30 Fuel pump 15 A
lights
16 Air conditioner 10 A 31 Ignition coil 10 A

Fuses
Identification of fuse
Capacity Color
7.5 A Brown
10 A Red
15 A Blue
20 A Yellow
25 A Natural (white)
Green (fuse type) / B- Fuse is OK
30 A 3. Clamp it on the fuse you wish to remove, C- Blown fuse
Pink (fusible link type) and pull the fuse straight out from the fuse
40 A Green (fusible link type) block.
5. Insert a new fuse of the same capacity
9 securely into the appropriate slot.
Fuse replacement
N00954901167
CAUTION
1. Before replacing a fuse, always turn off  Never use a fuse with a capacity greater than
the electrical item connected to the fuse the one listed or any substitute, such as wire,
and turn the ignition switch to the “OFF” foil etc. This would cause the circuit wiring
position or put the operation mode in to heat up and could cause a fire.
OFF.  If the replacement fuse blows again after a
2. There is a fuse remover (A) in the engine short time, have the electrical system
compartment fuse block. checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
4. Use the fuse location diagrams and the
find and correct the cause.
matching tables, to check the fuse that is
related to the problem. If the fuse is not
blown, something else must be causing
the problem. Have the system inspected
by your authorized Mitsubishi Motors

Replacement of light bulbs
Replacement of light bulbs CAUTION NOTE

N00942901418  Never hold a halogen light bulb with a bare  Be careful not to scratch the vehicle body
hand, dirty glove, etc. when removing a light and lens.
Before replacing a bulb, be sure the light is
The oil from your hand could cause the bulb  When it rains, or when the vehicle has been
off. Do not touch the glass part of the new to break the next time the headlights are washed, the inside of the lens sometimes
bulb with your bare fingers; the oil from your used. becomes temporarily foggy. This is the same
skin will stay on the glass and dim or destroy If the glass surface is dirty, clean it with phenomenon as when window glass mists up
the bulb when it gets hot. alcohol and let it dry completely before on a humid day, and does not indicate a func-
installing the bulb. tional problem.
CAUTION When the light is switched on, the heat will
remove the fog. However, if water gathers
 Bulbs are extremely hot immediately after
inside the light, please have it checked by an
being turned off.
When replacing a bulb, wait for it to cool
sufficiently before touching it. You could
otherwise be burned.
 Handle halogen light bulb with care. The gas Bulb location and capacity 9
inside a halogen light bulb is highly pressur- N00943001197
ized, so dropping, knocking, or scratching a  Do not install commercially available LED
halogen light bulb can cause it to shatter. type bulbs. CAUTION
Commercially available LED type bulbs  When replacing a bulb, be sure to use a new
could adversely affect the operation of the bulb of the same type, wattage, and color.
vehicle, such as by preventing the lights and If you install a different bulb, the bulb could
other vehicle equipment from operating malfunction or fail to come on and could
properly. lead to a vehicle fire.
NOTE
 If you are unsure of how to carry out the
work as required, it is recommended that
these procedures be carried out by an autho-

Outside ANSI Rear

Trade
N00950302102
Watt-
Item No. or
Front age
Bulb
type
4 - Front turn signal light 21 W PY21W
5 - Front fog light 35 W H8
6 - Side turn signal light — —
NOTE
ANSI
 The following lights use an LED type bulb
instead of a light bulb. trade No.
Item Wattage
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors or Bulb
9 dealer or a repair facility of your choice type
when either light needs to be repaired or 1 - High-mounted — —
replaced.
stop light
ANSI • Headlight (LED type)
Trade • Parking light 2 - Tail light — —
Watt-
Item No. or • Daytime running light 3 - Back-up light 16 W W16W
age
Bulb • Front side-marker light
4 - License plate 5W W5W
type • Side turn signal light
light
1 - Headlight Halogen 5 - Rear turn sig- 21 W WY21W
55 W HIR2
bulb nal light
LED — — 6 - Stop light — —
2 - Parking light/ 7 - Rear side- — —
Daytime running — — marker light
light
3 - Front side-marker
— —
light

NOTE Item Wattage Headlights (halogen bulb type)

 The following lights use an LED type bulb 1 - Vanity mirror lights (if so N00901801229
2W
instead of a light bulb. equipped)
Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
2 - Dome light (front)/Read-
NOTE
dealer or a repair facility of your choice 10 W  When replacing a bulb on the right side of
when either light needs to be repaired or ing light
the vehicle, make sure that the removed parts
replaced. 3 - LED interior illumination do not contact the coolant reserve tank.
—
• High-mounted stop light (Smartphone tray)
• Tail light 1. Turn the cap (A) counterclockwise to
4 - Dome light (rear) 8W
• Stop light remove it.
• Rear side-marker light 5 - Cargo room light 5W
6 - LED interior illumination
—
(Front drink holder)
Inside
N00950401757
NOTE 9
 The following lights use an LED type bulb
instead of a light bulb.
when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
• LED interior illumination (Smartphone
tray)
• LED interior illumination (Front drink 2. While pulling the tab (B), pull out the
holder) socket (C).

NOTE Headlight aim adjustment

 After installing the cap (A), make sure that N00943201359
the mark (E) on the cap is pointing upward The alignment of the headlights should be
and the cap is locked in place. If the cap is
checked by an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
not locked in place, it may become detached
while the vehicle is being driven.
Front side-marker lights

N00915501227
NOTE
3. Turn the bulb (D) counterclockwise to  The front side-marker lights use an LED type
remove it. bulb instead of a light bulb.
9 when the light needs to be repaired or
replaced.
Headlights (LED type)
N00900301197
NOTE Parking lights/Daytime running

 The headlights (LED type) use an LED type lights
bulb instead of a light bulb. N00917301753

dealer or a repair facility of your choice NOTE
4. To install the bulb, perform the removal when the light needs to be repaired or  The parking lights and daytime running
replaced. lights use an LED type bulb instead of a light
steps in reverse.
bulb.
replaced.


5. To install the bulb, perform the removal
Front turn signal lights steps in reverse.
N00943401494
1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction
NOTE
 When refitting each of the clip (D), first
opposite to the side you wish to replace.
insert part (G) of the clip into the hole and
2. Remove the screw (A), and then pull the then press part (H) into it.
wheel cut moulding (B) to release the
three clips (C).
4. Turn the socket (F) counterclockwise to

remove it, then remove the bulb from the
socket by turning it counterclockwise
9
while pressing in.
Side turn signal lights
N00943501192
NOTE
 The side turn signal lights use an LED type
CAUTION bulb instead of a light bulb.
 Do not pull the wheel cut moulding (B) more Check with an authorized Mitsubishi Motors
than is necessary to release the three clips dealer or a repair facility of your choice
(C). Otherwise, the wheel cut moulding when the light needs to be repaired or
could break. replaced.
3. Remove the three clips (D), and then pull

back the splash shield (E).

Front fog lights

N00943601959
1. To create enough work space, turn the

steering wheel all the way in the direction
opposite to the side you wish to replace.
2. Remove the screw (A), and then pull the
wheel cut moulding (B) to release the
three clips (C).

steps in reverse.
4. While holding down the tab (F), pull out
the socket (G). NOTE
9
 When refitting each of the clip (D), first
insert part (I) of the clip into the hole and
then press part (J) into it.
CAUTION
 Do not pull the wheel cut moulding (B) more
than is necessary to release the three clips
(C). Otherwise, the wheel cut moulding
could break. *: Front of the vehicle
3. Remove the three clips (D), and then pull 5. Turn the bulb (H) counterclockwise to
remove it.
Rear combination lights
back the splash shield (E). N00943701615
1. Open the liftgate.


2. After removing the two screws (A), move 3. Turn the socket counterclockwise and
the light unit rearward and remove the remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
Back-up lights
N00929101093
light unit pins (B). the socket.
1. Remove the three clips (A), and then pull
back the splash shield (B).
C- Rear turn-signal light

NOTE D- Stop light (LED) - cannot be replaced
*: Rear of the vehicle
9
 It will be easier to remove the light unit if
you insert a minus screwdriver with the end
covered with a cloth or other object into the NOTE 2. Turn the socket (C) counterclockwise to
space under the light unit and remove the  The rear side-marker light, tail light and stop remove it, and then pull the bulb out of
highest pin, and then pull the light unit at an light use an LED type bulb instead of a light the socket.
upward angle. bulb.
replaced.

steps in reverse.

NOTE
 When refitting the clip (A), first insert part
(D) of the clip into the hole and then press
part (E) into it.
NOTE
 Wrap a cloth around the tip of the screw-
9 License plate lights driver to keep from scratching the lens.

3. To install the bulb, perform the removal N00944001455
steps in reverse. 1. When removing the light unit (A), push it 3. Pull the bulb out of the socket.
toward the left side of the vehicle body.
NOTE
 Fully return the splash shield (B) to its origi-
nal position in the rear bumper.

2. Use a screwdriver to gently pry up the tab steps in reverse.
(B) and remove the lens.

Vehicle care precautions

tions. Choose the materials you will use care-
NOTE fully, to be sure that they do not contain Cleaning the inside of your
 When mounting the light unit, insert tab (C)
first then align tab (D) with its hole.
corrosives. If you are not sure, contact an vehicle
authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for help N00945200095
in choosing these materials. After washing the inside of your vehicle with
any cleaner, wipe it dry in a shady, well venti-
CAUTION lated area.
 Cleaning products can be dangerous. Some
are poisonous and others are highly flamma- CAUTION
ble. Some are dangerous if you breathe their
 Do not use organic substances (solvents,
fumes in a closed space. When you use any-
benzine, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline, etc.) or
thing in a container to clean your vehicle, be
alkaline or acidic solutions.
sure to follow the instructions. Always open
These chemicals can cause discoloring,
your vehicle doors or windows when you’re
staining or cracking of the surface.
High-mounted stop light cleaning the inside. Never use the following
N00943901154 chemicals to clean your vehicle:
If you use cleaners or polishing agents, make
sure their ingredients do not include the sub-
9
• Gasoline
stances mentioned above.
NOTE • Carbon Tetrachloride
 The high-mounted stop light uses an LED • Benzine
type bulb instead of a light bulb. • Kerosene
NOTE
• Naphtha
dealer or a repair facility of your choice  Always read the instructions on the cleaner
• Acetone
when the light needs to be repaired or label.
• Turpentine
replaced.
• Paint Thinner
• Lacquer Thinner
• Nail Polish Remover
Plastic, vinyl, synthetic leather,
Vehicle care precautions fabric and flocked parts
N00945301237
N00945100166
These can all be dangerous, and they all can
In order to maintain the value of your vehicle, 1. Lightly wipe these off with a soft cloth
damage your vehicle.
perform regular maintenance using the proper soaked in a 3 % solution of gentle soap
materials and procedures. Be sure to use only and water.
those materials and procedures that meet your
local environmental pollution control regula-
Cleaning the outside of your vehicle

2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water,
wring it out well, and wipe off all the
NOTE NOTE
 If fuzzing is difficult to remove from the seat  The genuine leather surface may harden and
soap.
upholstery, draw a suitable defuzzing brush shrink if it is exposed to direct sunlight for
over the surface in one direction. long hours. When your vehicle is parked,
NOTE place it in the shade as much as possible.
 Do not use cleaners, conditioners, and pro-  When the temperature of the vehicle interior
tectants containing silicones or wax. Genuine leather (if so equipped) rises in summer, vinyl products left on the
Such products, when applied to the instru- genuine leather seat may deteriorate and
N00945601285
ment panels or other parts, may cause reflec- stick to the seat.
tions on the windshield and obscure vision. 1. To clean, lightly wipe the leather with a
Also, if such products get on the switches of soft cloth soaked in a 5 % solution of gen-
the electrical accessories, it may lead to fail- tle soap and water. Cleaning the outside of your
ure of these accessories. 2. To rinse, dip the cloth in fresh water, vehicle
wring it out well, and wipe off all the N00945700058
soap.
9 Upholstery 3. To preserve and protect, use a leather pro-
To protect your vehicle’s finish, wash it often
and thoroughly. If desired, you may wax your
tecting agent on the genuine leather sur-
N00945500128 vehicle using a nonabrasive automobile wax.
1. To maintain the value of your new vehi- face.
cle, maintain the upholstery carefully and
keep the interior clean. Foreign material
NOTE
Use a vacuum cleaner and brush to clean  If genuine leather is wet with water, wipe it
N00945800033
the seats. If stained, vinyl and synthetic with a dry, soft cloth. If left damp, mildew Industrial pollution, road tar, bird droppings,
leather should be cleaned with an appro- may grow. tree sap, insect remains, sea water and other
priate cleaner. Cloth fabrics can be  The genuine leather surface can be damaged foreign matters can damage the finish on your
cleaned with either upholstery cleaner or a if brushed with a nylon or synthetic fiber vehicle.
3% solution of gentle soap in lukewarm brush. Generally, the longer any foreign material
water.  Organic solvents such as benzine, kerosene, stays on the finish, the worse the damage.
2. Clean the carpeting with a vacuum alcohol, gasoline, or acid or alkaline solvents Wash your vehicle as soon as possible when-
cleaner and remove any stains with carpet can discolor the genuine leather surface and ever the finish gets soiled.
cleaner. Oil and grease can be removed by should not be used.
lightly dabbing with a clean white cloth  Genuine leather can mildew if not kept
clean. Clean up any oil stains immediately.
and spot remover.

Washing CAUTION CAUTION

N00945901712  Never spray or splash water on the electrical • As your vehicle is equipped with the roof
Chemicals contained in the dirt and dust parts in the engine compartment. This may spoiler and the rear spoiler, check with the
damage them. Be careful also when washing car wash operator before using the car
picked up from air, rain, snow, or road sur-
the underbody to ensure that water does not wash.
faces can damage the paint and body of your
enter the engine compartment. • If your vehicle is equipped with roof rails,
vehicle if left on.
 Avoid automatic car washes that use rotating check with the car wash operator before
Frequent washing and waxing is the best way brushes. These brushes may scratch the paint using the car wash.
to protect your vehicle from this damage. surface and make it dull. • If your vehicle is equipped with the rain
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Scratches are more noticeable on darker col- sensor, place the wiper switch lever in the
Park the vehicle in the shade and spray it with ored vehicles. “OFF” position to deactivate the rain sen-
water to remove dust. Next, using plenty of  Some hot water washing equipment uses sor.
clean water and a car washing mitt or sponge, high pressure and heat to clean your vehicle.
wash the vehicle from top to bottom. Because hot water can damage plastic parts
and seep inside your vehicle, make sure you
During cold weather
Use a mild car washing soap if necessary.
Rinse thoroughly and wipe dry with a cham- do the following when using such equip- 9
ois or soft cloth. After washing the vehicle, ment: Salt and other chemicals used on winter roads
carefully clean the joints and flanges of the • Keep the washing nozzle at least 28 inches in some geographical areas can have a detri-
(70 cm) away from the vehicle body. mental effect on the vehicle underbody. You
doors, hood, etc., where dirt is likely to
• When washing around the door glass, hold should flush the underbody with a high pres-
remain.
the nozzle at a distance of more than sure hose every time you wash the outside of
28 inches (70 cm) and at a right angle to the your vehicle.
CAUTION glass surface.
Take special care to remove mud or other
 When washing the underside of your vehicle  Make sure to do the following when using an
debris which could trap and hold salt and
or the wheels, wear a pair of gloves to pro- automatic car wash, with help from either
moisture.
tect your hands. this manual or the car wash operator, to
avoid damaging your vehicle: After washing your vehicle, wipe off all
 If your vehicle is equipped with the rain sen-
• Fold the outside rearview mirrors. waterdrops from the rubber parts around the
sor, place the wiper switch lever in the
“OFF” position to deactivate the rain sensor • Close the door windows. doors to prevent the doors from freezing.
before washing the vehicle. Otherwise, the • Close the front sunroof (if so equipped)
wipers will operate in the presence of water • Tape or remove the rear wiper arm assem-
spray on the windshield and may get dam- bly.
aged as a result.

NOTE CAUTION Damaged paint

 When the door is frozen, opening it by force  Do not use gasoline, benzine, kerosene or N00946201099
may tear off or crack the rubber gasket paint thinners to remove road tar or other dirt Small cracks and scratches in the paint coat
installed around the door. Pour warm water from the vehicle surface.
should be touched up as soon as possible with
to melt the ice. Be sure to thoroughly wipe  Do not put wax on the areas having black
touch-up paint to prevent corrosion.
off the water after opening the door. To pre- matte coating because it can cause uneven
vent freezing of the weatherstripping on the Check body areas facing the road or the tires
discoloration, patches, blurs, etc. If these get
doors, hood, etc., treat with silicone lubri- wax on them, wipe the wax off right away carefully for damage to the paint caused by
cant. with a soft cloth and warm water. flying stones, etc. The paint code number for
 On vehicles equipped with the power pan- your vehicle can be found on the vehicle
oramic sunroof, be careful when waxing the information code plate located on the front
Waxing area around the front sunroof opening, not to passenger door sill.
N00946001257
put any wax on the weatherstrip (black rub-
ber) and surrounding plastic parts. If stained
Wax your vehicle once or twice a year, or with wax, the weatherstrip and surrounding Cleaning plastic parts
9 when water does not bead up on the paint. plastic parts cannot maintain a weatherproof N00946301221
Use a soft cloth to put a small amount of wax seal with the front sunroof. Use a sponge or chamois to clean these parts.
on the painted surfaces. After the wax has If the vehicle wax sticks to a gray or black
dried, polish with a dry soft cloth. rough surface of the bumper, molding or
Do not wax your vehicle in direct sunlight.
Polishing
N00946100046
lights, the surface may appear white in color.
You should wax when the painted surfaces In this case, wipe it off using lukewarm water
are cool. If painted surfaces have been severely dam- and a soft cloth or chamois.
aged and lost their original luster and color
tone, polish the surface lightly with a fine
CAUTION polishing compound. Avoid limiting your CAUTION
 Waxes containing high abrasive compounds polishing to the damaged surface only; polish  Do not use a scrubbing brush or other rough
should not be used. These waxes remove rust scrubber as these may damage the plastic
a somewhat wider area, moving the polishing
and stain effectively from the paintwork, but surface.
are harmful to the finish of the paint, because
cloth in one direction. After polishing, flush
 Do not use wax containing compounds (pol-
they also remove paint/clearcoat. the compound from the surface and apply a
ishing powder) which may damage the plas-
They are also harmful to other glossy sur- coat of wax to regain a beautiful luster.
tic surface.
faces such as the grille, trim, moldings, etc.

CAUTION CAUTION Cleaning the front sunroof (if so

 Do not let plastic parts get soiled with gaso-  Do not use a brush or other hard implement equipped)
line, oil, brake fluids, engine oils, greases, on the wheels. N00946801082
paint thinner, and sulfuric acid (battery elec-  Do not use any cleaner that contains an abra-
trolyte), as such substances will cause stains, sive substance or is acidic or alkaline. Doing Clean the inside of the front sunroof with a
cracks, or discoloration. so could cause the coating on the wheels to soft cloth. Hard deposits should be wiped
If any of these get on a plastic part, wipe peel or become discolored or stained. away with a cloth dipped in warm, neutral
them up with a soft cloth or chamois and a  Do not directly apply hot water using a steam detergent solution. Wipe away the solution
mild solution of soap and water. Then rinse cleaner or by any other means. with a sponge dipped in fresh water.
them immediately with water.  Contact with seawater or road salt used for
de-icing can cause corrosion. Rinse off such NOTE
Chrome parts substances as soon as possible.
 The surface treatment on the inside of the
N00946400052 glass may be removed if a hard cloth or
To prevent spots and corrosion of chrome organic solvent is used.
parts, wash with water, dry thoroughly, and
Window glass 9
N00946600054
apply a nonabrasive automotive wax. If the
chrome is severely damaged or pitted, use a The window glass can usually be cleaned Engine compartment
commercially available chrome polish. using only a sponge and water. Glass cleaner N00947000071
can be used to remove wax, oil, grease, dead Never spray or splash water on the electrical
insects, etc. After washing the glass, wipe it accessories in the engine compartment. This
Aluminum wheels dry with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
N00946501249
puts the engine at risk of being damaged.
1. Remove dirt using a wet sponge. Do not bring the circumferential parts, the
2. Use a mild detergent on any dirt that can- Wiper blades plastic parts and so on into contact with sulfu-
not be removed easily with water. N00946700068 ric acid (battery electrolyte) which may
Rinse off the detergent after washing the crack, stain or discolor them.
Use a soft cloth and glass cleaner to remove
wheel. If they are in contact, wipe off with soft cloth,
grease, dead insects, etc., from the wiper
3. Dry the wheel thoroughly using a chamois chamois or the like and an aqueous solution
blades.
leather or a soft cloth. of neutral detergent then immediately rinse
Replace the wiper blades when they no longer
the affected parts with plenty of water.
clean the windshield and rear window prop-
erly.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.) ....................10-2

Reporting Safety Defects ...............................................................10-2
Important facts to know in case of an accident ..............................10-4
10
Consumer information (For vehicles sold in U.S.A.)

their use, however, and may depart signifi- material of the tire to degenerate and reduce
Consumer information (For cantly from the norm due to variations in tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
vehicles sold in U.S.A.) driving habits, service practices and differ- to sudden tire failure. The grade C corre-
N01047101224 ences in road characteristics and climate. sponds to a level of performance which all
This information is provided in compliance passenger car tires must meet under the Fed-
eral Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
with the requirements of the National High- Traction AA, A, B, C Grades B and A represent higher levels of
way Traffic Safety Administration, Depart-
ment of Transportation. It provides the performance on the laboratory test wheel than
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, the minimum required by law.
purchasers and/or prospective purchasers
are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent
with information on reporting safety defects.
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled conditions on WARNING
 The temperature grade for the tire is
Uniform tire quality grading specified government test surfaces of asphalt
established for a tire that is properly
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
DOT quality grades - All passenger vehicle traction performance. speed, underinflation, or excessive load-
tires must conform to Federal Safety Require- ing, either separately or in combination,
10 ments in addition to these grades. The spe- WARNING can cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
cific grade rating in each grade category is  The traction grade assigned to the tire is
shown on the side wall of the tires on your based on straight-ahead braking traction
vehicle. tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction Reporting Safety Defects
characteristics.
Treadwear N01047201498
If you believe that your vehicle has a

The treadwear grade is a comparative rating Temperature A, B, C defect which could cause a crash or
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested could cause injury or death, you
under controlled conditions on a specified should immediately inform the
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B
government test course. For example, a tire
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the National Highway Traffic Safety
graded 150 would wear one and one-half
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
(11/2) times as well on the government course heat when tested under controlled conditions
tion to notifying Mitsubishi Motors
as a tire graded 100. The relative performance on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
of tires depends upon the actual conditions of Sustained high temperature can cause the Corporation.
10-2 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects

If NHTSA receives similar com- For vehicles sold in U.S.A. To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of
plaints, it may open an investigation, Canada, Inc. call 1-888-576-4878 or
and if it finds that a safety defect To contact Mitsubishi Motors North write to:
exists in a group of vehicles, it may America, Inc. call 1-888-648-7820 or
order a recall and remedy campaign. Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Can-
write to: ada, Inc.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems Mitsubishi Motors North Amer- Customer Relations Department
between you, your dealer, or ica, Inc. P.O. Box 41009
Mitsubishi Motors Corporation. Customer Relations Department 4141 Dixie Road
P.O. Box 6400 Mississauga, ON L4W 5C9
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Cypress, CA 90630-0064
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-
888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424- For vehicles sold in Puerto Rico
9153); go to
For vehicles sold in Canada
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: To contact Mitsubishi Motor Sales of 10
If you live in Canada, and you Caribbean, Inc.
NHTSA Headquarters
believe that your vehicle has a safety call 1-787-251-8715 or write to:
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE
West Building defect, you should immediately Mitsubishi Motor Sales of Carib-
Washington, DC 20590 notify Transport Canada, in addition bean, Inc.
to notifying Mitsubishi Motor Sales Customer Service Department
of Canada, Inc. You may write to: P.O. Box 192216
You can also obtain other informa-
Transport Canada SAN JUAN PR 00919-2216
tion about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov. 330 Sparks Street
Tower C
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5 For vehicles sold in Guam
To contact Triple J Enterprises Inc.

Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-3
Important facts to know in case of an accident

call (671)649-3673 or write to:  Ask for genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Important facts to know in Many times, to save money, your insur-
Triple J Enterprises, Inc. case of an accident ance company will recommend imitation
P.O. Box 6066 N01047301242 parts that do not meet the original specifi-
We hope you will never be involved in an cations of fit, finish, corrosion resistance
TAMUNING or workmanship.
GUAM 96931 accident, but there is always that potential
danger. So, please be sure to buckle up and
drive safely. Mitsubishi Motors built-in pro-
tection
For vehicles sold in Saipan In the event of an accident
The strength and integrity built into your
To contact Triple J Motors  Remain calm. vehicle is the result of a specific design
call (670)234-7133 or write to:  Check for injuries. Report all injuries to referred to as “Energy Management”. Indi-
the police, and, if necessary, call for an vidual body parts are designed to act as one
Triple J Motors ambulance. unit in the event of an accident. Shock waves
 Record all the details of the accident. This
10 P.O. Box 500487 will provide you with accurate records of
are absorbed by protective panels or are chan-
SAIPAN, MP96950-0487 neled around the passenger compartment.
the accident for discussions with your This important feature is possible because
insurance company and other persons high tensile steel is used in Mitsubishi panels
who may be acting on your behalf. and structural parts, something that cannot be
For vehicles sold in American guaranteed by the manufacturers of imitation
Samoa Key information to discuss with parts. All Genuine Mitsubishi body panels
your insurance company and support brackets are designed and con-
structed as important protection features in
To contact Pacific Marketing Inc. the event of an accident. By replacing body
 Understand your repair estimate before
call 684(699)9140 or write to: approving repairs. parts with imitations, your vehicle may no
 Choosing the repair shop and the brands longer meet original equipment specifica-
Pacific Marketing, Inc. of parts that they use on your vehicle is tions.
P.O. Box 698 your decision.
PAGO PAGO,
AMERICAN SAMOA AS, 96799
10-4 Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects
Important facts to know in case of an accident

cle. Remember to ask for genuine Mitsubishi
Consumer rights (For vehicles Motors parts.
sold in U.S.A.)
As a consumer requesting repair on your

vehicle, you have consumer rights. Across the
country, State Insurance Commissioners have
begun considering rules on the use of non-
OEM parts. This could mean that repair shops
will have to disclose to the consumer, when
they intend to use non-OEM parts. Since reg-
ulations are not consistent on this point,
remember you have a choice. So, if you want
genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts, you may
have to specifically request them. Make cer-
tain your insurance company understands
imitations are not to be used in the repair of 10
your vehicle. You deserve the best genuine
Mitsubishi Motors parts.
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors

parts
Genuine Mitsubishi Motors parts are built

with the high quality and durability standards
you expect. Genuine Mitsubishi Motors
replacement parts are your guarantee that
your vehicle will have all the technological
advantages and maintain the style and protec-
tion of a brand new Mitsubishi Motors vehi-
Customer assistance/Reporting Safety Defects 10-5

Specifications
Vehicle labeling .............................................................................11-2

Vehicle dimensions ........................................................................11-4
Vehicle weights ..............................................................................11-5
Engine specifications .....................................................................11-6
Battery ............................................................................................11-6
Tires and wheels ............................................................................11-7
Capacity .........................................................................................11-7
11
Vehicle labeling
3 - Air conditioning label
Vehicle labeling The air conditioning label is affixed on the
Chassis number
N01147401909
inside panel of the engine hood. The chassis number is stamped on the bulk-
Keep a record of the chassis number and head as shown in the illustration.
vehicle identification number. Such informa-
tion will assist police if your vehicle is stolen.
4 - Vehicle information code plate

The vehicle information code plate is located
on the front passenger door sill.
11
1 - Vehicle emission control information
label
The vehicle emission control information
label is affixed on the underside of the engine
hood.
2 - Vehicle identification number plate

The vehicle identification number is stamped
on the plate riveted to the left front corner of
the dashboard. It is visible from outside of the
vehicle through the windshield.
11-2 Specifications
Vehicle labeling
Type 2
Engine model/serial number
The engine model and serial number are
stamped on the cylinder block as shown in
the illustration.
Type 1
Certification label
N01148201252
The certification label is located on the

*: Front of the vehicle driver’s door sill.
11
Tire and loading information
placard
N01148101642
The tire and loading information placard is

located on the driver’s door sill.
Specifications 11-3
Vehicle dimensions
Vehicle dimensions
N01147501681
Overall length 173.4 in (4,405 mm)

Overall width 71.1 in (1,805 mm)
Overall height 2WD 66.3 in (1,685 mm)
4WD 66.5 in (1,690 mm)
Wheel base 105.1 in (2,670 mm)
11
11-4 Specifications
Vehicle weights
Vehicle weights
N01147602025
Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) 4,630 lb (2,100 kg)

Gross axle weight rating Front 2,646 lb (1,200 kg)
(GAWR) Rear 2,557 lb (1,160 kg)
With brake 2,000 lb (907 kg)
1 or 2 persons seated
Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg)
Maximum trailer weight
With brake 1,499 lb (680 kg)
3–5 persons seated
Without brake 1,250 lb (567 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight 827 lb (375 kg)
Maximum roof load 110 lb (50 kg)
Seating capacity 5 persons
NOTE 11
 Vehicle usage condition should never exceed above “Maximum” values.
 Roof load is important because it affects the vehicle capacity weight. Refer to “Loading cargo on the roof” on page 6-10.
GVWR: maximum total weight (load) limit specified for the vehicle
GAWR: maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle
Seating capacity: the maximum number of occupants
Specifications 11-5
Engine specifications
Engine specifications
N01147701609
Engine model 4B40

Engine displacement 91.5 CID (1,500 cm³)
No. of cylinders and cylinder arrangement Inline-4
Bore 2.95 in (75.0 mm)
Stroke 3.34 in (84.8 mm)
Compression ratio 10.0
Thermostat valve opening temperature 179.6 °F (82.0 °C)
Spark plugs NGK SILKR7H8
Spark plug gap .028 to .031 in (0.7 to 0.8 mm)
Firing order 1-3-4-2
11 Battery
N01147801365
75D23L
Battery is a 12 volt type.
11-6 Specifications
Tires and wheels
Tires and wheels

N01147901874
Tire P215/70R16 99H P225/55R18 97H

Size 16 x 6 1/2J 18 x 7J
Wheel PCD 4.5 in (114.3 mm)
Offset (Inset) 1.5 in (38 mm)
PCD: Pitch Circle Diameter (installation holes)
NOTE
 Contact an authorized Mitsubishi Motors dealer for details on the combination used on your vehicle.
 These tires satisfy vehicle loading conditions described in this owner’s manual.
Capacity
N01148002260 11
Item Capacity Lubricants
Fuel Front-wheel drive vehicles 16.6 gal (63 L)
Refer to “Fuel selection” on page 3-2.
(approximate) All-wheel drive vehicles 15.8 gal (60 L)
Oil pan 4.2 qt (4.0 L)
Engine oils displaying the ILSAC certification mark (“star-
Engine oil Oil filter .21 qt (0.2 L)
burst” symbol) on the container.
Oil cooler .11 qt (0.1 L)
Refer to “Continuously variable transmission (CVT) fluid” on
Continuously variable transmission (CVT) 8.2 qt (7.8 L)
page 9-8.
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5
Transfer oil .50 qt (0.47 L)
SAE 80
Specifications 11-7
Capacity
Item Capacity Lubricants
Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Hypoid Gear Oil API GL-5
Differential Rear axle .42 qt (0.4 L)
SAE 80
Brake As required Conforming to Brake fluid DOT3 or DOT4
Hood lock release mechanism and safety catch As required Multipurpose type grease NLGI Grade 2
Engine coolant Mitsubishi Motors Genuine Super Long Life Coolant
6.3 qt (6.0 L)
{Includes .69 qt (0.65 L) in reserve tank} Premium or equivalent*
Washer fluid 4.5 qt (4.3 L) —
Refer to the “Air con-
Refrigerant (air conditioning) ditioning label” on HFO-1234yf
page 11-2.
*: similar high quality ethylene glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrate and non-borate coolant with long life hybrid organic acid tech-
nology
11
11-8 Specifications
Alphabetical index
Numerics B C
12 V power outlets ............................ 5-208 Back-up light California Perchlorate Materials
4-wheel drive operation ....................... 5-70 Bulb location and capacity .............. 9-28 Requirements ................................... 3-13
Replacement .................................. 9-33 Capacities .......................................... 11-7
Ball joint, steering linkage seals, drive shaft
A boots ............................................... 9-22
Card holder ............................ 5-208, 5-218
Accessory (installation) ....................... 3-12 Cargo area cover............................... 5-220
Battery .............................................. 9-10
Active stability control (ASC) .............. 5-81 Cargo loads ........................................ 6-10
Charging system warning light ....... 5-183
Adaptive Cruise Control System (ACC) 5-88 Checking battery electrolyte level .... 9-10 Cargo room light............................... 5-216
Disconnection and connection ......... 9-11 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29
Air cleaner filter ................................... 9-8
During cold weather ....................... 9-11 Catalytic converter ................................ 9-2
Air conditioning Specification.................................. 11-6
Automatic air conditioning ................ 7-6 Cautions on the handling of all-wheel drive
Dual-zone automatic climate control air Blind Spot Warning (BSW)................ 5-108 vehicles............................................ 5-72
conditioning ................................. 7-15 Bottle holders.................................... 5-220 Certification label ............................... 11-3
Important air conditioning operating tips.. Brake Charging system warning light ........... 5-183
7-2 Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-7 Child restraint systems ........................ 4-22
Air purifier......................................... 7-23 Brake assist........................................ 5-78 Child safety locks for rear door ............ 5-35
Airbag ............................................... 4-30 Braking
12
Cleaning
All-wheel drive operation .................... 5-70 Anti-lock braking system ................ 5-78 Inside of your vehicle...................... 9-35
Aluminum wheels ............................... 9-39 Braking ........................................... 6-5 Outside of your vehicle ................... 9-36
Hose ............................................. 9-21
Anti-lock braking system..................... 5-78 Pad wear alarm .............................. 5-74 Coat hook......................................... 5-222
Arm rest........................................ 4-6, 4-8 Parking brake................................. 5-46 Consumer information......................... 10-2
Assist grip ........................................ 5-222 Pedal............................................. 5-73 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) ...
Pedal free play ............................... 9-19 5-60
Automatic air conditioning .................... 7-6
Power brakes ................................. 5-74 Fluid....................................... 9-8, 11-7
Automatic High Beam (AHB) ............ 5-191 Service brake ................................. 5-73 Selector lever operation ................... 5-61
Warning lights and buzzer.............. 5-181 Selector lever positions.................... 5-64
Bulb location and capacity .................. 9-27 Sports mode ................................... 5-65
12-1
Alphabetical index
Convenient hook .............................. 5-223 fluid ..................................... 9-8, 11-7
Coolant (engine) .......................... 9-7, 11-7 E Engine coolant ........................ 9-7, 11-7
ECO mode switch ............................. 5-198 Engine oil ............................... 9-5, 11-7
Cruise control..................................... 5-84
Rear axle oil............................ 9-9, 11-7
Cup holder ....................................... 5-219 Electric parking brake.......................... 5-47
Transfer oil ............................. 9-9, 11-7
Electric power steering system (EPS) .... 5-80 Washer fluid ........................... 9-9, 11-7
D Electric rear window defogger switch.. 5-204 Fluid capacities and lubricants ............. 11-7
Daytime running lights Electronic immobilizer (Anti-theft starting Forward Collision Mitigation system (FCM) .
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28 system) ..................................... 5-4, 5-27 5-100
Replacement .................................. 9-30 Emission-control system maintenance ... 9-20 Free-hand advanced security transmitter
Defogger (rear window) .................... 5-204 Engine (F.A.S.T.-key) .................................. 5-12
Defrosting or defogging (windshield, door Compartment................................... 9-5 Front fog lights
windows) ................. 7-9, 7-13, 7-18, 7-22 Coolant ................................... 9-7, 11-7 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28
Hood............................................... 9-3 Indicators..................................... 5-180
Dimensions ........................................ 11-4
Malfunction indicator light............. 5-182 Replacement .................................. 9-32
Dimmer (high/low beam change) ....... 5-191 Oil and oil filter ....................... 9-5, 11-7 Switch ......................................... 5-198
Disc brake pads .................................. 9-21 Overheating..................................... 8-4
Front seat adjustment ............................ 4-3
Dome light (front)/Reading lights....... 5-215 Serial number ................................. 11-2
Specification................................... 11-6 Front side-marker lights
12 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29
Engine hood ........................................ 9-3
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28
Dome light (rear) .............................. 5-216 Replacement .................................. 9-30
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29 Engine switch ..................................... 5-18
Front turn signal light
Doors Exhaust system ................................... 9-22 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28
Lock.............................................. 5-32 Replacement .................................. 9-31
Power door locks ............................ 5-34 F Fuel
Driving during cold weather .................. 6-5 Filling the fuel tank........................... 3-3
Floor console box.............................. 5-219
Driving precaution ................................ 6-2 Fuel economy................................... 6-2
Floor mat............................................. 6-3 Fuel hoses...................................... 9-21
Driving, alcohol and drugs..................... 6-2
Fluid Fuel selection ................................... 3-2
Dual-zone automatic climate control air Brake fluid .............................. 9-9, 11-7 Tank capacity................................. 11-7
conditioning ..................................... 7-15 Continuously variable transmission (CVT) Fuel Pump Shut-off System ................. 8-13
12-2
Alphabetical index
Fuses ................................................. 9-23 Hood lock release mechanism and safety
Fusible links....................................... 9-23 catch ............................................... 9-22 L
Horn switch ...................................... 5-206 Labeling............................................. 11-2
G Lane Departure Warning (LDW) ........ 5-115
General maintenance ........................... 9-21 I License plate light
If the vehicle breaks down..................... 8-2 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28
General vehicle data............................ 11-4
Replacement................................... 9-34
Genuine parts ..................................... 3-13 Ignition switch ................................... 5-57
Liftgate .............................................. 5-36
Glove compartment........................... 5-218 Important facts to know in case of an accident
10-4 Loading information.............................. 6-6
Indicators .............................. 5-160, 5-180 Lubricants .......................................... 11-7
H Luggage floor board.......................... 5-223
Information screen display ................. 5-161
Hazard warning flasher switch ........... 5-197
Inside rearview mirror......................... 5-51 Luggage hooks ................................. 5-223
Hazard warning lights ....................... 5-180
Inspection and maintenance following rough
Head restraints...................................... 4-9 M
road operation .................................. 5-72
Head Up Display (HUD) ................... 5-184
Instrument cluster.............................. 5-139 Modification of your vehicle ................ 3-12
Headlight leveling switch .................. 5-196
Interior lights .................................... 5-214 Multi Around Monitor....................... 5-129
Headlights
Multi-information display .................. 5-140 12
Dimmer ....................................... 5-191 J
Headlight flasher .......................... 5-191 Jack .................................................... 8-5 O
Replacement .................................. 9-29 Storage............................................ 8-5 Octane number ..................................... 3-2
Switch ......................................... 5-188 Jump-starting the engine ....................... 8-2 Oil
Heated steering wheel switch ............. 5-205 Engine oil ...................................... 11-7
High beam indicator.......................... 5-180 K Rear axle oil ................................... 11-7
High-mounted stop light Transfer oil .................................... 11-7
Keyless entry system .................... 5-6, 5-28
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28 Operation under adverse driving conditions..
Keys ................................................... 5-3
Hill start assist .................................... 5-77 8-12
HomeLink® Wireless Control System 5-209 Outside rearview mirrors ..................... 5-53
12-3
Alphabetical index
Overheating ......................................... 8-4 Rear side-marker lights Head restraints ................................. 4-9
Bulb location and capacity ............... 9-28 Making a cargo area........................ 4-12
Rear seats ........................................ 4-6
P Rear turn signal light
Seats and restraint systems ................ 4-3
Bulb location and capacity ............... 9-28
Parking ................................................ 6-6
Replacement................................... 9-32 Service brake...................................... 5-73
Parking brake ................................. 5-46
Rear-view camera ............................. 5-127 Service precautions ............................... 9-2
Parking brake lever stroke ................... 9-19
Rearview mirror Side turn signal light
Parking lights
Inside rearview mirror ..................... 5-51 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28
Outside rearview mirrors ................. 5-53 Snow tires .......................................... 9-18
Replacement .................................. 9-30
Replacement of light bulbs................... 9-27 Spark plugs ........................................ 9-20
Parking sensors ................................ 5-123
Replacing tires and wheels ................... 9-16 Starting the engine ..................... 5-24, 5-58
Polishing............................................ 9-38
Reporting Safety Defects ..................... 10-2 Steering
Power brakes...................................... 5-74
Steering wheel height and reach adjustment
Power outlet ..................................... 5-208
S 5-50
Power panoramic sunroof .................... 5-43
Safe driving techniques......................... 6-4 Stop lights
Power windows .................................. 5-40 Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28
S-AWC (Super-All Wheel Control) ...... 5-67
Puncture (Tire changing) ....................... 8-6 Storage spaces .................................. 5-217
Seat belt ............................................. 4-13
12 Adjustable seat belt shoulder anchor . 4-19 Sun visors ........................................ 5-207
R Child restraint systems..................... 4-22 Super-all wheel control (S-AWC)
Radiator cap ......................................... 9-8 Front passenger seat belt warning light..... S-AWC drive mode display ............. 5-69
Reading lights 4-19 S-AWC drive mode-selector ............ 5-68
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-29 Maintenance and inspection ............. 4-30 S-AWC operation display................ 5-69
Seat belt extender............................ 4-20 Supplemental Restraint System ............ 4-30
Rear axle oil................................ 9-9, 11-7 Seat belt force limitter ..................... 4-22 How the Supplemental Restraint System
Rear combination lights Seat belt pre-tensioners.................... 4-21 works .......................................... 4-33
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28 Seat belt use during pregnancy ......... 4-21 Maintenance service ....................... 4-45
Replacement .................................. 9-32 Seats ................................................... 4-2
Rear Cross Traffic Alert .................... 5-112 Arm rest .................................... 4-6, 4-8
Rear seat adjustment ............................. 4-6 Front seats ....................................... 4-3
12-4
Alphabetical index
Wheel
T U Specification .................................. 11-7
Tail light USB input terminal............................ 5-206 Wiper
Bulb location and capacity............... 9-28 How to connect a USB memory device .... Rear window wiper ....................... 5-203
Tank capacity ..................................... 11-7 5-206 Switch ......................................... 5-199
How to connect an iPod ................. 5-206 Wiper blades .................................. 9-19
Theft-alarm system ............................. 5-38
Tire ................................................... 9-12
Inflation pressure ............................ 9-15 V
Maintenance................................... 9-17 Vanity mirror .................................... 5-207
Quality grading............................... 10-2 Vanity mirror lights
Replacing tires and wheels............... 9-16 Bulb location and capacity .............. 9-29
Rotation ......................................... 9-17
Vehicle care precautions ..................... 9-35
Size (tire and wheel) ....................... 11-7
Snow tires ...................................... 9-18 Vehicle dimensions ............................ 11-4
Tire and loading information placard 11-3 Vehicle labeling ................................. 11-2
Tire chains ..................................... 9-18 Vehicle preparation before driving ......... 6-4
To change a tire ................................ 8-6
Tread wear indicator ....................... 9-17 Vehicle weights.................................. 11-5
Vents .................................................. 7-2
Tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) .....
5-118
12
Tools ................................................... 8-5 W
Storage ............................................ 8-5 Warning lights .................................. 5-181
Towing .............................................. 8-11 Washer
Trailer towing..................................... 6-11 Fluid ....................................... 9-9, 11-7
Transfer oil ................................. 9-9, 11-7 Rear window washer ..................... 5-203
Switch.......................................... 5-202
Turbocharger operation ....................... 5-60
Washing ............................................ 9-37
Turn signal light
Indicators ..................................... 5-180 Waxing ............................................. 9-38
Lever ........................................... 5-196 Weights ............................................. 11-5
12-5
How to calculate your gasoline mileage

2018 Mitsubishi Eclipse Cross 111857 PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

2018 Mitsubishi Eclipse Cross 111857 PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Eclipse Cross

/ 2018 OWNER’S MANUAL

© Copyright 2017 Mitsubishi Motors North America, Inc

Instruments and controls

1 Instruments and controls

Combination headlights and dimmer switch P.5-188

Headlight leveling switch (if so equipped) P.5-196 Engine switch (if so

Steering wheel audio remote control switches [For

Camera switch P.5-133

Instruments and controls

Electric rear window defogger

Engine hood release

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) P.5-205

Fuel tank filler door release lever P.3-3

Instruments and controls

1 Multi Around Monitor (if so equipped) P.5-129

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) -

Parking brake lever type Electric parking brake type

Parking brake lever P.5-47 Brake auto hold switch P.5-74

Heated seat switches Heated seat switches (for the front

Sun visors P.5-207

Front seat P.4-3

Supplemental Restraint System

Seat belt hook P.4-20

1 Dome light (front) switch P.5-215

Telematics Control Unit (TCU)

Head restraints P.4-9

Rear shade switch (if so equipped) P.5-43

Arm rest (if so equipped) P.4-8

Tether anchorages for child restraint system P.4-25

Cargo room light P.5-216

Convenient hook P.5-223

Luggage hooks P.5-223 Luggage floor board P.5-223

Engine hood P.9-3

Front turn signal lights P.5-196, 9-28, 9-31

Halogen headlights type LED headlights type Front side-marker

Spare tire P.8-7

Rear side-marker lights P.5-188, 9-28

Stop lights P.5-188, 9-28

Rear turn signal lights P.5-196, 9-28, 9-32

Parking sensors (if so equipped) P.5-123

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Warning lights Do this Ref. Page

 Park your vehicle in a safe place and stop the engine.

Quick index 2-1

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

SRS warning light

2-2 Quick index

If this warning light comes on or flashes while you’re driving...

Quick index 2-3

If this problem occurs...

If this problem occurs...

Problem Do this Ref. Page

Will not turn from “ACC” to “OFF”.

The engine does not start when

2-4 Quick index

If this problem occurs...

The engine does not start.

Quick index 2-5

If this problem occurs...

The engine is overheated.

Steam comes out of the engine